This is a modern-English version of Ptolemy's Tetrabiblos : or Quadripartite, being four books of the influence of the stars ... with a preface, explanatory notes, and an appendix containing extracts from the Almagest of Ptolemy and the whole of his Centiloquy, together with a short notice of Mr. Ranger's zodiacal planisphere and an explanatory plate, originally written by Ptolemy. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.


PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS
OR
QUADRIPARTITE

BEING
FOUR BOOKS
OF THE

INFLUENCE OF THE STARS


NEWLY TRANSLATED FROM THE GREEK PARAPHRASE OF PROCLUS
WITH

NEWLY TRANSLATED FROM THE GREEK PARAPHRASE OF PROCLUS
WITH

A PREFACE, EXPLANATORY NOTES

A Preface, Explanatory Notes

AND

AND

AN APPENDIX

AN APPENDIX

CONTAINING

HOLDING

EXTRACTS FROM THE ALMAGEST OF PTOLEMY

EXTRACTS FROM THE ALMAGEST OF PTOLEMY

AND THE WHOLE OF HIS

AND HIS ENTIRE

CENTILOQUY

CENTILOQUY

TOGETHER WITH

WITH

A Short Notice of Mr. Ranger’s Zodiacal Planisphere

A Brief Overview of Mr. Ranger’s Zodiacal Planisphere

AND AN EXPLANATORY PLATE

AND A DESCRIPTION PLATE

By J. M. ASHMAND

By J.M. Ashmand

NEW EDITION

NEW EDITION

“Ye stars, which are the poetry of Heaven!
If, in your bright leaves, we would read the fate
Of men and empires,—’tis to be forgiven.”
Lord Byron.

London:
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY W. FOULSHAM & CO., Ltd.
DEALERS IN SCIENTIFIC BOOKS
10/11 RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET, LONDON, E.C.4

London:
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY W. FOULSHAM & CO., Ltd.
DEALERS IN SCIENTIFIC BOOKS
10/11 RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET, LONDON, E.C.4

Made and Printed in Great Britain

Made and Printed in Great Britain

TO THE
AUTHOR OF “WAVERLEY”
THIS TRANSLATION
OF A
WORK CONTAINING THE BEST ACCREDITED PRINCIPLES
OF
ASTROLOGY

IS DEDICATED
With the most profound admiration of his unrivalled Talents

WHICH COULD ALONE HAVE RESTORED
INTEREST TO THE SPECULATIONS
OF AN
ANTIQUATED SCIENCE

TO THE
AUTHOR OF “WAVERLEY”
THIS TRANSLATION
OF A
WORK CONTAINING THE BEST VERIFIED PRINCIPLES
OF
Astrology

IS DEDICATED
With the deepest admiration for his unmatched talents

WHICH ALONE COULD HAVE REIGNITED
INTEREST IN THE IDEAS
OF AN
OUTDATED SCIENCE


ADVERTISEMENT

AD

The use recently made of Astrology in the poetical machinery of certain works of genius (which are of the highest popularity, and above all praise), seems to have excited in the world at large a desire to learn something of the mysteries of that science which has, in all former ages, if not in these days, more or less engaged reverence and usurped belief. The apparent existence of such a general desire has caused the completion of the following Translation, and its presentation to the public; although it was originally undertaken only in part, and merely to satisfy two or three individuals of the grounds on which the now neglected doctrines of Astrology had so long and so fully maintained credit.

The recent use of astrology in the poetic elements of some highly popular and widely praised works seems to have sparked a general curiosity about the mysteries of this science, which has commanded respect and belief throughout history, if not in recent times. This noticeable interest has led to the completion of the following translation and its release to the public, even though it was initially intended only to clarify the basis for the long-standing and now overlooked doctrines of astrology to just a few individuals.


[Pg ix]

[Pg ix]

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Contents

chap.   page
BOOK I
I. Proem  1
II. Knowledge may be acquired by Astronomy to a certain Extent  2
III. That Prescience is useful  8
IV. The Influences of the Planetary Orbs 13
V. Benefics and Malefics 14
VI. Masculine and Feminine 14
VII. Diurnal and Nocturnal 15
VIII. The Influence of Position with regard to the Sun 16
IX. The Influence of the fixed Stars 16
X. Constellations North of the Zodiac 19
XI. Constellations South of the Zodiac 20
XII. The Annual Seasons 21
XIII. The Influence of the Four Angles 21
XIV. Tropical, Equinoctial, Fixed, and Bicorporeal Signs 23
XV. Masculine and Feminine Signs 23
XVI. Mutual Configurations of the Signs 24
XVII. Signs commanding and obeying 26
XVIII. Signs beholding each other, and of equal Power 26
XIX. Signs Inconjunct 27
XX. Houses of the Planets 28
XXI. The Triplicities 29
XXII. Exaltations 31
XXIII. The Disposition of the Terms 32
XXIV. The Terms (according to Ptolemy) 35
XXV. The Places and Degrees of every Planet 36
XXVI Faces, Chariots, and other similar Attributes of the Planets 37
XXVII. Application, Separation, and other Faculties 38

BOOK 2
I. General Division of the Subject 40
II. Peculiarities observable throughout every entire Climate 41
III. The Familiarity of the Regions of the Earth with the  
   Triplicities and the Planets 43
IV. The Familiarity of the Regions of the Earth with the  
   Fixed Stars 52
V. Mode of Particular Prediction in Eclipses 52
VI. The Regions or Countries to be considered as liable to be  
   comprehended in the Event 53
VII. The Time and Period of the Event 54
VIII. The Genus, Class, or Kind, liable to be affected 55
IX.[Pg x] The Quality and Nature of the Effect 58
X. Colours in Eclipses, Comets, and Similar Phenomena 62
XI. The New Moon of the Year 63
XII. The particular Natures of the Signs by which the  
   different Constitutions of the Atmosphere are Produced 64
XIII. Mode of Consideration for particular Constitutions  
   of the Atmosphere 66
XIV. The Signification of Meteors 68

PART III
I. Proem 71
II. The Conception, and the Parturition, or Birth  
   by which latter Event the Animal quits the  
   Womb, and assumes another State of Existence 72
III. The Degree Ascending 74
IV. Distribution of the Doctrine of Nativities 75
V. The Parents 77
VI. Brothers and Sisters 81
VII Male or Female 82
VIII. Twins 83
IX. Monstrous or Defective Births 85
X. Children not Reared 86
XI. The Duration of Life 88
XII. The Prorogatory Places 88
XIII. The Number of Prorogators, and also the Part of Fortune 89
XIV. Number of the Modes of Prorogation 91
XV. Exemplification 96
XVI. The Form and Temperament of the Body 100
XVII. The Hurts, Injuries, and Diseases of the Body 106
XVIII. The Quality of the Mind 107
XIX. The Diseases of the Mind 114

BOOK 4
I. Proem 117
II. The Fortune of Wealth 117
III. The Fortune of Rank 118
IV. The Quality of Employment 120
V. Marriage 124
VI. Children 128
VII. Friends and Enemies 130
VIII. Travelling 132
IX. The Kind of Death 134
X. The Periodical Divisions of Time 137

APPENDIX
no.    
I. Almagest, Book viii, Chap. 4 144
II. Extract from the Almagest, Book II, Chap. 9 147
  Table of Latitudes, from the Almagest 151
  Extract from the Table of Ascensions, in the Almagest 152
III. Ptolemy’s Centiloquy 153
IV. The Zodiacal Planisphere, and plate 161

[Pg xi]

[Pg xi]

PREFACE

Of all sciences, whether true or false, which have at any time engaged the attention of the world, there is not one of which the real or assumed principles are less generally known, in the present age, than those of Astrology. The whole doctrine of this science is commonly understood to have been completely overturned; and, of late, people seem to have satisfied themselves with merely knowing the import of its name. Such contented ignorance, in persons, too, sufficiently informed in other respects, is the more extraordinary, since Astrology has sustained a most conspicuous part throughout the history of the world, even until days comparatively recent. In the East, where it first [Pg xii] arose, at a period of very remote antiquity,[1] and whence it came to subjugate the intellect of Europe, it still even now holds sway. In Europe, and in every part of the world where learning had “impress’d the human soil,” Astrology reigned supreme until the middle of the 17th century. It entered into the councils of princes, it guided the policy of nations, and ruled the daily actions [Pg xiii] of individuals. All this is attested by the records of every nation which has a history, and by none more fully than by those of England. Yet, with these striking facts before their eyes, the present generation seem never, until now, to have inquired on what basis this belief of their forefathers was established, nor by what authority the delusion (if it was one) could have been for so many ages supported. Among a thousand persons who now treat the mention of Astrology with supercilious ridicule, there is scarcely one who knows distinctly what it is he laughs at, or on what plea his ancestors should stand excused for having, in their day, contemplated with respect the unfortunate object of modern derision. [Pg xiv]

Of all the sciences, whether they are true or false, that have ever captured the world's attention, none have their real or assumed principles less widely recognized today than those of Astrology. Most people believe that the entire doctrine of this field has been completely disproven, and lately, many seem content to simply know what its name means. This kind of ignorance is especially surprising among individuals who are well-informed in other areas, given that Astrology has played a significant role throughout history, even into more modern times. In the East, where it first emerged in ancient times, and where it later came to dominate the thinking of Europe, it still holds influence today. In Europe and everywhere else learning has taken root, Astrology was the dominant force until the mid-17th century. It was involved in the decisions of rulers, shaped national policies, and influenced the everyday actions of individuals. This is documented in the historical records of every nation, particularly those of England. Yet, despite these remarkable facts, the current generation seems not to have questioned on what grounds this belief of their ancestors was founded, or what authority (if any) could have maintained this belief for so long. Among countless individuals who mock Astrology today, hardly anyone knows exactly what they are scoffing at, or what justification their ancestors might have for having once regarded it with respect.

The general want of information on these points, and the indifference with which such want has been hitherto regarded, cannot surely be attributed solely to the modern disrepute of the science; for mankind have usually, in every successive age, exercised great industry in tracing all previous customs, however trifling or obsolete, and in examining all sorts of creeds, however unimportant or erroneous, whenever there has appeared any striking connection between such matters and historical facts; and, since astrology is most unquestionably blended intimately with history, it therefore becomes necessary to seek for some further hypothesis, by which this ignorance and indifference may be accounted for.

The general lack of knowledge on these topics and the indifference towards this lack can't just be blamed on the modern discrediting of the science. Throughout history, people have worked hard to uncover past customs, no matter how trivial or outdated, and to analyze all types of beliefs, regardless of how insignificant or incorrect, whenever there was a clear link between these issues and historical events. Since astrology is undoubtedly intertwined with history, it’s essential to look for another explanation for this ignorance and indifference.

Perhaps astrology has been conceived to have borne the same relation to astronomy as alchymy did to chymistry. If such has been the notion, it has certainly been adopted in error, for a modern chymist is still almost an alchymist: it is true that he no longer delays his work in deference to the planets, nor does he now try to make gold, nor to distil elixir of earthly immortality; but nevertheless he still avails himself, to a certain degree, of the same rules and the same means as those of the old alchymist: he is still intent upon the subtle processes of Nature, and still imitates her as far as he can. He reduces the diamond to charcoal by an operation analogous to that by which the alchymist sought to transmute lead into gold; and he mainly differs from the alchymist only in having assured himself that there is a point beyond which Nature forbids facsimiles. Not so slightly, however, does the astronomer differ from the astrologer, but toto cœlo: the astrologer considered the heavenly bodies and their motions merely as the mechanism wherewith he was to weave the tissue of his predictions; and astronomy is no more an integral part of astrology, than the loom is of the web which has been woven by it. To have an idea of what alchymy was, it is sufficient to have an idea of chymistry; but astronomy, in itself, will never give a notion of astrology, which requires additional and distinct consideration.

Maybe astrology was meant to relate to astronomy in the same way alchemy related to chemistry. If that's the case, it's definitely a misconception, because a modern chemist is still almost like an alchemist: sure, they don't delay their work for the planets anymore, and they don’t try to make gold or distill a potion for eternal life; however, they still use many of the same principles and methods as the old alchemist. They remain focused on the intricate processes of nature and try to mimic her as much as possible. For instance, they can turn a diamond into charcoal using a method similar to how the alchemist aimed to turn lead into gold; the main difference is that they now recognize a limit beyond which nature does not allow for copies. On the other hand, astronomers and astrologers are quite different, to a great extent: the astrologer viewed the heavenly bodies and their movements merely as tools for crafting their predictions, while astronomy isn’t an essential part of astrology any more than a loom is essential to the fabric it produces. To understand what alchemy was, just grasp chemistry; however, astronomy alone won’t give you a clear idea of astrology, which needs to be considered in its own right.

It may be urged, that in the present day a general idea of this bygone and disused science is quite sufficient for everybody not professedly antiquarian. Such an assertion would doubtless never be controverted, provided the proposed general idea might comprehend the truth. But the present actual general idea of astrology is by no means so comprehensive; indeed, nothing can well be more inaccurate, or even more false: it seems to have been adopted not from the elements of the science itself, but from trite observations made by writers against the science; and consequently the world now wonders at the lamentable defect of understanding that could ever have permitted belief in it—forgetting that astrology has been consigned to neglect, not in consequence of any primâ facie palpability in its imputed fallacies, nor indeed of any special skill or acuteness on the part of its professed adversaries, but rather in consequence of the sudden and astonishing growth of other undoubted sciences, with which it has been [Pg xv] presumed to be incompatible, and which during the thousands of years of the reign of astrology were either unborn, or still slumbering in continued infancy.[2]

It could be argued that nowadays, a basic understanding of this old and unused science is enough for anyone who isn't a dedicated historian. Such a claim would likely go unchallenged, provided that the suggested basic understanding includes the truth. However, the current general understanding of astrology is far from comprehensive; in fact, it’s often inaccurate or even completely false. It appears to have been shaped not by the foundational elements of the science itself but by common criticisms from writers opposed to it. As a result, people now marvel at the unfortunate lack of understanding that would allow belief in astrology—forgetting that its decline wasn’t due to any obvious flaws in its supposed errors, nor because of any exceptional skill from its critics, but rather because of the rapid and remarkable development of other established sciences that have been seen as incompatible with it, which during astrology's long history were either non-existent or still developing. [Pg xv] [2]

The words “professed adversaries,” which have just now been used, are of course not intended to be applied to those mighty explorers of Nature’s laws and man’s powers, who, in their lofty career, may have made an incidental swoop at the pretensions of astrology. Directly engaged in more exact pursuits, they stopped not to dissect this their casual prey, which, after having been thus struck by eagles, was left to regale crows and daws, and these, in their convivial loquacity, accused their unfortunate victims of crimes incapable of being committed, and of offences which had never been imagined. Of the real faults of their victim these garrulous bipeds seem not to have been aware, or, if aware, they seem to have considered them as not sufficiently prominent. Nor was this want of candour or information absolutely confined to the mere vulgar herd of vituperative scribblers, for even the sparkling essay against astrology, written by Voltaire (in his irrepressible desire to convince the world that he was au fait in everything), proves only that the writer, though the most generally informed man of his time, had mistaken the really assailable points of the object of his attack.

The term “professed adversaries,” which has just been used, is clearly not meant for those great explorers of nature's laws and human capabilities who, in their ambitious journeys, might have taken a jab at the claims of astrology. Focused on more precise pursuits, they didn’t pause to analyze this incidental target, which, after being struck by these eagles, was left to be picked apart by crows and jackdaws. In their chatty banter, these birds accused their unfortunate prey of impossible crimes and imagined offenses. It seems these talkative creatures were either unaware of the real faults of their victim or, if they were aware, they viewed them as not significant enough. This lack of honesty or knowledge wasn’t just limited to the common crowd of critical writers; even Voltaire's witty essay against astrology, fueled by his uncontainable urge to prove he knew everything, shows that even the most knowledgeable man of his time misidentified the actual weak points of his target.

The author of the present Translation has no intention now of either advocating or impugning the doctrines of the science of which his Translation discourses: his purpose is a different one. He has that sort of respect for “the dead, which are really dead,” which, although it does not incline him to “praise” them “more than the living, which are yet alive,” is still sufficient to incite him to endeavour to avert the imputation of idiot credulity, to which their faith in astrology seems now to subject them in the general opinion of the enlightened “living.” And, while he disclaims all idea of presuming to offer any argument on either side of the question, as to the validity [Pg xvi] of the science, he must still, at the same time, confess his admiration of the ingenuity and contrivance manifest in its construction, and avow his readiness to believe that all its harmonized complications might have easily held dominion over some of the strongest minds in that darker period when it flourished.

The author of this Translation isn't trying to support or criticize the ideas of the science he’s discussing. His aim is different. He has a certain respect for “the dead, who are truly dead,” which, while it doesn’t lead him to “praise” them “more than the living, who are still alive,” is enough to motivate him to try to clear them of the foolishness that their belief in astrology seems to bring upon them in the eyes of the modern, enlightened “living.” And, while he disclaims any intention of arguing for or against the validity [Pg xvi] of the science, he must still admit his admiration for the cleverness and design evident in its framework, and he acknowledges that all its complex interconnections could easily have captivated some of the strongest minds during that darker time when it thrived.

In executing here the desire of attempting to vindicate the ancient credence in astrology, an elaborate disquisition would surely be not only unnecessary, but misplaced: it seems sufficient to refer the reader to the work of which the following is a translation, and to these undisputed facts—that the science was formerly inculcated by the highest and most erudite authorities of the period—that it was insisted on by votaries in all parts of the world, attesting and producing instances of its truth;—and, moreover, that it was so finely and beautifully put together, as to cause the only deficiency of one small, though most important, link in its whole chain of argument, to be undetected by dull minds, and readily supplied by enthusiastic genius. For centuries after centuries all branches of learning were either made subservient to astrology, or carried on in close alliance with it; and many of the illustrious names which it recalls to our recollection are gratefully reverenced even by modern science. The genius of Roger Bacon, although he was the first of that school of natural philosophy which acknowledges none but experimented truths, was nevertheless bowed to the doctrines of judicial astrology; and his greater Namesake, who after an interval of several centuries succeeded to him in giving proper direction to the mental energy, was still an arguer in favour of celestial influences: it may be, therefore, fairly inferred, that the subtle spell which had strength to enthrall “stuff” so “stern,” could have been of no weak or vulgar order, but that it was sufficiently potent and refined to interest and amuse even the present age.[3]

In following the desire to defend the old belief in astrology, a detailed discussion would be not only unnecessary but also misplaced: it seems enough to point the reader to the work that follows, which is a translation, and to these undeniable facts—that the science was once taught by the most esteemed and knowledgeable authorities of the time—that it was supported by followers all over the world, proving and providing examples of its validity;—and, furthermore, that it was so elegantly and skillfully constructed that the only missing small yet significant link in its entire argument was overlooked by less insightful minds and easily filled by passionate intellect. For centuries, all areas of knowledge were either subordinate to astrology or closely connected with it; many of the prominent names it brings to mind are still respected even by modern science. The genius of Roger Bacon, although he was the first of a natural philosophy school that recognizes only experimental truths, still adhered to the principles of judicial astrology; and his more famous namesake, who after several centuries succeeded him in directing intellectual energy, continued to argue in favor of celestial influences: it can therefore be fairly concluded that the subtle charm capable of captivating such serious “stuff” could not be weak or trivial, but was strong and refined enough to engage and entertain even today's audience.[3]

[Pg xvii] In this little volume will be found the whole of the elements of astrology, and the entire ground-work of those stupendous tomes in folio and quarto on the same subject, which were produced in myriads during the 16th and 17th centuries, for the due mystification of the then world. The present volume is addressed equally to the general reader, as well as to the votary of pure astrology, if any such there be; to the one it offers amusement; for the other, it should contain the most glowing interest. Even to the speculative metaphysician it will furnish food for contemplation; for, in addition to its peculiar hypothesis of cause and effect, it develops many of those apparent incongruities of character so often united in the same individual; and this development, even although adapted to the doctrine of the stars, still merits attention; inasmuch as the phenomena of which it treats (in whatever way they may be produced or regulated) will ever remain in actual existence.

[Pg xvii] In this small book, you'll find all the basics of astrology and the foundation of those huge volumes in folio and quarto on the same topic, which were produced in large numbers during the 16th and 17th centuries to mystify the world back then. This book is aimed at both the general reader and those who are dedicated to astrology, if any still exist; it offers entertainment for one and should hold great interest for the other. Even for the thoughtful metaphysician, it provides material for reflection; in addition to its unique ideas about cause and effect, it explores many of the apparent contradictions of character that often appear in the same person; and this exploration, even though tied to the beliefs about the stars, still deserves attention since the phenomena it discusses (regardless of how they may come about or be influenced) will always exist in reality.

The only English translation of Ptolemy’s Tetrabiblos, hitherto published, appears to have been first set forth in 1701, under the name of “The Quadripartite.” That publication has been long removed from general sale; and its gross misinterpretation of the author, caused by the carelessness or ignorance of Whalley and his assistants, by whom it was produced, has rendered most of its pages unintelligible: its absence is, therefore, scarcely to be regretted. The second edition of the same translation, professing to be “revised, corrected, and improved,” and published by Browne and Sibley, in 1786, was not, in any one instance, purified from the blunders and obscurities which disgraced its predecessor: it seems, in fact, less excusable than the former edition, of which it was merely a reprint, without being at all corrected, not even in certain typographical errata which the former printer had been zealous enough to point out in his final page. Even this second publication, worthless as it intrinsically is, can rarely now be met with, and, like the former, only at a very heavy price.

The only English translation of Ptolemy’s Tetrabiblos that has been published so far appears to have first come out in 1701, under the title “The Quadripartite.” That publication has long been out of print, and its poor interpretation of the author, caused by the carelessness or ignorance of Whalley and his team, has made most of its pages unreadable: its absence is hardly regrettable. The second edition of the same translation, claiming to be “revised, corrected, and improved,” was published by Browne and Sibley in 1786, but it failed to fix any of the errors and unclear parts that marred the original: it seems even less justifiable than the previous edition, as it was merely a reprint without any corrections, not even for certain typographical errata that the original printer had been diligent enough to point out on the last page. This second publication, worthless as it is, is also rarely encountered now, and, like the first, only at a very high price.

The present Translation has been made from Proclus’s Greek Paraphrase of Ptolemy’s original text; the edition followed is that of the Elzevirs, dated in 1635.[4] But, in the course of translation, continual references have been also had to various editions of the original text, in order to ascertain the proper acceptation of doubtful passages. The editions thus inspected were that by Camerarius, printed at Nuremberg in 1535; that by Melancthon, printed at Basle in 1553; and that by Junctinus, printed, with his own enormous commentaries, at Lyons, in 1581. Independently of [Pg xviii] these references, the present translation has been collated with the Latin of Leo Allatius, and with two other Latin translations: one printed at Basle, together with a translation of the Almagest in 1541; the other by itself at Perugio, in 1646.[5] The Translator has devoted all this extreme care and attention to his labours, in the wish to render Ptolemy’s astro-judicial doctrine [Pg xix] into English as purely and perfectly as possible; and, with the same view, he has likewise added, in an Appendix, certain extracts from such parts of the Almagest as were found to be referred to in his present work. Further illustration is also given by notes gathered from the “Primum Mobile” of Placidus,[6] and from a variety of other sources whence any elucidation of the text might be derived. Even Whalley’s “Annotations” (to use his own grandiloquent designation) have occasionally yielded information, not altogether unimportant, although generally incomplete.

The current translation has been created from Proclus's Greek paraphrase of Ptolemy's original text; the edition used is that of the Elzevirs, published in 1635.[4] Throughout the translation process, constant references have also been made to various editions of the original text to clarify the correct meaning of uncertain passages. The editions examined include the one by Camerarius, printed in Nuremberg in 1535; the one by Melancthon, printed in Basel in 1553; and the one by Junctinus, printed with his extensive commentaries in Lyon in 1581. In addition to these references, the current translation has been compared with the Latin version by Leo Allatius and two other Latin translations: one printed in Basel alongside a translation of the Almagest in 1541, and the other published separately in Perugia in 1646.[5] The translator has put in great care and effort into this work, aiming to render Ptolemy's astro-judicial doctrine into English as accurately and perfectly as possible; with that same goal in mind, he has also included in an appendix certain extracts from parts of the Almagest that are referenced in this work. Further explanation is also provided by notes collected from the “Primum Mobile” of Placidus,[6] as well as from various other sources that offer clarification of the text. Even Whalley's “Annotations” (to use his own lofty title) have occasionally provided useful information, though generally incomplete.

It seems improper to close this Preface (notwithstanding the bulk it has already attained), without annexing the following short notice of the life and works of the great man from whom the Tetrabiblos has emanated. [Pg xx]

It feels wrong to end this Preface (even though it's already quite lengthy) without including a brief overview of the life and works of the remarkable person from whom the Tetrabiblos originated. [Pg xx]

Claudius Ptolemy was born at Pelusium, in Ægypt, and became an illustrious disciple of the school of Alexandria, in which city he flourished during the reign of Adrian and that of Antoninus Pius. The date of his birth has been commonly assigned to the 70th year of the Christian æra; but the accuracy of this date seems questionable; for he has himself noted in one part of his works, that Antoninus reigned twenty-three years. He must have, therefore, survived that prince; and, as it is not probable that he continued his scientific labours until after ninety years of age, which he must have done had he been born about the year 70, because Antoninus died in the year 161, it seems that his birth would be more properly ascribed to some later period. Moreover, it is asserted by the Arabians, that he died in the 78th year of his age; and a similar statement is also made by Luca Gauricus, in the dedication of his version of the Almagest[7] to Dominico Palavicini: Gauricus has, however, placed his death in the year 147, which does not accord with the fact of his having survived Antoninus.

Claudius Ptolemy was born in Pelusium, Egypt, and became a renowned student of the school in Alexandria, where he thrived during the reigns of Adrian and Antoninus Pius. His birth is often thought to be in the 70th year of the Christian era, but this date seems questionable; he himself noted in one part of his works that Antoninus reigned for twenty-three years. Therefore, he must have outlived that emperor, and since it’s unlikely he continued his scientific work past the age of ninety—something he would have had to do if he was born around the year 70, as Antoninus died in 161—his birth is likely to be placed at a later time. Additionally, the Arabs claim he died at the age of 78, and Luca Gauricus makes a similar claim in the dedication of his version of the Almagest[7] to Dominico Palavicini. However, Gauricus places his death in 147, which conflicts with the fact that he lived after Antoninus.

Ptolemy has recorded that he observed, at Alexandria, an eclipse of the Moon, in the 9th year of Adrian; and that he made many observations upon the fixed stars in the 2nd year of Antoninus Pius: whence it may be concluded, that his observations upon the heavens were principally made during the period from a.d. 125 to a.d. 140, or thereabouts; and it also follows, of course, that the supposition, entertained by some authors, of his identity with the Ptolemy who was always in attendance upon Galba, as his personal astrologer, and who promised Otho that he should survive Nero and obtain the empire, is entirely without foundation. To Gauricus’s[8] version of the Almagest there is also another dedication, addressed to Pope Sixtus, and composed by George Trapezuntius, describing Ptolemy as “regiâ stirpe oriundum,” and explaining that he had, “with a truly regal mind,” applied himself to the sciences, because the ancient sceptre of the Ptolemies had previously passed into the hands of Cleopatra, and because the kingdom of Ægypt had been since reduced to the state of a Roman province. The authentic details of the circumstances of Ptolemy’s life are, however, extremely few. It is said that he was distinguished among the Greeks by the epithets “most wise,” and “most divine,” on account of his great learning; and, according to the Preface to Whalley’s translation of the Tetrabiblos, the Arabians report that “he was extremely abstemious, and rode much on horseback”; adding, that although he was “spruce in apparel,” yet his breath was not remarkable for an agreeable odour.

Ptolemy recorded that he observed a lunar eclipse in Alexandria during the 9th year of Adrian. He also made numerous observations of the fixed stars in the 2nd year of Antoninus Pius. This suggests that his observations of the heavens mainly occurred between AD 125 and AD 140, or thereabouts. It follows that the belief held by some authors that he is the same Ptolemy who was always with Galba as his personal astrologer and who promised Otho that he would outlive Nero and gain the empire is entirely unfounded. Gauricus’s[8] version of the Almagest also has another dedication addressed to Pope Sixtus, written by George Trapezuntius, describing Ptolemy as “regiâ stirpe oriundum” and explaining that he had “with a truly regal mind” devoted himself to the sciences because the ancient scepter of the Ptolemies had already passed to Cleopatra and because Egypt had become a Roman province. However, there are very few authentic details about Ptolemy’s life. He was said to be known among the Greeks by the titles “most wise” and “most divine” due to his extensive knowledge. According to the Preface to Whalley’s translation of the Tetrabiblos, the Arabs claim that “he was very temperate and rode a lot on horseback,” adding that although he was “neat in appearance,” his breath was not particularly pleasant.

The errors of the Ptolemaic theory of the universe have now been long discarded; but there are many points in which modern sciences, and modern astronomy in particular, have reaped incalculable benefits from the labours and researches of its great founder. He has preserved and [Pg xxi] transmitted to us the observations and principal discoveries of remoter periods, and has enriched and augmented them with his own. He corrected Hipparchus’s catalogue of the fixed stars, and formed tables for the calculation and regulation of the motions of the Sun, Moon, and planets. He was, in fact, the first who collected the scattered and detached observations of Aristotle, Hipparchus, Posidonius, and others on the economy of the world, and digested them into a system, which he set forth in his Μεγαλη Σνταξις or Great Construction, divided into thirteen books, and called, after him, the Ptolemaic System. This and all his other astronomical works are founded upon the hypothesis, that the earth is at rest in the centre of the universe, and that the heavenly bodies, stars, and planets, all move round it in solid orbs, whose motions are all directed by one primum mobile, or first mover, of which he discourses at large in the “Great Construction.” In that work he also treats of the figure and divisions of the earth, of the right and oblique ascensions of the heavenly bodies, and of the motions of the Sun, Moon, and planets; and he gives tables for finding their situations, latitudes, longitudes, and motions: he treats also of eclipses, and the methods of computing them; and he discourses of the fixed stars, of which he furnishes a numerous catalogue, with their magnitudes, latitudes, and longitudes.[9]

The mistakes of the Ptolemaic theory of the universe have long been thrown out; however, there are many ways in which modern sciences, especially modern astronomy, have gained immense benefits from the work and research of its great founder. He preserved and passed down the observations and main discoveries from earlier periods and added his own insights. He corrected Hipparchus's catalog of fixed stars and created tables for calculating and managing the movements of the Sun, Moon, and planets. In fact, he was the first to gather the scattered observations of Aristotle, Hipparchus, Posidonius, and others about the workings of the world and organized them into a system, which he presented in his Μεγαλη Σνταξις or Great Construction, divided into thirteen books, and known as the Ptolemaic System. This and all his other astronomical works are based on the idea that the earth is stationary at the center of the universe, and that the celestial bodies, stars, and planets all revolve around it in solid spheres, with their movements controlled by one primum mobile, or first mover, which he discusses in detail in the “Great Construction.” In that work, he also covers the shape and divisions of the earth, the right and oblique ascensions of heavenly bodies, and the movements of the Sun, Moon, and planets; he provides tables to determine their positions, latitudes, longitudes, and motions; he also discusses eclipses and the methods to calculate them; and he covers fixed stars, for which he supplies a comprehensive catalog, including their sizes, latitudes, and longitudes.[9]

It has been truly said, that “Ptolemy’s order, false as it was, enabled observers to give a plausible account of the motions of the Sun and Moon, to foretell eclipses, and to improve geography[10];” or, in other words, that it represented the actual phenomena of the heavens as they really appear to a spectator on the earth. It is therefore clear [Pg xxii] that Ptolemy’s astrology is just as applicable to modern and improved astronomy as it was to his own.[11]

It has been accurately said that “Ptolemy’s system, though incorrect, allowed observers to provide a convincing explanation of the movements of the Sun and Moon, predict eclipses, and enhance geography[10];” or, in other words, that it depicted the actual phenomena of the sky as they appear to someone on Earth. Therefore, it’s clear [Pg xxii] that Ptolemy’s astrology is just as relevant to modern and advanced astronomy as it was in his time.[11]

In the year 827[12] the “Great Construction” was translated by the Arabians into their own language, and by them communicated to Europe. It is through them that it has been usually known by the name of the Almagest. In the 13th century, the Emperor Frederic II caused it to be translated from the Arabic into Latin, and Sacrobosco[13] was consequently enabled to write his famous work upon the sphere. It was not, however, until about the end of the 15th century that the “Great Construction” was translated into Latin from the original text; and this important service was rendered to science by Purbach, a professor of philosophy at Vienna, who learned the Greek tongue at the instigation of Cardinal Bessarion. By means of this translation, the Ephemerides of George Müller, surnamed Regiomontanus, a disciple of Purbach’s, were first composed. The Greek text of the Almagest, or Great Construction, was first published at Basle, by Simon Grynæus, in 1538; and it was again printed at the same place in 1551, with certain other works of Ptolemy.[14] The rest of Ptolemy’s works connected with astronomy, and now extant, are the Tetrabiblos, or Four Books of the Influence of the Stars[15] (now translated); the Centiloquy, or Fruit of his Four Books, being a kind of supplement to the former; and the Significations of the Fixed Stars. The last is merely a daily calendar, showing the risings and settings of the stars, and the nature of the weather thereby produced. There are likewise extant his geographical work (which has rendered important service to modern geographers), and also his celebrated book on Harmonics, or the Theory of Sound.

In the year 827[12], the “Great Construction” was translated into Arabic and shared with Europe. That's why it's often known as the Almagest. In the 13th century, Emperor Frederic II had it translated from Arabic to Latin, enabling Sacrobosco[13] to write his famous work on the sphere. However, it wasn't until around the end of the 15th century that the “Great Construction” was translated into Latin from the original text; this important task was done by Purbach, a philosophy professor in Vienna, who learned Greek at the encouragement of Cardinal Bessarion. With this translation, George Müller, known as Regiomontanus and a student of Purbach, was able to create the first Ephemerides. The Greek text of the Almagest, or Great Construction, was first published in Basel by Simon Grynæus in 1538, and it was reprinted there in 1551, along with other works by Ptolemy.[14] The rest of Ptolemy’s works related to astronomy that are still available include the Tetrabiblos, or Four Books on the Influence of the Stars[15] (now translated); the Centiloquy, a summary of his Four Books that acts as a kind of supplement; and the Significations of the Fixed Stars. The last one is essentially a daily calendar that shows the rising and setting of the stars and the corresponding weather patterns. His geographical work, which has been notably helpful to modern geographers, and his well-known book on Harmonics, or the Theory of Sound, also still exist.

[Pg xxiii] Proclus, to whom the world is indebted for the improved text of the Tetrabiblos,[16] was born at Constantinople, in the year 410. He studied [Pg xxiv] at Alexandria and at Athens, and became very eminent among the later Platonists. He succeeded Syrianus, a celebrated philosopher, in the rectorship of the Platonic school at Athens, and died there in 485.[17] He was a most voluminous author, in poetry as well as in prose. Among his works there are Hymns to the Sun, to Venus, and to the Muses; Commentaries upon several pieces of Plato, and upon Ptolemy’s Tetrabiblos[18]; an Epitome or Commendium of all the Astronomical Precepts demonstrated in the Almagest; and elements of Theology and Natural Philosophy. He was in dispute with the Christians on the question of the eternity of the world, which he undertook to prove in eighteen elaborate arguments. A late writer in a certain periodical work has erroneously identified him with another Proclus, who was in favour with the Emperor Anastasius, and who destroyed the ships of Vitalianus, when besieging Constantinople in 514, by burning them with great brazen mirrors, or specula.

[Pg xxiii] Proclus, to whom the world owes thanks for the improved text of the Tetrabiblos, was born in Constantinople in 410. He studied in Alexandria and Athens, becoming quite prominent among the later Platonists. He took over from Syrianus, a well-known philosopher, as the head of the Platonic school in Athens, where he died in 485. He was a prolific writer, producing works in both poetry and prose. Among his works are Hymns to the Sun, to Venus, and to the Muses; commentaries on several pieces by Plato and on Ptolemy’s Tetrabiblos; an Epitome or Compendium of all the astronomical principles demonstrated in the Almagest; and elements of theology and natural philosophy. He debated with Christians on the topic of the eternity of the world, which he attempted to prove with eighteen detailed arguments. A later writer in a certain journal has mistakenly confused him with another Proclus, who was favored by Emperor Anastasius and who destroyed the ships of Vitalianus during the siege of Constantinople in 514 by setting them on fire with large bronze mirrors, or specula.

Signs of the Zodiac.

Zodiac Signs.

Aries Libra
Taurus Scorpio
Gemini  Sagittarius
Cancer Capricorn
Leo Aquarius
Virgo Pisces

[Pg 1]

[Pg 1]


PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS

Ptolemy's Tetrabiblos

OR

or

FOUR BOOKS

4 Books

OF THE

OF THE

INFLUENCE OF THE STARS

Impact of the Stars


BOOK THE FIRST


CHAPTER I
Introduction

The studies preliminary to astronomical prognostication, O Syrus! are two: the one, first alike in order and in power, leads to the knowledge of the figurations of the Sun, the Moon, and the stars; and of their relative aspects to each other, and to the earth: the other takes into consideration the changes which their aspects create, by means of their natural properties, in objects under their influence.

The studies that come before astronomical forecasting, O Syrus! are two: the first, equal in importance and strength, leads to understanding the positions of the Sun, the Moon, and the stars, as well as their relationships with one another and with the Earth. The second takes into account the changes that their positions cause in objects affected by their natural properties.

The first mentioned study has been already explained in the Syntaxis[19] to the utmost practicable extent; for it is complete in itself, and of essential utility even without being blended with the second; to which this treatise will be devoted, and which is not equally self-complete. The present work shall, however, be regulated by that due regard for truth which philosophy demands: and since the material quality of the objects acted upon renders them weak and variable, and difficult to be accurately apprehended, no positive or infallible rules (as were given in detailing the first doctrine, which is always governed by the same immutable laws) can be here set forth: while, on the other hand, a due observation of most of those general events, which evidently trace their causes to the Ambient, shall not be omitted.

The first study mentioned has already been thoroughly explained in the Syntaxis[19] as much as possible; it's complete on its own and is useful even without the second study, which this work will focus on and which isn’t as self-contained. However, this work will be guided by the commitment to truth that philosophy requires: and since the material quality of the objects being studied makes them weak, variable, and hard to understand accurately, no definitive or foolproof rules (like those provided in the first doctrine, which is always governed by the same unchanging laws) can be established here. At the same time, a careful observation of most of those general events that clearly trace their causes to the environment will not be overlooked.

It is, however, a common practice with the vulgar to slander everything which is difficult of attainment, and surely they who condemn the first of these two studies must be considered totally blind, whatever arguments may be produced in support of those who impugn the second. [Pg 2] There are also persons who imagine that whatever they themselves have not been able to acquire, must be utterly beyond the reach of all understanding; while others again will consider as useless any science of which (although they may have been often instructed in it) they have failed to preserve the recollection, owing to its difficulty of retention. In reference to these opinions, therefore, an endeavour shall be made to investigate the extent to which prognostication by astronomy is practicable, as well as serviceable, previously to detailing the particulars of the doctrine.

However, it's common for people to criticize everything that's hard to achieve, and those who dismiss the first of these two studies must be seen as completely blind, no matter what arguments are presented to defend those who attack the second. [Pg 2] Some people believe that anything they haven't been able to understand is completely beyond anyone's grasp; meanwhile, others think any knowledge is useless if they can’t remember it, even after being taught multiple times, due to its difficulty. Therefore, in light of these opinions, we will try to explore how practical and useful it is to predict events using astronomy before discussing the details of the theory.


CHAPTER II
Knowledge can be gained through astronomy to some extent.

That a certain power, derived from the æthereal nature, is diffused over and pervades the whole atmosphere of the earth, is clearly evident to all men. Fire and air, the first of the sublunary elements, are encompassed and altered by the motions of the æther. These elements in their turn encompass all inferior matter, and vary it as they themselves are varied; acting on earth and water, on plants and animals.[20]

That a certain power, coming from the ethereal nature, spreads throughout and fills the entire atmosphere of the earth is clear to everyone. Fire and air, the first of the sublunary elements, are surrounded and changed by the movements of the ether. These elements, in turn, surround all lower matter and modify it as they themselves are modified; influencing earth and water, as well as plants and animals.[20]

[Pg 3] The Sun, always acting in connection with the Ambient, contributes to the regulation of all earthly things: not only by the revolution of the seasons does he bring to perfection the embryo of animals, the buds of plants, the spring of waters, and the alteration of bodies, but by his daily progress also he operates other changes in light, heat, moisture, dryness and cold; dependent upon his situation with regard to the zenith.

[Pg 3] The Sun, constantly interacting with the surrounding environment, helps regulate everything on Earth: not only does his changing position throughout the seasons bring growth to animal embryos, plant buds, flowing waters, and physical transformations, but his daily path also brings about variations in light, heat, moisture, dryness, and cold, all influenced by his position relative to the zenith.

The Moon, being of all the heavenly bodies the nearest to the Earth, also dispenses much influence; and things animate and inanimate sympathize and vary with her. By the changes of her illumination, rivers swell and are reduced; the tides of the sea are ruled by her risings and settings; and plants and animals are expanded or collapsed, if not entirely at least partially, as she waxes or wanes.

The Moon, being the closest of all the celestial bodies to Earth, has a significant influence, causing both living and non-living things to respond and change. As her light changes, rivers rise and fall; the ocean tides are governed by her appearances and disappearances; and plants and animals either thrive or shrink, if not completely, then at least to some extent, as she grows or diminishes.

The stars likewise (as well the fixed stars as the planets), in performing their revolutions,[21] produce many impressions on the Ambient. They cause heats, winds, and storms, to the influence of which earthly things are conformably subjected.

The stars, both the fixed stars and the planets, as they move in their orbits, produce various effects on the surrounding atmosphere. They create heat, winds, and storms, which earthly things are naturally affected by.

And, further, the mutual configurations of all these heavenly bodies, by commingling the influence with which each is separately invested, produce a multiplicity of changes. The power of the Sun however predominates, because it is more generally distributed; the others either co-operate with his power or diminish its effect: the Moon more frequently and more plainly performs this at her conjunction, at her first and last quarter, and at her opposition: the stars act also to a similar purpose, but at longer intervals and more obscurely than the Moon; and their operation principally depends upon the mode of their visibility, their occultation and their declination.

And, on top of that, the way all these celestial bodies interact with each other, mixing their individual influences, creates a variety of changes. The Sun's power is the most dominant because it spreads out more widely; the other bodies either work with its energy or lessen its impact. The Moon usually has the most noticeable effect, especially during her conjunction, at her first and last quarters, and during her opposition. The stars also contribute similarly, but less frequently and more subtly than the Moon; their effect mainly depends on how visible they are, when they’re hidden, and their position in the sky.

From these premises it follows not only that all bodies, which may be already compounded, are subjected to the motion of the stars, but also that the impregnation and growth of the seeds from which all bodies proceed, are framed and moulded by the quality existing in the Ambient at the time of such impregnation and growth. And it is upon this principle that the more observant husbandmen and shepherds are accustomed, by drawing their inferences from the particular breezes which may happen at seed-time and at the impregnation of their cattle, to form predictions as to the quality of the expected produce. In short, however unlearned in the philosophy of nature, these men can foretell, solely by their previous observation, all the more general [Pg 4] and usual effects which result from the plainer and more visible configurations of the Sun, Moon, and stars. It is daily seen that even most illiterate persons, with no other aid than their own experienced observation, are capable of predicting events which may be consequent on the more extended influence of the Sun and the more simple order of the Ambient, and which may not be open to variation by any complex configurations of the Moon and stars towards the Sun. There are, moreover, among the brute creation, animals who evidently form prognostication, and use this wonderful instinct at the changes of the several seasons of the year, spring, summer, autumn, and winter; and, also, at the changes of the wind.

From these starting points, it follows that not only are all bodies, which may already be formed, affected by the movement of the stars, but also that the fertilization and growth of the seeds from which all bodies originate are shaped by the conditions present in the environment at the time of fertilization and growth. Based on this idea, more observant farmers and shepherds draw conclusions from the specific winds that occur during planting and the breeding of their animals to make predictions about the quality of the expected harvest. In short, even those who lack formal education in natural philosophy can predict, purely from their observations, the more general outcomes that result from the obvious and visible patterns of the Sun, Moon, and stars. It is often seen that even the most uneducated people, relying solely on their own experiences, can forecast events that may follow from the broader influence of the Sun and the simpler arrangement of the environment, which aren’t likely to change due to any complex configurations of the Moon and stars relative to the Sun. Furthermore, among animals, there are those that clearly exhibit foresight and use this remarkable instinct during the transitions of the seasons—spring, summer, autumn, and winter—and also with the changes in the wind.

In producing the changes of the seasons, the Sun itself is chiefly the operating and visible cause. There are, however, other events which, although they are not indicated in so simple a manner, but dependent on a slight complication of causes in the Ambient, are also foreknown by persons who have applied their observation to that end. Of this kind, are tempests and gales of wind, produced by certain aspects of the Moon, or the fixed stars, towards the Sun, according to their several courses, and the approach of which is usually foreseen by mariners. At the same time, prognostication made by persons of this class must be frequently fallacious, owing to their deficiency in science and their consequent inability to give necessary consideration to the time and place, or to the revolutions of the planets; all which circumstances, when exactly defined and understood, certainly tend towards accurate foreknowledge.

In causing the changes of the seasons, the Sun is mainly the active and visible factor. However, there are other events that, while not as straightforward, depend on a bit more complexity in the surroundings and can be anticipated by those who have focused their observations on them. These include storms and strong winds, which are influenced by specific positions of the Moon or fixed stars relative to the Sun, according to their various paths, and which are generally foreseen by sailors. At the same time, predictions made by these individuals can often be inaccurate because of their lack of scientific knowledge and their inability to properly take into account the timing and location, or the movements of the planets; all these factors, when clearly defined and understood, definitely contribute to accurate predictions.

When, therefore, a thorough knowledge of the motions of the stars, and of the Sun and Moon, shall have been acquired, and when the situation of the place, the time, and all the configurations actually existing at that place and time, shall also be duly known; and such knowledge be yet further improved by an acquaintance with the natures of the heavenly bodies—not of what they are composed, but of the effective influences they possess; as, for instance, that heat is the property of the Sun, and moisture of the Moon, and that other peculiar properties respectively appertain to the rest of them;—when all these qualifications for prescience may be possessed by any individual, there seems no obstacle to deprive him of the insight, offered at once by nature and his own judgment, into the effects arising out of the quality of all the various influences compounded together. So that he will thus be competent to predict the peculiar constitution of the atmosphere in every season, as, for instance, with regard to its greater heat or moisture, or other similar qualities; all which may be foreseen by the visible position or configuration of the stars and the Moon towards the Sun.

When someone has a solid understanding of the movements of the stars, the Sun, and the Moon, and knows the specific location, time, and all the current arrangements at that site and moment; and when this knowledge is further enhanced by understanding the nature of the celestial bodies—not what they are made of, but the actual influences they exert; for example, that heat is associated with the Sun, and moisture with the Moon, along with unique properties for each of the other celestial bodies—when an individual possesses all these abilities for foresight, there seems to be no reason to prevent them from gaining insight, offered both by nature and their own reasoning, into the effects that arise from the combination of all these different influences. This way, they will be able to predict the specific conditions of the atmosphere each season, such as whether it will be warmer or wetter, or any other similar characteristics; all of which can be anticipated by looking at the visible positions or arrangements of the stars and the Moon in relation to the Sun.

Since it is thus clearly practicable, by an accurate knowledge of the points above enumerated, to make predictions concerning the proper quality of the seasons, there also seems no impediment to the formation of similar prognostication concerning the destiny and disposition of every human being. For by the constitution of the Ambient, even at the [Pg 5] time of any individual’s primary conformation, the general quality of that individual’s temperament may be perceived; and the corporeal shape and mental capacity with which the person will be endowed at birth may be pronounced; as well as the favourable and unfavourable events indicated by the state of the Ambient, and liable to attend the individual at certain future periods; since, for instance, an event dependent on one disposition of the Ambient will be advantageous to a particular temperament, and that resulting from another unfavourable and injurious. From these circumstances, and others of similar import, the possibility of prescience is certainly evident.

Since it is clearly feasible, with a solid understanding of the points mentioned above, to make predictions about the quality of the seasons, there seems to be no barrier to making similar predictions about the fate and characteristics of every individual. The state of the environment allows us to perceive, even at the time of a person's initial formation, the overall quality of that person's temperament. We can also identify the physical attributes and mental abilities a person will have at birth, as well as the positive and negative events that may be influenced by the environment and are likely to affect the individual at specific times in the future. For example, an event influenced by one aspect of the environment might benefit a particular temperament, while another could prove harmful. From these and other related factors, the potential for foresight is certainly clear.

There are, however, some plausible assailants of this doctrine, whose attacks although greatly misapplied seem yet worthy of the following observations.

There are, however, some credible critics of this doctrine, whose attacks, even though largely misguided, still deserve the following observations.

In the first place, the science demands the greatest study and a constant attention to a multitude of different points; and as all persons who are but imperfectly practised in it must necessarily commit frequent mistakes, it has been supposed that even such events as have been truly predicted have taken place by chance only, and not from any operative cause in nature. But it should be remembered that these mistakes arise, not from any deficiency or want of power in the science itself, but from the incompetency of unqualified persons who pretend to exercise it. And, besides this, the majority of the persons who set themselves up as professors of this science, avail themselves of its name and credit for the sake of passing off some other mode of divination; by that means defrauding the ignorant, and pretending to foretell many things which from their nature cannot possibly be foreknown; and consequently affording opportunities to more intelligent people to impugn the value even of such predictions as can rationally be made. The reproach, however, thus brought upon the science is wholly unmerited; for it would be equally just to condemn all other branches of philosophy, because each numbers among its professors some mischievous pretenders.

First, this science requires extensive study and constant attention to many different aspects. Since those who only have a limited understanding of it are bound to make frequent mistakes, people have assumed that even the instances where accurate predictions were made happened purely by chance and not because of any natural processes. However, it’s important to remember that these mistakes stem not from a lack of capability in the science itself, but from the incompetence of unqualified individuals who claim to practice it. Furthermore, many who position themselves as experts in this field take advantage of its reputation to promote other forms of divination, misleading the uninformed and claiming to predict things that cannot genuinely be foreseen. This, in turn, gives more knowledgeable individuals a chance to challenge the legitimacy of even the predictions that can be reasonably made. However, the criticism directed at the science is completely unfair; it would be just as unreasonable to dismiss all other areas of philosophy simply because some of their practitioners are fraudulent.

Secondly, it is not attempted to be denied that any individual, although he may have attained to the greatest possible accuracy in the science, must still be liable to frequent error, arising out of the very nature of his undertaking, and from the weakness of his limited capacity in comparison with the magnitude of his object. For the whole theory of the quality of matter is supported by inference rather than by positive and scientific proof; and this is caused principally by the concretion of its temperament out of a multitude of dissimilar ingredients. And, although the former configurations of the planets have been observed to produce certain consequences (which have been adapted to configurations now taking place), and are, after long periods, and in a greater or less degree, resembled by subsequent configurations, yet these subsequent configurations never become exactly similar to those which have preceded them. For an entire return [Pg 6] of all the heavenly bodies to the exact situation in which they have once stood with regard to the earth will never take place, or at least not in any period determinable by human calculation, whatever vain attempts may be made to acquire such unattainable knowledge.[22] The examples referred to for guidance being therefore not exactly similar to the existing cases to which they are now applied, it must naturally follow that predictions are sometimes not borne out by the events. Hence arises the sole difficulty in the consideration of events produced by the Ambient. For no other concurrent cause has been hitherto combined with the motion of the heavenly bodies; although the doctrine of nativities, particularly that part of it relating to peculiar individual temperament, demands also the consideration of other concomitant causes, which are neither trifling nor unimportant, but essentially potent in affecting the individual properties of the creatures born. Thus the variety in seed has the chief influence in supplying the peculiar quality of each species; for, under the same disposition of the Ambient and of the horizon, each various kind of seed prevails in determining the distinct formation of its own proper species; thus man is born, or the horse is foaled; and by the same law are brought forth all the other various creatures and productions of the earth. It is also to be remembered, that considerable variations are caused in all creatures by the respective places where they may be brought forth: for although, under the same disposition of the Ambient, the germs of the future creatures may be of one species, whether human or of the horse, the difference in situation, of the places in which they are generated, produces a dissimilarity in the body and spirit of one from the body and spirit of another: and in addition to this it must be considered that different modes of nurture, and the variety of ranks, manners, and customs, contribute to render the course of life of [Pg 7] one individual greatly different from that of another[23]; consequently, unless every one of these varieties be duly blended with the causes arising in the Ambient, the prejudgment of any event will doubtless be very incomplete. For, although the greatest multiplicity of power exists in the Ambient, and although all other things act as concurrent causes in unison with it, and can never claim it as a concurrent cause in subservience to them, there will still, nevertheless, be a great deficiency in predictions attempted to be made by means of the heavenly motions alone, without regard to the other concurrent causes just now adverted to.

Secondly, it can’t be denied that any person, no matter how accurate they are in the field, is still prone to frequent errors due to the very nature of their work and the limitations of their understanding compared to the vastness of their subject. The whole theory regarding the properties of matter is based more on inference than on solid scientific proof, mainly because it’s made up of many different components. And while the past positions of the planets have been noted to cause certain outcomes (which can be related to their current positions), and can be somewhat mirrored again after long periods, these later positions never match exactly with those that came before them. An exact return of all celestial bodies to the identical positions they once had in relation to Earth will never occur, or at least not within any time frame that humans can calculate, no matter how futile the attempts are to gain such unattainable knowledge. Since the examples used for guidance are not exactly like the current situations they’re applied to, it naturally follows that predictions sometimes fail to match reality. This is the main challenge when considering events influenced by the surrounding environment. No other simultaneous cause has yet been integrated with the movements of celestial bodies; however, the theory of nativities, especially the part concerning individual temperament, also requires consideration of other accompanying causes, which are neither minor nor insignificant but are essential in affecting the individual characteristics of those born. Therefore, the variety in seeds plays a crucial role in defining the unique qualities of each species; under the same conditions of the environment and horizon, each type of seed helps shape the specific formation of its own species; thus humans are born, or horses are foaled; and this same principle applies to all the other various living beings and productions on Earth. It’s also important to note that significant variations occur in all creatures based on the places they’re born. Even though the seeds of future beings may belong to the same species, whether human or horse, differences in their locations result in variations in the body and spirit. Additionally, different methods of upbringing, along with various social ranks, behaviors, and customs, contribute to making one person’s life path significantly different from another’s. Therefore, unless all these variations are properly considered along with the factors coming from the environment, predictions about any event will inevitably be quite incomplete. Although the environment holds a vast array of influences, and although all other factors influence it simultaneously and do not rely on it as a subordinate cause, there will still be considerable shortcomings in predictions made solely based on celestial motions, without considering the other concurrent causes mentioned earlier.

Under these circumstances, it would seem judicious neither to deny altogether the practicability of prescience, because prognostications thus imperfectly derived are sometimes liable to be fallacious; nor, on the other hand, to admit that all events, whatever, are open to previous inquiry; as if such inquiry could in all cases be securely conducted without having recourse to mere inference, and as if it were not limited by the narrow extent of mere human abilities. The art of navigation, for instance, is not rejected, although it is in many points incomplete; therefore the bare fact that predictions are frequently imperfect cannot authorise the rejection of the art of prescience: the magnitude of its scope, and the faint resemblance that it bears to a divine attribute, should rather demand grateful commendations, and receive the utmost regard and attention. And, since no weakness is imputed to a physician, because he inquires into the individual habit of his patient, as well as into the nature of the disease, no imputation can justly attach to the professor of prognostication, because he combines the consideration of species, nurture, education and country, with that of the motion of the heavens: for as the physician acts but reasonably, in thus considering the proper constitution of the sick person as well as his disease; so, in forming predictions, it must surely be justifiably allowable to comprehend in that consideration every other thing connected with the subject in addition to the motion of the heavens, and to collect and compare with that motion all other co-operating circumstances arising elsewhere.

Given these circumstances, it seems wise not to completely dismiss the possibility of foresight, even though predictions made from such imperfect methods can be wrong; nor should we assume that every event can be examined in advance, as if such examinations could always be done securely without relying on mere inference, and as if they were not constrained by the limited capabilities of humans. The art of navigation, for example, is not dismissed despite its many shortcomings; similarly, the mere fact that predictions often fall short does not justify rejecting the art of foresight. The broad nature of its application and the slight resemblance it has to a divine quality should instead encourage appreciation and utmost attention. And just as no fault is found with a physician for considering both the individual characteristics of their patient and the nature of the illness, no blame can be fairly directed toward the expert in prediction for taking into account factors like species, upbringing, education, and location along with the movements of the stars. Just as the physician is justified in assessing the proper condition of the sick individual alongside the illness, it is certainly reasonable when making predictions to include all relevant factors along with the motion of the heavens, and to gather and compare all other influencing circumstances that arise from elsewhere.


[Pg 8]

[Pg 8]

CHAPTER III
That foresight is helpful.

It appears, then, that prescience by astronomy is possible under certain adaptation; and that alone it will afford premonition, as far as symptoms in the Ambient enable it to do so, of all such events as happen to men by the influence of the Ambient. These events are, from their commencement, always in conformity with the spiritual and corporeal faculties, and their occasional affections; as well as with the shorter or longer duration of those affections. They are also conformable with other things which, although not actually in man’s immediate person, are still absolutely and naturally connected with him: in connection with his body they are applicable to his estate, and his conjugal cohabitations; in connection with his spirit, they relate to his offspring[24] and his rank; and they are also connected with all fortuitous circumstances which may occasionally befall him.

It seems that predicting the future through astronomy is possible with some adjustments, and that, on its own, it can provide warnings about events that affect people due to environmental influences, as far as the symptoms in the environment allow it. These events, from the moment they start, always align with both our spiritual and physical faculties and their varying impacts, as well as the length of those impacts. They also connect with other aspects that, while not directly related to a person's immediate self, are still completely and naturally linked to them: in relation to their body, they apply to their circumstances and marital partnerships; in relation to their spirit, they pertain to their children and social status; and they are also linked to any random situations that may happen to them.[24]

That the foreknowledge of these can be attained has already been demonstrated; and it remains to speak of the utility of the attainment. First, however, let it be said in what respect and with what view it is proposed to draw advantage from this science; if it be considered in its tendency to promote the good of the mind, no object more advantageous can surely be wanting to induce the world to rejoice and delight in it, since it offers an acquaintance with things divine and human: if it be considered in respect to the benefits it is capable of conferring on the body, its utility in this view also, will be found on comparison to excel that of all other arts conducive to the comforts of life, for it is of more general application and service than all the others together. And, although it may be objected to the art of prescience, that it does not co-operate towards the acquirement of riches or glory, let it also be remembered that the same objection attaches to every other art and science; since there is not one which can of itself produce either riches or glory, not yet is there one which is on that plea deemed useless: it seems, therefore, that the science of prognostication, with its high qualifications and its aptitude to the most important objects, does not, in any greater degree, deserve to be condemned.

That we can achieve knowledge of these things has already been proven; now, let's discuss the usefulness of this knowledge. First, let’s clarify how we can benefit from this science. If we look at its ability to enhance our minds, there’s surely no greater reason for people to take joy in it, as it provides insight into both divine and human matters. If we consider its benefits for the body, its usefulness surpasses all other arts aimed at improving our lives since it is more widely applicable and beneficial than all the others combined. And although some might argue that the art of prediction doesn't help us gain wealth or fame, we should remember that this criticism also applies to all other arts and sciences. There isn’t a single one that can, on its own, produce wealth or fame, nor is there any that is dismissed as useless for this reason. Therefore, it seems that the science of prediction, with its valuable qualities and its relevance to the most significant issues, shouldn’t be condemned any more than the others.

In general, however, the persons who attack and reprobate it as being useless, do not pay due regard to the manner in which it becomes necessary; but deny its utility on the specious argument that it is [Pg 9] superfluous and puerile to attempt to foreknow things which must inevitably come to pass: thus considering it in a mode at once abstracted, unlearned, and unfair. For, in the first place, this fact ought to be kept in view, that events which necessarily and fully happen, whether exciting fear or creating joy, if arriving unforeseen, will either overwhelm the mind with terror or destroy its composure by sudden delight; if, however, such events should have been foreknown, the mind will have been previously prepared for their reception, and will preserve an equable calmness, by having been accustomed to contemplate the approaching event as though it were present, so that, on its actual arrival, it will be sustained with tranquillity and constancy.

In general, though, those who criticize it as useless don’t really consider how necessary it is; instead, they argue that it’s pointless and childish to try to predict things that are bound to happen. They look at it in a way that’s abstract, uninformed, and unfair. First of all, it should be noted that events that inevitably happen, whether they cause fear or bring joy, if they come unexpectedly, can either overwhelm the mind with terror or throw it off balance with sudden happiness. However, if these events had been anticipated, the mind would have been prepared for them and would remain calm, having already thought about the upcoming event as if it were happening right now. Therefore, when it actually occurs, the mind can handle it with peace and steadiness.

In the next place, it must not be imagined that all things happen to mankind, as though every individual circumstance were ordained by divine decree and some indissoluble supernal cause; nor is it to be thought that all events are shown to proceed from one single inevitable fate, without being influenced by the interposition of any other agency. Such an opinion is entirely inadmissable; for it is on the contrary most essential to observe, not only the heavenly motion which, perfect in its divine institution and order, is eternally regular and undeviating; but also the variety which exists in earthly things, subjected to and diversified by the institutions and courses of nature, and in connection with which the superior cause operates in respect to the accidents produced.

Next, we shouldn't assume that everything happens to people as if every single event is dictated by a divine plan or an unbreakable higher power. It's also not true that all events come from one unavoidable fate without being affected by other influences. This view is completely unacceptable. Instead, it’s crucial to recognize both the heavenly movements, which, perfect in their divine design and order, are eternally consistent and unchanging, and the variety found in earthly matters, which are shaped and varied by the laws and processes of nature. In this context, the higher power works in relation to the events that occur.

It is further to be remarked that man is subject, not only to events applicable to his own private and individual nature, but also to others arising from general causes. He suffers, for instance, by pestilences, inundations, or conflagrations, produced by certain extensive changes in the Ambient, and destroying multitudes at once; since a greater and more powerful agency must of course always absorb and overcome one that is more minute and weaker. In great changes, therefore, where a stronger cause predominates, more general affections, like those just mentioned, are put in operation, but affections which attach to one individual solely are excited when his own natural constitution peculiar to himself may be overcome by some opposing impulse of the Ambient, however small or faint. And in this point of view it is manifest that all events whatsoever, whether general or particular, of which the primary cause is strong and irresistible, and against which no other contrary agency has sufficient power to interpose, must of necessity be wholly fulfilled; and that events indicated by a minor cause must of course be prevented and annihilated, when some other agency may be found contending for an opposite effect; if, however, no such opposing agency can be found, they also must be fulfilled, in due succession to the primary cause. Nevertheless, the fulfilment of events thus indicated must not be ascribed solely to the vigour of the cause producing them, nor to any inevitable fate, but rather to the absence of any opposing influence capable of prevention. And thus, with all [Pg 10] things whatsoeverwhich trace their causes and origin to nature, the case is exactly similar; for stones,[25] plants, animals, wounds, passions, and diseases, all will of necessity operate on man to a certain degree; and they fail to do so, if antidotes be found and applied against their influence.

It should also be noted that a person is affected not only by events that pertain to their individual nature but also by those stemming from broader causes. For example, they endure hardships from outbreaks of disease, floods, or fires, which result from significant changes in the environment and can devastate many people at once. A stronger and more powerful force will always dominate and surpass a weaker one. Therefore, during major changes where a stronger cause is at play, more general impacts, like those mentioned, come into effect. However, personal impacts that affect an individual specifically arise when their unique natural constitution is challenged by any opposing influence from the environment, no matter how small or faint. From this perspective, it is clear that all events, whether general or specific, caused by a strong and unyielding force, and against which no opposing force has enough power to intervene, must inevitably happen. Events indicated by a weaker cause will be prevented or canceled out when there is a conflicting force trying to create an opposite result; however, if no opposing force exists, they must also occur in alignment with the primary cause. Nonetheless, the realization of such events should not be attributed solely to the strength of the cause producing them or to an unavoidable fate, but rather to the lack of any opposing influence capable of stopping them. Similarly, in all things that trace their origins to nature, the situation is exactly the same; stones, plants, animals, injuries, emotions, and diseases all have a certain impact on people, and they will not have such effects if remedies are found and applied against their influence. [Pg 10]

In exercising prognostication, therefore, strict care must be taken to foretell future events by that natural process only which is admitted in the doctrine here delivered; and, setting aside all vain and unfounded opinions, to predict that, when the existing agency is manifold and great, and of a power impossible to be resisted, the corresponding event which it indicates shall absolutely take place; and also, in other cases, that another event shall not happen when its exciting causes are counteracted by some interposing influence. It is in this manner that experienced physicians, accustomed to the observation of diseases, foresee that some will be inevitably mortal, and that others are susceptible of cure.

In making predictions, it's crucial to only use the natural methods accepted in the guidelines presented here. We should ignore all pointless and baseless opinions and expect that when there are many significant factors at play, creating an overwhelming force, the event they point to will definitely occur. Similarly, we can anticipate that certain events won't happen when their triggering causes are obstructed by some intervening influence. This is how seasoned doctors, who are familiar with the observation of illnesses, can predict that some cases will definitely be fatal while others can be treated.

Thus, when any opinion is given by the astrologer with respect to the various accidents liable to happen, it should be understood that he advances nothing more than this proposition; viz. that, by the property inherent in the Ambient, any conformation of it, suitable to a particular temperament, being varied more or less, will produce in that temperament some particular affection. And it is also to be understood that he ventures this opinion with the same degree of confidence, as that with which a physician may declare that a certain wound will increase or grow putrid; or a man acquainted with metals say that the magnet[26] will attract iron. But neither the increase nor putrefaction of the wound nor the magnet’s attraction of iron, is ordained by any inevitable law, although these consequences must necessarily follow, in due obedience to the first principles of the existing order of nature, when no means of prevention can be found and applied. But, however, neither of these consequences will take place, when such antidotes shall be presented as will naturally prevent them—and a similar [Pg 11] consideration should be given to the predictions of the astrologer—because, if garlick be rubbed on the magnet, iron will experience no attraction;[27] and if proper medicines be applied to the wound, it will cease to increase or to putrefy. And therefore all events which happen to mankind take place also in the regular course of nature, when no impediments thereto are found or known: but again, on the other hand, if any impediments or obstructions be found in the way of events which may be predicted by the regular course of nature to happen, such events will either not take place at all, or, if they should take place, will be much diminished in their force and extent.

Therefore, when an astrologer shares their opinion about the various events that could occur, it's important to understand that they are asserting only this idea: that, due to the properties inherent in the environment, any particular configuration that aligns with someone's temperament, being altered to some degree, will create a specific influence on that temperament. It's also crucial to recognize that the astrologer presents this view with the same level of certainty as a doctor who states that a certain wound will worsen or become infected, or as someone knowledgeable about metals claiming that a magnet will attract iron. However, the worsening or infection of the wound and the magnet's attraction to iron are not mandated by any unavoidable law, even though these outcomes will naturally follow under the established principles of nature when no prevention methods are possible. Nevertheless, neither of these outcomes will occur when effective countermeasures are applied to prevent them—similar reasoning should be applied to the forecasts of the astrologer—because if garlic is rubbed on the magnet, iron will not be attracted; and if the right treatments are used on the wound, it will stop getting worse or becoming infected. Thus, all events that occur for humanity happen in the usual course of nature when there are no known obstacles. Conversely, if there are any obstacles or barriers to events predicted to follow the natural course, those events may not happen at all, or if they do occur, they will likely be significantly lessened in their impact and scope.

The same order and consequence exist in all cases, whether the events have a general or only a particular operation; and it may therefore well be demanded, why prescience is believed to be possible as far as it regards general events, and why it is allowed to be serviceable in preparing for their approach; while in particular instances its power and use are altogether denied. That the weather and the seasons, and the indications of the fixed stars, as well as the configurations of the Moon, afford means of prognostication, many persons admit; and they exercise this foreknowledge for their own preservation and comfort, adapting their constitutions to the expected temperature, by cooling and refreshing things for the summer, and by warm things for the winter. They also watch the significations of the fixed stars, to avoid dangerous weather, in making voyages by sea; and they notice the [Pg 12] aspects of the Moon, when at the full, in order to direct the copulation of their herds and flocks, and the setting of plants or sewing of seeds: and there is not an individual who considers these general precautions as impossible or unprofitable. Still, however, these same persons withhold their assent to the possibility of applying prescience to particular cases; such, for instance, as any particular excess or diminution of cold or heat, whether arising out of the peculiar temperament producing the original cold or heat, or from the combination of other properties; nor do they admit that there are any means of guarding against many of these particular circumstances. And yet, if it be clear that persons, who prepare themselves by cooling things, are less affected by any general heat of the weather, there seems no reason for supposing that a similar preparation would not be equally effectual against any particular conjuncture oppressed by immoderate heat. It appears, however, that this idea, of the impracticability of attaining foreknowledge of particular circumstances, must originate solely in the mere difficulty of the acquirement; which difficulty is certainly rendered peculiarly arduous by the necessity of conducting the enquiry with the greatest accuracy and precision: and to this it must be added, that, as there is rarely found a person capable of arranging the whole subject so perfectly that no part of the opposing influence can escape his attention, it frequently happens that predictions are not properly regulated by due consideration of that opposing influence, and that the effects are at once considered fully liable to be brought to pass, agreeably to the primary agency and without any intervention. This defect, of not sufficiently considering the opposing influence, has naturally induced an opinion that all future events are entirely unalterable and inevitable. But, since the foreknowledge of particular circumstances, although it may not wholly claim infallibility, seems yet so far practicable as to merit consideration, so the precaution it affords, in particular circumstances, deserves in like manner to be attended to; and, if it be not of universal advantage, but useful in few instances only, it is still most worthy of estimation, and to be considered of no moderate value. Of this, the Ægyptians seem to have been well aware; their discoveries of the great faculties of this science have exceeded those of other nations, and they have in all cases combined the medical art with astronomical prognostication. And, had they been of opinion that all expected events are unalterable and not to be averted, they never would have instituted any propitiations, remedies, and preservatives against the influence of the Ambient, whether present or approaching, general or particular. But, by means of the science called by them Medical Mathematics, they combined with the power of prognostication the concurrent secondary influence arising out of the institutions and courses of nature, as well as the contrary influence which might be procured out of nature’s variety; and by means of these they rendered the indicated agency useful and advantageous: since their [Pg 13] astronomy pointed out to them the kind of temperament liable to be acted upon, as well as the events about to proceed from the Ambient, and the peculiar influence of those events, while their medical skill made them acquainted with everything suitable or unsuitable to each of the effects to be procured. And it is by this process that remedies for present and preservatives against future disorders are to be acquired: for, without astronomical knowledge, medical aid would be most frequently unavailing; since the same identical remedies are not better calculated for all persons whatsoever, than they are for all diseases whatsoever.[28]

The same order and consequence apply in all situations, whether the events are general or specific; and it’s reasonable to ask why we believe predicting general events is possible, allowing us to prepare for them, while we completely deny its effectiveness in specific cases. Many people agree that weather patterns, seasons, the positions of fixed stars, and the phases of the Moon provide ways to predict outcomes; they use this foresight for their own safety and comfort, cooling off in the summer and warming up in the winter. They also monitor the fixed stars to avoid bad weather while traveling by sea and pay attention to the full Moon phases to time breeding for their livestock and planting seeds. No one thinks these general precautions are impractical or pointless. However, these same people refuse to believe that foresight can apply to specific cases, such as an unusual extreme in temperature, whether that comes from a specific prevailing condition or from a mix of other factors; they also deny the possibility of being prepared for many specific circumstances. Yet, if it’s clear that people who cool off beforehand are less impacted by general summertime heat, there doesn’t seem to be a reason to doubt that similar preparation wouldn’t also work for specific instances of excessive heat. It seems that this belief in the impossibility of accurately predicting specific circumstances comes from the challenge in gaining that knowledge; this challenge is made even harder by the need to conduct the investigation with complete accuracy and precision. Additionally, since few people can handle the entire topic so flawlessly that no opposing factors slip by unnoticed, predictions often fail to take opposing influences into account, leading to an assumption that future events are entirely unchangeable and unavoidable. However, since being able to foresee specific circumstances, even if it isn’t infallible, seems practical enough to warrant attention, the precautions it offers in specific situations should also be considered valuable; and while it might not be universally beneficial, being useful in only a few instances makes it still quite valuable and worthy of recognition. The Egyptians clearly understood this; their advancements in this science surpassed those of other cultures, combining medical practice with astronomical predictions. If they believed that all expected events were unchangeable and unpreventable, they would never have set up any rituals, treatments, or preventive measures against the effects of their environment, whether they were current or forthcoming, general or specific. Through a practice they called Medical Mathematics, they merged predictive power with the associated secondary influences from natural laws and variability, making those predictions useful and beneficial. Their astronomy helped them identify the types of health conditions likely to be affected, as well as the events that would stem from the environment and their specific impacts, while their medical knowledge informed them about what would be beneficial or harmful for each case at hand. This is how we find treatments for current issues and preventative measures against future ailments: because, without astronomical knowledge, medical assistance would often be ineffective since the same remedies aren't equally effective for everyone or suitable for all diseases.

The practicability and utility of prescience having been thus far briefly explained, the ensuing discourse must be proceeded with. It commences, introductorily, with an account of the efficient properties of each of the heavenly bodies, taken from the rules of the ancients, whose observations were founded in nature. And, first, of the influences of the planets and of the Sun and Moon.

The practicality and usefulness of foresight have been briefly outlined, so we must continue with the discussion. It starts with an introduction to the effective properties of each celestial body, based on the principles of the ancients, whose observations were rooted in nature. First, we will discuss the influences of the planets, the Sun, and the Moon.


CHAPTER IV
THE INFLUENCES OF THE PLANETARY ORBS

The Sun[29] is found to produce heat and moderate dryness. His magnitude, and the changes which he so evidently makes in the seasons, render his power more plainly perceptible than that of the other heavenly bodies; since his approach to the zenith of any part of the earth creates a greater degree of heat in that part and proportionately disposes its inhabitants after his own nature.

The Sun[29] is known to generate heat and mild dryness. His size and the changes he clearly brings to the seasons make his influence more obvious than that of other celestial bodies; as his position at the highest point in the sky over any part of the Earth increases the heat in that area and consequently affects its inhabitants in accordance with his nature.

The Moon principally generates moisture; her proximity to the earth renders her highly capable of exciting damp vapours, and of thus operating sensibly upon animal bodies by relaxation and putrefaction. She has, however, also a moderate share in the production of heat, in consequence of the illumination she receives from the Sun.

The Moon mainly creates moisture; her closeness to the Earth makes her very good at stirring up damp vapors, which can affect living beings through relaxation and decay. However, she also plays a small role in producing heat due to the light she gets from the Sun.

Saturn produces cold and dryness, for he is most remote both from the Sun’s heat and from the earth’s vapours. But he is more effective in the production of cold than of dryness. And he and the rest of the planets derive their energy from the positions which they hold with regard to the Sun and Moon; and they are all seen to alter the constitution of the Ambient in various ways.

Saturn brings cold and dryness because it's farthest away from the Sun's heat and the Earth's moisture. However, it creates more cold than dryness. Both it and the other planets get their energy from their positions relative to the Sun and Moon, and they all change the environment around them in different ways.

Mars chiefly causes dryness, and is also strongly heating, by means of his own fiery nature, which is indicated by his colour, and in consequence of his vicinity to the Sun; the sphere of which is immediately below him. [Pg 14]

Mars primarily brings dryness and is also very hot due to his fiery nature, which is shown by his color, and because he is close to the Sun, whose sphere is just below him. [Pg 14]

Jupiter revolves in an intermediate sphere between the extreme cold of Saturn and the burning heat of Mars, and has consequently a temperate influence: he therefore at once promotes both warmth and moisture. But, owing to the spheres of Mars and the Sun, which lie beneath him, his warmth is predominant: and hence he produces fertilizing breezes.

Jupiter orbits in a middle region between the extreme cold of Saturn and the intense heat of Mars, so it has a moderate influence. This means it encourages both warmth and moisture. However, because Mars and the Sun, which are below him, exert their influence, his warmth is more significant. As a result, he generates nourishing breezes.

To Venus also the same temperate quality belongs, although it exists conversely; since the heat she produces by her vicinity to the Sun is not so great as the moisture which she generates by the magnitude of her light, and by appropriating to herself the moist vapours of the earth, in the same manner that the Moon does.

To Venus, the same moderate quality applies, although it works in the opposite way; the heat she generates from her closeness to the Sun isn't as intense as the moisture she creates from the size of her light and by absorbing the moist vapors from the earth, just like the Moon does.

Mercury sometimes produces dryness, and at other times moisture, and each with equal vigour. His faculty of absorbing moisture and creating dryness proceeds from his situation with regard to the Sun, from which he is at no time far distant in longitude; and, on the other hand, he produces moisture, because he borders upon the Moon’s sphere, which is nearest to the earth; and, being thus excited by the velocity of his motion with the Sun, he consequently operates rapid changes tending to produce alternately either quality.

Mercury can sometimes create dryness and other times moisture, and he does both with equal intensity. His ability to absorb moisture and create dryness comes from his position relative to the Sun, which he is always relatively close to in longitude; on the flip side, he generates moisture because he is adjacent to the Moon’s sphere, which is closest to Earth. As a result of his quick movement with the Sun, he causes rapid changes that alternately produce either quality.


CHAPTER V
Beneficial and harmful

Of the four temperaments or qualities above mentioned, two are nutritive and prolific, viz. heat and moisture; by these all matter coalesces and is nourished: the other two are noxious and destructive, viz. dryness and cold; by these all matter is decayed and dissipated.

Of the four temperaments or qualities mentioned above, two are nourishing and productive, namely heat and moisture; with these, all matter comes together and is sustained: the other two are harmful and destructive, namely dryness and cold; with these, all matter deteriorates and breaks down.

Therefore, two of the planets, on account of their temperate quality, and because heat and moisture are predominant in them, are considered by the ancients as benefic, or causers of good: these are Jupiter and Venus. And the Moon also is so considered for the same reasons.

Therefore, two of the planets, because of their temperate nature, and because heat and moisture are dominant in them, are viewed by the ancients as benefic, or bringers of good: these are Jupiter and Venus. The Moon is also regarded that way for the same reasons.

But Saturn and Mars are esteemed of a contrary nature, and malefic, or causers of evil: the first from his excess of cold, the other from his excess of dryness.

But Saturn and Mars are considered to have opposing qualities, and they bring about negativity: the first due to his extreme coldness, and the other because of his excessive dryness.

The Sun and Mercury are deemed of common influence, and productive either of good or evil in unison with whatever planets they may be connected with.

The Sun and Mercury are considered to have a shared influence, bringing about either positive or negative effects depending on the other planets they are linked with.


CHAPTER VI
MALE AND FEMALE

There are two primary sexes, male and female; and the female sex partakes chiefly of moisture. The Moon and Venus are therefore said to be feminine, since their qualities are principally moist.

There are two main sexes, male and female; and the female sex is mostly associated with moisture. The Moon and Venus are considered feminine because their characteristics are mainly moist.

The Sun, Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars are called masculine. Mercury is [Pg 15] common to both genders, because at certain times he produces dryness, and at others moisture, and performs each in an equal ratio.

The Sun, Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars are referred to as masculine. Mercury is [Pg 15] considered neutral because at different times it creates dryness and at other times moisture, doing both in equal measure.

The stars, however, are also said to be masculine and feminine, by their positions with regard to the Sun. While they are matutine and preceding the Sun, they are masculine; when vespertine and following the Sun, they become feminine.[30]

The stars are often considered both masculine and feminine, depending on their positions in relation to the Sun. When they appear in the morning before the Sun, they are seen as masculine; when they show up in the evening after the Sun, they are regarded as feminine.[30]

And they are further regulated in this respect by their positions with regard to the horizon. From the ascendant to the mid-heaven, or from the angle of the west to the lower heaven, they are considered to be masculine, being then oriental: and in the other two quadrants, feminine, being then occidental.

And they are further regulated by their positions related to the horizon. From the rising point to the highest point in the sky, or from the western point to the lowest point in the sky, they are regarded as masculine, as they are then in the east: and in the other two quadrants, they are considered feminine, as they are then in the west.


CHAPTER VII
Daytime and nighttime

The day and the night are the visible divisions of time. The day, in its heat and its aptitude for action, is masculine:—the night, in its moisture and its appropriation to rest, feminine.

The day and the night are the clear divisions of time. The day, with its warmth and suitability for activity, is masculine; the night, with its coolness and inclination for rest, is feminine.

Hence, again, the Moon and Venus are esteemed to be nocturnal; the Sun and Jupiter, diurnal; and Mercury, common; since in his matutine position he is diurnal, but nocturnal when vespertine.

Hence, again, the Moon and Venus are considered to be night-time; the Sun and Jupiter, day-time; and Mercury, both; since in his morning position he is day-time, but night-time when evening.

Of the other two planets, Saturn and Mars, which are noxious, one is considered to be diurnal, and the other nocturnal. Neither of them, however, is allotted to that division of time with which its nature accords (as heat accords with heat), but each is disposed of on a contrary principle: and for this reason, that, although the benefit is increased when a favourable temperament receives an addition of its own nature, yet, the evil arising from a pernicious influence is much mitigated when dissimilar qualities are mingled with that influence. Hence the coldness of Saturn is allotted to the day, to counterbalance its heat; and the dryness of Mars to the night, to counterbalance its moisture. Thus each of these planets, being moderated by this combination, is placed in a condition calculated to produce a favourable temperament.[31]

Of the two other planets, Saturn and Mars, which are harmful, one is considered a daytime planet and the other a nighttime one. However, neither of them is aligned with the time of day that matches their nature (since heat goes with heat); instead, they are assigned based on an opposing principle. This is because, while a beneficial quality enhances its own kind, the negative effects of a harmful influence are greatly reduced when it’s mixed with different qualities. So, the coldness of Saturn is assigned to the day to balance out its heat, and the dryness of Mars is assigned to the night to balance out its moisture. In this way, each of these planets is moderated by this combination, allowing for a more favorable environment.[31]


[Pg 16]

[Pg 16]

CHAPTER VIII
THE INFLUENCE OF POSITION
IN RELATION TO THE SUN

The respective powers of the Moon and of the three superior planets are either augmented or diminished by their several positions with regard to the Sun.

The powers of the Moon and the three outer planets are either increased or decreased based on their positions in relation to the Sun.

The Moon, during her increase, from her first emerging to her first quarter, produces chiefly moisture; on continuing her increase from her first quarter to her full state of illumination, she causes heat; from her full state to her third quarter she causes dryness; and from her third quarter to her occultation she causes cold.

The Moon, as she grows from her new phase to her first quarter, mainly creates moisture; as she continues to grow from her first quarter to her full phase, she generates heat; from her full phase to her last quarter, she brings about dryness; and from her last quarter to her disappearance, she causes cold.

The planets, when matutine, and from their first emerging until they arrive at their first station, are chiefly productive of moisture; from their first station until they rise at night, of heat; from their rising at night until their second station, of dryness; and from their second station until their occultation, they produce cold.[32]

The planets, when they first appear in the morning, mainly create moisture until they reach their first high point; from that point until they set in the evening, they generate heat; from their evening rise until their second high point, they bring dryness; and from their second high point until they disappear, they produce cold.[32]

But it is also sufficiently plain that they must likewise cause, by their intermixture with each other, many varieties of quality in the Ambient: because, although their individual and peculiar influence may for the most part prevail, it will still be more or less varied by the power of the other heavenly bodies configurated with them.

But it’s also clear that their mixing together must create many different qualities in the surroundings: because, even though their individual and unique influence usually takes the lead, it will still be altered to some extent by the power of other celestial bodies aligned with them.


CHAPTER IX
THE INFLUENCE OF THE FIXED STARS

Next in succession, it is necessary to detail the natures and properties of the fixed stars; all of which have their respective influences, analogous to the influences of the planets: and those stars which form the constellations of the zodiac require to be first described.

Next in line, it's essential to explain the nature and characteristics of the fixed stars; each of which has its own influences, similar to the influences of the planets: and the stars that make up the zodiac constellations need to be described first.

Aries. The stars in the head of Aries possess an influence similar in its effects to that of Mars and Saturn: those in the mouth act similarly to Mercury, and in some degree to Saturn; those in the hinder foot, to Mars; those in the tail, to Venus. [Pg 17]

Aries. The stars in the head of Aries have an effect that's similar to that of Mars and Saturn: those in the mouth are like Mercury, and to some extent, Saturn; those in the back foot, like Mars; and those in the tail, like Venus. [Pg 17]

Taurus. Those stars in Taurus, which are in the abscission of the sign, resemble in their temperament the influence of Venus, and in some degree that of Saturn: those in the Pleiades are like the Moon and Mars. Of the stars in the head, that one of the Hyades which is bright and ruddy, and called Facula,[33] has the same temperament as Mars: the others resemble Saturn, and, partly, Mercury; and those at the top of the horns are like Mars.

Taurus. The stars in Taurus, which are at the edges of the sign, have a temperament influenced by Venus and somewhat by Saturn: those in the Pleiades are like the Moon and Mars. Among the stars in the head, the bright and reddish one of the Hyades, called Facula,[33] has the same temperament as Mars: the others resemble Saturn and, to some extent, Mercury; and those at the tips of the horns are like Mars.

Gemini. The stars in the feet of Gemini have an influence similar to that of Mercury, and moderately to that of Venus.

Gemini. The stars in the feet of Gemini have an impact similar to that of Mercury, and a moderate effect from Venus.

The bright stars in the thighs are like Saturn: of the two bright stars on the heads, the one, which precedes and is called Apollo,[34] is like Mercury; the other which follows, called Hercules,[35] is like Mars.

The bright stars in the thighs are like Saturn: of the two bright stars on the heads, the one that comes first and is called Apollo,[34] is like Mercury; the other that follows, called Hercules,[35] is like Mars.

Cancer. The two stars in the eyes of Cancer are of the same influence as Mercury, and are also moderately like Mars. Those in the claws are like Saturn and Mercury. The nebulous mass in the breast, called the Præsepe, has the same efficacy as Mars and the Moon. The two placed on either side of the nebulous mass, and called the Asini, have an influence similar to that of Mars and the Sun.

Cancer. The two stars in the eyes of Cancer have the same effect as Mercury and are somewhat similar to Mars. The stars in the claws resemble Saturn and Mercury. The fuzzy area in the chest, known as the Præsepe, has the same power as Mars and the Moon. The two stars on either side of the fuzzy area, called the Asini, have an effect similar to that of Mars and the Sun.

Leo. Of the stars in Leo, two in the head are like Saturn and partly like Mars. The three in the neck are like Saturn, and in some degree like Mercury. The bright one in the heart, called Regulus,[36] agrees with Mars and Jupiter. Those in the loins, and the bright one in the tail, are like Saturn and Venus: those in the thighs resemble Venus, and, in some degree, Mercury.

Leo. Among the stars in Leo, two in the head resemble Saturn and somewhat Mars. The three in the neck are similar to Saturn and somewhat like Mercury. The bright star in the heart, called Regulus,[36] matches Mars and Jupiter. The stars in the loins, along with the bright one in the tail, are like Saturn and Venus: those in the thighs are similar to Venus and, to some extent, Mercury.

Virgo. The stars in the head of Virgo, and that at the top of the southern wing, operate like Mercury and somewhat like Mars: the other bright stars in the same wing, and those about the girdle, resemble Mercury in their influence, and also Venus moderately. The bright one in the northern wing, called Vindemiator, is of the same influence as Saturn and Mercury: that called Spica Virginis is like Venus and partly Mars: those at the points of the feet and at the bottom of the garments are like Mercury, and also Mars, moderately.

Virgo. The stars in the head of Virgo, along with the one at the top of the southern wing, act like Mercury and somewhat like Mars. The other bright stars in the same wing, as well as those around the waist, are similar to Mercury in their influence and also resemble Venus to some extent. The bright star in the northern wing, known as Vindemiator, has a similar influence to Saturn and Mercury; the star called Spica Virginis is akin to Venus and partly Mars. The stars at the points of the feet and at the bottom of the garments are similar to Mercury and also moderately like Mars.

Libra.[37] Those stars at the points of the claws of Scorpio operate like Jupiter and Mercury: those in the middle of the claws, like Saturn, and in some degree like Mars.

Libra.[37] Those stars at the tips of Scorpio's claws function somewhat like Jupiter and Mercury; those in the center of the claws resemble Saturn, and to some extent, Mars.

[Pg 18] Scorpio. The bright stars in the front of the body of Scorpio have an effect similar to that produced by the influence of Mars, and partly to that produced by Saturn: the three in the body itself, the middle one of which, called Antares,[38] is ruddy and more luminous, are similar to Mars and moderately to Jupiter: those in the joints of the tail are like Saturn and partly like Venus: those in the sting, like Mercury and Mars. The nebula is like Mars and the Moon.

[Pg 18] Scorpio. The bright stars at the front of Scorpio's body have effects similar to those of Mars and to a lesser extent, Saturn. The three stars in the body, with the middle one called Antares, which is reddish and brighter, resemble Mars and have some characteristics of Jupiter. The stars in the joints of the tail are akin to Saturn and somewhat to Venus, while those in the sting are like Mercury and Mars. The nebula resembles both Mars and the Moon.

Sagittarius. The stars at the point of the arrow in Sagittarius have influence similar to that of Mars and the Moon: those on the bow, and at the grasp of the hand, act like Jupiter and Mars: the nebula in the face is like the Sun and Mars: those in the waist and in the back resemble Jupiter, and also Mercury moderately: those in the feet, Jupiter and Saturn: the four-sided figure in the tail is similar to Venus, and in some degree to Saturn.

Sagittarius. The stars at the tip of the arrow in Sagittarius have effects similar to Mars and the Moon: those on the bow and at the hand's grip act like Jupiter and Mars: the nebula in the face resembles the Sun and Mars: those in the waist and back are like Jupiter, as well as moderately like Mercury: those in the feet are influenced by Jupiter and Saturn: the four-sided shape in the tail is similar to Venus, and to some extent, to Saturn.

Capricorn. The stars in the horns of Capricorn have efficacy similar to that of Venus, and partly to that of Mars. The stars in the mouth are like Saturn, and partly like Venus: those in the feet and in the belly act in the same manner as Mars and Mercury: those in the tail are like Saturn and Jupiter.

Capricorn. The stars in the horns of Capricorn have a power similar to that of Venus, and somewhat to that of Mars. The stars in the mouth are similar to Saturn, and partly to Venus: those in the feet and in the belly function like Mars and Mercury: those in the tail are similar to Saturn and Jupiter.

Aquarius. The stars in the shoulders of Aquarius operate like Saturn and Mercury; those in the left hand and in the face do the same: those in the thighs have an influence more consonant with that of Mercury, and in a less degree with that of Saturn: those in the stream of water have power similar to that of Saturn, and, moderately, to that of Jupiter.

Aquarius. The stars on the shoulders of Aquarius function like Saturn and Mercury; those in the left hand and in the face do the same. The stars in the thighs have a stronger influence aligned with Mercury, and to a lesser extent with Saturn. The stars in the stream of water have a power similar to that of Saturn, and, to some degree, to that of Jupiter.

Pisces. Those stars in Pisces, which are in the head of the southern fish, have the same influence as Mercury, and, in some degree, as Saturn: those in the body are like Jupiter and Mercury: those in the tail and in the southern line are like Saturn, and, moderately, like Mercury. In the northern fish, those on its body and back-bone resemble Jupiter, and also Venus in some degree: those in the northern line are like Saturn and Jupiter; and the bright star in the knot acts like Mars, and moderately like Mercury.[39]

Pisces. The stars in Pisces, located in the head of the southern fish, have a similar influence to Mercury and to some extent, Saturn. The stars in the body are comparable to Jupiter and Mercury. The ones in the tail and the southern line are like Saturn and, to a lesser degree, Mercury. In the northern fish, the stars on its body and backbone are similar to Jupiter and somewhat to Venus. The stars in the northern line resemble Saturn and Jupiter, while the bright star in the knot acts like Mars and moderately like Mercury.[39]


[Pg 19]

[Pg 19]

CHAPTER X
CONSTELLATIONS ABOVE THE ZODIAC

The constellations north of the zodiac have their respective influences, analogous to those of the planets, existing in the mode described in the following list.

The constellations north of the zodiac have their own influences, similar to those of the planets, which exist in the way described in the following list.

  • Ursa Minor. The bright stars in this constellation
  • are like Saturn, and in some degree like Venus.
  • Ursa Major is like Mars, but the nebula under the
  • tail resembles the Moon and Venus in its influence.
  • Draco. The bright stars operate like Saturn and Mars.
  • Cepheus is like Saturn and Jupiter.
  • Bootes is like Mercury and Saturn; but the bright and
  • ruddy star, called Arcturus, is like Mars and Jupiter.
  • Corona Borealis is like Venus and Mercury.
  • Hercules (or the Kneeler) is like Mercury.
  • Lyra is like Venus and Mercury.
  • Cygnus is like Venus and Mercury.
  • Cassiopeia is like Saturn and Venus.
  • Perseus is like Jupiter and Saturn: but the nebula,
  • in the hilt of the sword, is like Mars and Mercury.
  • Auriga. The bright stars are like Mars and Mercury.
  • Serpentarius is like Saturn, and moderately like Venus.
  • Serpens is like Saturn and Mars.
  • Sagitta is like Saturn, and moderately like Venus.
  • Aquila is like Mars and Jupiter.
  • Delphinus is like Saturn and Mars.
  • Equus (or Pegasus). The bright stars are like Mars and Mercury.
  • Andromeda is like Venus.
  • Delta (or the Triangle) is like Mercury.

[Pg 20]

[Pg 20]

CHAPTER XI
CONSTELLATIONS BELOW THE ZODIAC

The influences of the constellations south of the zodiac, existing in a similar mode, are as follows:—

The effects of the constellations south of the zodiac, operating in a similar way, are as follows:—

  • Piscis Australis. The bright star in the mouth is of the same
  • influence as Venus and Mercury.
  • Cetus is like Saturn.
  • Orion. The stars on the shoulders operate similarly to Mars and
  • Mercury; and the other bright stars to Jupiter and Saturn.
  • Fluvius (or Eridanus). The last bright one is of
  • the same influence as Jupiter; the rest are like Saturn.
  • Lepus is like Saturn and Mercury.
  • Canis. The bright star in the mouth is like Jupiter, and
  • partly like Mars: the others are like Venus.
  • Procyon.[40] The bright star is like Mercury, and in some
  • degree like Mars.
  • Hydrus. The bright stars are like Saturn and Venus.
  • Crater is like Venus, and in some degree like Mercury.
  • Corvus is like Mars and Saturn.
  • Argo. The bright stars are like Saturn and Jupiter.
  • Centaurus. The stars in the human part of the figure are
  • of the same influence as Venus and Mercury; the bright
  • stars in the horse’s part are like Venus and Jupiter.
  • Lupus. The bright stars are like Saturn, and partly like Mars.
  • Ara is like Venus, and also Mercury in some degree.
  • Corona Australis. The bright stars are like Saturn and Jupiter.

The respective influences of the several stars have been observed by the ancients to operate in conformity with the mode pointed out in the foregoing distributions.[41]

The different influences of the various stars have been noticed by ancient people to work according to the method described in the previous distributions.[41]


[Pg 21]

[Pg 21]

CHAPTER XII
THE SEASONS OF THE YEAR

The year comprises four seasons; spring, summer, autumn, and winter; of these, the spring partakes chiefly of moisture, for on the dissipation of cold and recommencement of warmth, an expansion of the fluids takes place: the summer is principally hot, owing to the Sun’s nearest approach to the zenith: the autumn is principally dry, because the recent heat has absorbed the moisture: and the winter is chiefly cold, the Sun being then at his farthest distance from the zenith.

The year has four seasons: spring, summer, autumn, and winter. Of these, spring is mostly damp since warmth returns and the cold fades, causing fluids to expand. Summer is mainly hot due to the Sun being closest to its highest point. Autumn is mostly dry because the recent heat has taken in the moisture. Winter is primarily cold, as the Sun is then farthest from its highest point.

The beginning of the whole zodiacal circle (which in its nature as a circle can have no other beginning, nor end, capable of being determined), is therefore assumed to be the sign of Aries, which commences at the vernal equinox:[42] since the moisture of spring forms a primary beginning in the zodiac, analogous to the beginning of all animal life; which, in its first age of existence, abounds principally in moisture: the spring, too, like the first age of animal life, is soft and tender; it is therefore suitably placed as the opening of the year, and is followed by the other seasons in appropriate succession. The summer comes second, and, in its vigour and heat, agrees with the second age of animals; the prime of life, and the period most abounding in heat. Again, the age when the prime of life has passed away, and in which decay prepares to advance, is chiefly abundant in dryness, and corresponds to the autumn. And the final period of old age, hastening to dissolution, is principally cold, like the winter.

The start of the entire zodiac circle (which, being a circle, has no defined beginning or end) is considered to be the sign of Aries, which begins at the spring equinox:[42] because the moisture of spring represents a primary start in the zodiac, similar to the beginning of all animal life; during its early existence, life is mainly filled with moisture. Spring, like the early stage of animal life, is soft and gentle; thus, it is appropriately positioned as the start of the year, followed by the other seasons in a fitting order. Summer comes next, and its warmth and energy align with the second stage of animals— the prime of life, which is the time most filled with heat. Then, the stage when the peak of life has passed and decay starts to set in is largely dry, corresponding to autumn. Finally, the last stage of old age, approaching decline, is mainly cold, like winter.


CHAPTER XIII
THE INFLUENCE OF THE FOUR ANGLES

The angles are the four cardinal points of the horizon, whence are derived the general names of the winds. With respect to their qualities, it is to be observed that the eastern point, or angle of the [Pg 22] ascendant, is chiefly dry in its nature; because, on the Sun’s arrival therein, the damps occasioned by the night begin to be dried up: and all winds blowing from that quarter, under the common name of east winds, are arid and free from moisture.

The angles mark the four main points of the horizon, from which the general names of the winds are derived. In terms of their characteristics, it’s important to note that the eastern point, or angle of the [Pg 22] ascendant, is primarily dry in nature. This is because, as the Sun rises there, the moisture accumulated overnight begins to evaporate. All winds coming from that direction, commonly referred to as east winds, are dry and lack humidity.

The southern point, or angle of the mid-heaven, is the most hot; because the Sun’s meridan position, which produces greater warmth and heat, declines (in this part of the earth) towards the south. The winds, therefore, which blow from that quarter, and are commonly called south winds, are hot and rarefying.

The southern point, or angle of the mid-heaven, is the hottest; because the Sun’s meridian position, which generates more warmth and heat, shifts (in this part of the world) toward the south. Therefore, the winds that come from that direction, commonly known as south winds, are hot and thin.

The western point, or occidental angle, is moist; because, when the Sun is there, the moisture, which had been overpowered during the day, recommences its operation: and the winds proceeding from thence, and commonly called west winds, are light and damp.

The western point, or west angle, is humid; because when the Sun is there, the moisture that had been suppressed during the day starts to rise again: and the winds coming from that direction, commonly known as west winds, are light and wet.

The northern point, or angle of the lower heaven, is the most cold; for the Sun’s meridian position in this part of the earth is far removed from it in declination: and all winds thence proceeding, under the common name of north winds, are cold and frosty.

The northern point, or angle of the lower sky, is the coldest; because the Sun's highest position in this part of the world is far away in terms of angle: and all winds coming from there, commonly called north winds, are cold and frosty.

It will, of course, be seen that a thorough acquaintance with the foregoing matters is essential in order to acquire the faculty of distinguishing temperaments in every shape and variation: since it is sufficiently obvious that the effective influence of the stars must be greatly diversified by the constitutions of the seasons, as well as those of the ages of life, and of the angles; and also that the stars have a much stronger influence on any constitution, when there may not be in it any tendency contrary to their own, as the whole influence is then entire and unalloyed. For example, stars effecting heat operate more vigorously in constitutions of heat; and those effecting moisture in constitutions of moisture. On the other hand, should a tendency, contrary to their own, exist in any constitution, the stars accordingly become less efficacious; in consequence of being attempered and mixed with that contrary tendency: and this happens, for instance, when stars effecting heat are attempered by constitutions of cold, or stars producing moisture by constitutions of dryness. The influence of every star is thus modified by the proportionate admixture presented by constitutions of a nature different from its own.

It will, of course, be clear that a deep understanding of the topics discussed is crucial for developing the ability to recognize different temperaments in all their forms and variations. It's quite evident that the impact of the stars must vary significantly based on the seasons, life stages, and angles. Additionally, the stars have a much stronger effect on a constitution when there is no opposing tendency, allowing their influence to be complete and pure. For instance, stars that produce heat work more effectively in hot constitutions, while those that generate moisture are more potent in wet constitutions. Conversely, if there's an opposing tendency in any constitution, the stars' influence becomes weaker because it's tempered and mixed with that opposing tendency. This occurs, for example, when heat-producing stars are influenced by cold constitutions or moisture-generating stars by dry ones. The effect of each star is thus altered by the degree of mixture with constitutions that differ from its own.

In succession to the previous instructions, the following description of the natural and peculiar properties of the signs of the zodiac is annexed: the general temperaments of the signs are analogous to those of the seasons, which are respectively established under each sign, but they have, also, certain peculiar energies, arising from their familiarity with the Sun, the Moon, and the stars, which shall be hereafter specified;—and the simple and unmixed influences existing in the signs, as considered only in themselves and with regard to each other, will be first stated.

In continuation of the previous instructions, the following description of the natural and unique properties of the zodiac signs is included: the general temperaments of the signs are similar to those of the seasons associated with each sign, but they also have specific qualities due to their relationship with the Sun, the Moon, and the stars, which will be detailed later;—and the straightforward and pure influences present in the signs, when viewed independently and in relation to one another, will be addressed first.


[Pg 23]

[Pg 23]

CHAPTER XIV
Tropical, equinox, fixed, and bicorporeal signs

Among the twelve signs, some are termed tropical, others equinoctial, others fixed, and others bicorporeal.

Among the twelve signs, some are called tropical, others equinoctial, some are fixed, and others are bicorporeal.

The tropical signs are two: viz. the first thirty degrees after the summer solstice, which compose the sign of Cancer; and the first thirty degrees after the winter solstice, composing the sign of Capricorn. These are called tropical, because the Sun, after he has arrived at their first points, seems to turn, and to change his course towards a contrary latitude;[43] causing summer by the turn he makes in Cancer, and winter by that which he makes in Capricorn.

The tropical signs are two: the first thirty degrees after the summer solstice, which make up the sign of Cancer, and the first thirty degrees after the winter solstice, which form the sign of Capricorn. They are called tropical because when the Sun reaches their starting points, it seems to turn and change direction toward a different latitude;[43] creating summer with the turn in Cancer and winter with the turn in Capricorn.

There are also two equinoctial signs: Aries, the first after the vernal equinox; and Libra, the first after the autumnal equinox: they are so called, because the Sun, when in the first point of either, makes the day and night equal.

There are also two equinox signs: Aries, the first after the spring equinox, and Libra, the first after the autumn equinox. They're called this because when the Sun is at the first point of either, day and night are equal.

Of the remaining eight signs, four are fixed, and four bicorporeal. Those signs, which severally follow immediately after the two tropical and the two equinoctial signs, are termed fixed, because, during the Sun’s presence in them, the cold, heat, moisture or dryness, of the season, which commenced on his arrival in the preceding tropical or equinoctial sign, is then more firmly established: not, however, that the temperament of the season has in itself actually increased in vigour, but, having continued for some time in operation, it then renders all things more strongly affected by its influence.

Of the remaining eight signs, four are fixed, and four are mutable. The signs that come right after the two tropical and the two equinoctial signs are called fixed because, while the Sun is in them, the cold, heat, moisture, or dryness from the season that started when it entered the previous tropical or equinoctial sign becomes more established. However, this doesn’t mean the season’s temperament has actually grown stronger; rather, since it has been active for a while, it makes everything more deeply influenced by its effects.

The bicorporeal signs severally follow the fixed signs; and, being thus intermediately placed between the fixed and the tropical signs, they participate in the constitutional properties of both, from their first to their last degrees.

The bicorporeal signs each follow the fixed signs; and, being positioned in between the fixed and the tropical signs, they share the fundamental traits of both, from their first to their last degrees.


CHAPTER XV
MALE AND FEMALE SIGNS

Again, among the twelve signs, six are called masculine and diurnal, and six feminine and nocturnal. They are arranged in alternate order, one after the other, as the day is followed by the night, and as the male is coupled with the female.

Again, out of the twelve signs, six are referred to as masculine and daytime, and six are feminine and nighttime. They are arranged in alternating order, one after the other, just as day follows night, and as male is paired with female.

The commencement, it has been already said, belongs to Aries; since the moisture of the spring forms an introduction for the other seasons. And, [Pg 24] as the male sex governs, and the active principle takes precedence of the passive, the signs of Aries and Libra are consequently considered to be masculine and diurnal. These signs describe the equinoctial circle, and from them proceed the principal variation, and most powerful agitation, of all things. The signs immediately following them are feminine and nocturnal; and the rest are consecutively arranged as masculine and feminine, by alternate order.

The start of the year, as already mentioned, is associated with Aries; because the moisture of spring signals the beginning of the other seasons. And, [Pg 24] since the male gender dominates, and the active principle takes precedence over the passive, the signs of Aries and Libra are seen as masculine and associated with the daytime. These signs mark the equinox, and from them stem the main variations and strongest movements of everything. The signs that follow are feminine and associated with nighttime; and the rest are organized alternately as masculine and feminine.

Masculine or feminine qualities are, however, by some persons, attributed to the signs by means of a different arrangement, and by making the sign ascending (which is also called the horoscope) the first of the masculine signs. They also consider the first tropical sign to be that in which the Moon is posited, because she undergoes more frequent and rapid changes and variations than any other heavenly body; and it is by a similar mode of reasoning that they establish the horoscope as the first masculine sign, on account of its being more immediately under the Sun. Again, certain of these persons likewise allow the alternate arrangement of the signs; while there are, again, others who do not admit it; but, instead thereof, divide the whole zodiac into quadrants, and denominate those between the ascendant and the mid-heaven, and between the western angle and the lower haven, oriental and masculine; and the other two quadrants, occidental and feminine.

Masculine or feminine qualities are sometimes assigned to the signs by different methods, with the ascending sign (also known as the horoscope) being considered the first of the masculine signs. They also view the first tropical sign as the one with the Moon in it because she changes and varies more frequently and rapidly than any other celestial body. A similar line of thought leads them to designate the horoscope as the first masculine sign, since it is more closely associated with the Sun. Additionally, some of these individuals accept an alternating arrangement of the signs, while others do not; instead, they divide the entire zodiac into quadrants, labeling the sections between the ascendant and the mid-heaven, and between the western angle and the lower haven, as oriental and masculine, whereas the other two quadrants are termed occidental and feminine.

There have also been other additional appellations bestowed on the signs, in consequence of their apparent formations and figures: they have been called quadrupedal, terrestrial, imperial, fruitful, and have received various other distinguishing epithets of the same sort; but these distinctions seem too unimportant to be even enumerated here, since their origin is obvious, and since, should they ever be thought serviceable towards the inference of future effects, they may be easily applied without the aid of further instruction.

There have also been other names given to the signs due to their obvious shapes and figures: they have been called quadrupedal, terrestrial, imperial, fruitful, and have received various other similar titles; but these distinctions seem too trivial to even list here, since their origins are clear, and if they are ever thought to be useful for predicting future outcomes, they can be easily applied without any additional guidance.


CHAPTER XVI
MUTUAL CONFIGURATIONS OF THE SIGNS

There are certain familiarities or connections between different parts of the zodiac; and the chief of these is that which exists between such parts as are configurated with each other.

There are certain familiarities or connections between different parts of the zodiac, and the main one is the relationship between those parts that are aligned with each other.

This mutual configuration attaches to all parts diametrically distant from each other, containing between them two right angles, or six signs, or a hundred and eighty degrees: it also exists in all parts at the triangular distance from each other, containing between them one right angle and a third, or four signs, or a hundred and twenty degrees; also, in all parts at the quadrate distance from each other, containing between them exactly one right angle, or three signs, or ninety degrees; and, also, in all parts at the hexagonal distance from each other, containing between them two-thirds of a right angle, or two [Pg 25] signs, or sixty degrees.[44] These several distances are taken for the following reasons: the distance by diameter, however, is in itself sufficiently clear, and requires no further explanation; but, as to the rest, after the diametrical points have been connected by a straight line, AB; the space of the two right angles, contained on the diameter, is then to be divided into aliquot parts of the two greatest denominations; that is to say, into halves, AFC, CFB, and into thirds, AFD, DFE, EFB: there will then be provided for the third part (AD) a super-proportion (DC), equal to its own half; and for the half (AC) a super-proportion (CE), equal to its own third part; so that the division into two aliquot parts, AC, CB, will make the quartile distance AC; and the division into three aliquot parts, AD, DE, EB, will make the sextile distance AD, and the trinal distance AE. The respective super-proportions (on either side of the intermediate quartile AC, formed by the one right angle AFC), will also again make the quartile AC (if there be added to the sextile, AD, the super-proportion DC, equal to the half of the sextile), and the trine AE (if there be added to the quartile AC the super-proportion CE, equal to the third part of the quartile).

This mutual configuration connects all points that are directly opposite each other, forming two right angles, six signs, or one hundred eighty degrees between them. It also exists at all points that are triangularly distant from each other, forming one right angle and a third, or four signs, or one hundred twenty degrees between them; as well as at all points that are quadratically distant from each other, forming exactly one right angle, or three signs, or ninety degrees; and at all points that are hexagonally distant from each other, forming two-thirds of a right angle, or two signs, or sixty degrees. These different distances are considered for the following reasons: the distance by diameter is clear enough in itself and doesn’t need further explanation. However, for the other distances, after the diametrical points are connected by a straight line, AB; the space of the two right angles along the diameter is then divided into parts of the two largest denominations; specifically, into halves, AFC, CFB, and into thirds, AFD, DFE, EFB. For the third part (AD), a super-proportion (DC) is provided that’s equal to its own half; and for the half (AC), a super-proportion (CE) is provided that’s equal to its own third. Therefore, the division into two equal parts, AC, CB, creates the quartile distance AC; and the division into three equal parts, AD, DE, EB, results in the sextile distance AD, and the trinal distance AE. The respective super-proportions (on both sides of the intermediate quartile AC, formed by the one right angle AFC) will again produce the quartile AC (if the super-proportion DC, which is equal to half of the sextile, is added to the sextile AD), and the trine AE (if the super-proportion CE, which is equal to one-third of the quartile, is added to the quartile AC). [Pg 25] [44]

[Pg 26] Of these configurations, the trine and the sextile are each called harmonious, because they are constituted between signs of the same kind; being formed between either all feminine or all masculine signs. The opposition and quartile are considered to be discordant, because they are configurations made between signs not of the same kind, but of different natures and sexes.[45]

[Pg 26] Among these configurations, the trine and the sextile are both called harmonious because they are formed between signs of the same type, being made up of either all feminine or all masculine signs. The opposition and square are seen as discordant since they are configurations created between signs of different types and genders. [45]


CHAPTER XVII
Signs of Authority and Compliance

Any two signs configurated with each other at an equal distance from the same, or from either equinoctial point, are termed commanding and obeying, because the ascensional and descensional times of the one are equal to those of the other, and both describe equal parallels.

Any two signs arranged with each other at an equal distance from the same point, or from either equinox point, are called commanding and obeying. This is because the times for one to rise and set are equal to those of the other, and both trace out equal parallels.

The signs in the summer semicircle are commanding; those in the winter semicircle, obeying: for, when the Sun is present in the former, he makes the day longer than the night; and, when in the latter, he produces the contrary effect.

The signs in the summer half of the sky are dominant; those in the winter half are submissive: because when the Sun is in the former, it makes the day longer than the night; and when in the latter, it creates the opposite effect.


CHAPTER XVIII
SIGNS LOOKING AT EACH OTHER,
AND OF EQUAL STRENGTH

Any two signs, equally distant from either tropical sign, are equal to each other in power; because the Sun, when present in one, makes day and night, and the divisions of time, respectively equal in duration to those which he produces when present in the other. Such signs are also said to behold each other, as well for the foregoing reasons, as because each of them rises from one and the same part of the horizon, and sets in one and the same part.[46]

Any two signs that are equally far from either tropical sign are equal to each other in influence. This is because when the Sun is in one sign, it creates day and night, along with time divisions that are equally long as those it creates when it's in the other sign. These signs are often said to look at each other, not only for these reasons but also because each of them rises and sets in the same part of the horizon. [46]


[Pg 27]

[Pg 27]

CHAPTER XIX
SIGNS INCONJUNCT

All signs, between which there does not exist any familiarity in any of the modes above specified, are inconjunct and separated.

All signs that don’t have any familiarity in any of the methods mentioned above are inconjunct and separate.

For instance, all signs are inconjunct which are neither commanding nor obeying, and not beholding each other nor of equal power, as well as all signs which contain between them the space of one sign only, or the space of five signs, and which do not at all share in any of the four prescribed configurations: viz. the opposition, the trine, the quartile, and the sextile. All parts which are distant from each other in the space of one sign only are considered inconjunct, because they are averted, as it were, from each other; and because, although the said space between them may extend into two signs, the whole only contains an angle equal to that of one sign: all parts distant from each other in the space of five signs are also considered inconjunct, because they divide the whole circle into unequal parts; whereas the spaces contained in the configurations above mentioned, viz. the opposition, trine, quartile, and sextile, produce aliquot divisions.[47]

For example, all signs that are inconjunct neither command nor obey, and they don't look at each other or have equal strength. This also applies to signs that are separated by only one sign or five signs, and that don't fit into any of the four defined configurations: the opposition, trine, quartile, and sextile. Any parts that are just one sign apart from each other are seen as inconjunct because they turn away from each other. Even though the space between them might extend across two signs, the whole arrangement only forms an angle that's the same as one sign. Similarly, parts that are five signs apart are also considered inconjunct because they split the entire circle into uneven sections. In contrast, the spaces defined by the configurations of opposition, trine, quartile, and sextile create equal divisions.[47]


[Pg 28]

[Pg 28]

CHAPTER XX
PLANETARY HOUSES

Those stars which are denominated planetary orbs have particular familiarity with certain places in the zodiac, by means of parts designated as their houses, and also by their triplicities, exaltations, terms, and so forth.

Those stars called planetary orbs have a specific connection with certain spots in the zodiac, through areas known as their houses, as well as their triplicities, exaltations, terms, and more.

The nature of their familiarity by houses is as follows:

The way they're familiar with houses is as follows:

Cancer and Leo are the most northerly of all the twelve signs; they approach nearer than the other signs to the zenith of this part of the earth, and thereby cause warmth and heat: they are consequently appropriated as houses for the two principal and greater luminaries; Leo for the Sun, as being masculine; and Cancer for the Moon, as being feminine. It has hence resulted, that the semicircle from Leo to Capricorn has been ordained solar, and the semicircle from Aquarius to Cancer, lunar; in order that each planet might occupy one sign in each semicircle, and thus have one of its houses configurated with the Sun and the other with the Moon, conformably to the motions of its own sphere, and the peculiar properties of its nature.

Cancer and Leo are the most northern of all twelve zodiac signs; they come closer to the highest point of this part of the earth than the other signs, creating warmth and heat. Because of this, they are designated as the homes for the two main celestial bodies: Leo for the Sun, representing masculinity, and Cancer for the Moon, representing femininity. This has led to the division where the semicircle from Leo to Capricorn is considered solar, and the semicircle from Aquarius to Cancer is lunar. This arrangement allows each planet to occupy one sign in each semicircle, so it can have one of its homes associated with the Sun and the other associated with the Moon, in line with its own movements and unique characteristics.

Saturn, therefore, since he is cold and inimical to heat, moving also in a superior orbit most remote from the luminaries, occupies the signs opposite to Cancer and Leo: these are Aquarius and Capricorn; and they are assigned to him in consideration of their cold and wintry nature; and because the configuration by opposition does not co-operate towards the production of good.[48]

Saturn, being cold and hostile to heat, and also moving in a higher orbit far from the stars, occupies the signs opposite Cancer and Leo: those are Aquarius and Capricorn. They are assigned to him because of their cold and wintry characteristics, and because the opposition doesn't support the creation of good. [48]

Jupiter has a favourable temperament, and is situated beneath the sphere of Saturn; he therefore occupies the next two signs, Sagittarius [Pg 29] and Pisces. These signs are airy and fruitful, in consequence of their trinal distance from the houses of the luminaries, which distance harmonises with the operation of good.

Jupiter has a positive nature and is located below Saturn; as a result, he rules the next two signs, Sagittarius [Pg 29] and Pisces. These signs are associated with air and abundance, due to their trinal distance from the houses of the luminaries, which aligns with positive influences.

Mars is dry in nature, and beneath the sphere of Jupiter: he takes the next two signs, of a nature similar to his own, viz. Aries and Scorpio, whose relative distances from the houses of the luminaries are injurious and discordant.

Mars is inherently dry, and beneath Jupiter: he influences the next two signs, which share similar traits, namely Aries and Scorpio, whose positions relative to the houses of the luminaries are harmful and conflicting.

Venus, possessing a favourable temperament, and placed beneath the sphere of Mars, takes the next two signs, Taurus and Libra. These are of a fruitful nature, and preserve harmony by the sextile distance; and this planet is never more than two signs distant from the Sun.

Venus, with a positive nature, is positioned under the influence of Mars and rules the next two signs, Taurus and Libra. These signs are prosperous and maintain harmony through the sextile aspect; plus, this planet is always no more than two signs away from the Sun.

Mercury never has greater distance from the Sun than the space of one sign, and is beneath all the other planets: hence he is placed nearest to both luminaries, and the remaining two signs, Gemini and Virgo, are allotted to him.[49]

Mercury never gets farther from the Sun than the distance of one sign, and is below all the other planets. That's why it’s positioned closest to both luminaries, and the other two signs, Gemini and Virgo, are assigned to it.[49]


CHAPTER XXI
THE TRIPLICITIES

The familiarity existing by triplicity arises in the following mode:

The familiarity that comes from triplicity arises in this way:

The triplicity preserves accordance with an equilateral triangle, and the whole zodiacal orbit is defined by three circles, viz. that of the equinox, and those of the two tropics; the twelve signs are, therefore, distributed among four equilateral triangles.

The triplicity aligns with an equilateral triangle, and the entire zodiac orbit is outlined by three circles: one for the equinox and the other two for the tropics. Thus, the twelve signs are divided among four equilateral triangles.

The first triangle, or triplicity, is formed by three masculine signs, Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius, having the Sun, Jupiter, and Mars as lords by house. Mars, however, being contrary in condition to the solar influence, this triplicity receives, as its lords, only Jupiter and the Sun. By day, therefore, the Sun claims the principal co-regency of it, and Jupiter by night. Aries is on the equinoctial circle, Leo on the summer, and Sagittarius on the winter circle. This triplicity is principally northern, owing to the concurrent dominion of Jupiter, who is fruitful and airy, and expressly connected with winds proceeding from the north; it is, however, also north-west, in consequence of [Pg 30] being, in some degree, combined with the west by means of the house of Mars, who introduces western breezes and the feminine qualities of that quarter, in consequence of his lunar condition.[50]

The first group of three signs, or triplicity, consists of three masculine signs: Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius, ruled by the Sun, Jupiter, and Mars by house. However, since Mars is contrary to the solar influence, this triplicity has only Jupiter and the Sun as its lords. So during the day, the Sun takes the lead, while Jupiter rules at night. Aries is located on the equinoctial circle, Leo on the summer circle, and Sagittarius on the winter circle. This triplicity is mainly northern due to Jupiter's influence, which is fertile and airy, directly associated with northern winds. However, it also holds a north-west aspect because it is somewhat linked to the west through Mars, who brings western breezes and the feminine traits of that direction, due to his lunar nature. [Pg 30] A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0

The second triplicity, formed by Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn, is allotted to the dominion of the Moon and Venus, since it consists of feminine signs. The Moon rules it by night, and Venus by day. Taurus is on the summer circle, Virgo on the equinoctial, and Capricorn on the winter. This triplicity is southern, in consequence of the dominion of Venus, whose warm and moist influence produces south winds: it, however, additionally receives a mixture of the east, by means of Saturn; for, as Capricorn is the house of that planet, and an eastern sign, Saturn becomes effective of winds from that quarter, and furnishes this triplicity with a mixture of the east, with which quarter he is further connected by means of his solar condition.[51]

The second triplicity, made up of Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn, is associated with the influence of the Moon and Venus, as it includes feminine signs. The Moon governs it at night, while Venus rules during the day. Taurus is aligned with the summer solstice, Virgo with the equinox, and Capricorn with the winter solstice. This triplicity is southern due to Venus's influence, which brings warm and moist conditions that create southern winds. However, it also gets a mix from the east, thanks to Saturn; Capricorn is the sign for Saturn and is also eastern, allowing Saturn to influence winds from that direction and providing this triplicity with an eastern blend, further enhanced by its solar characteristics.[51]

The third triplicity is composed of Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius, masculine signs. It holds connection with Saturn and Mercury by containing their houses, and is therefore attributed to them, and not to Mars, to which planet it bears no relation. Saturn rules it by day, owing to his condition,[52] and Mercury by night. Gemini is on the summer circle, Libra on the equinoctial, and Aquarius on the winter. This triplicity is principally eastern, by the influence of Saturn; but it becomes north-east by receiving also a mixture of the north from the condition of Jupiter, with which planet Saturn has, in this respect, a diurnal familiarity.[53]

The third group consists of Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius, which are masculine signs. It is linked to Saturn and Mercury because it includes their houses, so it is attributed to them, not to Mars, which it has no connection with. Saturn governs it during the day due to his condition,[52] and Mercury governs it at night. Gemini is positioned on the summer solstice, Libra on the equinox, and Aquarius on the winter solstice. This group is mainly oriented to the east due to Saturn's influence, but it also turns to the northeast, incorporating some northern aspects from Jupiter, with which Saturn has a daytime familiarity.[53]

The fourth triplicity, formed by Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces, is left to the remaining planet, Mars, who has right in it by means of his house, Scorpio. But, as the signs which compose this triplicity are feminine, the Moon by night and Venus by day, through their feminine condition, govern it, together with Mars. Cancer is on the summer circle, Scorpio on the winter, and Pisces on the equinoctial. This triplicity is western, in consequence of the government of the Moon and Mars; but it is also blended with the south by the joint dominion of Venus, and therefore becomes south-west.

The fourth group, made up of Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces, is assigned to the remaining planet, Mars, who has authority here through his sign, Scorpio. However, since the signs in this group are feminine, the Moon at night and Venus during the day, because of their feminine nature, also govern it along with Mars. Cancer is located on the summer circle, Scorpio on the winter circle, and Pisces on the equinoctial. This group is considered western due to the influence of the Moon and Mars; however, it also has some southern elements because of Venus's joint rule, making it south-west.


[Pg 31]

[Pg 31]

CHAPTER XXII
Celebrations

That which is termed the exaltation of the planets is considered by the following rules:

That which is called the exaltation of the planets is understood by the following rules:

The Sun on his entrance into Aries is then passing into the higher and more northern semicircle; but, on his entrance into Libra, into the more southern and lower one: his exaltation, therefore, is determined to be in Aries, as, when present in that sign, he begins to lengthen the days, and the influence of his heating nature increases at the same time. His fall is placed in Libra, for the converse reasons.

The Sun entering Aries is moving into the upper and northern half of the sky; however, when it enters Libra, it's moving into the lower and southern half. Thus, its exaltation is in Aries because, when the Sun is in that sign, it starts to lengthen the days, and its warming influence also increases. Its fall is in Libra for the opposite reasons.

Saturn on the contrary, in order to preserve his station opposite to the Sun, in this respect, as well as in regard to their respective houses, obtains his exaltation in Libra, and his fall in Aries: since, in all cases, the increase of heat must be attended by a diminution of cold, and the increase of cold by a diminution of heat.

Saturn, on the other hand, to maintain his position opposite the Sun, both in this aspect and in relation to their respective houses, reaches his exaltation in Libra and his fall in Aries. This is because, in all situations, an increase in heat must be accompanied by a decrease in cold, and an increase in cold must be accompanied by a decrease in heat.

The Moon, again, after conjunction with the Sun in Aries, the seat of his exaltation, makes her first appearance, and begins to augment her light in Taurus, the first sign of her own triplicity, which is consequently ascribed to be her exaltation; while Scorpio, the opposite sign, is her fall.

The Moon, after aligning with the Sun in Aries, where it is exalted, makes its first appearance and starts to increase its light in Taurus, the first sign of its own element, which is therefore considered its exaltation; whereas Scorpio, the opposite sign, represents its fall.

Jupiter, since he is efficacious in exciting fruitful breezes from the north, and since he becomes most northerly, and augments his peculiar influence when in Cancer, accordingly obtains his exaltation in that sign, and his fall in Capricorn.

Jupiter, because he effectively stirs up productive winds from the north, and because he is at his highest point in the north and increases his unique power when in Cancer, is therefore exalted in that sign and falls in Capricorn.

Mars possesses a fiery nature, which receives its greatest intensity in Capricorn, in which sign this planet becomes most southerly; his exaltation is therefore placed in Capricorn, in opposition to that of Jupiter, and his fall in Cancer.

Mars has a fiery nature, which becomes most intense in Capricorn, the sign where this planet is positioned furthest south; its exaltation is therefore in Capricorn, opposite that of Jupiter, and its fall is in Cancer.

Venus is of a moist nature, and becomes chiefly moist when in Pisces. Under that sign a dampness begins to be perceptible in the atmosphere, and Venus, from being in that sign, derives an augmentation of her own proper influence: her exaltation is consequently placed therein, and her fall in Virgo.

Venus has a moist nature and becomes especially damp when in Pisces. In this sign, a noticeable humidity starts to appear in the atmosphere, and Venus, being in this sign, gains an increase in her own influence. Therefore, her exaltation is associated with Pisces, while her fall is in Virgo.

Mercury is of a nature opposite to that of Venus, and is more dry: in opposition to her, therefore, he takes his exaltation in Virgo, in which sign the autumnal dryness makes its first appearance; and he receives his fall in Pisces.

Mercury is completely different from Venus and is drier. In contrast to her, he is exalted in Virgo, where the dryness of autumn first shows up; and he falls in Pisces.


[Pg 32]

[Pg 32]

CHAPTER XXIII
THE DISPOSITION OF THE TERMS __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

There are two methods of disposing the terms of the planets, in reference to the dominion of the triplicities; one is Ægyptian, the other Chaldaic.

There are two methods for dealing with the terms of the planets concerning the dominion of the triplicities: one is Egyptian, and the other is Chaldean.

But the Ægyptian method preserves no regular distribution, neither in point of successive order nor in point of quantity.

But the Egyptian method lacks a consistent distribution, both in terms of order and quantity.

In point of order it is defective, since it, in some instances, allots the first degrees of a sign to the lord of the house, in others to the lord of the triplicity, and in others again to the lord of the exaltation. By selecting examples this failure in order will easily be seen; for instance, if the order were regulated by the government of houses, for what reason should Saturn take the first degrees in Libra, since that sign is the house of Venus? or why should Jupiter take them in Aries, which is the house of Mars? If the government of triplicities were followed, for what reason should Mercury take the first degrees in Capricorn, which is in the triplicity ruled by Venus? If the government by exaltations, why should Mars take the first degrees in Cancer? that sign being the exaltation of Jupiter. And if the order were regulated even by considering the planet which possesses most of these dignities in the sign, for what reason should Mercury take the first degrees in Aquarius, in which sign he rules only by triplicity, and why not Saturn, who has government in it by house, as well as by triplicity? or why in short should Mercury, who does not possess any kind of dominion in Capricorn, receive the first degrees in that sign also? The same want of order is abundantly evident in the rest of the distribution.

In terms of structure, it’s flawed because sometimes it gives the first degrees of a sign to the ruler of the house, other times to the ruler of the triplicity, and sometimes to the ruler of the exaltation. By providing examples, this disorganization can easily be illustrated; for instance, if the order was determined by house rulership, why would Saturn take the first degrees in Libra, since that sign is ruled by Venus? Or why would Jupiter take them in Aries, which is ruled by Mars? If we followed the triplicity rulers, why would Mercury take the first degrees in Capricorn, which belongs to Venus's triplicity? And if we considered exaltations, why would Mars take the first degrees in Cancer, which is the exaltation of Jupiter? Furthermore, if the order was based on which planet has the most dignities in a sign, why would Mercury take the first degrees in Aquarius, where he only rules by triplicity, and not Saturn, who has rulership there by house and triplicity? Or why, in short, should Mercury, who has no dominion in Capricorn, receive the first degrees in that sign as well? This same lack of order is clearly evident in the rest of the distribution.

An equal irregularity exists in the respective quantities of degrees allotted by the Ægyptians to the several terms of the planets. For it is by no means a proper nor sufficient demonstration of accuracy that the aggregate sum of all the numbers of every single planet amounts to the precise total requiring to be divided into portions of time;[55] since, even if it be admitted that this total, collected from every single star, is correctly asserted by the Ægyptians, it may still be objected that the same total, so collected by them, may be found in [Pg 33] many other ways by interchanging the numbers in a sign. There are persons also who contend that in every latitude the same space of time is occupied in ascension by every star; this, however, is manifestly wrong: for, in the first place, these persons are guided by the vulgar opinion of the plane heights of ascension, which is totally foreign to truth, and according to which, in the parallel of Lower Ægypt, the signs of Virgo and Libra would ascend each in thirty-eight degrees and a third,[56] and Leo and Scorpio each in thirty-five degrees; when it is, on the contrary, shown by the Tables,[57] that the latter two signs occupy in their several ascensions more than thirty-five degrees each, but Virgo and Libra less. It should further be observed, that those who support this opinion seem (by so doing) not only to dispute the quantity of the terms most generally received, but to be driven also to the necessity of falsifying many points; since (as it is indispensable to keep to the same total amount of all the terms together) they make use of parts of degrees; but even that contrivance does not enable them to reach the true point.

There is a similar inconsistency in the different amounts of degrees assigned by the Egyptians to the various planetary terms. It's not a proper or sufficient demonstration of accuracy just because the total sum of all the numbers for each planet equals the exact amount needed to be divided into time segments; [55] even if we accept that this total, gathered from every single star, is correctly claimed by the Egyptians, it can still be argued that the same total, compiled by them, could be calculated in many other ways by swapping the numbers in a sign. Some people also argue that every star occupies the same amount of time in ascending, regardless of latitude; however, this is clearly incorrect. First, these individuals rely on the common misconception about the uniform heights of ascension, which has no basis in reality. According to this view, in the latitude of Lower Egypt, the signs of Virgo and Libra would each ascend by thirty-eight degrees and a third, [56] while Leo and Scorpio would each ascend by thirty-five degrees. In reality, as shown by the Tables, [57] the latter two signs take more than thirty-five degrees each for their ascension, while Virgo and Libra take less. Furthermore, it's worth noting that those who uphold this belief seem not only to challenge the commonly accepted amounts but also end up having to distort many points; since it's essential to maintain the same total for all the terms, they resort to using fractional degrees, but even that tactic does not lead them to the correct conclusion.

The old terms, admitted by many persons on the authority of former tradition, are as follows:

The old terms, accepted by many based on past tradition, are as follows:

THE TERMS ACCORDING TO THE ÆGYPTIANS

THE TERMS ACCORDING TO THE EGYPTIANS

Aries Taurus Gemini Cancer Leo Virgo
Jupiter  6   6 Ven.  8   8 Mer. 6  6 Mars  7   7 Jup.  6   6 Mer. 7  7
Venus 6  12  Mer. 6  14  Jup. 6  12  Ven. 6  13  Ven. 5  11  Ven. 10   17 
Mercury  8  20 Jup. 8 22 Ven. 5 17 Mer. 6 19 Sat. 7 18 Jup. 4 21
Mars 5 25 Sat. 5 27 Mars 7 24 Jup. 7 26 Mer. 6 24 Mars 7 28
Saturn 5 30 Mars 3 30 Sat. 6 30 Sat. 4 30 Mars 6 30 Sat. 2 30
Libra Scorpio  Sagittarius   Capricorn   Aquarius  Pisces
Saturn 6  6 Mars 7 7 Jup. 12  12 Mer. 7  7 Mer. 7  7 Ven. 12  12
Mercury 8 14 Ven. 4 11 Ven. 5 17 Jup. 7 14 Ven. 6 13 Jup. 4 16
Jupiter 7 21 Mer. 8 19 Mer. 4 21 Ven. 8 22 Jup. 7 20 Mer. 3 19
Venus 7 28 Jup. 5 24 Sat. 5 26 Sat. 4 26 Mars 5 25 Mars 9 28
Mars 2 30 Sat. 6 30 Mars 4 30 Mars 4 30 Sat. 5 30 Sat. 2 30

[Pg 34] Thus, by the Ægyptian distribution, it appears that the total numbers of the degrees for each planet, added together, make 360:—viz. for Saturn 57, Jupiter 79, Mars 66, Venus 82, and Mercury 76.

[Pg 34] So, according to the Egyptian breakdown, the total degrees for each planet add up to 360:—specifically, for Saturn 57, Jupiter 79, Mars 66, Venus 82, and Mercury 76.

The method of the Chaldæans contains a certain simplicity of arrangement as to quantity, and preserves an order of succession rather more comformable to the dominion of the triplicities. It is, nevertheless, highly imperfect, as may be easily discovered even without being pointed out: for in the first triplicity (which the Chaldæans also attribute to the same signs; viz. Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius), Jupiter, the lord of the triplicity, takes the first degrees; Venus, who rules the next triplicity, follows him; after her, in succession, are Saturn and Mercury, the lords of the triplicity of Gemini; and lastly Mars, lord of the remaining triplicity. In the second triplicity (also allotted to the same signs, viz. Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn), Venus stands first; next to her, Saturn and Mercury; after them Mars, and Jupiter last. In the other two triplicities a similar order of succession is closely followed; and with respect to the third triplicity, which is ascribed to two lords, viz. to Saturn and Mercury, Saturn is placed first in order by day and Mercury by night.

The method of the Chaldeans has a straightforward way of organizing quantities and follows a sequence that aligns more closely with the control of the triplicities. However, it's still quite flawed, which is easy to see even without specific examples: in the first triplicity (which the Chaldeans also associate with the same signs—Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius), Jupiter, the ruler of the triplicity, is given the first degrees; Venus, who governs the next triplicity, follows him; after that are Saturn and Mercury, the rulers of the triplicity of Gemini; and finally, Mars, the lord of the remaining triplicity. In the second triplicity (also assigned to the same signs—Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn), Venus is first; then come Saturn and Mercury; after them is Mars, with Jupiter last. A similar order of succession is closely adhered to in the other two triplicities, and regarding the third triplicity, which has two rulers—Saturn and Mercury—Saturn is listed first during the day, while Mercury comes first at night.

The quantity of degrees allotted to each planet is also simply regulated in the Chaldaic method; it diminishes in graduation from the quantity given to the planet first in order, so that each successive planet takes one degree less than that which preceded it. Thus the first planet takes eight degrees, the second seven, the third six, the fourth five, and the fifth four. By this arrangement the degrees of Saturn amount by day to 78, and by night to 66; the degrees of Jupiter to 72, of Mars to 69, of Venus to 75, and of Mercury by day to 66, and by night to 78—the whole amounting to 360.

The number of degrees assigned to each planet is also organized in a straightforward way in the Chaldaic method; it decreases gradually from the amount given to the first planet, so each following planet takes one degree less than the one before it. Thus, the first planet takes eight degrees, the second seven, the third six, the fourth five, and the fifth four. With this setup, Saturn's degrees total 78 by day and 66 by night; Jupiter's total 72, Mars has 69, Venus gets 75, and Mercury has 66 by day and 78 by night—the total comes to 360.

Of these two distributions of the terms, that of the Ægyptians seems more to be relied on than the other; since it has been handed down and recommended in the writings of the Ægyptian authors, and also because the degrees of the terms, in nativities rectified by them as examples, are universally in accordance with this distribution; while, on the other hand, neither the order nor the number of the Chaldaic method has ever been recorded or explained by any writer—not even by the writers of that very nation: the accuracy of that method is consequently doubtful, and its irregularity as to the order of placing the planets is widely open to censure.

Of these two ways of organizing the terms, the Egyptian system seems to be more trustworthy than the other one. It has been passed down and endorsed in the writings of Egyptian authors, and the classifications in the birth charts corrected by them as examples consistently align with this system. In contrast, the order and number of the Chaldean method has never been documented or clarified by any writer—not even by those from that very nation. Therefore, the reliability of that method is questionable, and its inconsistency in the arrangement of the planets is often criticized.

There is, however, an ancient writing which has fallen into the author’s possession, and which gives a rational and consistent account of the nature of the terms; of the order in which they are to be taken, and of the quantity belonging to each. It will be found in the subsequent chapter.

There is, however, an ancient text that the author has come across, which provides a logical and coherent explanation of the nature of the terms, the sequence in which they should be considered, and the amount that applies to each. It will be found in the next chapter.


[Pg 35]

[Pg 35]

CHAPTER XXIV
Ptolemy's Terms

In arranging the order in which the planets take their terms in each sign, their exaltations, triplicities, and houses, are taken into consideration; and whatever planet, whether benefic or malefic, may possess two rights of dominion in one and the same sign, such planet is universally placed first in order in that sign. In other cases, however, where it does not happen that a malefic possesses two rights of dominion in the sign, it is always placed last.

In organizing the sequence in which the planets occupy each sign, their exaltations, triplicities, and houses are considered. Any planet, whether good or bad, that has two rights of control in the same sign is always ranked first in that sign. However, if a malefic planet does not have two rights of control in the sign, it is typically ranked last.

The lord of the exaltation is placed first; then the lord of the triplicity; and then the lord of the house; in regular succession, according to the series of the signs; but it must again be remembered that any planet, having two rights of dominion in the same sign, takes precedence, as before mentioned, of those having only one. In Cancer and Leo, however, the malefics occupy the first degrees; as those signs are the houses of the Moon and the Sun, which take no terms; and the malefics being found to have greater potency in those signs therefore take precedence in them. Mars, consequently, receives the first degrees in Cancer, and Saturn in Leo, by which arrangement a proper order is preserved.[58]

The lord of exaltation is placed first, followed by the lord of triplicity, and then the lord of the house, in their usual order according to the sequence of the signs. However, it's important to remember that if a planet has two rights of dominion in the same sign, it takes precedence over those with only one. In Cancer and Leo, the malefic planets occupy the first degrees since those signs are ruled by the Moon and the Sun, which don’t assign terms. Because the malefics have more power in those signs, they take priority there. Thus, Mars occupies the first degrees in Cancer, and Saturn does so in Leo, ensuring a proper order is maintained.[58]

The respective quantities of degrees for the several terms is thus determined: viz. when there is no planet found to be lord by two rights in the same sign, or in the two signs next following, each of the benefics, Jupiter and Venus, takes seven degrees; the malefics, Saturn and Mars, take five degrees each; and Mercury, being of common influence, takes six degrees; thus completing the whole thirty. Since, however, there are some cases in which a planet has always a double right—(for Venus obtains the sole government of Taurus and Pisces, as the Moon does not share in the terms)—it is to be observed that when such double right (whether it exist in the same sign or in the signs next following as far as may complete a quadrant) may be possessed by any planet, that planet receives in addition one degree. The planets thus entitled were distinguished by points in the ancient writing above mentioned. And the degree, added to the quantity of the planet which exercises a double right, is subtracted from those of single right; most generally from Saturn and Jupiter, in consequence of their slower motion. [Pg 36]

The amounts of degrees for each term are determined as follows: when there’s no planet that has control by two rights in the same sign or in the two following signs, both benefics, Jupiter and Venus, each get seven degrees; the malefics, Saturn and Mars, get five degrees each; and Mercury, which has a common influence, gets six degrees; this adds up to a total of thirty. However, there are situations where a planet always has a double right—(for instance, Venus solely governs Taurus and Pisces, since the Moon does not share in these terms)—it should be noted that when a planet has such a double right (whether in the same sign or in the next signs to complete a quadrant), that planet gets an extra degree. The planets that were given this distinction were marked with points in the ancient text mentioned earlier. Additionally, the degree given to a planet with a double right is subtracted from those with a single right; usually, this is taken from Saturn and Jupiter because of their slower movement. [Pg 36]

These terms are detailed in the following table:—

These terms are explained in the table below:—

Aries Taurus Gemini Cancer Leo Virgo
Jupiter  6   6 Ven.  8   8 Mer.  7   7 Mars  6   6 Jup.
Sat.
 6   6 Mer.  7   7
Venus 8  14  Mer. 7  15  Jup. 6  13  Mer.
Jup.
7  13  Mer. 7  13  Ven. 6  13 
Mercury  7 21 Jup. 7 22 Ven. 7 20 Jup.
Mer.
7 20 Sat.
Ven.
6 19 Jup. 5 18
Mars 5 26 Sat. 2
4
 4
26
Mars 6 26 Ven. 7 27 Jup. 6 25 Sat. 6 24
Saturn 4 30 Mars 6
4
30 Sat. 4 30 Sat. 3 30 Mars 5 30 Mars 6 30
Libra Scorpio  Sagittarius   Capricorn   Aquarius  Pisces
Saturn 6  6 Mars 6  6 Jup. 8  8 Ven. 6  6 Sat. 6  6 Ven. 8  8
Venus 5 11 Ven.
Jup.
8
7
14
13
Ven. 6 14 Mer. 6 12 Mer. 6 12 Jup. 6 14
Mercury
Jupiter
8
5
19
16
Jup.
Ven.
7
8
21 Mer. 5 19 Jup. 7 19 Ven. 8 20 Mer. 6 20
Jupiter
Mercury
5
8
24 Mer. 6 27 Sat. 6 25 Sat.
Mars
6
5
25
25
Jup. 5 25 Mars 6 26
Mars 6 30 Sat. 3 30 Mars 5 30 Mars
Sat.
5 30 Mars 5 30 Sat. 4
3
30

CHAPTER XXV
THE LOCATIONS AND ASPECTS OF EACH PLANET

The signs have been subdivided by some persons into parts still more minute, which have been named places and degrees of dominion. Thus the twelfth part of a sign, or two degrees and a half, has been called a place, and the dominion of it given to the signs next succeeding. Other persons again, pursuing various modes of arrangement, attribute to each planet certain degrees, as being aboriginally connected with it, in a manner somewhat similar to the Chaldaic arrangement of the terms. But all these imaginary attributes cannot be herein detailed, for they [Pg 37] receive no confirmation from nature, are not capable of being rationally demonstrated, and are, in fact, merely the offspring of scientific vanity.

Some people have further divided the signs into even smaller parts, which they call places and degrees of dominion. For example, the twelfth part of a sign, or two and a half degrees, is referred to as a place, and its dominion is assigned to the following signs. Others, taking different approaches, assign specific degrees to each planet based on a supposed original connection, somewhat similar to the Chaldaic system of terms. However, all these imagined attributes cannot be extensively detailed here, as they lack validation from nature, cannot be logically demonstrated, and are essentially just products of scientific pride. [Pg 37]

The following observation, however, deserves attention, and must not be omitted.

The following observation, however, deserves attention and should not be overlooked.

The beginnings of the signs, and likewise those of the terms, are to be taken from the equinoctial and tropical points. This rule is not only clearly stated by writers on the subject, but is also especially evident by the demonstration constantly afforded, that their natures, influences and familiarities have no other origin than from the tropics and equinoxes, as has been already plainly shown.[59] And, if other beginnings were allowed, it would either be necessary to exclude the natures of the signs from the theory of prognostication, or impossible to avoid error in then retaining and making use of them; as the regularity of their spaces and distances, upon which their influence depends, would then be invaded and broken in upon.

The origins of the signs and the terms should be drawn from the equinox and tropical points. This rule is not only clearly stated by writers on the topic, but it's also obvious from the consistent demonstration that their natures, influences, and familiarities come solely from the tropics and equinoxes, as has already been clearly shown.[59] If we were to allow different origins, we would either have to exclude the natures of the signs from the theory of prediction or we would inevitably make mistakes in using them; because the order of their spaces and distances, which is what their influence relies on, would then be disrupted.


CHAPTER XXVI
FACES, CHARIOTS, AND OTHER SIMILAR
ATTRIBUTES OF THE PLANETS

The familiarities existing between the planets and the signs are such as have been already particularised.

The connections between the planets and the signs have already been detailed.

There are also, however, further peculiarities ascribed to the planets. Each is said to be in its proper face, when the aspect it holds to the Sun, or Moon, is similar to that which its own house bears to their houses: for example, Venus is in her proper face when making a sextile aspect to either luminary, provided she be occidental to the Sun, but oriental to the Moon, agreeably to the primary arrangement of her houses.[60]

There are also some unique traits associated with the planets. Each planet is considered to be in its proper position when the way it interacts with the Sun or Moon is similar to how its own sign relates to theirs. For example, Venus is in her proper position when she forms a sextile aspect with either luminary, as long as she is located west of the Sun but east of the Moon, in accordance with the main arrangement of her signs.[60]

Each planet is also said to be in its proper chariot, or throne, or otherwise triumphantly situated, when it holds familiarity with the place which it actually occupies by two, or more, of the prescribed modes of connection: for when it is so circumstanced, its influence and energy are specially augmented by the familiarity it thus holds with the sign which encompasses it, and which is similar in influence and co-operates with it.

Each planet is also said to be in its rightful position, or at its best, when it connects well with the space it occupies in two or more of the established ways: when this happens, its influence and energy are greatly enhanced by the connection it has with the sign surrounding it, which shares similar influence and works in harmony with it.

Lastly, each planet (although it may possess no familiarity with the sign encompassing it) is said to rejoice, when any connection subsists between itself and other stars of the same condition; as, notwithstanding the distance between them, a certain sympathy and [Pg 38] communication of influence is derived from their mutual resemblance. In the same manner, again, when a planet occupies a place adverse and dissimilar in condition to itself, much of its influence is dissipated and lost; in consequence of the interposition and admixture of the other different influence, arising out of the dissimilar temperament of the sign by which it is encompassed.

Lastly, each planet, even if it doesn't have any familiarity with the sign surrounding it, is said to thrive when there's a connection with other stars that share its condition. Despite the distance, there's a kind of sympathy and exchange of influence due to their similarities. Similarly, when a planet is in a position that's contrary and different from its own, much of its influence is weakened and wasted because of the interference and mixture of the other influence coming from the different nature of the sign it's in. [Pg 38]


CHAPTER XXVII
APPLICATION, SEPARATION, AND OTHER SKILLS

In all cases when the distances between planets or luminaries are but trifling,[61] the planet which precedes is said to apply to that which follows; and that which follows to be separating from that which precedes.[62] The same rule obtains both in respect to bodily conjunction and to any other of the aspects before described; except that, in the application and separation of the bodily conjunction, it is also essential to observe the actual latitudes of the bodies, in order to receive and consider only such a transit as may be made in the same parts of the zodiac.[63] But in the application and separation of aspects merely, the same attention is not requisite, since all the rays are uniformly converged into one focus, that is to say, into the angle of the earth,[64] and meet there alike from every quarter. [Pg 39]

In all situations where the distances between planets or celestial bodies are minimal,[61] the planet that's ahead is said to be applying to the one that's behind, and the one that's behind is seen as separating from the one that's ahead.[62] This rule applies to both physical conjunction and any other aspects mentioned earlier; except that, when it comes to the application and separation of physical conjunction, it's also important to consider the actual latitudes of the bodies, in order to focus only on transits that occur within the same sections of the zodiac.[63] However, for the application and separation of just aspects, this level of attention isn’t necessary, since all the rays converge uniformly into one point, which is to say, the angle of the earth,[64] and come together from all directions equally. [Pg 39]

It appears, therefore, by the whole of what has been already delivered, that the effective influence of the stars must be considered as arising not only from their own peculiar natures and properties, but also from the quality of the surrounding signs, and from configuration with the Sun and the angles; all which has been pointed out. The influence of each planet, however, is strengthened chiefly when it may be oriental, swift and direct in its proper course and motion—for it has then its greatest power: but, on the other hand, it loses strength when occidental and slow in motion or retrograde; as it then acts with smaller effect.[65] Its influence also receives accession or diminution, from its position with regard to the horizon; as, if it be situated in the mid-heaven, or succedent to the mid-heaven, it is especially strong; likewise, if it be on the actual horizon, or succedent to the horizon, it is also powerful—particularly if in the eastern quarter. Should it, however, be below the earth, and configurated with the ascendant, either from the lower heaven, or from any other part below the earth, its influence then becomes more languid; but if, when below the earth, it hold no such configuration, it is entirely deprived of efficacy.[66]

It seems, therefore, from everything that has already been said, that the effective influence of the stars should be seen as coming not just from their unique natures and properties but also from the quality of the surrounding signs and their alignment with the Sun and angles, all of which has been pointed out. The influence of each planet is mostly strengthened when it is eastern, swift, and on its direct path—because at that time it has its greatest power. However, it loses strength when it is western and slow-moving or retrograde, as it then has a smaller effect. Its influence also increases or decreases based on its position related to the horizon; for example, if it’s located in the mid-heaven or just below it, it is particularly strong. Likewise, if it’s on the actual horizon or just below it, it is also powerful—especially if it’s in the eastern part. If it is below the earth and aligns with the ascendant, whether from the lower heaven or from any point below the earth, its influence then becomes weaker; but if it is below the earth and has no such alignment, it loses all effectiveness.


[Pg 40]

[Pg 40]

BOOK THE SECOND


CHAPTER I
GENERAL DIVISION OF THE TOPIC

The great and leading points, requiring to be attended to as a necessary means of introduction to the consideration of particular predictions, having been succinctly defined, the further parts of the subject, comprehending everything which may tend to facilitate prediction, and render it complete, shall now be duly proceeded in; and, at the same time, care shall be taken to confine the whole doctrine within the limits of natural reason.

The main points that need to be addressed as an essential introduction to understanding specific predictions have been clearly outlined. Now we will move on to the additional aspects of the topic, including everything that can help make predictions clearer and more comprehensive. At the same time, we will ensure that the entire discussion stays within the bounds of natural reasoning.

The foreknowledge to be acquired by means of Astrology is to be regarded in two great and principal divisions. The first, which may be properly called General, or Universal, concerns entire nations, countries, or cities; and the second, denominated Particular, or Genethliacal, relates to men individually.

The knowledge gained through Astrology can be classified into two main categories. The first, which we can call General or Universal, pertains to entire nations, countries, or cities; and the second, known as Particular or Genethliacal, focuses on individuals.

In considering these respective divisions, it seems proper to give priority to that which has the more general application and influence: because, in the first place, general events are produced by causes greater and more compulsatory than the causes of particular events; secondly, because natures of more extended potency must invariably control those which are more limited in action; and, thirdly, because particular events, or individual affections, are comprehended in those of general influence.[67] It is therefore especially necessary, in desiring to investigate particular events, to treat first of those which are general.

In looking at these different areas, it makes sense to prioritize the one that has a broader application and impact. First, general events are caused by forces that are greater and more compelling than those that lead to specific events. Second, more powerful forces will always have an effect on those that are weaker. Lastly, specific events or individual experiences are included within those that have a general impact. [67] Therefore, if we want to study specific events, we should first focus on the general ones.

Again, general events are subdivided according to their operation upon entire countries, and upon certain cities or districts: one sub-division being regarded as affecting entire countries, and the other certain cities or districts only. They are also separately considered according to the causes by which they are produced; war, pestilence, famine, earthquakes, inundations, and other similar visitations being dependent on such greater and more important causes, as arise only after considerable periods; while slighter causes, arising more frequently, have reference only to the revolution of the seasons; their greater or less variation in cold and heat; the severity or mildness of the weather; the occasional abundance or scarcity of provisions; and other like occurrences. [Pg 41]

Once again, general events are divided based on their impact on entire countries or specific cities and regions: one division affects whole countries, while the other focuses on particular cities or areas. They are also analyzed separately according to the reasons behind them; events like war, disease, famine, earthquakes, floods, and other similar disasters are linked to larger, more significant causes that develop over long periods. In contrast, smaller causes occur more frequently and relate to seasonal changes, variations in temperature, weather conditions, the occasional surplus or shortage of food, and other similar factors. [Pg 41]

Hence the consideration of those events which concern whole countries, and are dependent on the greater causes (since it has a more extended scope than the other, which attaches only to certain cities, or districts, and is subject to slighter causes) takes precedence. And, for its due investigation, two essential points are to be attended to: the first is, the appropriate familiarity of the zodiacal signs and the fixed stars with the several regions which may be concerned; and the second comprises the indications occasionally arising in those parts of the heavens where such familiarity is found: for instance, the eclipses of the Sun and Moon, and such transits as may be made by the planets, when matutine, and in their respective stations.

Therefore, when considering events that affect entire countries and are influenced by larger causes (since this has a broader scope than those that only relate to specific cities or regions and are subject to smaller causes), it is prioritized. To properly investigate this, two key points need to be addressed: first, the relevant knowledge of the zodiac signs and fixed stars connected to the various regions involved; and second, the signs that may appear in those parts of the sky where this knowledge is applicable, such as solar and lunar eclipses, and the transits of planets when they are in the morning and at their respective locations.

The nature of the sympathy between these things must, however, be explained first; and a brief description will therefore be given of the chief peculiarities observable in whole nations; in regard to their manners and customs, as well as to their bodily formation and temperament; considered agreeably to their familiarity with those stars and signs whence the natural cause of their peculiarities duly proceeds.

The nature of the connection between these things needs to be explained first; so a brief description will be provided of the main characteristics seen in entire nations regarding their manners and customs, as well as their physical appearance and temperament, considered in relation to their familiarity with the stars and signs that influence the natural cause of their traits.


CHAPTER II
Peculiarities observable in every climate

The peculiarities of all nations are distinguished according to entire parallels and entire angles, and by their situation with regard to the Sun and the Ecliptic.

The unique traits of all countries are identified based on complete parallels and full angles, as well as their position in relation to the Sun and the Ecliptic.

The climate which we inhabit is situated in one of the Northern Quadrants: but other nations, which lie under more southern parallels, that is to say, in the space between the equinoctial line and the summer tropic, have the Sun in their zenith, and are continually scorched by it. They are consequently black in complexion, and have thick and curled hair. They are, moreover, ugly in person, of contracted stature, hot in disposition, and fierce in manners, in consequence of the incessant heats to which they are exposed; and they are called by the common name of Æthiopians. But the human race does not alone afford evidence of the violent heat in these regions; it is shown also by all other animals and by the state of the surrounding atmosphere.

The climate we live in is located in one of the Northern Quadrants; however, other nations that are further south, meaning in the area between the equator and the summer tropic, have the Sun directly overhead and are constantly burned by it. As a result, the people there have darker skin and thick, curly hair. They are also considered unattractive, tend to be shorter, are hot-tempered, and have aggressive behaviors due to the relentless heat they endure; they are commonly referred to as Ethiopians. But it's not just humans that show the extreme heat in these areas; it's evident in all other animals as well as in the condition of the surrounding atmosphere.

The natives of those countries which lie under the more remote northern parallels (that is to say, under the Arctic circle and beyond it[68]) have their zenith far distant from the zodiac and the Sun’s heat. Their constitutions, therefore, abound in cold, and are also highly imbued with moisture, which is in itself a most nutritive quality, and, in these latitudes, is not exhausted by heat: hence they are fair in complexion, with straight hair, of large bodies and full stature. They are cold in disposition, and wild in manners, owing to the constant cold. The state of the surrounding atmosphere and of animals and [Pg 42] plants, corresponds with that of men; who (as natives of these countries) are designated by the general name of Scythians.

The people from those countries that are located under the more remote northern parallels (that is to say, under the Arctic Circle and beyond it[68]) experience their height of life far from the zodiac and the Sun’s warmth. Their bodies, therefore, are filled with cold and are also rich in moisture, which is very nourishing, and in these regions, does not diminish with heat: as a result, they have a fair complexion, straight hair, and are large and tall. They tend to be cold in temperament and wild in behavior, due to the constant chill. The conditions of the surrounding atmosphere, as well as the animals and plants, mirror those of the people; who (as the natives of these regions) are collectively referred to as Scythians.

The nations situated between the summer tropic and the Arctic circle, having the meridian Sun neither in their zenith nor yet far remote from it, enjoy a well-temperated atmosphere. This favourable temperature, however, still undergoes variation, and changes alternatively from heat to cold; but the variation is never vast nor violent. The people who enjoy this kindly atmosphere are consequently of proportionate stature and complexion, and of good natural disposition: they live not in a state of dispersion, but dwell together in societies, and are civilised in their habits. Among the nations comprehended in this division, those verging towards the south are more industrious and ingenious than the others, and more adapted to the sciences: and these qualifications are engendered in them by the vicinity of the zodiac to their zenith, and by the familiarity thus subsisting between them and the planets moving in the zodiac, which familiarly gives activity and an intellectual impulse to their minds. Again, the natives of those countries which lie towards the east excel in courage, acting boldly and openly under all circumstances; for in all their characteristics they are principally conformed to the Sun’s nature, which is oriental, diurnal, masculine and dexter—(and it is plainly apparent that the dexter parts of all animals are much stronger than others)—hence results the greater courage of the inhabitants of the East. And as the Moon, on her first appearance after conjunction, is always seen in the west, the western parts are therefore lunar, and consequently feminine and sinister; whence it follows that the inhabitants of the west are milder, more effeminate and reserved.

The countries located between the Tropic of Cancer and the Arctic Circle, where the sun is neither directly overhead nor too far away, enjoy a temperate climate. However, this pleasant temperature still varies, shifting between hot and cold; but the changes are never extreme or abrupt. The people living in this gentle climate tend to have a balanced height and complexion, and they generally have a good-natured character. They don't live in isolation but rather in communities and have civilized lifestyles. Among these nations, those closer to the south are more industrious and inventive compared to others, and they are more inclined towards the sciences. These traits arise from their proximity to the zodiac at its zenith and the familiar relationship they have with the planets in the zodiac, which inspires them with energy and intellectual curiosity. Additionally, the inhabitants of the eastern regions stand out for their bravery, acting boldly and confidently in any situation; they embody the characteristics associated with the sun, which is eastern, diurnal, masculine, and right-sided—clearly, the right sides of all creatures are generally stronger than the left. This results in greater courage among the people of the East. On the other hand, because the moon is always seen in the west right after its conjunction, the western regions are associated with lunar qualities and are consequently feminine and weaker; as a result, the inhabitants of the west tend to be gentler, more sensitive, and reserved.

Thus, in all countries, certain respective peculiarities exist in regard to manners, customs and laws; and in each it is found that some portion of the inhabitants differs partially and individually from the usual habits and condition of their race. These variations arise similarly to the variations perceptible in the condition of the atmosphere; as, in all countries, the general state of whose atmosphere may be either hot, or cold, or temperate, certain districts are found to possess a particular temperature of their own, and to be more or less hot, or cold, by being more or less elevated than the general face of the country. So, likewise, certain people become navigators owing to their proximity to the sea, while others are equestrian, because their country is a plain; and others, again, become domiciliated by the fertility of their soil.

Thus, in every country, there are unique traits related to manners, customs, and laws; and within each one, it's evident that some people differ individually from the common habits and conditions of their background. These variations occur in a way similar to the differences we see in the atmosphere; just as some regions in all countries may be hot, cold, or temperate overall, certain areas have their own specific climate, being hotter or colder based on their elevation compared to the surrounding land. Similarly, some communities become seafaring because they're close to the ocean, while others are more suited to horseback riding due to flat land, and yet others settle in areas with rich soil that supports agriculture.

And thus, in each particular climate, certain peculiar qualities are to be found, arising from the natural familiarity which it holds with the stars and the twelve signs. And although these qualities do not pervade it, in such a manner as to be necessarily exhibited by every individual native, yet they are so far generally distributed as to be of much utility in investigating particular events; and it is highly important to take at least a brief notice of them.

And so, in each specific climate, there are certain unique qualities that come from its natural connection with the stars and the twelve zodiac signs. While these qualities aren’t present in everyone, they are generally enough to be useful in examining specific events; and it's very important to at least acknowledge them briefly.


[Pg 43]

[Pg 43]

CHAPTER III
THE FAMILIARITY OF THE EARTH’S REGIONS
WITH THE TRIPLICITIES AND THE PLANETS

It has been already stated that there are four triplicities distinguishable in the zodiac. The first, composed of Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius, is the north-west triplicity; and Jupiter has chief dominion over it on behalf of its northern proportion; but Mars also rules with him in reference to the west. The second, consisting of Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn, is the south-east; and in this triplicity Venus bears chief rule, in consequence of the southern proportion; but Saturn also governs with her in consideration of the east. The third, composed of Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius, is north-east; and Saturn is here the principal lord, in consequence of the eastern proportion; Jupiter, however, governs with him in reference to the north. The fourth triplicity is constituted of Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces, and is south-west; it owns Mars as its principal ruler, in consideration of its western proportion; and, on behalf of the south, it is also governed by Venus.

It has already been mentioned that there are four groups of three signs in the zodiac. The first one, made up of Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius, is the north-west group; Jupiter has the main influence here because of its northern aspect, but Mars also shares rulership in relation to the west. The second group, which includes Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn, is the south-east; in this group, Venus has primary control due to its southern aspect, but Saturn also rules alongside her for the east. The third group, consisting of Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius, is the north-east; Saturn is the main lord in this case because of the eastern aspect, although Jupiter also rules with him in relation to the north. The fourth group is made up of Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces, and is the south-west; it recognizes Mars as its main ruler because of its western aspect, and it is also influenced by Venus for the south.

The four triplicities being thus established, the whole inhabited earth is accordingly divided into four parts, agreeing with the number of the triplicities. It is divided latitudinally by the line of the Mediterranean Sea, from the Straits of Hercules to the Issican Gulf, continued onwards through the mountainous ridge extending towards the east; and by this latitudinal division its southern and northern parts are defined. Its longitudinal division is made by the line of the Arabian Gulf, the Ægean Sea, Pontus, and the lake Mæotis; and by this line are separated its eastern and western parts.

The four groups are thus established, and the entire inhabited earth is divided into four regions, corresponding to the number of these groups. It's split horizontally by the line of the Mediterranean Sea, stretching from the Straits of Hercules to the Issican Gulf, and continuing through the mountain range extending eastward; this horizontal division defines its southern and northern regions. The vertical division is made by the line of the Arabian Gulf, the Aegean Sea, the Black Sea, and Lake Maeotis; this line separates its eastern and western regions.

Of the four quadrants of the earth, thus agreeing in number with the four triplicities, one is situated in the north-west of the entire earth, and contains Celto-galatia; or, as it is commonly called, Europe. Opposed to this quadrant lies that of the south-east, towards Eastern Æthiopia; it is called the southern part of Asia Magna. Another quadrant of the entire earth is in the north-east, about Scythia, and is called the northern part of Asia Magna. To this is opposed the quadrant of the south-west, which lies about Western Æthiopia, and is known by the general name of Libya.

Of the four quadrants of the earth, which matches the four triplicities, one is located in the northwest of the entire earth and includes Celto-galatia, or what we commonly refer to as Europe. Opposite this quadrant is the southeast quadrant, which corresponds to Eastern Æthiopia and is known as the southern part of Asia Magna. Another quadrant of the entire earth is in the northeast, near Scythia, and is called the northern part of Asia Magna. Opposing this is the quadrant in the southwest, which is around Western Æthiopia and is commonly referred to as Libya.

Each of these quadrants contains certain parts, which, in comparison with its other parts, lie more contiguous to the middle of the earth; and these parts, in respect of the quadrant to which they belong, have a situation opposite to the rest of that quadrant, in the same manner as that quadrant itself is situated in regard to the rest of the earth. For instance, in the quadrant of Europe, which is situated on the north-west of the whole earth, those parts of it which lie towards the middle of the earth, and near the angles of the other quadrants, are [Pg 44] manifestly situated in the south-east of that quadrant. The like rule obtains in regard to the other quadrants. And hence it is evident that each quadrant is in familiarity with two oppositely-placed triplicities, its whole extent being adapted to the one triplicity which governs it as an entire quadrant; but its particular parts, situated about the middle of the earth, and lying, as regards the rest of the quadrant, in a direction contrary to that assigned to the whole quadrant altogether, being adapted to the other triplicity which rules the particular quadrant lying opposite to it. The planets exercising dominion in both these triplicities also hold familiarity with these particular parts; but, with the other more remote parts of any quadrant, only those planets hold familiarity which rule in the single triplicity to which the whole quadrant is allotted. With the said particular parts about the middle of the earth, Mercury also, as well as the other planets in dominion, bears familiarity, in consideration of his meditative condition and common nature.

Each of these quadrants contains certain areas that are closer to the center of the Earth compared to other areas; these parts, in relation to their quadrant, are positioned opposite to the rest of that quadrant, just as the quadrant itself is positioned in relation to the rest of the Earth. For example, in the quadrant of Europe, which is located in the northwest of the entire Earth, those areas that are closest to the center of the Earth and near the corners of the other quadrants are clearly positioned in the southeast of that quadrant. The same principle applies to the other quadrants. This makes it clear that each quadrant is connected to two opposite sets of three signs, with the entire area being aligned with one set of three signs that governs it as a whole; however, its specific parts, located near the center of the Earth and directed oppositely relative to the rest of the quadrant, are aligned with the other set of three signs that rules the quadrant opposite to it. The planets that have authority over both of these sets of three signs are also connected to these specific areas; however, only those planets that govern the single set of three signs assigned to the whole quadrant are associated with the more distant areas of any quadrant. Mercury, as well as the other planets in authority, also has a connection with these specific areas near the center of the Earth, given his contemplative nature and common essence.

Under this arrangement, it follows that the north-western parts of the first quadrant, or that of Europe, are in familiarity with the north-west triplicity, composed of Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius; and they are accordingly governed by the lords of that triplicity, Jupiter and Mars, vespertine. These parts, as distinguished by their appropriation to entire nations, are Britain, Galatia, Germany, Barsania,[69] Italy, Apulia, Sicily, Gaul, Tuscany, Celtica, and Spain. And, since the triplicity itself and the planets connected with it in dominion are adapted to command, the natives of these countries are consequently impatient of restraint, lovers of freedom, warlike, industrious, imperious, cleanly, and high-minded. But, owing to the vespertine configuration of Jupiter and Mars, as well as the masculine condition of the anterior parts of the triplicity, and the feminine condition of its latter parts,[70] the said nations regard women with scorn and indifference.[71] They are, however, still careful of the community, brave and faithful, affectionate in their families, and perform good and kind actions.

Under this arrangement, it's clear that the north-western parts of the first quadrant, or Europe, are aligned with the north-west triplicity, which consists of Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius. These areas are therefore influenced by the rulers of that triplicity, Jupiter and Mars, in the evening. The regions represented, as given to specific nations, include Britain, Galatia, Germany, Barsania, Italy, Apulia, Sicily, Gaul, Tuscany, Celtica, and Spain. Since the triplicity itself and the planets associated with it are suited to leadership, the people from these countries tend to be restless, freedom-loving, combative, hardworking, assertive, neat, and noble-minded. However, due to the evening positioning of Jupiter and Mars, along with the masculine characteristics of the earlier parts of the triplicity and the feminine traits of the latter parts, these nations often look at women with disdain and lack of interest. Nonetheless, they remain committed to the community, brave and loyal, loving within their families, and engage in good and kind deeds.

Among the countries before named, Britain, Galatia, Germany, and Barsania have a greater share of familiarity with Aries and Mars; and their inhabitants are accordingly wilder, bolder, and more ferocious. Italy, Apulia, Sicily, and Gaul are in familiarity with Leo and the Sun; [Pg 45] and the natives of these countries are more imperious, yet kind and benevolent, and careful of the commonwealth. Tuscany, Celtica, and Spain, are connected with Sagittarius and Jupiter; and their inhabitants are lovers of freedom, simplicity, and elegance.

Among the countries mentioned, Britain, Galatia, Germany, and Barsania have a stronger connection to Aries and Mars; as a result, their people are wilder, bolder, and more fierce. Italy, Apulia, Sicily, and Gaul are associated with Leo and the Sun; [Pg 45] and the natives of these regions are more commanding, yet kind and generous, taking care of the common good. Tuscany, Celtica, and Spain are linked to Sagittarius and Jupiter; and their inhabitants appreciate freedom, simplicity, and elegance.

The south-eastern parts of this quadrant, which are situated towards the middle of the earth, viz. Thrace, Macedonia, Illyria, Hellas, Achaia, and Crete, as well as the Cyclad Isles and the shores of Asia Minor and of Cyprus, assume, in addition, a connection with the south-east triplicity, which is composed of Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn, and ruled by Venus and Saturn; and, in consequence of the vicinity of these regions to the middle of the earth, Mercury likewise has a proportionate dominion over them. Hence their inhabitants, being subjected to the rulers of both triplicities, enjoy a favourable temperament of mind and of body. From Mars they imbibe their fitness for command, their courage, and impatience of restraint; from Jupiter their love of freedom, their self-rule, their skill in guiding public affairs, and in legislation: through the influence of Venus they are also lovers of the arts and sciences, as well as of music and poetry, of public shows, and all the refinements of life; and from Mercury they deduce their hospitality, their fondness for society and communion, their love of equity and of literature, and their power of eloquence. They are also in the highest degree conversant with sacred mysteries, owing to the vespertine figuration of Venus.

The southeastern parts of this area, which are located near the equator—specifically Thrace, Macedonia, Illyria, Greece, Achaia, and Crete, along with the Cycladic Islands and the coasts of Asia Minor and Cyprus—also share a connection with the southeast triplicity, which consists of Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn and is ruled by Venus and Saturn. Because these regions are close to the equator, Mercury also has a significant influence over them. As a result, their inhabitants, who are under the influence of both triplicities, enjoy a balanced state of mind and body. From Mars, they gain their leadership qualities, bravery, and impatience for restrictions; from Jupiter, they develop their appreciation for freedom, self-governance, and skills in managing public affairs and legislation. Through Venus’s influence, they also have a love for the arts and sciences, music and poetry, public performances, and the finer aspects of life. From Mercury, they inherit their hospitality, sociability, love of fairness and literature, and eloquence. Additionally, they are highly knowledgeable about sacred mysteries, due to Venus's evening aspect.

It is further to be observed of these last-named countries, that the inhabitants of the Cyclad Isles, and of the shores of Asia Minor and of Cyprus, are more particularly under the influence of Taurus and Venus, and are therefore voluptuous, fond of elegance, and over-studious in their attention to the body. The people of Hellas, Achaia, and Crete, have a stronger familiarity with Virgo and Mercury, and are therefore learned and scientific, preferring the cultivation of the mind to the care of the body. The people of Macedonia, Thrace, and Illyria, are chiefly influenced by Capricorn and Saturn; whence they are greedy of wealth, inferior in civilization, and have no ordinances of civil polity.

It should also be noted about these mentioned countries that the residents of the Cyclad Islands, as well as those along the coast of Asia Minor and Cyprus, are particularly influenced by Taurus and Venus. As a result, they tend to be indulgent, appreciate beauty, and are overly focused on physical appearance. In contrast, the people of Greece, Achaea, and Crete are more aligned with Virgo and Mercury, making them more knowledgeable and scientific, valuing intellectual growth over physical concerns. Meanwhile, the inhabitants of Macedonia, Thrace, and Illyria are primarily influenced by Capricorn and Saturn, which leads them to be materialistic, less advanced in civilization, and lacking established laws governing civic life.

The second quadrant consists of the southern division of Asia Magna. Such of its parts as are contained in India, Arriana, Gedrosia, Parthia, Media, Persia, Babylonia, Mesopotamia, and Assyria, are situated in the south-east of the whole earth, and have due familiarity with the south-east triplicity (composed of Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn), and consequently with Venus, Mercury, and Saturn, in matutine figuration. The nature of the inhabitants of these countries is obedient to the dominion of these ruling influences; they worship Venus under the name of Isis; and they also pay devotion to Saturn, invoking him by the name of Mithranhelios. Many of them likewise foretell future events; and they consecrate to the gods some of their bodily members, to which superstition they are induced by the nature of [Pg 46] the figuration of the planets before mentioned.[72] They are, moreover, hot in constitution, amorous and lustful, fond of acting, singing, and dancing, gaudy in their dresses and ornaments; owing to the influence of Venus. Saturn, however, inclines them to simplicity of conduct; and, in consequence of the matutine figuration, they address their women publicly.[73] There are also many among them who beget children by their own mothers.[74] The matutine figurations also influence their mode of worship, which is performed by prostration of the breast; because the heart is the nobler part of the body, and, in its vivifying faculties, acts like the Sun. And, although the influence of Venus makes the people, generally speaking, finical and effeminate in their personal adornment and apparel, yet the connection which Saturn holds with them, by means of the east, still renders them great in mind, eminent in council, courageous and warlike.

The second quadrant includes the southern part of Asia Magna. The regions found in India, Arriana, Gedrosia, Parthia, Media, Persia, Babylonia, Mesopotamia, and Assyria are located in the southeast of the earth and are closely associated with the southeast triplicity (which consists of Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn) and, as a result, with Venus, Mercury, and Saturn in the morning aspect. The inhabitants of these areas are influenced by these ruling forces; they worship Venus under the name Isis and also honor Saturn, referring to him as Mithranhelios. Many of them can predict future events, and they dedicate some of their body parts to the gods, a practice driven by their beliefs related to the mentioned planetary alignments. They tend to be passionate, romantic, and indulgent, enjoying activities like acting, singing, and dancing, as well as wearing flashy clothing and accessories because of Venus's influence. However, Saturn encourages them to have a simpler lifestyle and, due to the morning aspect, they interact with their women in public. There are also some among them who father children by their own mothers. The morning alignments also shape their worship practices, which involve prostration of the chest, as the heart is considered the nobler part of the body and acts like the Sun in its vital functions. While Venus's influence makes the people generally concerned with their appearance and dress, the connection with Saturn through the east still lends them great intellect, leadership, courage, and a warrior spirit.

It is to be remarked, that Parthia, Media, and Persia, have a more particular familiarity with Taurus and Venus; whence it follows that the dwellers in those countries wear splendid garments, and clothe the whole person entirely, except the breast; they are also fond of elegance and refinement. The countries about Babylon, Mesopotamia, and Assyria, are connected with Virgo and Mercury; their inhabitants are consequently studious of the sciences, and, among other attainments, excel in making observations on the five planets. India, Arriana, and Gedrosia, are connected with Capricorn and Saturn; the natives of these regions are, therefore, ill-formed in person, of dirty habits, and barbarous manners.

It’s worth noting that Parthia, Media, and Persia have a special connection with Taurus and Venus; this leads to the people in those areas wearing fancy clothing and covering their entire bodies except for the chest. They also appreciate elegance and sophistication. The regions around Babylon, Mesopotamia, and Assyria are associated with Virgo and Mercury; as a result, their inhabitants are inclined toward academic pursuits and, among other skills, excel at observing the five planets. India, Arriana, and Gedrosia are linked to Capricorn and Saturn; as a result, the people from these areas tend to be poorly formed in body, have unclean habits, and display barbaric behavior.

The remaining parts of this second quadrant, viz. Idumæa, Cœlesyria, Judæa, Phœnicia, Chaldæa, Orchynia, and Arabia Felix, occupy a situation in the vicinity of the middle of the earth, and in the north-west of the quadrant to which they actually belong: hence they are in familiarity with the north-west triplicity (which consists of Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius), and they have for their rulers, Jupiter and Mars, together with Mercury. By means of the figuration of these planets, the natives of the said countries are skilful in trade and all mercantile affairs, heedless of danger, yet treacherous, servile, and thoroughly fickle.

The remaining parts of this second quadrant, namely Idumea, Coelesyria, Judea, Phoenicia, Chaldea, Orchynia, and Arabia Felix, are located near the center of the earth and in the northwest of the quadrant they actually belong to. Because of this, they are connected to the northwest triplicity, which includes Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius, and they are ruled by Jupiter, Mars, and Mercury. Thanks to the influence of these planets, the people of these regions are skilled in trade and all business matters, often ignoring danger, yet they can be deceitful, servile, and quite unreliable.

The inhabitants of Cœlesyria, Idumæa, and Judæa, are principally influenced by Aries and Mars, and are generally audacious, [Pg 47] atheistical,[75] and treacherous. The Phœnicians, Chaldæans, and Orchynians, have familiarity with Leo and the Sun, and are therefore more simple and humane in disposition; they are also studious of astrology, and pay greater reverence than all other nations to the Sun. The people of Arabia Felix are connected with Sagittarius and Jupiter: the country is fertile, and abundantly productive of spices, and its inhabitants are well-proportioned in person, free in all their habits of life, and liberal in all their contracts and dealings.

The people of Cœlesyria, Idumæa, and Judæa are mainly influenced by Aries and Mars, making them generally bold, skeptical, and deceitful. The Phoenicians, Chaldeans, and Orchynians relate closely to Leo and the Sun, which makes them more straightforward and compassionate; they are also keen students of astrology and hold the Sun in higher regard than any other nation. The residents of Arabia Felix are associated with Sagittarius and Jupiter: the land is fertile and rich in spices, and the people are well-built, free in their lifestyle, and generous in their agreements and transactions. [Pg 47]

The third quadrant occupies the northern division of Asia Magna. Those several parts of it which lie to the north-east of the whole earth, and comprise Hyrcania, Armenia, Mantiana, Bactriana, Casperia, Serica, Sauromatica, Oxiana, and Sogdiana, are in familiarity with the north-east triplicity, composed of Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius, and have for their rulers Saturn and Jupiter, in matutine positions; hence the inhabitants worship Jupiter and the Sun.[76] They are abundantly rich in all things: they possess much gold, and are dainty and luxurious in their diet. They are also learned in theology, skilled in magic, just in all their dealings, free and noble-minded, holding dishonesty and wickedness in abhorrence, strongly imbued with the softer affections of nature; and, in a worthy cause, they will even readily embrace death to preserve their friends. They are, furthermore, chaste in marriage, elegant and splendid in their dress, charitable and beneficent, and of enlightened intellect. All these qualities are principally produced by the matutine positions of Saturn and Jupiter, who influence the region.

The third quadrant covers the northern part of Asia Magna. The various areas to the northeast of the entire earth include Hyrcania, Armenia, Mantiana, Bactriana, Casperia, Serica, Sauromatica, Oxiana, and Sogdiana. These areas are associated with the northeast triplicity made up of Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius, ruled by Saturn and Jupiter in morning positions; therefore, the inhabitants worship Jupiter and the Sun. They are extremely wealthy in every way: they have a lot of gold and enjoy a refined and luxurious diet. They are knowledgeable in theology, skilled in magic, fair in all their dealings, and noble-minded, holding deceit and evil in disdain. They are deeply compassionate and, for a just cause, will willingly face death to protect their friends. Additionally, they are faithful in marriage, stylish and elegant in their clothing, generous and charitable, and possess an enlightened intellect. All these qualities largely stem from the morning positions of Saturn and Jupiter, who influence the region.

Among these nations, however, Hyrcania, Armenia, and Mantiana, have a greater familiarity with Gemini and Mercury; and the inhabitants are consequently more acute in apprehension, but less tenacious of their probity. The countries about Bactriana, Casperia, and Serica, are connected with Libra and Venus; and the natives are endowed with much wealth and many luxuries, and take delight in poetry and songs. The nations about Sauromatica, Oxiana and Sogdiana, are influenced by Aquarius and Saturn; and are therefore less polished in manners, and more austere and uncouth.

Among these nations, however, Hyrcania, Armenia, and Mantiana have a better understanding of Gemini and Mercury; as a result, the people are sharper in perception but less committed to their integrity. The regions around Bactriana, Casperia, and Serica are associated with Libra and Venus; the locals are rich and enjoy many luxuries, taking pleasure in poetry and music. The nations near Sauromatica, Oxiana, and Sogdiana are influenced by Aquarius and Saturn; therefore, they tend to be less refined in manners and more stern and rough.

The other parts of this quadrant, lying near the middle of the entire earth, consist of Bithynia, Phrygia, Colchis, Laxica, Syria, Commagene, Cappadocia, Lydia, Lycia, Cilicia, and Pamphylia. These, being situated in the south-west of their quadrant, have familiarity accordingly with the south-west triplicity, composed of Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces, and [Pg 48] are ruled by Mars and Venus, together with Mercury. In these countries Venus is principally worshipped; she is invoked as the Mother of the Gods, and by various local and indigenous appellations; Mars likewise receives adoration here, under the name of Adonis, as well as by other titles;[77] and some of the religious services to these deities are performed by loud lamentations. The people are servile in mind, diligent in labour, yet fraudulent, knavish, and thievish; they enter into foreign armies for the sake of hire, and make prisoners and slaves of their own countrymen: besides which, they are continually subject to intestine broils. These traits arise from the matutine figurations of Mars and Venus. It is further to be observed, that, from the circumstance of Mars receiving his exaltation in Capricorn (one of the signs of the triplicity ruled by Venus), and Venus hers in Pisces (a sign belonging to the triplicity of Mars), it thence follows that the women have strong attachments and kindly affections to their husbands, are vigilant and careful in domestic affairs, and highly industrious: they also act as servants, and labour for the men, with all due obedience, in every thing.

The other areas of this quadrant, located near the center of the entire earth, include Bithynia, Phrygia, Colchis, Laxica, Syria, Commagene, Cappadocia, Lydia, Lycia, Cilicia, and Pamphylia. These regions, situated in the southwest of their quadrant, correspond with the southwest triplicity, made up of Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces, and are governed by Mars, Venus, and Mercury. In these lands, Venus is primarily venerated; she is invoked as the Mother of the Gods and known by various local names. Mars is also worshipped here under the name Adonis and other titles; [77] and some of the rituals for these deities include loud lamentations. The people tend to be subservient in nature, hardworking, but also deceitful, crafty, and thieving; they enlist in foreign armies for pay and capture their fellow countrymen as prisoners and slaves. Furthermore, they are often embroiled in internal conflicts. These characteristics stem from the early positions of Mars and Venus. It should also be noted that because Mars is exalted in Capricorn (one of the signs within the triplicity ruled by Venus) and Venus is exalted in Pisces (which is part of the triplicity of Mars), it follows that women in these regions form strong bonds and affectionate ties to their husbands, are attentive and diligent in household matters, and are very industrious: they also serve and work for the men, showing proper obedience in everything.

Bithynia, Phrygia, and Colchis, must however be excepted from sharing in this general propriety of the female character; for, as these nations are chiefly connected with Cancer and the Moon, their male population is, generally speaking, slavish in its habits, timid and superstitious, while the greater part of the women, owing to the matutine and masculine position of the Moon, are of masculine manners, ambitious of command, and warlike. These females, like the Amazons, shun the addresses of men, and delight in the use of arms, and in manly occupations: they also amputate the right breasts of their female children for the sake of adapting them to military service, and in order that, when in combat and exposing that part of their body, they may appear to be of the male sex. Again, Syria, Commagene, and Cappadocia, are principally influenced by Scorpio and Mars; and their inhabitants are accordingly bold, wicked, treacherous, and laborious. Lydia, Cilicia, and Pamphylia, have a greater familiarity with Pisces and Jupiter; when their inhabitants are wealthy, of mercantile habits, living in freedom and in community, faithful to their engagements, and honest in their dealings.

Bithynia, Phrygia, and Colchis, however, should be noted as exceptions to the typical female characteristics seen elsewhere. Since these regions are mainly associated with Cancer and the Moon, their men tend to be generally submissive, fearful, and superstitious. In contrast, most women here, due to the early and strong influence of the Moon, exhibit masculine traits; they are ambitious for power and have a warrior spirit. These women, much like the Amazons, avoid the company of men and enjoy using weapons and engaging in traditionally male activities. They even remove the right breasts of their female children to prepare them for military roles, allowing them to appear more masculine in combat. Additionally, Syria, Commagene, and Cappadocia are largely influenced by Scorpio and Mars, which makes their inhabitants bold, wicked, treacherous, and hardworking. Lydia, Cilicia, and Pamphylia, on the other hand, are more aligned with Pisces and Jupiter; their people are often wealthy, engaged in trade, live freely in communities, keep their promises, and are honest in their business dealings.

The remaining quadrant is the vast tract known by the general name of Libya. Its several parts, distinguished by the particular names of Numidia, Carthage, Africa,[78] Phazania, Nasamonitis, Garamantica, [Pg 49] Mauritania, Getulia, and Metagonitis, are situated in the south-west of the entire earth, and have due familiarity with the south-west triplicity, composed of Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces; their rulers therefore are Mars and Venus, in vespertine position. From this figuration of the planets it results that the dwellers in these regions are doubly governed by a man and a woman, who are both children of the same mother; the man rules the males, and the woman the females. They are extremely hot in constitution, and desirous of women; their marriages are usually made by violence, and in many districts the local princes first enjoy the brides of their subjects: in some places, however, the women are common to all. The influence of Venus causes the whole people to delight in personal ornaments, and in being arrayed in female attire: nevertheless, that of Mars renders them courageous, crafty, addicted to magic, and fearless of dangers.

The remaining quadrant is the large area commonly known as Libya. Its various regions, identified by the specific names of Numidia, Carthage, Africa, Phazania, Nasamonitis, Garamantica, Mauritania, Getulia, and Metagonitis, are located in the southwest of the world and are closely linked to the southwest zodiac signs, consisting of Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces. Their ruling planets are therefore Mars and Venus, in an evening position. This arrangement of the planets means that the people in these areas are under the influence of both a man and a woman, who are siblings from the same mother; the man governs the males, while the woman governs the females. They are very passionate and desire women; their marriages often involve force, and in many regions, local rulers first claim the brides of their subjects. In some places, however, the women are shared among all. The influence of Venus leads the entire population to enjoy personal decoration and to dress in feminine clothing; however, Mars's influence makes them brave, cunning, inclined toward magic, and unafraid of danger. [Pg 49]

Again, however, of the above-named countries, Numidia, Carthage, and Africa, are more particularly in familiarity with Cancer and the Moon: their inhabitants, consequently, live in community, attend to mercantile pursuits, and enjoy abundantly all the blessings of nature. The natives of Metagonitis, Mauritania, and Getulia, are influenced by Scorpio and Mars, and are consequently ferocious and pugnacious in the highest degree; eaters of human flesh, utterly indifferent to danger, and so regardless and prodigal of blood, as to slay each other without hesitation on the slightest cause. The people in Phazania, Nasamonitis, and Garamantica, are connected with Pisces and Jupiter, and are accordingly frank and simple in manners, fond of employment, well disposed, fond of the decencies of life, and, for the most part, free and unrestrained in their actions: they worship Jupiter by the name of Ammon.

Again, however, of the countries mentioned above, Numidia, Carthage, and Africa are particularly associated with Cancer and the Moon: their inhabitants, as a result, live in community, engage in trade, and enjoy plenty of nature's blessings. The natives of Metagonitis, Mauritania, and Getulia are influenced by Scorpio and Mars, making them extremely fierce and aggressive; they practice cannibalism, show no fear of danger, and are so reckless with blood that they kill each other without a second thought over the slightest disagreements. The people in Phazania, Nasamonitis, and Garamantica are connected with Pisces and Jupiter, and are thus open and straightforward in their behavior, hardworking, kind, appreciate the niceties of life, and mostly live freely and without restrictions: they worship Jupiter under the name of Ammon.

The other parts of this quadrant, which lies near the middle of the entire earth, are Cyrenaica, Marmarica, Ægypt, Thebais, Oasis, Troglodytica, Arabia, Azania, and Middle Æthiopia. These countries, being situated in the north-east of their quadrant, have due familiarity with the north-east triplicity (consisting of Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius), and are governed by Saturn and Jupiter, and also by Mercury. Their inhabitants, therefore, participate in the influence of all the five planets in vespertine figuration, and consequently cherish due love and reverence for the gods, and dedicate themselves to their service. They are addicted to sepulchral ceremonies; and, owing to the said vespertine position, they bury their dead in the earth,[79] and remove them from the public eye. They use various laws and [Pg 50] customs, and worship divers gods. In a state of subjection, they are submissive, cowardly, abject, and most patient; but when they command, they are brave, generous, and high-minded. Polygamy is frequent among them, and practised by the women as well as the men: they are most licentious in sexual intercourse, and allow incestuous commerce between brothers and sisters. Both men and women are extraordinarily prolific, and correspond in this respect with the fecundity of their soil. Many of the men are, however, effeminate and debased in mind; in consequence of the figuration of the malefics, together with the vespertine position of Venus; and some of them mutilate their persons.[80]

The other parts of this quadrant, which is near the center of the entire earth, include Cyrenaica, Marmarica, Egypt, Thebais, Oasis, Troglodytica, Arabia, Azania, and Middle Ethiopia. These regions, located in the northeast of their quadrant, are closely associated with the northeast triplicity (comprising Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius) and are influenced by Saturn and Jupiter, as well as Mercury. Consequently, their inhabitants experience the influence of all five planets during the evening and therefore show love and respect for the gods, dedicating themselves to their service. They are inclined towards burial rituals and, due to this evening influence, bury their dead in the ground, keeping them out of the public eye. They follow various laws and customs and worship different gods. In times of subjugation, they are obedient, timid, submissive, and very patient; but when they are in charge, they are courageous, generous, and noble-minded. Polygamy is common among them, practiced by both women and men; they are quite promiscuous and permit incestuous relationships between siblings. Both men and women are incredibly fertile, paralleling the productivity of their land. However, many of the men are effeminate and mentally degraded, likely because of the influence of the malefics along with Venus's evening position; some even mutilate themselves.

Among these last-named countries, Cyrenaica, Marmarica, and particularly Lower Ægypt, are chiefly influenced by Gemini and Mercury: the natives are therefore highly intellectual and sensible, and gifted with capacity for every undertaking; above all, for the attainment of wisdom, and an insight into divine mysteries. They are also magicians, performing secret rites and ceremonies, and are in every respect calculated for the prosecution of all scientific inquiry.[81] The inhabitants of Thebais, Oasis, and Troglodytica, are connected with Libra and Venus; they are of warmer constitution, and more hasty disposition, and enjoy life in all its plentitude and abundance. The natives of Arabia, Azania, and Middle Æthiopia, have familiarity with Aquarius and Saturn; they consequently feed on flesh and fish indiscriminately, and live in a state of dispersion like wild beasts; they never unite in society, but lead a wandering and savage life. [Pg 51]

Among these last-named countries, Cyrenaica, Marmarica, and especially Lower Egypt are mainly influenced by Gemini and Mercury: the locals are therefore very intellectual and sensible, with the ability to take on any challenge, especially in seeking wisdom and understanding divine mysteries. They are also skilled in magic, performing secret rituals and ceremonies, and are well-suited for pursuing all scientific inquiries. [81] The people of Thebais, Oasis, and Troglodytica are linked with Libra and Venus; they tend to have a warmer personality and a more impulsive nature, enjoying life to its fullest. The natives of Arabia, Azania, and Middle Ethiopia are familiar with Aquarius and Saturn; as a result, they eat both meat and fish indiscriminately and live in a state of disarray like wild animals; they never form societies, instead leading a nomadic and savage lifestyle. [Pg 51]

Table Showing all the Countries
Belonging to Each Sign Respectively

Table Showing all the Countries
Belonging to Each Sign Respectively

Signs. Aries. Taurus. Gemini. Cancer. Leo Virgo
Triplicity. North West. South East. North East. South West. North West. South East.
Quadrant of the Countries. North West. South East. North East. South West. North West. South East.
Countries remote from the
middle of the earth.
Britain
Galatia
Germany
Barsania
Parthia
Media
Persia
Hyrcania
Armenia
Mantiana
Numidia
Carthage
Africa
Italy
Apulia
Sicily
Gaul
Mesopotamia
Babylonia
Assyria
Quadrant of the Countries. South East. North West. South West. North East. South East. North West.
Countries near the middle
of the earth.
Cælesyria
Idumæa
Judæa
Cyclades
Cyprus
Asia Minor
Cyrenaica
Marmarica
Lower Ægypt 
Bithynia
Phrygia
Colchis
Phœnicia
Chaldæa
Orychnia
Hellas
Achaia
Crete
Signs. Libra. Scorpio. Sagittarius. Capricorn. Aquarius. Pisces.
Triplicity. North East. South West. North West. South East. North East. South West.
Quadrant of the Countries. North East. South West. North West. South East. North East. South West.
Countries remote from the
middle of the earth.
Bactriana
Casperia
Serica
Metagonitis
Mauritania
Getulia
Tuscany
Celtica
Spain
India
Arriana
Gedrosia
Sauromatica 
Oxiana
Sogdiana
Phazania
Nasamonitis
Garamantica
Quadrant of the Countries South West. North East. South East. North West. South West. North East.
Countries near the middle
of the earth.
Thebais
Oasis
Troglodytica 
Syria
Commagene 
Cappadocia
 
Arabia Felix
Thrace
Macedonia
Illyria
Arabia
Azania
Middle
Lydia
Cilicia
Pamphylia
           Æthiopia  

[Pg 52] The familiarities exercised by the Planets, and by the Signs of the Zodiac, together with the manners, customs, and qualities, particular as well as general, which they produce, have now been concisely described; but in order to facilitate the knowledge and use of them, the subjoined table is inserted, to show, at one view, what countries are in connection with each sign, respectively, according to the mode above detailed.

[Pg 52] The relationships formed by the Planets and the Signs of the Zodiac, along with the specific and general traits, behaviors, and customs they create, have now been briefly outlined. To help you understand and utilize this information better, the following table is provided to show, at a glance, which countries are associated with each sign, based on the method described above.


CHAPTER IV
THE FAMILIARITY OF THE EARTH'S REGIONS WITH THE FIXED STARS

In addition to the rules which have been already given, respecting the familiarity of the regions of the earth with the signs and planets, it must be observed, that all fixed stars which may be posited on any line, drawn from one zodiacal pole to the other, through such parts of the zodiac as may be connected with any particular country, are also in familiarity with that particular country.

In addition to the rules already provided about how the regions of the earth relate to the signs and planets, it should be noted that all fixed stars positioned along any line drawn from one zodiac pole to the other, passing through parts of the zodiac linked to a specific country, also have a connection with that country.

And, with regard to metropolitan cities, it is necessary to state, that those points or degrees of the zodiac, over which the Sun and Moon were in transit, at the time when the construction of any such city was first undertaken and commenced, are to be considered as sympathizing with that city in an especial manner; and that, among the angles, the ascendant is principally in accordance with it. In certain cases, however, where the date of foundation of a metropolis cannot be ascertained, the mid-heaven in the nativity of the reigning king, or other actual chief magistrate, is to be substituted, and considered as that part of the zodiac with which it chiefly sympathizes.[82]

And when it comes to big cities, it's important to note that the positions of the Sun and Moon at the time the city was originally founded are particularly significant for that city. Among the key points, the ascendant is especially aligned with it. In some cases, if the founding date of a city can't be determined, the mid-heaven from the birth chart of the current king or leader should be used as the reference point for its main alignment. [82]


CHAPTER V
METHOD OF SPECIFIC PREDICTION IN ECLIPSES

After having gone through the necessary preliminary topics, it is now proper to speak of the manner in which predictions are to be formed and considered; beginning with those which relate to general events, affecting either certain cities, or districts, or entire countries.

After covering the necessary preliminary topics, it's time to discuss how predictions should be made and understood, starting with those that relate to general events impacting specific cities, regions, or whole countries.

The strongest and principal cause of all these events exists in the [Pg 53] ecliptical conjunctions of the Sun and Moon, and in the several transits made by the planets during those conjunctions.

The main reason for all these events is found in the [Pg 53] ecliptical alignments of the Sun and Moon, along with the various movements of the planets during those alignments.

One part of the observations, required in forming predictions in cases of this nature, relates to the locality of the event, and points out the cities or countries liable to be influenced by particular eclipses, or by occasional continued stations of certain planets, which at times remain for a certain period in one situation. These planets are Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars; and they furnish portentous indications, when they are stationary.

One aspect of the observations needed to make predictions in these situations concerns the location of the event and highlights the cities or countries that might be affected by specific eclipses or by the temporary positions of certain planets that sometimes stay in one place for a while. These planets are Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars, and they provide significant indications when they are stationary.

Another branch relates to time, and gives pre-information of the period at which the event will occur, and how long it will continue to operate.

Another branch relates to time and provides advance information about when the event will take place and how long it will last.

The third branch is generic; and points out the classes, or kinds, which the event will affect.

The third branch is general and identifies the categories or types that the event will impact.

The last part is specific; and foreshows the actual quality and character of the coming event.

The final part is specific and hints at the true nature and character of the upcoming event.


CHAPTER VI
THE REGIONS OR COUNTRIES TO BE CONSIDERED
AS LIABLE TO BE INCLUDED IN THE EVENT

The first of the several branches of consideration just enumerated relates to locality, and is to be exercised in the following manner:—

The first of the various branches of consideration mentioned relates to location and should be applied as follows:—

In all eclipses of the Sun and Moon, and especially in such as are fully visible, the place in the zodiac, where the eclipse happens, is to be noted; and it must be seen what countries are in familiarity with that place, according to the rules laid down regarding the quadrants and the triplicities; and in like manner it must be observed what cities are under the influence of the sign in which the eclipse happens; either by means of the ascendant, and the situations of the luminaries at the time of their foundation, or by means of the mid-heaven of their kings or governors, actually ruling at the time of the eclipse; although such time may be subsequent to the building of the said cities. Whatever countries or cities shall be thus found in familiarity with the ecliptical place, will all be comprehended in the event; which will, however, principally attach to all those parts which may be connected with the identical sign of the eclipse,[83] and in which it was visible while above the earth.[84]

In all solar and lunar eclipses, especially those that are fully visible, it's important to note the zodiac position where the eclipse occurs. We should also see which countries are related to that position based on the rules about quadrants and triplicities. Similarly, we need to observe which cities are influenced by the sign of the eclipse, either through the rising sign and the positions of the luminaries when they were founded or by the mid-heaven of their current rulers at the time of the eclipse, even if that time is after the cities were established. Any countries or cities identified as related to the ecliptical position will be affected by the event, though it will mainly impact those areas connected to the specific sign of the eclipse, [83] and where it was visible from above the earth. [84]


[Pg 54]

[Pg 54]

CHAPTER VII
THE DATE AND TIME OF THE EVENT

The second point requiring attention relates to time, and indicates the date when the event will take place, and the period during which its effect will continue: these are to be ascertained in the following manner.

The second point that needs to be addressed is time, which specifies when the event will happen and how long its impact will last: these details should be determined in the following way.

It must however be premised, that as an eclipse, occurring at any particular season, cannot happen in all climates at the same temporal or solar hour,[85] so neither will the magnitude of the obscuration, nor the time of its continuance, be equal in all parts of the world. First, therefore (as is done in a nativity), the angles are to be arranged, in every country connected with the eclipse, according to the hour at which the eclipse takes place and the elevation of the pole in that country. The time, during which the obscuration of the eclipse may continue in each country, is then to be noted in equatorial hours.[86] And, after these particulars have been carefully observed, it is to be understood that the effect will endure as many years as the obscuration lasted hours, provided the eclipse was solar; but if lunar, a like number of months is to be reckoned instead of years.

It should be noted, however, that just as an eclipse occurring in a specific season can't happen in all climates at the same time, so the extent of the obscuration and the duration will not be the same everywhere in the world. First, just like in a natal chart, the angles need to be organized in each country associated with the eclipse based on the time it happens and the height of the pole in that location. Next, the duration of the eclipse's obscuration in each country should be recorded in equatorial hours.[86] After these details have been thoroughly noted, it should be understood that the effects will last as many years as the hours the obscuration lasted, assuming the eclipse was solar; if it was lunar, then the same number of months should be counted instead of years.

The commencement of the effect, and the period of its general intensity, or strength, are to be inferred from the situation of the place of the eclipse with respect to the angles. For, if the ecliptical place be near the eastern horizon, the effect will begin to be manifested in the course of the first four months after the date of the eclipse; and its general height, or intensity, will take place in, or about, the first third part of the whole extent of its duration. If the ecliptical place happen to be in or near the mid-heaven, the effect will begin to appear in the second four months, and its general intensity will occur about the second third part; and, if the place should fall near the western horizon, the effect will begin in the third four months, and take its general intensity in the last third part of its whole duration.[87]

The start of the effect and its general intensity or strength can be determined by the location of the eclipse in relation to the angles. If the ecliptical position is close to the eastern horizon, the effect will start to show within the first four months after the eclipse date, and its overall intensity will peak in about the first third of its total duration. If the ecliptical position is around the mid-heaven, the effect will begin to emerge in the second four months, with the general intensity occurring around the second third. If the position is near the western horizon, the effect will start in the third four months, with its overall intensity happening in the last third of its entire duration.[87]

[Pg 55] Partial intensities, or relaxations of the effect, are, however, to be inferred from any combinations which may happen during the intermediate period,[88] either in the actual places where the primary cause was presented, or in other places configurated therewith. They are also to be conjectured by the various courses, or transits, of such planets as co-operate in producing the effect, by being configurated with the sign in which the primary cause was situated; and, with this view, the matutine, vespertine, or stationary position, or midnight culmination of those planets must be observed; for the effect will be strengthened and augmented by their matutine or stationary position; but weakened and diminished by their being vespertine, or situated under the sunbeams, or by their midnight culmination.

[Pg 55] You can draw conclusions about partial intensities or relaxations of the effect from any combinations that occur during the intermediate period,[88] either in the exact locations where the primary cause was present or in nearby locations that are related to it. You can also make guesses based on the different paths or movements of the planets that help create the effect by being aligned with the sign where the primary cause was located. To do this, you should observe the morning, evening, or stationary positions, as well as the midnight peak, of these planets; the effect will be stronger and enhanced during their morning or stationary positions but will be weaker and diminished during their evening positions, when they are in sunlight, or during their midnight peak.


CHAPTER VIII
THE GENERATION, CATEGORY, OR TYPE THAT CAN BE IMPACTED

The third division of these observations relates to the mode of distinguishing the genus, or species, of animals or things about to sustain the expected effect. This distinction is made by means of the conformation and peculiar properties of those signs in which the place of the eclipse, and the places of such fixed stars and planets, as are in dominion according to the actual sign of the eclipse, and that of the angle before it, may be found. And a planet, or fixed star, is to be considered as holding dominion when circumstanced as follows.

The third part of these observations deals with how to identify the genus or species of animals or things that are expected to experience a certain effect. This identification is based on the shape and unique characteristics of the signs that indicate the location of the eclipse, along with the positions of the fixed stars and planets that are in control according to the current sign of the eclipse and the angle before it. A planet or fixed star is considered to be in control when it meets the following conditions.

If there be found one planet having more numerous claims than any other to the place of the eclipse, as well as to that of the angle, being also in the immediate vicinity of those places, and visibly applying to, or receding from them, and having likewise more rights over other places connected with them by configuration; the said planet being, at the same time, lord by house, triplicity, exaltation, and terms; in such a case, only that single planet is entitled to dominion. But, if the lord of the eclipse and the lord of the angle be not identical, then those two planets which have most connections with each place are to be noted; and, of these two, the lord of the eclipse is to be preferred to the chief dominion, “although the other is to be considered as bearing rule conjointly.”[89] And if more than two should be found, having equal preensions to each [Pg 56] place, that particular one among them which may be nearest to an angle, or most concerned with the places in question, by the nature of its condition, is to be selected for dominion.[90]

If there is one planet that has more claims than any other on the position of the eclipse as well as on the angle, is also close to those positions, and is visibly moving towards or away from them, and has more influence over other positions connected by configuration; that planet, at the same time, being the lord by house, triplicity, exaltation, and terms; in this case, that single planet holds the power. However, if the lord of the eclipse and the lord of the angle are not the same, then the two planets that are most connected to each position should be noted; and of these two, the lord of the eclipse should be favored for the main dominion, “even though the other should also be considered to share authority.”[89] And if there are more than two, each having equal claims to each position, the one among them that is closest to an angle or most relevant to the positions in question, based on its nature, should be chosen for dominance.[90]

But, among the fixed stars, the chief bright one (which, during the time of the eclipse, may hold connection, in any of the nine modes of apparent configuration detailed in the First Syntaxis[91] with the angles then actually in passage), is to be admitted to dominion; as also that one which, at the ecliptical hour, may be in an eminent situation, either having risen, or having culminated with the angle following the place of the eclipse.[92]

But among the fixed stars, the brightest one (which, during the eclipse, might have a connection in any of the nine ways of visual arrangement described in the First Syntaxis[91] with the angles currently in motion) should be acknowledged as having power; also, the star that, at the ecliptic hour, might be in a prominent position, either having risen or reached its peak with the angle closest to the eclipse.[92]

Having considered, according to the foregoing rules, what stars co-operate in regulating the coming event, the conformation and figure of the signs, in which the eclipse takes place and the said ruling stars may be posited, are also to be observed; and, from the properties and characteristics of those signs, the genus or species, to be comprehended in the event, is chiefly to be inferred.

Having thought about what stars play a role in shaping the upcoming event, according to the previous guidelines, we also need to pay attention to the shape and position of the signs where the eclipse occurs, as well as where those ruling stars are located. Additionally, we should understand the properties and traits of those signs to mainly deduce the type or category involved in the event.

For instance, should the zodiacal constellations, and those of the ruling fixed stars out of the zodiac, be of human shape, the effect will fall upon the human race. If the signs be not of human shape, but yet terrestrial, or quadrupedal, the event would be indicated to happen to animals of similar form: the signs shaped like reptiles signify that serpents and creatures of that description will be affected; those bearing the figure of ferocious beasts denote that the event will affect savage and destructive animals; and those figured like tame beasts show that it will operate on animals serviceable to mankind, and of domestic character; as intimated by the shape and figure of the signs, whether resembling horses, oxen, sheep, or any other useful animals. In addition to this, the terrestrial signs situated in the north, about the Arctic circle, indicate sudden earthquakes; and those in the south, sudden deluges of rain. And, should the ruling places be situated in signs shaped like winged animals, as in that of Aquila, or in others of similar form, the event will take effect on birds; and will chiefly attach to those which afford food to man. If the said [Pg 57] places should be in signs formed like creatures which swim, and in marine signs, such as Delphinus, the effect will be felt by marine animals, and in the navigation of fleets; if in river signs, such as Aquarius and Pisces, it will attach to animals living in rivers and in fresh waters: and, if in Argo, both sea and fresh-water animals will be affected by it.[93]

For example, if the zodiac constellations and the fixed stars outside the zodiac were human-shaped, the outcome would impact humanity. If the signs aren’t human-shaped but instead resemble terrestrial or four-legged creatures, the events would likely affect animals with similar forms: signs shaped like reptiles suggest that snakes and similar creatures will be influenced; those resembling wild beasts indicate that fierce and destructive animals will be impacted; and those resembling domestic animals imply that the effects will be felt by animals that serve humans and are domesticated, as shown by the shapes of signs like horses, cows, sheep, or any other useful animals. Additionally, terrestrial signs in the north, near the Arctic Circle, suggest sudden earthquakes, while those in the south indicate sudden heavy rains. If the dominant positions are in signs shaped like flying animals, like Aquila, or similar forms, the outcomes will affect birds, particularly those that provide food for people. If these positions are in signs resembling aquatic creatures or marine signs like Delphinus, the effects will be felt by sea animals and in navigation; if in river signs, like Aquarius and Pisces, it will impact animals living in rivers and freshwater: and if in Argo, both sea and freshwater animals will be affected by it.[Pg 57]

Again, should the ruling places be situated in tropical or in equinoctial signs, in either case alike they presignify changes in the state of the atmosphere, at the respective season to which each sign is appropriated. For example, with regard to the season of spring and the productions of the earth, if the said places should be in the sign of the vernal equinox, they will produce an effect on the buds of the vine and fig, and of such other trees as sprout forth at that season. Should they be in the sign of the summer tropic, the event will affect the gathering and depositing of fruits; and, with respect to Ægypt in particular, it will impede the rising of the Nile. If they should be in the sign of the autumnal equinox, they foreshow that it will operate on grain and on various sorts of herbs; if in the sign of the winter tropic, on potherbs, esculent vegetables, and such birds and fishes as arrive in that season.

Again, if the ruling positions are in tropical or equinoctial signs, they indicate changes in the atmosphere depending on the season linked to each sign. For instance, during spring and the growth of plants, if these positions are in the sign of the vernal equinox, they will influence the buds of grapevines, figs, and other trees that bloom in that season. If they are in the sign of the summer tropic, the outcome will affect the harvesting and storage of fruits; specifically for Egypt, it will hinder the flooding of the Nile. If they are in the sign of the autumnal equinox, they will indicate impacts on grains and various herbs; if in the sign of the winter tropic, they will affect leafy greens, edible vegetables, and the birds and fish that appear in that season.

The equinoctial signs further indicate the circumstances liable to happen in ecclesiastical concerns, and in religious matters: the tropical signs give warning of changes in the atmosphere and in political affairs; the fixed signs, of changes in institutions and in buildings; and the bicorporeal signs show that the future event will fall alike on princes and their subjects.

The equinoctial signs indicate the situations that could arise in church matters and religion: the tropical signs warn of changes in the weather and political situations; the fixed signs point to changes in organizations and buildings; and the bicorporeal signs suggest that the future event will affect both rulers and their subjects equally.

Again, the ruling places situated in the east, during the time of the eclipse, signify that fruits and seeds, incipient institutions, and the age of youth, will be affected; those, which may be in the mid-heaven above the earth announce that the coming event will relate to ecclesiastical affairs, to kings and princes, and to the middle age; those in the west, that it will influence the laws, old age, and persons about to die.

Once more, the ruling areas in the east during the eclipse indicate that crops and seeds, emerging institutions, and youth will be impacted; those positions in the mid-heaven above the earth suggest that the upcoming event will pertain to church matters, rulers, and the middle age; while those in the west will affect laws, the elderly, and individuals nearing death.

The proportion liable to be affected, of that genus or kind on which the event will fall, is to be ascertained by the magnitude of the obscuration caused by the eclipse, and by the positions held by the operative stars in regard to the ecliptical place; as, in vespertine position to a solar eclipse, or in matutine position to a lunar eclipse, the said stars will most usually much diminish the effect; in opposition they render it moderate; but in matutine position to a solar eclipse, or in vespertine to a lunar, they greatly augment and extend it.[94]

The proportion likely to be affected, of that type or category on which the event will occur, is determined by the intensity of the darkness caused by the eclipse and by the positions of the influencing stars in relation to the ecliptic location; for instance, in the evening position during a solar eclipse, or in the morning position during a lunar eclipse, these stars usually diminish the effect significantly; in opposition, they moderate it; but in the morning position during a solar eclipse, or in the evening during a lunar eclipse, they greatly enhance and extend it.[94]


[Pg 58]

[Pg 58]

CHAPTER IX
THE QUALITY AND NATURE OF THE EFFECT

The discrimination of the peculiar properties and character of the effect about to be produced, and of its good or evil nature, occupies the fourth and last division of this part of the subject.

The distinction of the unique properties and characteristics of the effect about to be produced, as well as its positive or negative nature, is the focus of the fourth and final section of this part of the topic.

These properties must be gathered from the power of the stars which control the ruling places, and from the contemperament created by their relative admixture with each other and with the places which they control. For, although the Sun and Moon are the acknowledged sources of all the efficacy and dominion of the stars, and of their strength or weakness, and in a certain manner regulate and command them, still, it is by the theory of the contemperament, produced by the stars in dominion, that the effect is indicated.

These properties must be derived from the power of the stars that govern the ruling areas, and from the balance created by their interactions with each other and with the places they influence. Although the Sun and Moon are recognized as the main sources of all the power and control of the stars, as well as their strength or weakness, and in some way manage them, it is through the theory of balance created by the stars in control that the effect is shown.

In order to understand the indications thus made, it is necessary to begin by attending to the following detail of the effective property of each planet—previously observing, however, that, when any circumstance is said, for the sake of brevity, to come to pass by the general influence of the five planets, their temperament, and the power and assistance they may derive from natures similar to their own, the actual continuance of their own proper constitution, or the casual combination of any analogous influence, arising from fixed stars or places in the zodiac, are all, at the same time, to be kept in view. Consequently, whenever any general remark is herein made relative to the five planets, it will likewise be necessary to bear in mind both their temperament and quality; as fully, indeed, as if the stars themselves had not been named, but only their effective quality and nature. And, it is further to be remembered, that, in every case of compound temperament, not only the combination of the planets with each other requires to be considered, but also that of such fixed stars and zodiacal places as share in the natures of the planets, by being respectively connected with them according to the familiarities already described.

To understand the indications made, we need to start by considering the following details about each planet's effective properties. It’s important to note that when any situation is briefly described as occurring due to the general influence of the five planets, we must also take into account their temperament and the power and support they gain from similar natures. Additionally, we should keep in mind their own constitution and any random combinations from fixed stars or zodiac positions. Therefore, whenever a general observation is made about the five planets, we must also remember their temperament and characteristics, as if we were only discussing their actual quality and nature without naming the stars themselves. Lastly, it's important to remember that in every case of mixed temperament, we need to consider not just how the planets interact with each other, but also how fixed stars and zodiac positions that share similar qualities are connected to them, as explained earlier.

Hence, when Saturn may be sole governor, he will produce disasters concomitant with cold. And, in as far as the event may apply to the human race in particular, it will induce among men lingering diseases, consumptions, declines, rheumatisms, disorders from watery humours, and attacks of the quartan ague; as well as exile, poverty, and a general mass of evils, griefs, and alarms: deaths also will be frequent, but chiefly among persons advanced in age. That part of the brute creation [Pg 59] which is most serviceable to man will likewise suffer, and be destroyed by disease; and men who make use of the animals thus diseased will be infected by them, and perish with them. The atmosphere will become dreadfully chilly and frosty, unwholesome, turbid and gloomy, presenting only clouds and pestilence. Copious and destructive storms of snow and hail will descend, generating and fostering insects and reptiles noxious to mankind. In rivers, and at sea, tempests will be frequent and general, causing disastrous voyages and many shipwrecks; and even fish will be destroyed. The waters of the sea will retire for a time, and again return and produce inundations; rivers will overflow their banks, and cause stagnant pools; and the fruits of the earth, especially such as are necessary to sustain life, will be lost and cut off by blight, locusts, floods, rains, hail, or some similar agency; and the loss will be so extensive as to threaten even famine.

So, when Saturn is the only one in charge, he will bring about disasters linked to cold. In terms of how this affects humanity, it will lead to long-lasting diseases like consumption, decline, rheumatism, ailments caused by excess fluids, and bouts of quartan fever. There will also be banishment, poverty, and a host of problems, sorrows, and fears. Deaths will be common, especially among older individuals. Those animals that are most useful to humans will also suffer and die from illness, and humans who depend on these sick animals will become infected and die with them. The atmosphere will turn extremely cold and frosty, unhealthy, murky, and dark, filled only with clouds and disease. There will be heavy and destructive snow and hailstorms, which will give rise to harmful insects and reptiles. In rivers and at sea, storms will occur frequently, leading to disastrous trips and many shipwrecks; even fish will be lost. The sea will recede for a time and then return, causing floods; rivers will overflow their banks, creating stagnant pools; and essential crops needed for survival will be ruined and destroyed by blight, locusts, floods, rains, hail, or similar factors, with losses so severe that they will threaten famine.

Jupiter, if he should be lord alone, will thoroughly improve and benefit all things. Among mankind, in particular, this planet promotes honour, happiness, content, and peace, by augmenting all the necessaries and comforts of life, and all mental and bodily advantages. It induces also favours, benefits, and gifts emanating from royalty, and adds greater lustre to kings themselves, increasing their dignity and magnanimity: all men, in short, will share in the prosperity created by its influence. With regard to the operation of the event on brutes, those which are domestic and adapted to man’s service will be multiplied and will thrive; while others, which are useless and hostile to man, will be destroyed. The constitution of the atmosphere will be healthy and temperate, filled with gentle breezes and moisture, and favourable to fruits. Navigation will be safe and successful; rivers will rise to their just proportion; fruit and grain, and all other productions of the earth conducive to the welfare and happiness of mankind, will be presented in abundance.

Jupiter, if he were to be the sole ruler, would significantly improve and enhance everything. Specifically for humanity, this planet fosters honor, happiness, fulfillment, and peace by increasing all the essentials and comforts of life, as well as all mental and physical benefits. It also brings favors, benefits, and gifts from those in power, adding greater prestige to kings and enhancing their dignity and greatness: in short, everyone will enjoy the prosperity brought about by its influence. As for its effects on animals, those that are domestic and useful to humans will multiply and thrive, while those that are harmful and useless will be eliminated. The atmosphere will be healthy and mild, filled with gentle breezes and moisture, perfect for growing fruits. Navigation will be safe and successful; rivers will rise to their proper levels; and fruits and grains, along with all other products of the earth that contribute to human welfare and happiness, will be available in abundance.

Mars, when governing alone, generally causes such mischief and destruction as are concomitant with dryness. And, among mankind, foreign wars will be excited, accompanied with intestine divisions, captivity, slaughter, insurrections of the people, and wrath of princes against their subjects; together with sudden and untimely death, the consequence of these disturbances. Feverish disorders, tertian agues, and hæmorrhages will take place, and will be rapidly followed by painful death, carrying off chiefly youthful persons: and conflagration, murder, impiety, every infraction of the law, adultery, rape, robbery, and all kinds of violence will be practised. The atmosphere will be parched by hot, pestilential, and blasting winds, accompanied by drought, lightnings, and fires emitted from the sky. At sea, ships will be suddenly wrecked by the turbulence of the wind and strokes of lightning. Rivers will fail, springs will be dried up, and there will be a scarcity of water proper for food and sustenance. All the creatures and productions of the earth adapted to the use of man, [Pg 60] whether beasts, grain, or fruits, will be damaged or destroyed by excessive heat, by storms of thunder and lightning, or by violent winds; and whatever has been deposited in store will be destroyed or injured by fire, or by heat.

Mars, when ruling alone, usually brings about trouble and destruction associated with dryness. Among people, it will spark foreign wars, along with internal conflicts, captivity, slaughter, uprisings, and anger from leaders towards their subjects; all of this can lead to sudden and untimely deaths as a result of these disruptions. Fevers, intermittent fevers, and bleeding will occur, often followed by painful deaths, especially affecting young people. There will be arson, murder, wrongdoing, lawbreaking, adultery, sexual assault, theft, and all kinds of violence. The atmosphere will be scorched by hot, pestilent, and destructive winds, coupled with drought, lightning, and fiery chaos from the sky. At sea, ships will suddenly sink due to fierce winds and lightning strikes. Rivers will dry up, springs will vanish, and there will be a shortage of water necessary for food and survival. All creatures and resources of the earth meant for human use, whether animals, grains, or fruits, will be harmed or destroyed by extreme heat, storms of thunder and lightning, or strong winds; and whatever has been stored will be ruined or damaged by fire or heat. [Pg 60]

Venus, alone in domination, generally produces the same effects as Jupiter, yet with greater suavity and more agreeably. Glory, honour, and joy will attend mankind; happy marriages will be contracted, and the fortunate pairs will be blest with numerous children. Every undertaking will proceed prosperously, wealth will increase, and the conduct of human life will be altogether pure, simple and pious; due reverence being paid to all holy and sacred institutions, and harmony subsisting between princes and their subjects. The weather also will be of a favourable temperature, cooled by moistening breezes; the air altogether pure and salubrious, frequently refreshed by fertilising showers. Voyages will be performed in safety, and be attended by success and profit. Rivers will be improved, and receive their adequate supply of waters; and all things valuable and useful to mankind, whether animal or vegetable, will abundantly thrive and multiply.

Venus, reigning alone, generally brings about the same effects as Jupiter, but in a smoother and more pleasant way. Glory, honor, and joy will follow humanity; happy marriages will happen, and the fortunate couples will be blessed with many children. Every endeavor will go well, wealth will grow, and human life will be completely pure, simple, and virtuous; proper respect will be given to all holy and sacred institutions, and there will be harmony between rulers and their people. The weather will also be pleasantly mild, with refreshing breezes; the air will be clear and healthy, often refreshed by nourishing rain. Travel will be safe, resulting in success and profit. Rivers will flourish and get the right amount of water; everything valuable and beneficial to people, whether animal or plant, will thrive and multiply abundantly.

Mercury, if possessing dominion, is usually conjoined with one or other of the planets before-mentioned, and is conformed and assimilated to their natures; yet as, in itself, it presents a certain addition to their power, this planet increases the respective impulses of them all. And, in regard to the operation of the event on mankind, it will promote industry and skill in business; but, at the same time, thievish propensities, robberies, and plots of treachery: if configurated with the malefics, it will produce calamities in navigation, and will also cause dry and parching diseases, quotidian fever, cough, consumption, and hæmorrhage. All parts of the ceremonies and services of religion, the affairs of the executive government, as well as manners, customs, and laws, are disposed and regulated by this planet, conformably to its admixture and familiarity with each of the others. And in consequence of the dryness of its nature, arising from its proximity to the Sun, and the rapidity of its motion, it will generate in the atmosphere turbulent, sharp and varied winds, together with thunders, meteors, and lightnings, accompanied by sudden chasms in the earth, and earthquakes: by these means it not unfrequently occasions the destruction of animals and plants assigned to the service of mankind. Besides the foregoing effects, it produces, when in vespertine position, a diminution of waters, and, when matutine, an augmentation.

Mercury, when in control, is usually linked with one or more of the previously mentioned planets, adopting their characteristics. However, since it adds its own influence, it enhances the effects of all of them. Regarding its impact on humanity, it encourages hard work and business skills, but it can also lead to deceitful behavior, theft, and conspiracies. If it aligns with the malefic planets, it can cause disasters in navigation and lead to dry, draining illnesses, daily fevers, coughs, tuberculosis, and bleeding. This planet affects all religious ceremonies and services, as well as government affairs, customs, and laws, according to its interactions with the other planets. Due to its dry nature, stemming from its closeness to the Sun and its quick movement, it creates turbulent, sharp, and shifting winds in the atmosphere, along with thunderstorms, meteors, and lightning, which can result in sudden ground cracks and earthquakes. This often leads to the destruction of animals and plants that serve humanity. In addition to these effects, when Mercury is positioned in the evening, it reduces water levels, and when it is positioned in the morning, it increases them.

Each of the planets, when fully exercising its own separate and distinct influence, will properly produce the peculiar effects above ascribed to it; but should it be combined with others, whether by [Pg 61] configuration, by familiarity arising from the sign in which it may be posited,[95] or by its position towards the Sun, the coming event will then happen agreeably to the admixture and compound temperament which arise from the whole communion actually subsisting among the influencing powers. It would, however, be a business of infinite labour and innumerable combinations, quite beyond the limits of this treatise, to set forth fully every contemperament and all configurations, in every mode in which they can possibly exist; and the knowledge of them must therefore be acquired by particular discrimination in every instance, under the guidance of the precepts of science. Yet the following additional remark must not be here omitted.

Each planet, when operating on its own, will typically create the specific effects attributed to it. However, if it interacts with other planets—whether through their arrangement, their shared qualities based on the sign they're in, or their position relative to the Sun—then the resulting event will reflect the mixture and unique qualities that come from the entire interaction between the influencing forces. It would require an immense amount of effort and countless combinations, far beyond what this text can cover, to thoroughly explain every possible combination and configuration in which they might occur. Therefore, this knowledge must be gained through careful analysis in each case, guided by scientific principles. However, the following additional point should not be overlooked.

The nature of the familiarities, subsisting between the stars, lords of the coming event, and the countries or cities over which the event will extend, requires to be observed; for, should the stars be benefic, and their familiarity with the countries liable to sustain the effect be unimpeded by any opposing influence, they will then exercise the favourable energies of their own nature in a greater degree. And, on the other hand, when any obstacle may intervene to obstruct their familiarity, or when they themselves may be overpowered by some opposing influence, the advantages of their operation will be diminished. Again, should the stars, lords of the coming event, not be benefic, but injurious, their effect will be less severe, provided they may either have familiarity with the countries on which the event will fall, or be restrained by some opposing influence. If, however, they should have no such familiarity, and not be subjected to restraint by any others, endowed with a nature contrary to their own and possessing a familiarity with the countries in question, the evils which they produce will then be more violent and intense. And all these general affections, of whatever kind, whether good or evil, will be principally felt by those persons in whose individual nativities there may be found the same disposition of the luminaries (which are the most essential significators), or the same angles, as those existing during the eclipse which operates the general affection. The same remark equally applies to other persons, in whose nativities the disposition of the luminaries and of the angles may be in opposition to that existing during the eclipse. With respect to these coincidences, the partile agreement, or opposition, of the ecliptical place of the luminaries to the place of either luminary in a nativity, produces an effect at least capable of being guarded against.[96]

The relationships between the stars, which influence upcoming events, and the countries or cities affected by those events, need to be understood. If the stars are favorable and their relationship with the countries that will be impacted is not blocked by any opposing forces, they'll amplify their positive energies. Conversely, if there are obstacles hindering this relationship or if the stars are overwhelmed by opposing influences, their beneficial effects will be weakened. Additionally, if the stars governing the event are not positive but harmful, their negative impact will be less severe if they either have a connection with the countries affected or are limited by some opposing forces. However, if they lack such connections and are not held in check by other entities that have a contrary nature and are familiar with those countries, the harm they cause will be more intense and severe. These general effects, whether positive or negative, will be most strongly experienced by individuals whose personal astrology aligns with the positions of the luminaries (which are key indicators) or the same angles present during the eclipse that prompts the general effect. This observation also applies to others whose astrology conflicts with that of the eclipse. Regarding these alignments, the direct agreement or opposition of the ecliptical position of the luminaries to the positions of either luminary in a personal chart can create an effect that can at least be mitigated.


[Pg 62]

[Pg 62]

CHAPTER X
COLORS IN ECLIPSES; COMETS,
AND SIMILAR PHENOMENA

In investigating general events, it is necessary further to observe the colours or hues displayed during an eclipse, either in the luminaries, or around them; in the shape of rods or rays, or in other similar forms. For, if these colours or hues should be black, or greenish, they portend effects similar to those produced by Saturn’s nature; if white, to those operated by Jupiter; if reddish, to those by Mars; if yellow, to those by Venus; and if of various colours, to those by Mercury.

In examining general events, it's important to take note of the colors or shades visible during an eclipse, whether in the celestial bodies themselves or around them; in the form of beams or rays, or in other similar shapes. If these colors should be black or greenish, they suggest effects similar to those associated with Saturn; if white, those associated with Jupiter; if reddish, those with Mars; if yellow, those linked to Venus; and if there are various colors, those related to Mercury.

And, if the entire bodies of the luminaries be thus coloured, or should the hues extend over all the parts immediately circumjacent to the luminaries, it is an indication that the effects will attach to most parts of the region, or countries, with which the eclipse and its ruling places may be in familiarity. If, however, the colouring should not spread over the whole surface of the luminaries, nor over all the parts around them, but be limited to some particular quarter, then only such a portion of the said countries, as may be indicated by the situation of the visible hues, will be comprehended in the event.

And if the entire bodies of the celestial bodies are colored this way, or if the colors spread over all the areas nearby, it suggests that the effects will impact most regions or countries that the eclipse and its significant places are related to. However, if the coloring doesn’t cover the whole surface of the celestial bodies or all the surrounding areas, but is confined to a specific section, then only that part of the mentioned countries, as indicated by the visible colors, will be affected by the event.

It is also requisite to notice, with respect to general events, the risings or first appearances of those celestial phenomena called comets, whether presenting themselves at ecliptical times or at any other periods. They are displayed in the shape of beams, trumpets, pipes, and in other similar figures, and operate effects like those of Mars and Mercury; exciting wars, heated and turbulent dispositions in the atmosphere, and in the constitutions of men, with all their evil consequences. The parts of the zodiac[97] in which they may be posited when they first appear, and the direction and inclination of their trains, point out the regions or places liable to be affected by the events which they threaten; and the form of the signs indicates the quality and nature of those events, as well as the [Pg 63] genus, class, or kind, on which the effect will fall. The time of their continuance shows the duration of their effect; and their position, with regard to the Sun, the period when it will commence; as, if they first appear matutine, they denote an early commencement; but, if vespertine, that it will be late and tardy.

It’s important to pay attention to general events, especially the rise or first appearances of celestial phenomena known as comets, whether they show up during eclipses or at other times. They appear in the shapes of beams, trumpets, pipes, and other similar figures, and have effects similar to those of Mars and Mercury; they stir up wars, heated disputes in the atmosphere, and in people's minds, along with all their negative consequences. The parts of the zodiac[97] where they first appear, as well as the direction and angle of their tails, indicate the regions likely to be affected by the events they signal. The shapes of the signs reveal the character and nature of those events, along with the category or type that will be impacted. The length of time they persist shows how long their effects will last, and their position in relation to the Sun indicates when those effects will begin; for instance, if they first appear in the morning, it suggests an early start, but if they appear in the evening, it means it will be delayed and slow to happen. [Pg 63]

The general and more comprehensive parts of the consideration regarding regions, countries, and cities, having now been explained, it becomes necessary to discuss certain particular points of the same consideration; that is to say, the annual occurrences which take place at certain fixed seasons, and the chief of which is that called the New Moon of the Year.

The overall and broader aspects of the discussion about regions, countries, and cities have now been covered, so it’s important to address some specific points of the same discussion. This means the annual events that happen at certain set times, the most important of which is the New Moon of the Year.


CHAPTER XI
THE NEW MOON OF THE YEAR

In every annual revolution made by the Sun, the first new Moon of the year is to be considered as the point of the commencement of his circuit; this is evident not only from its denomination, but from its virtue also.[98]

In each yearly cycle of the Sun, the first new moon of the year should be seen as the starting point of its journey; this is clear not just from its name but also from its significance.[98]

The case stands thus: In the ecliptic, which, as circle, has in fact no actual or definite beginning, the two equinoctial and the two tropical points, marked by the equator and the tropical circles, are reasonably assumed as beginnings. And to obviate any doubt as to which of these four points should preferably be considered as the primary beginning (since in the regular simple motion of a circle no part of it has any apparent precedence), the appropriate quality naturally belonging to each of these four points has been taken into consideration by the writers on this subject. And the point of the vernal equinox has been consequently designated by them as the beginning of the year; because, from that time, the duration of the day begins to exceed that of the night, and because the season then produced partakes highly of moisture, which is always a predominant quality in all incipient generation and growth. After the vernal equinox comes the summer solstice; when the day attains its greatest length, and in Ægypt, at the same period, the rise of the Nile takes place and the Dog Star appears. Then follows the autumnal equinox, when all fruits are gathered in, and the sowing of seeds recommences anew; lastly, comes the winter solstice, when the day proceeds from its shortest duration towards its increase.

The situation is as follows: In the ecliptic, which is a circle and has no true starting point, the two equinoctial points and the two tropical points, defined by the equator and the tropical circles, are considered reasonable starting points. To clarify which of these four points should be viewed as the primary starting point (since in the uniform motion of a circle no section has any obvious priority), the specific qualities associated with each of these four points have been assessed by experts on this topic. As a result, the point of the vernal equinox has been named as the beginning of the year; because after this point, the length of day starts to surpass that of night, and the season is characterized by moisture, which is a key quality for all initial growth and development. After the vernal equinox, the summer solstice occurs, when the day is the longest, and in Egypt, during this time, the Nile floods and the Dog Star rises. Next is the autumnal equinox, when all the harvest is collected, and the planting of seeds begins again; finally, the winter solstice arrives, marking the transition from the shortest day towards longer days ahead.

[Pg 64] Although the foregoing arrangement has been adopted by men of science to denote the commencement of the several seasons of the year, it yet seems to be more consonant to nature, and more consistent with the facts, that the combined positions of the Sun, and the new, or full, Moon, which happen when the Sun is nearest to the points above mentioned, should mark the four beginnings; and more especially if such combined positions should produce eclipses: thus, from the new or full Moon, taking place when the Sun is nearest to the first point of Aries, the spring should be dated; from that when the Sun is nearest to the first point of Cancer, the summer; from that when he is nearest to the first point of Libra, the autumn; and from that when he is nearest to the first point of Capricorn, the winter. The Sun not only produces the general qualities and constitutions of the seasons, by means of which very illiterate persons are enabled, in a certain degree, to form predictions, but he also regulates the proper significations of the signs with regard to the excitation of the winds, as well as other general occurrences, more or less subjected to occasional variation. All these general effects are usually brought about by the new or full Moon which takes place at the aforesaid points, and by the configurations then existing between the luminaries and the planets: but there are certain particular consequences which result from the new and full Moon in every sign,[99] and from the transits of the planets; “and which require monthly investigation.”[100]

[Pg 64] While scientists have established a system to mark the start of the seasons, it seems more natural and accurate to have the combined positions of the Sun and the new or full Moon—especially when they lead to eclipses—define the beginnings of the four seasons. Therefore, we could consider spring starting with the new or full Moon when the Sun is closest to the first point of Aries, summer when the Sun is nearest to the first point of Cancer, autumn when it’s close to the first point of Libra, and winter when it’s near the first point of Capricorn. The Sun influences the main characteristics of the seasons, allowing even untrained individuals to make certain predictions, and it also governs how the signs relate to changes in the winds and other common events that can vary. These general effects usually occur due to the new or full Moon at these specific points and the relationships between the luminaries and planets at that time. However, there are also specific outcomes related to the new and full Moon in each sign, [99] and the planets' transits; “and which require monthly investigation.” [100]

It therefore becomes necessary to explain, in the first instance, the particular natures and attributes exercised by each sign in influencing the several constitutions of the weather, as it exists at various times of the year; these natures and attributes shall now be immediately detailed. It will be recollected, that the particular properties of the planets and the fixed stars, as affecting the wind and the atmosphere, as well as the manner in which the entire signs hold familiarity with the winds and the seasons, have been already set forth.

It’s essential, first of all, to explain the specific characteristics and qualities of each sign that influence the different weather patterns throughout the year; these characteristics and qualities will now be detailed. It’s important to remember that the distinct properties of the planets and the fixed stars, which affect the wind and the atmosphere, along with how each sign interacts with the winds and seasons, have already been discussed.


CHAPTER XII
THE SPECIFIC CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SIGNS THAT CAUSE THE VARIOUS CONDITIONS OF THE ATMOSPHERE __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

The sign of Aries has a general tendency, arising from the presence of the Equinox, to promote thunder and hail. Certain of its parts, however, operate in a greater or less degree, according to the nature of the stars [Pg 65] which compose the sign: for instance, the front parts excite rain and wind; the middle are temperate; and those behind are heating and pestilential. The northern parts, also, are heating and pernicious, but the southern cooling and frosty.

The sign of Aries generally tends to bring about thunder and hail, especially due to the presence of the Equinox. However, some parts of it influence weather to varying degrees, depending on the characteristics of the stars that make up the sign. For example, the front parts create rain and wind; the middle is moderate; and the back parts are warming and harmful. The northern parts are also warming and dangerous, while the southern parts are cooling and frosty. [Pg 65]

The sign of Taurus, in its general character, partakes of both temperaments,[102] but is nevertheless chiefly warm. Its front parts, and especially those near the Pleiades, produce earthquakes, clouds and winds: the middle parts are moistening and cooling; those behind, and near the Hyades, are fiery, and cause meteors and lightnings. The northern parts are temperate; the southern turbulent and variable.

The sign of Taurus, in its overall nature, has aspects of both temperaments,[102] but is primarily warm. Its front areas, especially those close to the Pleiades, create earthquakes, clouds, and winds; the middle areas are moist and cool; the back parts, near the Hyades, are fiery and bring meteors and lightning. The northern regions are mild; the southern ones are restless and unpredictable.

Gemini, in its general tendency, is temperate; but its leading parts produce mischief by moisture; its middle parts are entirely temperate; its latter parts mixed and turbulent. The northern parts promote earthquakes and wind; and the southern are dry and heating.

Gemini, overall, is moderate; however, its main traits can create trouble through dampness; its central traits are entirely moderate; its later traits are a mix and chaotic. The northern traits cause earthquakes and wind, while the southern traits are dry and hot.

Cancer is, in the whole, serene and warm, but its anterior part near the Præsepe are oppressively hot and suffocating; the middle parts are temperate, and the latter parts excite wind. And both its northern and southern parts are equally fiery and scorching.

Cancer is overall calm and warm, but the front part near the Præsepe is uncomfortably hot and stifling; the middle sections are moderate, while the back sections create wind. Both the northern and southern parts are equally intense and blazing.

Leo has a general tendency operative of stifling heat. The anterior parts are oppressively and pestilentially hot; yet the middle parts are temperate; and those behind are injurious by means of moisture. The northern parts produce variation and heat, and the southern moisture.

Leo generally tends to have stifling heat. The front parts are oppressively hot; the middle parts are mild; and the back parts are harmful due to moisture. The northern areas create variations and heat, while the southern areas bring moisture.

Virgo, in its general tendency, excites moisture and thunder. The front parts, however, are chiefly warm and noxious; the middle temperate; and the latter parts watery. The northern parts promote wind; the southern are temperate.

Virgo, overall, brings moisture and storms. The front areas are mostly warm and unhealthy; the middle is mild; and the back areas are wet. The northern sections generate wind; the southern ones are moderate.

Libra has a general tendency to produce change and variation. Its front and middle parts are temperate; its hinder parts watery. The northern parts cause variable winds, and the southern are moistening and pestilential.

Libra generally leads to change and variety. Its front and middle sections are mild; its back sections are watery. The northern areas create variable winds, while the southern parts bring moisture and disease.

Scorpio, in its general character, is fiery and productive of thunder. The front parts cause snow; the middle are temperate; the latter parts excite earthquakes. Its northern parts are heating; its southern, moistening.

Scorpio, overall, is fiery and brings thunder. The front sections create snow; the middle is mild; the back parts trigger earthquakes. The northern areas are warm; the southern areas are damp.

Sagittarius, generally, is effective of wind. The front parts are moistening; the middle temperate; and the hinder parts fiery. The northern parts promote wind, and the southern variation and moisture. [Pg 66]

Sagittarius, in general, is associated with wind. The front sections are moist; the middle is temperate; and the back sections are fiery. The northern areas enhance wind, while the southern ones bring variation and moisture. [Pg 66]

Capricorn’s general tendency is to operate moisture. But its anterior parts are pernicious by means of heat, its middle parts are temperate, and its latter parts promote rain. Both its northern and southern parts are injurious by means of moisture.

Capricorn generally tends to manage moisture. However, its front parts are harmful due to heat, its middle parts are moderate, and its back parts encourage rain. Both its northern and southern sections are detrimental because of moisture.

Aquarius, in its general character, is cold and watery. The front parts are moistening; the middle temperate; and the latter parts productive of wind. The northern parts are heating; the southern cause snow.

Aquarius, in its overall nature, is cool and watery. The front areas are damp; the middle is mild; and the back parts create wind. The northern sections are warm; the southern ones bring snow.

Pisces, in its general character, is cold and effective of wind. The front parts are temperate; the middle moistening; the hinder parts highly heating. The northern parts excite wind, and the southern are watery.

Pisces, in its overall nature, is chilly and generates wind. The front sections are moderate; the middle is damp; the back sections are very hot. The northern areas produce wind, and the southern areas are watery.


CHAPTER XIII
METHOD OF CONSIDERATION FOR SPECIFIC
ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS

The first part of the consideration, requisite to form an estimate of the various constitutions liable to take effect in the atmosphere, applies to the general qualities pervading the several quarters of the year, and has therefore the most extended scope. In order to learn these qualities, it is necessary, in every quarter, to observe, as above directed, the new or full Moon which may happen before[103] the period of the Sun’s transit through either tropical or equinoctial [Pg 67] point, whichever it may be; and to arrange the angles (as in the case of a nativity) according to the degree and hour at which the new or full Moon may be found to happen, in every latitude for which the consideration may be desired. Such planets and stars as may have dominion over the places where the said new or full Moon happens, and over the following angle, are then to be noted, in the same manner as that stated with regard to eclipses. And after these preliminary steps have been attended to, a general inference may be drawn as to the proper qualities of the whole quarter; and the intensity or relaxation of their operation is to be contemplated from the natures of the ruling planets and stars, distinguished by the faculties they possess, and by the mode in which they affect the atmosphere.

The first part of the analysis needed to estimate the different conditions that can occur in the atmosphere relates to the overall qualities present during each season of the year, and thus covers a broad range. To understand these qualities, it's essential to observe, as mentioned earlier, the new or full Moon that occurs before [103] the Sun's transition through either the tropical or equinoctial points, depending on which one it is; and to organize the angles (similar to how it’s done in a birth chart) based on the degree and hour of the new or full Moon for each latitude where the assessment is relevant. Next, we note any planets and stars that influence the locations where the new or full Moon occurs, along with the subsequent angle, just like in the case of eclipses. Once these initial steps are completed, we can make a general conclusion about the characteristics of the entire season; and from the nature of the ruling planets and stars, identified by their attributes and the way they influence the atmosphere, we can consider the strength or weakening of their effects.

The second part of the consideration relates to each month, and requires a similar observation of the new or full Moon first taking place on the Sun’s progress through each sign: and it must be remembered, that, if a new Moon should have happened at a period nearest to the Sun’s transit over the past tropical or equinoctial point, the new Moon also in each succeeding sign, until the commencement of the next quarter, are to be observed; but, if a full Moon should have so happened, then similar observation is to be made of each subsequent full Moon. The angles, also, must be duly attended to, as well as the planets and stars ruling in both the places[104]; and especially the nearest phases, applications, and separations of the planets, and their properties. The peculiar qualities of the two places, and the winds, liable to be excited by the planets themselves and by those parts of the signs in which they may be situated, are likewise to be considered; and also that particular wind, which is indicated by the direction of the Moon’s ecliptical latitude. By the aid of these observations, and by weighing and comparing the existing vigour of each of the several properties and qualities, the general constitution of the atmosphere during each month may be predicted.

The second part of the consideration relates to each month and requires a similar look at the new or full Moon first occurring as the Sun moves through each sign. It's important to remember that if a new Moon occurs closest to the Sun's transit over the past tropical or equinoctial point, we should also observe the new Moon in each subsequent sign until the next quarter begins. However, if a full Moon happens instead, we should make similar observations of each following full Moon. We also need to pay attention to the angles as well as the planets and stars ruling in both places[104]; especially the nearest phases, applications, and separations of the planets and their properties. We should consider the unique qualities of both places, and the winds that could be influenced by the planets themselves and by the areas of the signs where they are located. Additionally, we must take into account the specific wind indicated by the direction of the Moon’s ecliptical latitude. With these observations and by weighing and comparing the current strength of each of the various properties and qualities, we can predict the overall atmosphere during each month.

The third part of this consideration appertains to significations applying more minutely, and points out their force or weakness. In [Pg 68] this case, the partile configurations of the Sun and Moon, at the intermediate quarters, as well as at the new or full Moon, are to be attentively regarded; since there is a certain variation in the constitution of the atmosphere, which usually commences about three days before, and sometimes, also, about three days after the Moon has equated her course to the Sun. The configurations effected between the Moon, at each quarterly equation, and the planets, whether by the trine, sextile, or other authorized distances, are also to be observed; because the peculiar property of the change in the constitutions of the atmosphere depends much upon such configurations, and may be accordingly perceived by considering the nature of the influence which the said configurated planets and the signs exercise over the atmosphere and the winds.

The third part of this discussion focuses on more specific meanings and highlights their strengths or weaknesses. In this case, it's important to closely examine the configurations of the Sun and Moon during the intermediate phases, as well as at the new or full Moon, since there's a noticeable change in atmospheric conditions that usually starts about three days before and sometimes continues about three days after the Moon aligns with the Sun. It's also important to take note of the configurations that occur between the Moon during each quarter and the planets, whether through trine, sextile, or other recognized angles, because the unique effects on atmospheric conditions heavily rely on these configurations. This influence can be understood by looking at how these positioned planets and signs affect the atmosphere and winds.

The particular quality of the weather, thus produced, will be more fully established on certain days; especially when the brighter and more efficacious fixed stars maybe near the Sun, either matutine or vespertine; as, when so posited, they most frequently convert the constitution of the atmosphere to an agreement with their own natures: and, when the Luminaries may transit any one of the angles, a similar effect is also produced. At all such positions the particular constitutions of the atmosphere are subject to variation, and thus become alternately more intense or more relaxed in their respective qualities. In this manner, by certain positions of the Moon, the flux and reflux of the sea are caused: and, when the Luminaries may be in angles, a change of the wind is produced, according to the direction of the Moon’s ecliptical latitude.

The specific weather conditions that result from this will be more clearly defined on certain days, especially when brighter and more influential fixed stars are close to the Sun, whether in the morning or evening. When positioned like this, they often change the atmosphere to align with their own characteristics. Additionally, when the celestial bodies pass through any of the key angles, a similar effect occurs. At all these positions, the distinct qualities of the atmosphere can vary, becoming alternately more intense or more relaxed. In this way, certain positions of the Moon cause the rise and fall of the tides, and when the celestial bodies are in the angles, a change in the wind occurs based on the Moon's ecliptical latitude.

Finally, in all these considerations, it must be remembered that the more general and first constituted cause takes precedence, and that the particular cause comes subsequently and secondarily: and, that the operation is in the highest degree confirmed and strengthened, when the stars, which regulate the general effects, may be also configurated towards the production of the particular effects.

Finally, in all these considerations, it should be noted that the more general and primary cause comes first, while the specific cause follows and is secondary. Moreover, the effect is significantly confirmed and enhanced when the stars, which govern the overall outcomes, are also aligned to produce the specific effects.


CHAPTER XIV
THE MEANING OF METEORS

In order to facilitate prognostication in minor and more limited instances, it is important to make further observation of all remarkable appearances occasionally visible around or near the Sun, Moon, and stars. And, for the diurnal state of the atmosphere, the Sun’s rising should be remarked; for the nocturnal state, his setting; but the probable duration of any such state must be considered by reference to the Sun’s configuration with the Moon; for, in most cases, each aspect, made between them, indicates the continuance of a certain state until another aspect shall take place.

To help predict outcomes in smaller and more specific situations, it’s important to keep observing all notable phenomena that can be seen around the Sun, Moon, and stars. For daytime weather, we should pay attention to the Sun’s rise; for nighttime conditions, to its set. However, the likely duration of these states should be considered in relation to the Sun’s position in relation to the Moon, since in most cases, the angles formed between them indicate how long a certain state will last until another angle occurs.

Hence, the Sun, when rising or setting, if he shine clear and open, free [Pg 69] from mists, gloom, and clouds, promises serene weather. But, if he have a wavering or fiery orb, or seem to emit or attract red rays, or if he be accompanied in any one part by the clouds called parhelia, or by other reddish clouds of extended figure, in the form of long rays, he then portends violent winds, chiefly liable to arise from those parts in which the said phenomena may have shown themselves. If he should be pale or lurid, and rise or set encumbered with clouds, or surrounded by halos, he indicates storms and winds coming from the quarter of his apparent situation: and, if he be also accompanied by parhelia, or by lurid or dark rays, similar effects are also threatened from the parts where those appearances may be situated.[105]

Therefore, when the Sun rises or sets clearly and openly, without mists, gloom, or clouds, it promises nice weather. However, if it appears wavering or fiery, or seems to emit or attract red rays, or if there are clouds known as parhelia nearby, or other reddish clouds in long rays, it indicates strong winds, especially likely to come from the areas where these phenomena are visible. If the Sun appears pale or sickly and rises or sets with clouds or surrounded by halos, it suggests storms and winds coming from the direction it seems to be in; and if it’s also accompanied by parhelia or dark rays, similar effects are likely from the areas where those signs appear. [Pg 69]

The Moon’s course is to be carefully observed, at the third day before or after her conjunction with the Sun, her opposition, and her intermediate quarters; for, if she then shine thin and clear, with no other phenomena about her, she indicates serenity; but, if she appear thin and red, and have her whole unilluminated part visible, and in a state of vibration, she portends winds from the quarter of her latitude and declination[106]: and if she appear dark, or pale and thick, she threatens storms and showers. All halos formed around the Moon should also be observed; for, if there appear one only, bright and clear, and decaying by degrees, it promises serene weather; but, if two or three appear, tempests are indicated: and, if they seem reddish and broken, they threaten tempests, with violent and boisterous winds; if dark and thick, they foreshow storms and snow; if black and broken, tempests with both winds and snow; and, whenever a greater number may appear, storms of greater fury are portended.

The Moon's path should be closely observed on the third day before or after she aligns with the Sun, during her opposition, and at her intermediate phases. If she shines faintly and clearly, with no other phenomena around her, it signals calm weather. However, if she looks thin and red, showing her entire dark side and appearing to flicker, it suggests winds coming from her latitude and declination. If she seems dark, or pale and thick, it warns of storms and rain. It's also important to watch for any halos around the Moon; if a single bright and clear halo appears, gradually fading, it indicates fair weather. But if two or three halos show up, it points to storms ahead. If they look reddish and fragmented, it warns of tempests with strong winds; if they are dark and thick, they foreshadow storms and snow; if they are black and broken, they predict tempests accompanied by both winds and snow. And whenever a larger number of halos are present, it signifies storms of greater intensity.

The planets, also, and the brighter fixed stars, occasionally have halos, which indicate certain effects appropriate to their tinctures, and to the nature of the stars around which they may be situated.

The planets and the brighter fixed stars sometimes have halos that indicate specific effects related to their colors and the nature of the stars nearby.

The apparent magnitudes of the fixed stars, and the colours of the luminous masses among them, are likewise to be remarked: for, when the stars appear brighter and larger than usual, they indicate an excitation of the wind from that quarter in which they may be situated. The nebulous mass of the Præsepe in Cancer, and others similar to it, also require observation; as, if in fine weather they appear gloomy and [Pg 70] indistinct, or thick, they thereby threaten a fall of rain; but, if clear and in continual vibration, they announce rough gales of wind.[107]

The brightness of the fixed stars and their colors are also worth noting: when the stars seem brighter and larger than usual, it signals that the wind is picking up from that direction. The cloudy mass of the Præsepe in Cancer and others like it also need attention; if they look dark and unclear or dense during nice weather, it suggests rain is coming. However, if they appear clear and constantly shifting, it indicates strong winds ahead.[Pg 70]

Appearances occasionally visible in the sky, resembling the trains of comets,[108] usually indicate wind and drought; in a degree proportionate to their multitude and continuance.

Appearances that can sometimes be seen in the sky, resembling the tails of comets, [108] usually signal wind and drought; with the effect increasing based on their number and how long they last.

Appearances, resembling shooting or falling stars, when presented in one part only, threaten a movement of wind from that part;[109] when in various and opposite parts, they portend the approach of all kinds of tempestuous weather, together with thunder and lightning. Clouds resembling fleeces of wool will also sometimes presage tempests; and the occasional appearance of the rainbow denotes, in stormy weather, the approach of serenity; in fine weather, storms. And, in a word, all remarkable phenomena, visible in the sky, universally portend that certain appropriate events will be produced, each harmonising with its proper cause, in the manner herein described.

Appearances that look like shooting or falling stars, when seen in one area only, suggest a gust of wind coming from that direction; [109] when they're in different and opposing areas, they signal the arrival of all sorts of stormy weather, including thunder and lightning. Clouds that look like fluffy wool can also sometimes indicate storms; and the rare sight of a rainbow during bad weather suggests calm is coming; in good weather, it hints at storms. In short, all unusual sights in the sky generally indicate that specific related events will occur, each corresponding with its appropriate cause, as described here.

After the forgoing brief investigation of the more limited as well as more extensive significations, regarding general events, it becomes proper to proceed to the doctrine of genethliacal prognostication, or judgments of individual nativities.

After the brief exploration of both the narrower and broader meanings related to general events, it is appropriate to move on to the study of horoscopic prediction or the analysis of individual birth charts.

End of Book II

**End of Book II**

[Pg 71]

[Pg 71]


BOOK THE THIRD


CHAPTER I
INTRODUCTION

In the preceding pages, such events as effect the world generally have been discussed in priority; because they are operated by certain principal and paramount causes, which are, at the same time, predominant over particular and minor events applicable only to the separate properties and natural peculiarities of individuals. The foreknowledge of these particular events is called Genethlialogy, or the science of Nativities.

In the previous pages, we've talked about events that impact the world as a whole first; because they are driven by key causes that also take precedence over specific, lesser events that only relate to the unique characteristics and traits of individuals. The ability to predict these specific events is known as Genethlialogy, or the science of Nativities.

It must be remembered that the causation, by which all effects, whether general or particular, are produced and foreknown, is essentially one and the same; for the motions of the planets, and of the Sun and Moon, present the operative causation of events which happen to any individual, as well as of those which happen generally; and the foreknowledge of both may be obtained by the several creatures and substances, subjected to the influence of the heavenly bodies, and by due attention to the changes produced in those natures, by the configurations displayed in the Ambient by the planetary motion.

It should be remembered that the cause behind all effects, whether general or specific, is fundamentally the same. The movements of the planets, as well as the Sun and Moon, show the causal relationships of events that affect individuals and those that occur in general. Both can be anticipated through the various creatures and substances that are influenced by the celestial bodies, paying close attention to the changes in these natures caused by the configurations displayed in the surroundings due to planetary motion.

Still, however, the causes of general events are greater and more complete than those of particular events; and, although it has been now stated, that one single identical power supplies both the causation and the foreknowledge of general as well as particular events, yet there does not belong to the two sorts of events a similar origin or beginning, at which observation of the celestial configurations must be made, for prognostication. In regard to general events, the dates of origin and commencement are many and various; for all general events cannot be traced to one origin, neither is their origin always considered by means of the matter subjected to their operation, for it may be also established by circumstances occurring in the Ambient and presenting the causation. It may, in fact, almost be said that they all originate in eminent eclipses of the Luminaries, and in remarkable transits made by the stars, at various times.

Still, the causes of general events are broader and more comprehensive than those of specific events. It's been stated that a single identical power provides both the causation and the foresight of general and specific events. However, these two types of events do not share a similar origin or starting point, which is crucial for observing celestial configurations for predictions. For general events, the starting dates are numerous and varied; not all general events can be traced back to a single origin, nor is their origin always considered in relation to the matter they affect. It can also be determined by circumstances occurring in the environment that present the causation. In fact, it could almost be said that they all stem from significant eclipses of the luminaries and from notable movements of the stars at different times.

Particular events, however, which concern men individually, may be traced to one origin, single as well as manifold. Their origin is single, in respect to the primary composition of the nascent man; but it is also manifold, in respect to other circumstances subsequently indicated by dispositions in the Ambient, correlative to the primary [Pg 72] origin. In all particular events, the origin, or birth, of the subjected matter itself, must, of course, be the primary origin; and, in succession thereto, the various beginnings of other subsequent circumstances are to be assumed. Hence, therefore, at the origin of the subjected matter, all the properties and peculiarities of its contemperament must be observed; and then the subsequent events, which will happen at certain periods, sooner or later, are to be considered by means of the division of time, or the scale of the ensuing years.[110]

Specific events that affect individuals can be traced back to a single source, even though they can also have multiple origins. Their main source is singular when we look at the initial makeup of a developing person; however, it can also be diverse when considering other factors that arise later based on the environment, which relate back to the original source. In every specific event, the source or origin of the subject matter itself has to be the primary origin, followed by the various beginnings of other later circumstances. Therefore, at the origin of the subject matter, all its attributes and characteristics need to be recognized, and the subsequent events that will occur over time should be analyzed based on the timeline or the progression of the following years. [Pg 72]


CHAPTER II
THE CONCEPTION AND THE BIRTH; BY
WHICH LATER EVENT THE ANIMAL LEAVES THE WOMB,
AND ENTERS A DIFFERENT STATE OF EXISTENCE

The actual moment, in which human generation commences, is, in fact, by nature, the moment of the conception itself; but, in efficacy with regard to subsequent events, it is the parturition or birth.

The actual moment when human life begins is, in reality, at the moment of conception itself; however, in terms of its impact on subsequent events, it is the act of birth.

In every case, however, where the actual time of conception may be ascertained, either casually or by observation, it is useful to remark the effective influence of the configuration of the stars as it existed at that time; and, from that influence, to infer the future personal peculiarities of mind and body. For the seed will, at the very first, and at once, receive its due quality, as then dispensed by the Ambient; and, although in subsequent periods its substance is varied by growth and conformation, it will still, by the laws of nature, congregate, during its growth, only such matter as may be proper to itself, and will become more and more imbued with the peculiar property of the first quality impressed on it at the time of conception. These precepts must always be attended to, when that time can be ascertained.

In every case where the exact time of conception can be determined, whether by chance or observation, it's important to note the significant influence of the star configuration at that moment. From that influence, we can predict future personal traits, both mental and physical. The seed will immediately receive its specific qualities based on what was present in the atmosphere at that time. While its essence may change as it grows and develops, it will still naturally attract and incorporate only those materials that are suitable for it, becoming increasingly shaped by the unique characteristics imparted to it at the moment of conception. These guidelines should always be considered when the time of conception can be identified.

But, if the time of conception cannot be precisely made out, that of the birth must be received at the original date of generation; for it is virtually the most important, and is in no respect deficient, on comparison with the primary origin by conception, except in one view only; viz. that the origin by conception affords the inference of occurrences which take effect previously to the birth, whereas the origin by birth can, of course, be available only for such as arise subsequently. And, although the birth should in strictness be called the secondary beginning, while the conception might be insisted on as the primary beginning, it is still found to be equal to the conception in its efficacy, and much more complete, although later in time. For the conception may, in fact, be said to be the generation of mere human seed, but the birth that of man himself; since the infant at its birth [Pg 73] acquires numerous qualities which it would not possess while in the womb, and which are proper to human nature alone; “such, for instance, as the particular action of the senses and the movement of the body and limbs.”[111] Besides, even if the position of the Ambient, actually existing at the birth, cannot be considered to assist in forming and engendering the particular shape and qualities of the infant, it is nevertheless still auxiliary to the infant’s entrance into the world: because nature, after completing the formation in the womb, always effects the birth in immediate obedience to some certain position of the Ambient, corresponding and sympathising with the primary position which operated the incipient formation. It is therefore perfectly admissible, and consistent with reason, that the configuration of the stars, as it exists at the time of birth, although it cannot be said to possess any share of the creative cause, should still be considered to act in signification, as fully as the configuration at the time of conception; because it has, of necessity, a power corresponding to that configuration which actually possessed the creative cause.

But if the timing of conception can't be pinpointed exactly, the timing of birth should be taken as the original moment of creation; because it’s essentially the most significant and is not lacking in comparison to the initial moment of conception, except in one way: the moment of conception suggests events that happen before birth, while the moment of birth can only relate to events after that point. Although birth might technically be called the secondary start, and conception insisted upon as the primary one, it still proves equally effective as conception and is much more complete, even if it happens later. Conception can really be seen as the generation of basic human seed, but birth represents the emergence of a person; since the newborn obtains many qualities at birth that it wouldn't have while in the womb, qualities that are unique to human nature; “such as the specific functioning of the senses and the movement of the body and limbs.” Moreover, even if the position of the environment at the time of birth doesn’t directly shape the specific form and attributes of the baby, it still plays a role in the baby's entry into the world: because nature, after finishing the formation in the womb, always causes birth in response to a certain position of the environment, which corresponds and aligns with the initial positioning that influenced the beginning of formation. Therefore, it makes perfect sense and aligns with reason that the arrangement of the stars at birth, even though it can't be said to have any part in the creative cause, should still be considered as influential as the arrangement at conception; because it necessarily has a power that corresponds to that configuration which did influence the creative cause.

In speaking of the practicability of prognostication, in the commencement of this treatise, the intention of setting forth this part of the subject, now under consideration, in a scientific manner, has been already notified. The ancient mode of prediction, founded on the commixture of all the stars, and abounding in infinite complication and diversity, will therefore be passed over; and, in fact, any attempt to detail it, however accurately and minutely made, in conformity to the several precepts given in the traditions relating to it, would prove unserviceable and unintelligible: it is therefore entirely abandoned. And the doctrine, now presented, comprehending every species of event liable to happen, and explaining all the effective influences generally exercised by the stars, in their separate qualities, over every species of event, shall be delivered succinctly, and in agreement with the theory of nature.

In discussing the feasibility of forecasting at the start of this work, the goal of presenting this aspect of the topic in a scientific way has already been mentioned. The ancient method of prediction, based on the combination of all the stars and filled with endless complexity and variety, will be overlooked; in fact, any attempt to explain it, no matter how precise and detailed, according to the traditional guidelines related to it, would be ineffective and confusing: it is therefore completely set aside. The theory now presented will cover all kinds of events that could occur and will clarify all the significant influences generally exerted by the stars, in their individual characteristics, over each type of event, and this will be conveyed clearly and in accordance with the natural theory.

With this view, certain places in the Ambient, regulating the formation of all inferences of the events liable to affect mankind, are appointed as a kind of mark to which the whole theory of those inferences is applied, and to which the operative powers of the stars, when holding familiarity with the said places, are in a general manner directed: in the same way as, in archery, the arrow is directed to the target. And any event, which depends on the compound temperament of many various natures and influences together, must be left to the discretion of the artist, who, like the skilful archer, must himself judge of the best mode of hitting the mark.

With this perspective, certain locations in the environment, which influence all conclusions about events that could impact humanity, are designated as reference points for the entire theory of those conclusions. The active forces of the stars, when associated with these locations, are generally directed toward them, similar to how an arrow is aimed at a target in archery. Any event that relies on the combined characteristics of various natures and influences must be left to the skill of the practitioner, who, like a skilled archer, must determine the best way to hit the target.

To proceed methodically and in due order, it is proper to commence by investigating such general events as are open to consideration, and liable to have happened, or to happen, at the actual origin by birth; [Pg 74] since, from that origin, all things necessary to be investigated may be gathered; as before stated. Yet, if a previous inquiry, by means of the primary origin by conception, should nevertheless be desired and undertaken, such an inquiry may still in some degree assist prognostication; although only in regard to properties and qualities dispensed and imbibed at the time of conception.

To move forward methodically and in the right order, it's best to start by looking into general events that can be considered and that could have occurred or might occur at the actual point of birth; [Pg 74] since from that starting point, all necessary elements for investigation can be gathered, as previously mentioned. However, if there's a desire to explore a previous inquiry based on the initial origin of conception, such an inquiry can still somewhat aid prediction, but only concerning the traits and qualities associated with the time of conception.


CHAPTER III
THE DEGREE GOING UP

There frequently arises some uncertainty as to the precise time of birth, and some apprehensions lest it should not be accurately noted. In most cases, the actual minute of the hour, at which the birth happens, can only be ascertained by making a scientific observation, at the time, with an horoscopical astrolabe[112]; for all other instruments, employed in ascertaining the hour, are almost fallacious, although used by many persons with much care and attention. The clepsydra,[113] for instance, is subject to error, because the flow of the water will, from various causes, proceed irregularly: and the sundial is often incorrectly placed, and its gnomon often distorted from the true meridian line. To obviate the difficulty arising from the inaccuracy of these instruments, it seems highly necessary to present some method by which the actually ascending degree of the zodiac may be easily ascertained, in a natural and consistent manner.

There’s often some uncertainty about the exact time of birth, and some worry that it might not be recorded correctly. In most cases, the exact minute of birth can only be determined by making a scientific observation at the time using a horoscopical astrolabe[112]; because all other tools used to figure out the hour are generally unreliable, even though many people use them carefully. The clepsydra,[113] for example, can be inaccurate because the flow of water can be irregular for various reasons; and sundials are often misplaced, and their gnomon is frequently misaligned with the true meridian line. To overcome the challenges caused by the inaccuracies of these instruments, it’s important to present a method for easily determining the actual ascending degree of the zodiac in a natural and consistent way.

And in order to attain this essential point, it is necessary first to set down the ordinary degree which, by the Doctrine of Ascensions,[114] is found near the ascendant at the presumed hour. After this has been done, the new or full Moon, whichever it may be, that may take place next before the time of parturition, must be observed: and, if a new Moon, it will be necessary to mark exactly the degree of the conjunction of the two luminaries; but, if a full Moon, the degree of luminary only which may be above the earth during the parturition. After this, it must be observed what planets have dominion over the said degree: and their dominion depends always on the five following prerogatives, viz. on triplicity, house, exaltation, terms, and phase [Pg 75] or configuration[115]; that is to say, a planet, eligible to dominion, must be connected with the degree in question either by one, or more, or all of these prerogatives.

And to reach this crucial point, it's important first to note the typical degree that, according to the Doctrine of Ascensions, is found near the ascendant at the expected time. Once that's done, the new or full Moon—whichever occurs just before the time of childbirth—needs to be observed. If it's a new Moon, you should precisely mark the degree of the conjunction between the two luminaries; if it's a full Moon, note only the degree of the luminary that is above the earth at the time of childbirth. After that, you need to check which planets have control over that degree, and their control is always based on the following five factors: triplicity, house, exaltation, terms, and phase or configuration; in other words, a planet eligible for control must be associated with the degree in question by one, more, or all of these factors. [Pg 75]

If, therefore, there may be found any one planet properly qualified in all or most of these prerogatives, the exact degree, which it occupies in that sign in which it may be posited during the parturition, is to be remarked; and it is then to be inferred that a degree of the same numerical denomination was actually ascending, at the precise time of birth, in that sign which appears, by the Doctrine of Ascensions, to be nearest to the ascendant.[116]

If one planet meets all or most of these qualifications, it's important to note the exact degree it occupies in the sign during birth. From this, we can conclude that a degree with the same number was actually rising at the moment of birth in the sign closest to the ascendant.[116]

But when two planets, or more, may be equally qualified in the manner prescribed, it must be seen which of them may transit, during the parturition, a degree nearest in number to the ordinary degree shown by the Doctrine of Ascensions to be then ascending; and that said degree, nearest in number, is to be considered as pointing out the numerical denomination of the degree actually ascending. And when the degrees of two planets, or more, may closely and equally approximate in numerical denomination to the ordinary degree found by the Doctrine of Ascensions, the degree of that planet which possesses further claims, by connection with the angles and by its own condition, is to regulate the number of the actually ascending degree.

But when two or more planets are equally qualified in the way described, we need to see which one can transit during labor at a degree closest in number to the ordinary degree indicated by the Doctrine of Ascensions that is currently ascending; this degree, nearest in number, should be regarded as indicating the numerical value of the degree that is actually ascending. If the degrees of two or more planets are closely and similarly aligned in numerical value with the ordinary degree found by the Doctrine of Ascensions, the degree of the planet that has additional significance due to its connections with the angles and its own status will determine the number of the degree that is actually ascending.

It must however be observed, that if the actual distance of the degree, in which the ruling planet may be posited, from the ordinary degree ascending, be found to exceed its distance from the ordinary degree of the mid-heaven; the numerical denomination, found in the way above mentioned, is then to be considered as applicable to the actual degree in culmination; and the other angles are to be arranged in conformity therewith.[117]

It should be noted, however, that if the actual distance of the degree where the ruling planet is located exceeds its distance from the usual degree at the Ascendant, then the numerical value determined in the manner described above should be considered applicable to the actual degree at culmination; and the other angles should be arranged accordingly.[117]


CHAPTER IV
DISTRIBUTION OF THE DOCTRINE OF Nativities

After due attention to the preceding instructions, the doctrine of genethliacal prognostication should be separately and distinctly considered, for the sake of order and perspicuity, in its first, second and successive divisions or heads of inquiry. It will thus be found to present a mode of investigation, at once practicable, competent and agreeable to nature.

After paying close attention to the previous instructions, the concept of genethliacal prognostication should be examined separately and clearly, for the sake of organization and clarity, in its first, second, and subsequent divisions or areas of inquiry. This will reveal a method of investigation that is practical, effective, and in harmony with nature.

One division is applicable only to certain circumstances established previously to the birth; as, for instance, to those which concern the [Pg 76] parents; another to circumstances, which may be established both before and after the birth; as those respecting brothers and sisters; another to circumstances actually occurring at the very time of birth, and immediately consequent thereupon: and this head of inquiry embraces various points, and is by no means simple: and the last division relates to events liable to take place after the birth, at various periods, earlier or later; and it involves a still more diversified theory.

One division only applies to certain situations that are decided before birth, like those involving the parents. Another division concerns situations that can be established both before and after birth, such as those related to siblings. Another division looks at circumstances happening at the exact moment of birth and the immediate aftermath. This area of inquiry includes various factors and isn’t straightforward. The final division involves events that might happen after birth, at different times, either sooner or later, and it covers an even broader range of theories.

Thus, the questions to be solved, in regard to the actual circumstances of the birth itself, are, whether the production will be male or female; twins, or even more; whether it will be monstrous; and whether it will be reared.

Thus, the questions that need to be answered about the actual circumstances of the birth itself are whether the baby will be a boy or a girl; if there will be twins, or more; whether it will be abnormal; and whether it will be raised.

The questions of the periods subsequent to the birth relate first to the duration of life (which is distinct from the question of rearing), then to the shape and figure of the body, to the bodily affections, and to injuries or defects in the members. After these, further inquiry is instituted as to the quality of the mind, and the mental affections; then, as to fortune, in regard to rank and honours as well as wealth. In succession to these, the character of the employment or profession is sought out; then, the questions relative to marriage and offspring, and to consentaneous friendship, are to be considered; then, that concerning travel; and, lastly, that concerning the kind of death which awaits the native. The question of death, although depending, in fact, upon the same influence as the question of the duration of life, seems yet to find its proper situation in being placed last in the series.

The questions that arise after birth first relate to how long a person will live (which is different from the issue of upbringing), then to the person's physical appearance, health issues, and any injuries or disabilities. Following that, we look into the quality of the mind and emotional state; then, we consider one's fortune in terms of social status, honors, and wealth. Next, we examine the nature of one's job or career; then we address questions about marriage and children, as well as trustworthy friendships; after that, we look at travel; and finally, we consider the type of death that awaits the individual. The topic of death, while actually linked to the same factors as life expectancy, seems to be more appropriately placed at the end of this sequence.

On each of the foregoing points of inquiry, the doctrine and precepts to be followed shall be thoroughly and succinctly detailed; but all idle conceits, promulgated by many persons without any foundation capable of sustaining the test of reason, shall be utterly avoided, in deference to the only true agency, which is derived from primal Nature herself. It is only upon clearly effective influences that this treatise is established: and all matters, which are open to an authorized mode of inquiry by means of the theory of the stars, and their positions and aspects with regard to appropriate places, shall be fully discussed here; but the divination by lots and numbers, unregulated by any systematic causation, must remain unnoticed.

On each of the points mentioned above, the principles and guidelines to be followed will be clearly and concisely laid out; however, any baseless ideas put forth by various people without any reason to support them will be completely disregarded, in favor of the only genuine source, which comes from nature itself. This discussion is based solely on clearly effective influences: all topics that can be examined through an authorized method based on the theory of the stars and their positions and relationships to specific locations will be thoroughly addressed here; however, divination through lots and numbers, without any systematic reasoning, will not be covered.

The brief remarks, immediately following, are applicable to all cases, generally, and are now at once stated, to avoid the repetition of them under each particular division or head of inquiry.

The short comments that follow apply to all cases in general and are stated here to avoid repeating them under each specific section or topic of discussion.

Firstly, notice must be taken of that place in the zodiac which corresponds, according to the scheme of the nativity with the particular division of inquiry; for example, the place of the mid-heaven is adapted to questions comprised under the head of employment or profession; and the Sun’s place to those relative to the concerns of the father.

Firstly, attention should be given to the section of the zodiac that aligns with the specific area of inquiry according to the natal chart; for instance, the mid-heaven is relevant to questions about career or profession, while the position of the Sun pertains to issues related to the father's influence.

Secondly, after the proper place has thus been duly ascertained, the planets holding right of dominion there, by any of the five prerogatives hereinbefore mentioned, are to be observed; and, if any [Pg 77] one planet be found to be lord by all these prerogatives, that planet must be admitted as the ruler of the event liable to happen under that particular head of inquiry. If, however, two or three planets hold dominion, that one among them, which may have most claims to the place in question, must be selected as the ruler.

Secondly, after identifying the proper location, the planets that have authority there, based on any of the five privileges mentioned earlier, should be noted. If one planet is found to be dominant by all these privileges, that planet must be recognized as the ruler of the event expected to occur under that specific topic. However, if two or three planets share dominance, the one among them with the strongest claims to the location in question should be chosen as the ruler. [Pg 77]

Thirdly, the natures of the ruling planet and of the signs, in which itself and the place which it thus controls may severally be situated, are to be considered as indicating the quality of the event.

Thirdly, the characteristics of the ruling planet and the signs it governs, along with the locations it controls, should be taken into account as they indicate the quality of the event.

Fourthly, the proportionate vigour and strength, or weakness, with which the dominion is exercised, as exhibited either by the actual cosmical position of the ruling planet, or by its position in the scheme of the nativity, will point out to what extent and with what force the event will operate. And a planet is found to be cosmically powerful when in one of its own places,[118] or when oriental, or swift in course; and it is strong in the scheme of the nativity, when transiting an angle or succedent house; especially those of the ascendant, or of the mid-heaven. But it is cosmically weaker, when not in one of its own places; or when occidental, or retarded in its course; and in respect to the scheme of the nativity, it is weak when cadent from the angles.

Fourthly, the relative power and strength, or weakness, with which control is exercised, as shown either by the current position of the ruling planet or by its position in the birth chart, will indicate how significantly and forcefully the event will unfold. A planet is considered cosmically strong when it's in one of its own signs, or when it's in an eastern position, or moving quickly; and it’s strong in the birth chart when it’s in an angular or succedent house, especially in the first house (ascendant) or the tenth house (mid-heaven). On the other hand, it is cosmically weaker when it’s not in one of its own signs, or when it's in a western position, or moving slowly; and in terms of the birth chart, it is weak when it's in a cadent position from the angles.

Lastly; the general time, about which the event will take place, is to be inferred from the ruling planet’s matutine or vespertine position, in regard to the Sun and the ascendant, and from the circumstance of its being situated in an angle, or a succedent house. As, if it be matutine, or in an angle, its influence operates earlier and more promptly; but, if vespertine or in a succedent house, later and more tardily. And, in reference to this point, the quadrant which precedes the Sun, and that which precedes the ascendant, together with the quadrants opposite to these, are oriental and matutine; and the other quadrants, following the former, are occidental and vespertine.

Lastly, the general time when the event will happen is to be inferred from the ruling planet's position in the morning or evening in relation to the Sun and the ascendant, as well as whether it's located in an angle or a succedent house. If the planet is in the morning or in an angle, its influence will take effect sooner and more decisively; however, if it's in the evening or in a succedent house, its effect will occur later and more slowly. Regarding this point, the quadrant before the Sun and the one before the ascendant, along with the quadrants opposite to these, are considered eastern and morning; the remaining quadrants that follow are western and evening.


CHAPTER V
THE PARENTS

Under each head of inquiry, the proposed investigation must be entered upon in the manner mentioned in the preceding chapter: and, to proceed in due order, the circumstances relating to the parents require to be first disposed of.

Under each area of investigation, the proposed study must begin as described in the previous chapter; and, to maintain proper order, the circumstances concerning the parents need to be addressed first.

In conformity with nature, the Sun and Saturn are allotted to the person of the father; and the Moon and Venus to that of the mother: and the mode in which these luminaries and planets may be found posited, with reference to each other, as well as to other planets and stars, will intimate the situation of affairs affecting the parents.

In line with nature, the Sun and Saturn are assigned to the father, while the Moon and Venus are assigned to the mother. The positions of these celestial bodies in relation to each other, as well as other planets and stars, will suggest the status of matters concerning the parents.

Thus, for example, the degree of their fortune and wealth will be [Pg 78] indicated by the doryphory,[119] or attendants of the luminaries. If the luminaries be accompanied (either in the same signs in which themselves are placed, or in the signs next following), by the benefics, and by such stars or planets as are of the same tendency as themselves, a conspicuous and brilliant fortune is presaged: especially, should the Sun be attended by matutine stars, and the Moon by vespertine,[120] and these stars be also well established in the prerogatives before mentioned. Likewise, if Saturn or Venus be matutine, and in proper face,[121] or in an angle, it foreshows the prosperity of either parent respectively, according to the scheme.[122] If, however, the luminaries hold no connection with the planets, and be unattended by any doryphory, the adverse fortunes of the parents, their humble state and obscurity, and then denoted; especially, if Saturn and Venus may not be favourably constituted. The parents are also subjected to a state of vicissitude, never rising above mediocrity, when the luminaries may have a doryphory of a condition or tendency foreign to their own: as, for instance, when Mars may ascend near in succession to the Sun, or Saturn to the Moon; or if the benefics be found constituted unfavourably, and not in conformity with their own natural condition and tendency. But should the part of fortune, as shown by the scheme of the nativity, be found in a favourable position, and in consonance with the doryphory of the Sun and Moon, the estate of the parents will then remain steady and secure. If, however, the position be discordant and adverse, or if the malefics compose the doryphory, the parents’ estate will be unproductive and even burthensome.

Thus, for example, the level of their fortune and wealth will be [Pg 78] indicated by the attendants, or doryphory, of the luminaries. If the luminaries are accompanied (either in the same signs they're in or in the next signs over) by the benefics, and by other stars or planets with a similar influence, a notable and bright fortune is predicted; especially if the Sun is attended by morning stars, and the Moon by evening ones, and these stars are also well placed according to the earlier mentioned criteria. Likewise, if Saturn or Venus is in the morning and properly placed, or in a strong position, it suggests the prosperity of one of the parents, according to the chart. If, however, the luminaries have no connection with the planets and aren’t accompanied by any attendants, it indicates the adverse fortunes of the parents, their humble status, and obscurity, especially if Saturn and Venus are not in a favorable position. The parents will also experience fluctuations, never rising above mediocrity, when the luminaries have attendants that are contrary to their own nature: for instance, when Mars rises close to the Sun, or Saturn to the Moon; or if the benefics are unfavorably positioned and don’t align with their natural tendencies. But if the part of fortune, as shown by the birth chart, is in a favorable position and aligns with the attendants of the Sun and Moon, the parents’ situation will remain stable and secure. If, however, the position is discordant and unfavorable, or if the malefics make up the attendants, the parents' situation will be unfruitful and burdensome.

The probable duration of the lives of the parents is to be inferred by means of other configurations. And, in the case of the father, a long life is presaged, if Jupiter, or Venus, be in any mode whatever configurated with either the Sun, or Saturn; or, also, if Saturn himself make an harmonious configuration with the Sun; (that is to say, either by the conjunction, the sextile, or the trine); provided such configuration be fully and strongly established and confirmed:[123] and, when not so established and confirmed, although it does not actually denote a short life, yet it will not then equally presage a long life. [Pg 79]

The expected lifespan of the parents can be determined through other configurations. For the father specifically, a long life is indicated if Jupiter or Venus is aligned with either the Sun or Saturn in any way; or if Saturn forms a harmonious connection with the Sun (meaning through conjunction, sextile, or trine); as long as that configuration is strong and well-established. When such a configuration is not strong and well-established, while it may not suggest a short life, it also won’t indicate a long life. [123] [Pg 79]

If however the planets be not posited in the manner just described; and if Mars be elevated above,[124] or ascend in succession to the Sun, or to Saturn; or, even, should Saturn himself not be in consonance with the Sun, but configurated with it by the quartile or opposition, and if, when thus circumstanced, both he and the Sun should be posited in cadent houses, it is then indicated that the father is liable to infirmities; but, if in angles or succedent houses, the father will live only a short life, and suffer from various bodily injuries and diseases. The shortness of his life is particularly intimated by the position of the Sun and Saturn in the first two angles, viz. the ascendant and the mid-heaven, or in their succedent houses; and his affliction by diseases and injuries, when they may be posited in the two other angles, the western and the lower heaven, or in the houses succedent thereto. And, if Mars be aspected to the Sun in the way before-mentioned, the father will die suddenly, or receive injury in his face or eyes; but, should Mars be so aspected to Saturn, he will be afflicted with contractions of the muscles or limbs, and with fevers and disorders proceeding from inflammation and wounds; or even death may be the consequence. And even Saturn himself, if badly configurated with the Sun, will also inflict disease and death on the father, by inducing such particular disorders as are incidental from watery humour.

If the planets are not positioned as previously described; and if Mars is higher than [124] or moves towards the Sun or Saturn; or, if Saturn doesn’t align well with the Sun, but rather forms a square or opposition with it, and if both the Sun and Saturn are in weaker houses, it suggests the father may face health issues. However, if they are in strong or supportive houses, the father’s life will be short and he will suffer from various ailments. The shortness of his life is especially indicated when the Sun and Saturn are in the first two strongest positions, which are the ascendant and the midheaven, or in their supportive houses; and he will experience health problems and injuries if they are positioned in the other two strong positions, the western and lower heavens, or in the houses following them. If Mars is aligned with the Sun as mentioned earlier, the father may die unexpectedly or sustain injuries to his face or eyes; but if Mars is aligned with Saturn, he may suffer from muscle or limb contractions, fevers, and conditions caused by inflammation and wounds; or even death could result. Likewise, if Saturn has a bad alignment with the Sun, it could lead to illness and death for the father, by causing specific health issues related to excess fluid.

The foregoing observations are applicable to the father, and those which follow must be attended to in the case of the mother.

The comments above apply to the father, and the following points must be considered for the mother.

Should the Sun be configurated, in any mode whatever, with the Moon or Venus, or, should Venus herself be harmoniously configurated with the Moon, either by the sextile, the trine, or the conjunction, the mother will live long.

Should the Sun be aligned in any way with the Moon or Venus, or if Venus is in harmony with the Moon through a sextile, trine, or conjunction, the mother will have a long life.

If, however, Mars be succedent to the Moon and Venus, or in quartile or opposition to them, or, if Saturn be similarly aspected to the Moon only, and both of them be void of course or retrograde, or cadent, adverse accidents and disease will attend the mother; should they, on the other hand, be swift in motion and placed in angles, they portend that her life will be short, or grievously afflicted. Their position in the oriental angles, or succedent houses, particularly denotes the shortness of her life; and, in those which are occidental, her affliction. In the same manner, should Mars be thus aspected to the Moon (and should that luminary at the same time be oriental), the mother’s sudden death, or some injury in her face or eyes, will be produced: and, if the Moon be then occidental, death will be occasioned by miscarriage in parturition, by inflammation, or by wounds. Such are the effects which ensue from these aspects made by Mars to the Moon; but, should he make them to Venus, death will then take place from fever, some latent disease, or sudden sickness. Saturn’s aspect[125] to the Moon, when she is oriental, inflicts on the mother disease and death from extreme colds, or fevers; but, should the Moon be occidental, the danger arises from affections of the womb, or from consumption.

If Mars is positioned after the Moon and Venus, or is at a right angle or opposite to them, or if Saturn has a similar position to the Moon only, and both are void of course, retrograde, or positioned in areas of decline, it will lead to negative events and illness affecting the mother. Conversely, if they are moving quickly and located in strong positions, it suggests that her life will be short or she will face serious challenges. Their placement in the eastern angles or the succeeding houses particularly indicates a short life for her; in the western houses, it indicates her suffering. Similarly, if Mars is positioned this way in relation to the Moon (and if the Moon is in an eastern position at that time), it could lead to the mother's sudden death, or some kind of injury to her face or eyes. If the Moon is in a western position, then death could occur due to miscarriage during childbirth, inflammation, or wounds. These are the effects that result from Mars's aspects to the Moon; however, if Mars makes these aspects to Venus, death will occur due to fever, some hidden illness, or sudden sickness. Saturn's aspect to the Moon, when it is in an eastern position, causes the mother illness and death from extreme colds or fevers; but if the Moon is in a western position, danger arises from issues related to the womb or from tuberculosis.

[Pg 80] In the investigation of all these circumstances, it is highly essential that the properties of the signs, in which are situated the stars actuating the influence, should be also taken into consideration; and that, by day, the Sun and Venus should be principally observed; and by night, Saturn and the Moon.

[Pg 80] When looking into all these factors, it's very important to consider the qualities of the signs where the stars that have an effect are located. During the day, we should mainly observe the Sun and Venus, and at night, we should focus on Saturn and the Moon.

If, however, after due attention has been paid to the foregoing points, a more specific inquiry still be demanded, it will then become necessary to assume the place allotted to the naternal or maternal condition, as the case may be, for an horoscope or ascendant, in order to pursue the investigation.[126] And by this means, which in this respect will answer the purpose of a nativity, all other particulars concerning the parents may be viewed succinctly; according to the general forms hereinafter given, as adapted for practice and applicable to all events.

If, after considering the above points, a more specific inquiry is still needed, it will be necessary to take into account the assigned role of the paternal or maternal condition, depending on the situation, for a horoscope or ascendant, to continue the investigation.[126] This approach, which serves the purpose of a nativity in this context, will allow us to summarize all other details regarding the parents; based on the general formats provided later, which are suitable for practical use and applicable to all events.

In these and in all other cases, the mode, in which the influences are commixed, must be carefully kept in view; and it must be observed whether any particular stars possess, in themselves alone, the operative cause, or whether others share dominion with them; and it is then to be seen which among them all are more powerful, and which of them take the lead in establishing the event: so that due inference may be drawn agreeably to their several natures. And should the several stars, which may happen to be combined in dominion, be also equal in power, the diversity of their several natures, and the admixture of qualities thence arising, must then be taken into consideration; and, by fairly weighing this various admixture, the nature and quality of the future event may be apprehended.

In these and all other cases, it's important to closely examine how the influences mix together. We need to see if any specific stars are solely responsible for the effects, or if others share control with them. Then, we can determine which ones are the strongest and which take the lead in creating the outcome, allowing us to make appropriate conclusions based on their different characteristics. If the stars that combine in control are equal in strength, we must consider their different natures and the mixing of qualities that results. By carefully evaluating this mix, we can understand the nature and quality of future events.

[Pg 81]

[Pg 81]

Stars, posited separately or at a distance from each other, distribute, at their appropriate times and periods, the events operated by each: thus the earlier events are brought about by stars which are more oriental than others, and the latter events by those which are more occidental. For it is indispensably requisite that the star, under the influence of which some particular event is expected to happen, should be originally[127] connected with the place to which the inquiry, concerning that event, is allotted; and, if such connection should not have existed, no effect of any importance can possibly be produced; because a star does not exercise a vigorous influence, unless it was fully in communication at the beginning. But, however, the time, at which the effect will take place, is further regulated by the relative distance of the star, governing the effect, from the Sun and the angles of the world, as well as by its primary position of dominion.

Stars, placed apart or at a distance from one another, distribute events according to their specific times and periods. Earlier events are triggered by stars that rise earlier than others, while later events are influenced by those that rise later. It's essential that the star, under which a certain event is anticipated to occur, is originally connected to the location relevant to that event. If such a connection doesn’t exist, no significant result can happen because a star doesn't have a strong influence unless it was fully aligned at the beginning. Additionally, the timing of when the effect will happen is governed by the star's distance from the Sun and the earth's angles, along with its primary position of control.


CHAPTER VI
Siblings

Under this head of inquiry, a general and cursory investigation, only, can be performed; and an attempt to dive into minute particulars would be fruitless, and would prove to be merely a vain search after things not open to discovery.[128]

Under this topic, only a general and brief investigation can be carried out; trying to dig into the details would be pointless and would turn out to be just a futile search for things that can’t be uncovered.[128]

The place, whence inferences are drawn respecting brothers and sisters, is to be considered as being applicable only to children of the same mother, and it is consequently, agreeably to nature, presumed to be the same as the maternal place; viz. the sign occupying the mid-heaven; or, by day, that which contains Venus, and, by night, the Moon. This sign and its succedent are considered as indicative of the mother and her children, and the same place is therefore properly allotted to brothers and sisters.

The location from which conclusions are made about siblings is understood to apply only to children of the same mother. Therefore, it is naturally assumed to be the same as the maternal position: specifically, the sign located at the mid-heaven; during the day, the sign that holds Venus, and at night, the Moon. This sign and the one following it are seen as representing the mother and her children, so this same location is appropriately designated for brothers and sisters.

[Pg 82] Hence, provided this place be configurated with the benefics, there will be several brothers and sisters: the number of them depending upon the number and positions of such benefic stars, whether in bicorporeal signs, or in signs of single form.

[Pg 82] So, if this location is influenced by the positive stars, there will be multiple brothers and sisters: the total number depending on how many and where these positive stars are positioned, whether in dual signs or in single signs.

If, however, the malefics should be in elevation over this place, or be hostilely situated in opposition thereto, the brothers and sisters will then be few in number; and this fewness especially follows when the malefics may surround the Sun. Should the hostile configuration be presented from the other angles,[129] and, particularly, if from the ascendant, Saturn will then represent the elder born; and Mars, by inflicting death, will diminish the total number of brothers and sisters.[130]

If the malefic planets are positioned prominently in this area, or are in a negatively aligned opposition, there will likely be fewer brothers and sisters. This reduction in number especially occurs when malefics are surrounding the Sun. If there is a negative configuration from other angles, especially from the ascendant, Saturn will represent the eldest sibling, while Mars, through causing death, will reduce the overall number of brothers and sisters.

Again, should the stars, which promise brethren, be favourably circumstanced as to their cosmical position, the brethren will be eminent and illustrious; but humble and obscure, if the cosmical position be of an adverse nature. If, also, the malefic stars should be in elevation over those which give brethren, the life of the brethren will then be only of short duration.

Again, if the stars that signify brothers are in a good position in the cosmos, the brothers will be notable and distinguished; however, they will be humble and unknown if the cosmic position is unfavorable. Additionally, if the negative stars are dominant over those representing brothers, the lifespan of the brothers will be short.

Stars, constituted masculinely, represent brothers; those femininely, sisters. The more oriental stars likewise represent the elder born; and those which are more occidental, the younger.

Stars that are masculine symbolize brothers; those that are feminine symbolize sisters. The more eastern stars also represent the firstborn, while the more western stars represent the younger ones.

Moreover, should the stars, which give brethren, be harmoniously configurated with that one which has dominion of the sign allotted to brethren, the brethren will be mutually friendly and affectionate; and, if an harmonious configuration be also extended, by the same planets, to the part of fortune, the brethren will live together in communion. But, if the stars, which give brethren, should, on the contrary, be in situations unconnected with each other, or be in opposition, the brethren will then live at variance, mutually practising enmity and fraud.

Moreover, if the stars that represent siblings are aligned harmoniously with the one that rules the sign assigned to siblings, then the siblings will be friendly and caring toward each other. If this harmonious alignment also influences the part of fortune, the siblings will live together in harmony. However, if the stars representing siblings are instead in positions that are disconnected or in opposition, then the siblings will live in conflict, each practicing hostility and deceit against the other.


CHAPTER VII
GENDER

After the indications which regard brothers and sisters have been investigated by the foregoing rules, consonant with nature and reason, the actual native, or the person to whom the scheme of nativity is specially appropriated, demands attention; and the first and most obvious inquiry is whether the said native will be male or female.

After looking into the signs related to siblings using the previous rules, which align with nature and logic, the focus shifts to the actual native, or the person for whom the birth chart is specifically created; and the first and most obvious question is whether this native will be male or female.

The consideration of this question rests not on a single basis, nor can [Pg 83] it be pursued in one sole direction only: it depends, on the contrary, upon the several situations of the two luminaries and the ascendant, and upon such planets as possess any prerogatives in the places of those situations; and all these circumstances should be specially observed at the time of conception, and, in a general manner also, at that of birth.

The answer to this question isn't based on just one factor, nor can it be examined from just one angle: instead, it relies on the different positions of the two main celestial bodies and the rising sign, along with any planets that have influence in those positions. All of these details should be carefully noted at the time of conception and, in a broader sense, at the time of birth.

Observation of the said three places, and of the mode in which the planets ruling them may be constituted, is wholly indispensable: it must be seen whether all, or most of them, may be constituted masculinely or femininely; and prediction must, of course, be regulated in conformity with their disposition, so observed; as tending to produce a male or female birth.

Observing the three mentioned places and how the planets governing them are set up is absolutely crucial: it needs to be determined whether they are mostly configured as male or female; and predictions must, of course, be adjusted based on this observation, as it influences the likelihood of producing a male or female birth.

The masculine or feminine nature of the stars is to be distinguished in the manner already pointed out in the commencement of this treatise.[131] For instance, by the nature of the signs in which they are situated, by their relative position to each other, and also by their position towards the earth; as when in the east, they are masculinely disposed, and, when in the west, femininely. Their relative position to the Sun also affords guidance in distinguishing them; since, if they should be matutine, they are considered to signify the male gender; and if vespertine, the female. Thus, from the sex chiefly prevalent, as observed by these rules, that of the native may be rationally inferred.

The masculine or feminine nature of the stars can be identified in the way described at the beginning of this treatise.[131] For example, it depends on the signs they occupy, their relative positions to one another, and their placement in relation to the Earth; when they’re in the east, they are considered masculine, and when in the west, feminine. Their relative position to the Sun also helps in distinguishing them; if they are rising, they are thought to represent the male gender, and if they are setting, the female. Therefore, based on the predominant sex observed through these rules, we can reasonably infer the gender of the individual.


CHAPTER VIII
TWINS

With respect to the probability of the birth of twins, or a greater number at once, the same places must be observed, as those mentioned in the preceding chapter; that is to say, the places of both luminaries and the ascendant.

Regarding the likelihood of having twins or more than one birth at a time, the same locations must be considered as those mentioned in the previous chapter; specifically, the positions of both luminaries and the ascendant.

When two, or all three, of the said places may be situated in bicorporeal signs, births of this kind will occur, in consequence of the combination which then arises; especially, provided all the planets, which control those places, should also be similarly circumstanced: or although only some of them be posited in bicorporeal signs, while the rest may be placed by two or more together. Because even more than twins will be born, in a case wherein all the ruling places may be in bicorporeal signs, most of the planets being, at the same time, posited in the same way, and configurated with them. The number of children, however, to be produced at the birth, is to be inferred from the planet which exercises the right of determining the [Pg 84] number[132]: and the sex or sexes are to be predicted by means of the planets in configuration with the Sun, Moon, and ascendant.

When two or all three of the mentioned places are in dual signs, this can lead to the birth of such children due to the resulting combination; especially if all the planets that govern those places are also in similar positions. Even if only some of them are in dual signs while others are grouped together, this can still happen. More than twins can be born when all the ruling places are in dual signs, with most of the planets also in those signs and interacting with them. The number of children born is determined by the planet that has the authority to set the count: [Pg 84] and the sex or genders can be predicted based on the planets in relation to the Sun, Moon, and ascendant.

And, should the position of the heavens be arranged so that the angle of the mid-heaven, and not that of the ascendant, may be connected with the luminaries, there will, in that case, be produced, almost always, twins; and sometimes even more.

And if the position of the heavens is such that the angle of the mid-heaven, rather than that of the ascendant, is connected to the stars, it will almost always result in twins; and sometimes even more.

To speak, however, more particularly, three males will be born, as in the nativity of the Anactores,[133] when Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars may be configurated with the places before appointed, in bicorporeal signs; and three females, as in the nativity of the Graces, when Venus and the Moon, with Mercury femininely constituted, may be configurated in like manner. When Saturn, Jupiter, and Venus may be configurated, two males and one female will be born; as in the nativity of the Dioscuri[134]; and, when Venus, the Moon, and Mars may be so configurated, two females and one male; as in the nativity of Ceres, Core, and Liber.[135]

To be more specific, three males will be born, similar to the birth of the Anactores, when Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars align with the designated positions in dual-bodied signs; and three females, like in the birth of the Graces, when Venus and the Moon, along with a feminine Mercury, align in the same way. When Saturn, Jupiter, and Venus align, two males and one female will be born, as seen in the birth of the Dioscuri; and when Venus, the Moon, and Mars align, two females and one male will be born, as in the birth of Ceres, Core, and Liber.

In cases of this kind, however, it most usually happens that the conception has not been complete, and that the children are born with some remarkable imperfections or deformities. And, in some instances, owing to a certain concurrence of events, these numerous productions are quite extraordinary and amazing.

In situations like this, it often turns out that the conception isn’t complete, leading to children being born with notable imperfections or deformities. Additionally, in some cases, due to a combination of events, these many outcomes can be quite extraordinary and astonishing.


[Pg 85]

[Pg 85]

CHAPTER IX
Abnormal or defective births

The same places, as those pointed out in the two chapters last preceding, are again to be considered, in inquiring into the probability of a monstrous or defective birth. For it will be found that, at a birth of this description, the luminaries are either cadent from the ascendant, or else not in any manner configurated with it; while, at the same time, the angles[136] are occupied by the malefics.

The same locations mentioned in the two preceding chapters should be revisited when examining the chances of a monstrous or defective birth. It will be observed that, at the time of such a birth, the celestial bodies are either falling away from the ascendant or are not in any kind of alignment with it; meanwhile, the angles[136] are taken up by the malefics.

It therefore becomes necessary, when such a position of the heavens may occur at the time of birth, to observe forthwith the preceding new or full Moon[137] and its ruler; as well as the rulers of the luminaries at the said time of birth. For, if all the places, in which the rulers of the luminaries, and in which the Moon herself and Mercury may be situated, at the birth, or, if most of those places should be totally inconjunct and unconnected with the places of the said preceding new or full Moon and its ruler, the birth will then be monstrous. And if it should be further found, in addition to this absence of connection, that the luminaries may be also posited in quadrupedal or bestial signs, and the two malefics in angles, the birth will in that case not be human. And should the luminaries, when so circumstanced, be not at all supported by any benefic planet, but only by malefics, the creature born will be wholly indocile, wild, and of evil nature: if, however, they should receive support from Jupiter or Venus, the offspring will then be like that of dogs or cats, or other creatures held in religious veneration and used in worship[138]: but, if Mercury support the luminaries, it will resemble that of fowls, oxen, or swine, or, of other animals adapted to the service of mankind.

It is therefore necessary, when such a celestial alignment happens at the time of birth, to immediately observe the preceding new or full Moon[137] and its ruler, as well as the rulers of the luminaries at that moment. If the positions of the rulers of the luminaries, alongside the Moon and Mercury, at the time of birth are mostly disconnected from the positions of the preceding new or full Moon and its ruler, then the birth will be considered abnormal. Furthermore, if it is found that, in addition to this lack of connection, the luminaries are placed in animal-related signs and the two malefic planets are in prominent positions, then the birth will not be human. If the luminaries, in this situation, are not supported by any beneficial planet but only by malefics, the offspring will be entirely unmanageable, wild, and of bad nature. However, if they receive support from Jupiter or Venus, then the offspring will resemble animals like dogs or cats, or other creatures that are revered and used in worship[138]: but if Mercury supports the luminaries, it will be similar to that of birds, cattle, or pigs, or other animals that serve humanity.

When the luminaries may be in signs of human shape, while other circumstances in the scheme of the nativity may exist as before described, the creature born will then be human, or will partake of human nature, although it will still be defective in some peculiar quality. And, in order to ascertain the nature of that defect, the shape and form of the signs found on the angles occupied by the malefics, as well as of those wherein the luminaries are situated, must be taken into consideration: and, if in this instance also, no benefic planet should lend support to any one of the prescribed places, the offspring produced will be utterly void of reason, and indeed indefinable.[139] If, however, it should happen, that Jupiter or Venus [Pg 86] give support, the defect will be veiled by a specious outward appearance, similar to that of hermaphrodites, and of those persons called Harpocratiaci,[140] or others of like imperfections. And should Mercury also give support, in addition to that of Jupiter or Venus, the offspring will then become an interpreter of oracles and divinations; but, if Mercury support alone, it will be deaf and dumb,[141] although clever and ingenious in its intellect.

When the planets align with human-shaped signs and other aspects of the birth chart are as previously described, the being born will be human or will have human traits, though it may still have some specific flaw. To determine the nature of that flaw, you need to consider the shapes and forms of the signs where the malefic planets sit, as well as those where the luminaries are located. If no benefic planet supports any of the relevant positions, the resulting offspring will lack reason and be truly unclassifiable.[139] However, if Jupiter or Venus provides support, the flaw will be masked by an attractive outward appearance, similar to that of hermaphrodites and individuals known as Harpocratiaci,[140] or others with similar imperfections. If Mercury also lends support alongside Jupiter or Venus, the offspring will become skilled at interpreting oracles and divinations; but if Mercury supports alone, the being will be deaf and dumb,[141] yet clever and inventive in its thinking.


CHAPTER X
UNRAISED CHILDREN

The question which now remains to be considered, in order to complete the investigation of circumstances taking place simultaneously with the nativity, or immediately consequent thereon, is, whether the child, then born, will or will not be reared.

The question that now needs to be addressed, in order to complete the investigation of circumstances occurring at the same time as the birth, or immediately after, is whether the child that has just been born will be raised or not.

This inquiry is to be handled distinctly from that regarding the duration of life, although there is an apparent connection between them. The questions themselves are, indeed, similar; for it is much the same thing to inquire whether the child will be nurtured, or how long it will live; and the only distinction, between these two questions, arises from the different modes in which they are treated. For instance, the inquiry into the duration of life is to be pursued only in cases wherein there is allotted to the native some space of time, not less in duration than a solar period; that is to say, a year. Therefore, since time is also measured by smaller portions, such as months, days, and hours, and since the question, whether the native will or will not be reared, belongs to cases wherein some exuberance of evil influence threatens speedy destruction, and where life is not likely to endure throughout a whole year, the inquiry into the duration of life must consequently involve a more multifarious consideration, than that which relates to rearing; which may be at once disposed of, in a more general and summary manner.

This inquiry should be handled separately from the one about the length of life, even though there’s a clear connection between them. The questions themselves are quite similar; it’s basically the same to ask whether the child will be raised or how long it will live. The only difference between these two questions comes from the different ways they are approached. For example, the investigation into the length of life should only be pursued when there is a certain period of time allotted to the individual, not less than a solar year. In other words, at least a year. Because time is also measured in smaller segments, like months, days, and hours, and because the question of whether the individual will be raised pertains to situations where negative influences threaten quick destruction, and where life is unlikely to last a full year, the investigation into the length of life must consider more variables than the question about rearing, which can be addressed more generally and quickly.

Thus, if either of the two luminaries be in an angle, and one of the malefics be either in conjunction with that luminary, or else distant in longitude from each luminary, in an exactly equal space; so as to form the point of junction of two equal sides of a triangle, of which sides the two luminaries form the extremities, while, at the same time, no benefic star may partake in the configuration, and while the rulers [Pg 87] of the luminaries may be also posited in places belonging to, or controlled by, the malefics; the child, then born, will not be susceptible of nurture, but will immediately perish.

So, if either of the two major celestial bodies is positioned at an angle, and one of the malefic planets is either aligned with that celestial body or is a specific distance away from both celestial bodies, creating a junction of two equal sides of a triangle where the two celestial bodies are at the ends, and simultaneously, no benevolent star is involved in the configuration, while the rulers of those celestial bodies are also located in areas associated with the malefics, then the child born under these conditions will not survive or will immediately die.

Should the configuration, made between the malefic planet and the luminaries, not exist precisely in the mode just mentioned; that is to say, should the said planet not be equally distant from both luminaries, so as to form the point of junction of two equal sides of a triangle; yet should it then happen that the rays of two malefics may nearly approach the places of the two luminaries, casting an injurious influence either on both, or only one of them, and if both the said malefics be together succedent, or in opposition, to the luminaries, or if one of them be succedent, and the other in opposition, or even if only one may particularly afflict one of the luminaries, then, in any such case, no duration of life will be allotted to the child: for the supremacy of the power of the malefics extinguishes the influence favourable to human nature, and tending to prolong existence.

If the alignment between the harmful planet and the sun and moon isn't exactly as described—meaning the planet isn't at an equal distance from both the sun and moon, forming a connection at two equal sides of a triangle—then it could still happen that the rays from two harmful planets come close to the positions of the sun and moon, creating a negative effect on one or both. If both harmful planets are in a supportive position relative to the sun and moon, or if they are in opposition, or if one is in a supportive position while the other is in opposition, or even if just one planet negatively impacts one of the luminaries, in any of these situations, the child will not be destined for a long life. The overpowering influence of the harmful planets overrides any positive effects that support human life and longevity.

Mars is exceedingly pernicious when succedent to the Sun, and Saturn when succedent to the Moon. But a converse effect takes place when either of these planets may be in opposition to the Sun or Moon, or in elevation above them; for the Sun will then be afflicted by Saturn, and the Moon by Mars; and especially so, provided the said planets should have local prerogatives in the signs containing the luminaries, or in the sign on the ascendant. And, should a double opposition exist, by the circumstance of the luminaries being placed in two opposite angles, and by the two malefics being each so posited as to be equally distant from each luminary, the child will be born almost, if not quite, dead. Nevertheless, if the luminaries should be separating from, or be otherwise configurated with benefic planets, whose rays may be projected to parts preceding the said luminaries, the child will then live as many days, or hours, as there are degrees, numbered between the prorogator[142] and the nearest malefic.

Mars is extremely harmful when it’s behind the Sun, and Saturn when it’s behind the Moon. However, the opposite effect occurs when either of these planets is in opposition to the Sun or Moon, or is higher than them; in that case, the Sun will be affected by Saturn, and the Moon by Mars. This is especially true if those planets are in powerful positions in the signs containing the luminaries or in the sign rising on the ascendant. If there is a double opposition, with the luminaries placed in two opposite angles and the two malefics positioned equally distant from each luminary, the child will almost certainly be born dead. However, if the luminaries are separating from or positively interacting with benefic planets, projecting their rays to areas ahead of the luminaries, the child will live for as many days or hours as there are degrees between the benefic and the nearest malefic.

If malefics should cast their rays to parts preceding the luminaries, and benefics to parts following them, the child will be abandoned at its birth; but will afterwards meet with adoption, and will live. Yet, if the malefics should be in elevation above those benefics which are thus configurated, the child, so adopted, will lead a life of misery and servitude: if, on the contrary, the benefics should be in elevation, then whoever may adopt the deserted child will supply the place of its parents. And, provided a benefic planet should either ascend with, or near in succession to the Moon, or be applying to her, [Pg 88] and one of the malefics be occidental, the child’s own parents will, in that case, take it again under their protection.

If the bad planets influence the areas before the good ones, and the good planets influence the areas after them, the child will be abandoned at birth; but will later be adopted and will survive. However, if the bad planets are positioned higher than the good ones in this scenario, the adopted child will live a life of misery and servitude. On the other hand, if the good planets are positioned higher, then whoever adopts the abandoned child will act as its parents. Additionally, if a good planet rises with or close to the Moon, or is approaching her, and one of the bad planets is positioned to the west, then in that case, the child's own parents will reclaim it. [Pg 88]

Rules similar to the foregoing are to be observed, when more than one child is born; for, if any one of those planets, which may be configurated towards the production of two, or even more children, should be under the west, the children will be born half dead, or deformed, and imperfect in body. And, if the planet so situated should also be beneath the malefics, the children will not be susceptible of nurture, or their life will be of the shortest span.

Rules like the ones mentioned above should be followed when more than one child is born; because if any of the planets that influence the birth of two or more children is positioned in the west, the children may be born stillborn, deformed, or physically imperfect. Additionally, if that planet is also positioned near the malefics, the children may not be able to thrive, or their lives may be very short.


CHAPTER XI
Lifespan

Of all events whatsoever, which take place after birth, the most essential is the continuance of life: and as it is, of course, useless to consider, in cases wherein the life of a child does not extend to the period of one year, what other events contingent on its birth might otherwise have subsequently happened, the inquiry into the duration of life consequently takes precedence of all other questions, as to the events subsequent to the birth.

Of all the events that happen after a person is born, the most important is the continuation of life. It’s pointless to think about what other events related to a child’s birth could have occurred if the child doesn’t live past their first year. Therefore, questions about how long life lasts take priority over all other questions about what happens after birth.

The discussion of this inquiry is by no means simple, nor easy of execution; it is conducted in a diversified process, by means of the governance of the ruling places. And the method now about to be laid down seems, of all others, the most consonant with reason, and with nature: because the influence of the prorogatory places, as well as of the rulers of those places, and the disposal of the anæretic[143] places or stars, perform the whole operation of regulating the duration of life. Each of these influences is to be distinguished in the mode pointed out in the chapters immediately ensuing.

The discussion of this inquiry is definitely not straightforward or easy to carry out; it takes place through a complex process, guided by the governance of the ruling areas. The method that will be presented now seems to be the most logical, as it aligns with both reason and nature: because the effects of the delaying authorities, as well as the leaders of those areas, along with the arrangement of the **anæretic[143]** places or stars, carry out the entire process of determining the length of life. Each of these influences will be identified in the way outlined in the following chapters.


CHAPTER XII
The Provisional Locations

Firstly, those places, only, are to be deemed prorogatory, to which the future assumption of the dominion of prorogation exclusively belongs. These several places are the sign on the angle of the ascendant, from the fifth degree above the horizon, to the twenty-fifth degree below it; the thirty degrees in dexter sextile thereto, constituting the eleventh house, called the Good Dæmon; also the thirty degrees in dexter quartile, forming the mid-heaven above the earth; those in dexter [Pg 89] trine making the ninth house, called God; and lastly, those in opposition, belonging to the angle of the west.

Firstly, the only places that should be considered significant are those where the future idea of control over these areas is entirely relevant. These places include the sign on the angle of the ascendant, from the fifth degree above the horizon to the twenty-fifth degree below it; the thirty degrees in the right sextile, which make up the eleventh house, known as the Good Dæmon; also the thirty degrees in the right quartile, forming the mid-heaven above the earth; those in the right trine create the ninth house, referred to as God; and finally, those in opposition, which correspond to the angle of the west.

Secondly, among these places, the degrees which constitute the mid-heaven are entitled to preference, as being of a more potent and paramount influence: the degrees in the ascendant are next in virtue; then the degrees in the eleventh house succedent to the mid-heaven; then those in the angle of the west; and, lastly, those in the ninth house, which precedes the mid-heaven.

Secondly, among these places, the degrees that make up the mid-heaven are given priority, as they have a stronger and more significant influence: the degrees in the ascendant are next in importance; then the degrees in the eleventh house following the mid-heaven; then those in the angle of the west; and finally, those in the ninth house, which comes before the mid-heaven.

No degrees under the earth are, in any manner, eligible to the dominion now in question; except such only as enter into light actually above the succedent, or, in other words, with the ascendant. And any sign, although it may be above the earth, is still incompetent to partake in this dominion, if it be inconjunct with the ascendant: hence the sign which precedes the ascendant, and constitutes the twelfth house (called that of the Evil Dæmon), is incompetent; and not only for the above reason, but also because it is cadent, and because the beams cast by the stars posited therein, towards the earth, are impaired by the thick and dark exhalations arising from the earth’s vapours, which produce an unnatural colour and magnitude in the appearance of stars so posited, confusing, and in some measure annihilating, their beams.

No degrees below the earth can have any influence over the dominion being discussed, except for those that come into light directly above the succeeding degree, or in other words, with the ascendant. And any sign, even if it is above the earth, cannot contribute to this dominion if it is inconjunct with the ascendant. Therefore, the sign that precedes the ascendant, which represents the twelfth house (known as the house of the Evil Dæmon), is not eligible; not only for this reason, but also because it is in a cadent position, and the light from the stars located there is weakened by the heavy and dark vapors rising from the earth, which creates an unnatural color and size in the appearance of those stars, confusing and somewhat diminishing their light.

Thus far with regard to the places of prorogation.

Thus far regarding the places of prorogation.


CHAPTER XIII
THE NUMBER OF PROROGATORS, AND
ALSO THE ROLE OF FORTUNE

After due attention has been given to the instructions in the preceding chapter, the Sun, the Moon, the Ascendant, and the part of Fortune, are to be considered as the four principally liable to be elected to the office of prorogator; and their positions, together with those of such planets as rule in the places of their positions, are to be observed.

After carefully following the instructions in the previous chapter, the Sun, the Moon, the Ascendant, and the part of Fortune should be regarded as the four most likely candidates for the role of prorogator. Their positions, along with those of any planets that govern the areas where they are located, should be noted.

The part of Fortune is ascertained by computing the number of degrees between the Sun and the Moon; and it is placed at an equal number of degrees distant from the ascendant, in the order of the signs. It is in all cases, both by night and day, to be so computed and set down, that the Moon may hold with it the same relation as that which the Sun may hold with the ascendant; and it thus becomes, as it were, a lunar horoscope or ascendant.[144]

The part of Fortune is determined by calculating the degrees between the Sun and the Moon; it is positioned at the same number of degrees away from the ascendant, following the sequence of the signs. This calculation should be done consistently, both during the night and day, so that the Moon has the same relationship with it as the Sun has with the ascendant; thus, it effectively forms a lunar horoscope or ascendant. [144]

[Pg 90] Among the candidates for prorogation, as before-mentioned, by day the Sun is to be preferred, provided he be situated in a prorogatory place; and, if not, the Moon; but if the Moon, also, should not be so situated, then that planet is to be elected which may have most claims to dominion, in reference to the Sun, the antecedent new Moon, and the ascendant; that is to say, when such planet may be found to have dominion over any one of the places where these are situated, by at least three prorogatives, if not more; the whole number being five. If, however, no planet should be found so circumstanced, the Ascendant is then to be taken. [Pg 91]

[Pg 90] Among the candidates for postponement, as mentioned before, during the day, the Sun should be preferred, provided it is in a favorable position; if not, then the Moon should be considered. However, if the Moon is also not in a suitable position, then you should choose the planet that has the most authority regarding the Sun, the previous new Moon, and the ascendant. In other words, when you find a planet that has control over any of the places where these are positioned, based on at least three favorable aspects, if not more, out of a total of five. If no such planet is found, then the Ascendant should be used instead. [Pg 91]

By night, the Moon is to be elected as prorogator, provided, in like manner, she should be in some prorogatory place; and if she be not, the Sun: if he also be not in any prorogatory place, then that planet which may have most rights of dominion in reference to the Moon,[145] and the antecedent full Moon and the part of Fortune. But, if there be no planet claiming dominion in the mode prescribed, the Ascendant must be taken, in case a new Moon had last preceded the birth; but, if a full Moon, the part of Fortune.

By night, the Moon is to be chosen as the regent, as long as she is in a suitable position; if she isn't, then the Sun will take that role. If the Sun is also not in a suitable position, then the planet with the strongest claim to dominion over the Moon, [145] and the previous full Moon and the part of Fortune will be considered. However, if no planet has a valid claim as outlined, the Ascendant should be used if a new Moon occurred right before the birth; if it was a full Moon, then the part of Fortune should be used.

If the two luminaries, and also some ruling planet of appropriate condition, should be each posited in a prorogatory place, then, provided one luminary may be found to occupy some place more important and influential than the others, that luminary must be chosen; but should the ruling planet occupy the stronger place, and have prorogatives of dominion suitable to the conditions of both luminaries, the planet must then be preferred to either of them.[146]

If the two celestial bodies, along with a suitable ruling planet, are positioned in favorable spots, then, if one celestial body is found to be in a more significant and influential position than the others, that body should be selected; however, if the ruling planet occupies the stronger position and has dominion traits that match the conditions of both celestial bodies, then the planet should be preferred over either of them.[146]


CHAPTER XIV
NUMBER OF WAYS TO EXTEND A SESSION

When the prorogator has been determined as above directed, it is also necessary to take into consideration the two modes of prorogation; one into succeeding signs, under the projection of rays, as it is called; and, when the prorogator may be in an oriental place, that is to say, in any place between the mid-heaven and the ascendant, this mode only is to be used. The other mode extends into signs preceding the prorogator, according to what is called horary proportion[147]; and, in cases when the prorogator may be situated in any place receding from the mid-heaven, or, in other words, between the mid-heaven and the angle of the west, both modes of prorogation are to be adopted.

When the prorogator has been identified as mentioned above, it’s also important to consider the two ways of prorogation; one is through the following signs, based on the projection of rays, as it’s referred to; and, when the prorogator is in an eastern position, meaning anywhere between the mid-heaven and the ascendant, only this method should be used. The other method goes into signs that come before the prorogator, based on what is known as horary proportion[147]; and, in cases where the prorogator is located anywhere away from the mid-heaven, or in other words, between the mid-heaven and the western angle, both methods of prorogation should be applied.

It is next to be observed, that certain degrees are anæretic; though, in the prorogation made into signs preceding, the only degree which is strictly anæretic is that of the western horizon; and it becomes so [Pg 92] because it obscures the lord of life; while other degrees, of stars meeting with or testifying to the prorogator, both take away from and add to the aggregate amount of the prorogation, which would otherwise continue until the descension or setting of the prorogator. Of these last-mentioned degrees, however, there are none properly anæretic; since they are not borne to the prorogatory place, but, on the contrary, that place is carried to their positions.[148] In this manner the benefics increase the prorogation, but the malefics diminish it; and Mercury assists the influence of either party with which he may be configurated. The amount of the increase or diminution is indicated by the degree, in which each star, so operating, is exactly situated; for the number of years will depend upon, and correspond with, the horary times[149] proper to each degree; and if the birth be by day, care must be taken to calculate the diurnal horary times; if by night, the nocturnal. These directions are to be understood as applicable to instances wherein the degrees in question may be in the ascendant; if farther advanced, a deduction proportionate to the distance is to be made, unless they should be on the occidental horizon, in which case there can be no remainder.

It should be noted that certain degrees are anæretic; however, in the earlier discussions regarding signs, the only degree that is truly anæretic is that of the western horizon, as it obscures the lord of life. Other degrees, involving stars that meet with or relate to the prorogator, both diminish and increase the overall impact of the prorogation, which would otherwise go on until the descension or setting of the prorogator. Among these other degrees, none are strictly anæretic; instead, they do not carry the prorogatory place towards them, but rather, that place is drawn towards their positions. In this way, the benefics enhance the prorogation, while the malefics reduce it; and Mercury supports the influence of either side depending on how he is configured. The extent of the increase or decrease is shown by the degree where each star operates, as the number of years will rely on and align with the horary times appropriate to each degree. If the birth occurs during the day, it is important to calculate the daytime horary times; if at night, the nighttime ones. These guidelines apply when the relevant degrees are ascending; if they are further advanced, a deduction proportional to the distance should be made, unless they are on the western horizon, in which case there would be no remainder. [Pg 92]

But, in the prorogation made into succeeding signs, the places of the malefics, Saturn and Mars, are anæretic, whether meeting the prorogator bodily, or by emission of rays in quartile, from either side, or in opposition: they are also sometimes anæretic, by a sextile ray, if in a sign of equal power, obeying or beholding the sign of the prorogator. And even the mere degree, in signs following, in quartile with the [Pg 93] prorogatory place, as also the degree in sextile, if badly afflicted, which is sometimes the case in signs of long ascension, and, still further, the degree in trine, if in signs of short ascension, are all anæretic: so also is the Sun’s place, should the Moon be prorogatory. But, although the meetings, which occur in the course of prorogation thus made, have, respectively, some of them an anæretic, and other a preservative, power, in consequence of their occurring by means of an actual transmission to the prorogatory place[150]; yet their anæretic tendency is not always effectual, but only in cases where the places, so brought to the prorogatory place, may be badly afflicted. For should those places be situated within the terms of a benefic, the operation of their anæretic degree becomes impeded; and it will likewise be impeded, if either of the benefics should cast a ray in quartile, trine, or opposition,[151] to the said anæretic degree itself, or to some other degree near in succession, and not farther distant from it than twelve degrees, if the benefic be Jupiter; nor than eight, if Venus: the like impediment will also subsist, if both the prorogator and itsopponent[152] should be bodies,[153] and not have the same latitude.

But in the transition to the following signs, the positions of the malefics, Saturn and Mars, are critical, whether they meet the prorogator directly or through a quartile aspect from either side, or in opposition. They can also be critical through a sextile aspect if they are in a sign of equal strength, complying with or observing the sign of the prorogator. Even a mere degree in succeeding signs, forming a quartile with the prorogatory position, as well as a degree in sextile, if poorly afflicted—which can sometimes happen in signs with long ascension—and additionally, a degree in trine if in signs with short ascension, are all critical as well: the same goes for the Sun’s position if the Moon is prorogatory. However, while the interactions that take place during this type of prorogation have some that are critical and others that are protective due to their actual connection to the prorogatory position[150]; their critical effect isn't always strong, but only when the positions brought to the prorogatory place are poorly afflicted. If those positions fall within the bounds of a benefic, the effectiveness of their critical degree is hindered; it will also be hindered if either of the benefics casts a quartile, trine, or opposition ray[151] to the critical degree itself or another degree close in succession and not more than twelve degrees away if the benefic is Jupiter, or eight degrees if it's Venus. The same hindrance will occur if both the prorogator and its opponent[152] are physical bodies[153] and do not share the same latitude.

Therefore, whenever there may be found two or more conflicting configurations, auxiliary on the one hand, and hostile on the other, due observation must be made to ascertain which party surpasses the other, in power as well as in number. The pre-eminence in number will be, of course, obvious, from the greater number[154] on one side than on the other; but, for pre-eminence in power, it must be seen whether the stars, auxiliary or hostile as the case may be, are, on the one side, in places appropriate to themselves, while they are not so on the other; and especially whether those on the one side may be oriental, and those on the other occidental. It is also to be observed, in all cases, that not any one of such stars, whether hostile or auxiliary, is to be left out of the present calculation, on account [Pg 94] of its casual position under the sunbeams.[155] This rule must be particularly attended to, because, even though the Moon be not prorogatory, the solar place itself becomes anæretic, if shackled by the simultaneous presence of a malefic, and not restored to freedom of operation by any benefic.

Whenever there are two or more conflicting configurations—some being supportive and others being hostile—careful observation is needed to determine which side is stronger in both power and numbers. The superiority in numbers will be clear from the greater count on one side compared to the other. However, to assess superiority in power, it's important to see whether the stars, whether supportive or hostile, are appropriately positioned on one side but not the other. Specifically, we need to check if the stars on one side are in the eastern positions while those on the other are in the western positions. Additionally, we should ensure that none of the stars, whether hostile or supportive, is excluded from consideration due to their random positioning in relation to sunlight. This guideline is particularly crucial because, even if the Moon isn't beneficial, the location of the Sun can become harmful if it's hindered by the presence of a negative influence and isn't freed up by a positive one. [Pg 94]

The number of years, depending on the distances between the prorogatory and anæretic places, cannot be always gathered simply and at once from the ascensional times[156] of each respective degree; but only in cases when the ascendant itself, or some other specific degree or body, actually ascending in the oriental horizon, may possess the prorogation. For, if it be desired to calculate agreeably to nature, every process of calculation that can be adopted must be directed to the attainment of one object; that is to say, to ascertain after how many equatorial times[157] the place of the succeeding body, or degree, will arrive at the position preoccupied at the birth by the preceding body, or degree: and, as equatorial time transits equally both the horizon and the meridian, the places in question[158] must be considered, in respect of their proportionate distances from both these; each equatorial degree[159] being taken to signify one solar year.

The number of years, depending on the distances between the prorogatory and anæretic places, can't always be determined simply and immediately from the ascensional times[156] of each respective degree; only when the ascendant itself or another specific degree or body is actually rising on the eastern horizon can it hold the prorogation. If you want to calculate in line with nature, every calculation process used must aim toward one goal: to figure out after how many equatorial times[157] the next body or degree will reach the position occupied at birth by the previous body or degree. Since equatorial time transits both the horizon and the meridian equally, the places in question[158] must be considered in relation to their proportional distances from both; each equatorial degree[159] represents one solar year.

In conformity with the foregoing remarks, when it may happen that the prorogatory and preceding place may be actually on the oriental horizon, it will be proper to reckon, at once, the ascensional times which may intervene until the meeting of the degrees; because, after the same number of equatorial times, the anæreta will arrive at the prorogatory place; that is to say, at the oriental horizon. Should the prorogatory place be found on the meridian, the whole number of degrees by right ascension, in which the whole intercepted arc will transit the meridian, must then be taken. And if the prorogatory place be on the occidental horizon, the number of descensions, in which every degree of the distance will be carried down (or, in other words, the number of ascensions, in which their opposite degrees will ascend), is in that case to be reckoned.[160]

In line with the previous comments, if the prorogatory and preceding position happens to be on the eastern horizon, it’s important to calculate the ascension times that will occur until the degrees meet; because, after the same number of equatorial times, the anæreta will reach the prorogatory position, which is the eastern horizon. If the prorogatory position is on the meridian, you need to account for the total number of degrees in right ascension that the entire intercepted arc will cover while crossing the meridian. And if the prorogatory position is on the western horizon, you should tally the number of descensions, which is how many degrees will descend (or, similarly, how many ascensions the opposing degrees will go through), in that case.[160]

[Pg 95] When, however, a prorogatory and preceding place may not be situated on any one of the three aforesaid points, but in some intermediate station, it must be observed that other times[161] will then bring the succeeding place to the preceding one; and not the times of ascension or descension, or transit of the mid-heaven, as above spoken of. For any places whatever, which have one particular position, on the same degree, in regard to the horizon and meridian, are alike and identical. This is the case, for instance, with all places lying on any one of those semicircles which are drawn through the arcs of the meridian and horizon; and each of these semicircles (all of which have position at the same equal distance from each other) marks one temporal hour[162]; and, as the time occupied in proceeding through the places[163] above described, and arriving at the same position of the horizon and meridian, is rendered unequal to and different from the time of transits in the zodiac; so, also, the transits of other spaces are made, agreeably to their position, in time again distinct from this.

[Pg 95] However, when a preceding location isn’t at one of the three mentioned points but sits somewhere in between, it should be noted that other times[161] will then bring the following place to the previous one; and not the times of rising or setting, or the transit at mid-heaven, as mentioned earlier. Any locations that have the same position concerning the horizon and meridian are alike and identical. This applies, for example, to all locations lying on any of those semicircles drawn through the arcs of the meridian and horizon; each of these semicircles (all of which are evenly spaced) represents one hour[162]; and since the time spent moving through the previously described places and reaching the same position in the horizon and meridian is unequal and different from the time of transits in the zodiac, similarly, the transits of other areas are timed according to their positions, distinctly separate from this.

There is, however, a method by which the proportion of time, occupied in the progress of a succeeding place to a prorogatory and preceding place, in whatever position, whether oriental, meridianal, or occidental, or any other, may be easily calculated. It is as follows:—

There is, however, a way to easily calculate the amount of time spent moving from one location to another, whether that location is eastern, northern, western, or any other position. It is as follows:—

When it has been ascertained what degree of the zodiac is on the [Pg 96] mid-heaven, as also which are the preceding and succeeding degrees, the period of whose meeting is to be calculated, the position of the preceding degree, and its distance in temporal hours from the meridian, are next to be noted; because any part of the zodiac, on becoming distant from the meridian in the same temporal hours, must fall on the same individual semicircle.[164] For ascertaining this distance, the number of ascensions, in a right sphere, found in the intermediate space between the said preceding degree and the mid-heaven, either above or under the earth, is to be divided by the number of the diurnal or nocturnal horary times of the said preceding degree: for instance, if that degree be above the earth, by its diurnal horary times; and, by its nocturnal, if it be under the earth. It is then to be discovered in what number of equatorial times the succeeding degree will be distant from the same meridian, by as many similar temporal hours as those by which the preceding degree is distant from it. And, to effect this, the hours in question must be noted, and it must first be observed, by the right ascensions again, how many equatorial times the succeeding degree, at its original position, is distant from the degree on the mid-heaven; and then it must be seen how many equatorial times it will be distant, on coming to the preceding degree’s distance in temporal hours from the said mid-heaven: this will be found, by multiplying those hours by the succeeding degree’s horary times; diurnal, if the future position be above the earth, and nocturnal if under; and the difference in amount, of these two distances, in equatorial times, will present the number of years inquired for.

Once you determine the degree of the zodiac that’s at the mid-heaven, as well as the degrees before and after it that you want to calculate the meeting period for, you should note the position of the preceding degree and how many temporal hours it is from the meridian. This is important because any part of the zodiac that moves away from the meridian during the same temporal hours must fall on the same semicircle. To figure out this distance, divide the number of ascensions in a right sphere between the preceding degree and the mid-heaven—whether it’s above or below the earth—by the number of diurnal or nocturnal horary times of the preceding degree. For example, if the degree is above the earth, use its diurnal horary times; if it’s below, use its nocturnal times. Then, determine how many equatorial times the succeeding degree will be from the same meridian, using the same number of temporal hours that the preceding degree is from it. To do this, you need to note the hours in question and first check, through right ascensions again, how many equatorial times the succeeding degree is from the mid-heaven degree. Then see how many equatorial times it will be distant when it reaches the same temporal hour distance as the preceding degree from the mid-heaven. You can find this by multiplying those hours by the succeeding degree’s horary times: diurnal if the future position is above the earth and nocturnal if below. The difference between these two distances in equatorial times will give you the number of years you’re looking for.

CHAPTER XV
EXAMPLE

In order to exemplify the foregoing instructions, let the first point of Aries be supposed as the preceding place, and the first point in Gemini the succeeding; and let the latitude of the country, to which the operation relates, be such as will cause the longest day to consist of fourteen hours[165]; and where the horary magnitude of the beginning of Gemini will be about seventeen equatorial times.[166]

In order to illustrate the previous instructions, let's consider the first point of Aries as the starting point, and the first point in Gemini as the next one; and let's assume that the latitude of the location in question is such that the longest day lasts fourteen hours[165]; and where the hourly size of the start of Gemini will be around seventeen equatorial times.[166]

Let the first point of Aries be first placed on the ascendant, so that the beginning of Capricorn may be on the mid-heaven above the earth, and [Pg 97] the first point of Gemini be distant from the said mid-heaven 140 equatorial times.[167] Now, since the first point of Aries is distant six temporal hours from the mid-heaven above the earth, the times of that distance will be found, by multiplying the said six hours by the seventeen equatorial times of the horary magnitude of the first point of Gemini, to be 102.[168] The whole sum of the distance to the mid-heaven above the earth, is 148 times; and as 148 times exceed 102 by 46, the succeeding place will consequently devolve into the preceding place after 46 times (being the amount of the times of ascension of Aries and Taurus[169]); since, in this instance, the prorogatory place is established in the ascendant.

Let the first point of Aries be positioned on the ascendant, so that the beginning of Capricorn is at the mid-heaven above the earth, and the first point of Gemini is 140 equatorial units away from this mid-heaven. [Pg 97] Since the first point of Aries is six temporal hours away from the mid-heaven above the earth, this distance will be calculated by multiplying these six hours by the seventeen equatorial units of the horary magnitude of the first point of Gemini, resulting in 102. The total distance to the mid-heaven above the earth is 148 units; since 148 units exceed 102 by 46, the following place will consequently pass into the previous place after 46 units (which is the amount of the ascension times of Aries and Taurus); as, in this case, the prorogatory place is established in the ascendant.

In like manner, let the first point of Aries be next placed on the mid-heaven, culminating; so that the first point of Gemini, in its first position, may be distant from the said mid-heaven 58 equatorial times.[170] Now, as it is required to bring the first point of Gemini, in its second position, to the mid-heaven, the whole distance is to be reckoned, viz. 58 times, in which Aries and Taurus pass the mid-heaven; because, again, the prorogatory place was culminating.[171]

In the same way, place the first point of Aries at the mid-heaven, reaching its peak; so that the first point of Gemini, in its initial position, is 58 equatorial times away from that mid-heaven. [170] Now, to bring the first point of Gemini to the mid-heaven in its second position, you need to measure the full distance, which is 58 times, during which Aries and Taurus reach the mid-heaven; because, once more, the significant position was at its peak. [171]

In the same way, let the first point of Aries be descending[172]; so that the beginning of Cancer may occupy the mid-heaven, and the first point of Gemini precede the mid-heaven at the distance of 32 equatorial times.[173] Therefore, as the first point of Aries is on the west, and again distant six temporal hours from the meridian, let these six hours be multiplied by the seventeen times; which will produce 102, making the sum of the distance[174] of the first point of Gemini, at its future descension, from the meridian.[175] But, as the first point of Gemini, at its first position, was already distant from the meridian 32 times; which number 102 exceed by 70; it [Pg 98] will consequently arrive at its descension after 70 times, the amount of the excess; in which space Aries and Taurus will have descended, and their opposite signs Libra and Scorpio arisen.[176]

In the same way, let the first point of Aries be descending[172]; so that the start of Cancer may occupy the midheaven, and the first point of Gemini precedes the midheaven by a distance of 32 equatorial times.[173] Therefore, since the first point of Aries is to the west and is six temporal hours away from the meridian, let these six hours be multiplied by seventeen; this will give 102, making the total distance [174] of the first point of Gemini, at its future descent, from the meridian.[175] However, since the first point of Gemini, at its initial position, was already 32 times away from the meridian; this number 102 exceeds it by 70; it [Pg 98] will therefore reach its descent after 70 times, which is the amount of the excess; in that time frame, Aries and Taurus will have descended, and their opposite signs Libra and Scorpio will have risen.[176]

Again, let the first point of Aries have another position, not in any angle,[177] but, for instance, at the distance of three temporal hours past the meridian; so that the 18th degree of Taurus may be on the mid-heaven, and the first point of Gemini be approaching the mid-heaven, at the distance of thirteen equatorial times. The seventeen times must, therefore, be again multiplied by the three hours, and the first point of Gemini, at its second position, will be found to be past the meridian, at the distance of 51 times.[178] The distance of 13 times of the first position and 51 times of the second position are then both to be taken; and they will produce 64 times. In the former instances the prorogatory place performed in the same succession; viz. occupying 46 times in coming to the ascendant, 58 in coming to the mid-heaven, and 70 in coming to the west; so that the present number of times, depending on the intermediate position between the mid-heaven and the west, and being 64, also differs from each of the other numbers, in proportion to the three hours’ difference of position. For, in the other cases which proceeded by quadrants,[179] according to the angles, the times progressively differed by twelve, but, in the present case of a minor distance of three hours, they differ by six.[180]

Again, let's place the first point of Aries in a different position, not at any angle, [177] but, for example, three hours past the meridian; so that the 18th degree of Taurus is at the mid-heaven, and the first point of Gemini is approaching the mid-heaven, at a distance of thirteen equatorial times. Therefore, the seventeen times must be multiplied by three hours again, and the first point of Gemini, at its second position, will be found past the meridian, at a distance of 51 times.[178] The distances of 13 times from the first position and 51 times from the second position are then both to be considered; and they will total 64 times. In the earlier cases, the prorogatory place followed the same sequence; that is, occupying 46 times to reach the ascendant, 58 to reach the mid-heaven, and 70 to reach the west; so that the current number of times, depending on the intermediate position between the mid-heaven and the west, and being 64, also differs from each of the other numbers, in relation to the three hours’ difference in position. For, in the other cases that proceeded by quadrants, [179] based on the angles, the times differed progressively by twelve, but in the current situation of a shorter distance of three hours, they differ by six.[180]

There is, however, another method which may be used, and which is still more simple; for instance, should the preceding degree be on the ascendant, the following intermediate times of ascension,[181] between it and the succeeding degree, may be reckoned; should it be on the mid-heaven, the times of ascension must be reckoned on a right sphere; and, if it be on the west, descending, the intermediate times of descension[182] are to be reckoned. But, should the preceding degree be between any two of these angles, as, for instance, at the distance of Aries, just spoken of, the proper times for each angle must first be considered. And, since the first point of Aries was assigned a position between the two angles of the mid-heaven and the west, the proper times [Pg 99] of the distances from these angles to the first point of Gemini[183] would be found to be 58 from the mid-heaven, and 70 from the west. The distances, in temporal hours, of the preceding degree from each of these angles, are then to be ascertained; and whatever proportion these same temporal hours, contained in such distances between the said preceding degree and each angle, may bear to the temporal hours of the whole quadrant, the same proportion, out of the excess of the times of distance of one angle over those of the other, is either to be added to, or deducted from, the actual number of times of the respective angles. For instance, in the example before set forth, 70 times exceed 58 times by 12; and the preceding place was distant from the angles three equal temporal hours, which are the half of six, the number belonging to the whole quadrant. Now, three being the half of six, and 12 being the amount of the excess, the half of 12 is therefore to be taken, giving 6 to be either added to the 58 times, or subtracted from the 70: thus, in either way, producing 64, the required number of times.

There is, however, another method that can be used, which is even simpler. For example, if the previous degree is on the rising sign, the upcoming intermediate times of ascension, [181] between it and the next degree, can be calculated. If it’s on the mid-heaven, the times of ascension should be calculated using a right sphere; and, if it’s on the descending west, the intermediate times of descension [182] should be calculated. However, if the previous degree is situated between any two of these angles, like at the distance of Aries mentioned earlier, the proper times for each angle need to be considered first. Since the first point of Aries was positioned between the mid-heaven and west angles, the appropriate distances from these angles to the first point of Gemini [183] would be found to be 58 from the mid-heaven and 70 from the west. The distances, in temporal hours, of the previous degree from each of these angles need to be determined; and whatever proportion these temporal hours, within those distances between the previous degree and each angle, have to the total temporal hours of the whole quadrant, that same proportion out of the excess of the times at one angle over those of the other should either be added to or subtracted from the actual number of times of the respective angles. For instance, in the previously mentioned example, 70 exceeds 58 by 12; and the previous position was three equal temporal hours away from the angles, which is half of six, the total for the whole quadrant. Now, since three is half of six, and 12 is the excess amount, half of 12 should be taken, resulting in 6 being either added to the 58 times or subtracted from the 70, thus yielding 64 as the required number of times.

If, however, the preceding place should be distant from either angle two temporal hours, which are the third part of 6, then, in that case, the third part of 12, the amount of the excess, must be taken, viz. 4: and, if the said two hours be the distance, as calculated from the mid-heaven, the said 4 times are to be added to the 58 times; but, if it be the distance from the occidental angle, the 4 times are to be subtracted from the 70.

If the location mentioned earlier is two hours away from either angle, which is a third of 6, then the excess amount, which is a third of 12, should be considered, meaning 4. If these two hours are measured from the mid-heaven, then add these 4 to the 58. However, if it's measured from the western angle, subtract the 4 from the 70.

In conformity with these rules now laid down, the amount of the times must necessarily be obtained.[184]

In line with these established rules, the number of times must definitely be determined.[184]

[Pg 100] The anæretic and critical influences of all meetings or descensions of prorogators[185] remain to be determined; beginning, in due order, with such as are accomplished in the shortest time. And whatever else may happen, by means of any affliction or assistance offered (in the manner heretofore prescribed) during the actual transit of the meeting, is also to be decided on, as well as whatever may occur through other circumstances, arising out of the ingresses taking place at the time: because, should the places of both the significators be afflicted, and should the transit of the stars, at the then existing ingress, operate injuriously on the chief ruling places, it is then altogether probable that death will ensue;[186] and, even though one of the places[187] may be disposed favourably to human nature, the crisis will still be important and perilous; but, if both the places be so disposed favourably, some debility only, or transient malady, or hurt, will then happen. It is, however, necessary in these cases, to consider also what familiarity, or analogy, the peculiar properties of the places, thus meeting, may bear to the circumstances of the nativity.

[Pg 100] The critical effects of all meetings or gatherings of prorogators[185] still need to be determined, starting with those that happen in the shortest time. Whatever else may occur, whether due to any hardship or help provided (as previously described) during the actual meeting, also needs to be evaluated, along with anything that happens because of other factors that arise from the ingress occurring at that time. If both key positions are troubled, and if the movement of the stars at the current ingress negatively affects the main ruling positions, it is highly likely that death will follow;[186] and even if one of the positions[187] is favorably aligned with human nature, the situation will still be critical and dangerous. However, if both positions are favorably aligned, only some weakness, a temporary illness, or injury is expected to occur. It is important in these cases to also consider how the unique characteristics of the positions in question relate to the circumstances of the birth chart.

In order to obviate the doubts which frequently arise, as to the particular star or place to which the anæretic dominion ought to be assigned, all the meetings should be duly contemplated and considered, each by each; and thus, after considering those chiefly corresponding with the events already past, and with the future events about to follow, or with the whole altogether, it will be practicable to found an observation on the equality or inequality of their influence.

To clear up the doubts that often come up about which specific star or location the anæretic dominion should be assigned to, each meeting should be carefully analyzed one by one. By doing this, and focusing on those that correspond to past events or upcoming events, or looking at everything as a whole, we can reliably evaluate the equal or unequal influence they have.


CHAPTER XVI
THE SHAPE AND DISPOSITION OF THE BODY

The matters affecting and regulating the duration of life have now been disposed of; and it becomes proper to enter into further particulars, commencing, in due order, with the figure and conformation of the body; because Nature forms and moulds the body before she inspires it with a soul. In fact, the body, in its materiality, is endowed with suitable constitutional properties begotten with it, and almost apparent from its very birth; but the soul afterwards, and by degrees, develops the [Pg 101] appropriate qualities which it derives from the primary cause, and which become known much later than external attributes, and in process of time only.

The issues surrounding and controlling the length of life have now been addressed; it’s time to delve into further details, starting in proper order with the shape and structure of the body. This is because Nature shapes and molds the body before infusing it with a soul. In reality, the body, in its physical form, is born with inherent constitutional traits that are almost clear from the moment of birth. However, the soul gradually develops the fitting qualities it receives from the primary source, and these become recognized much later than the outer characteristics and only over time. [Pg 101]

In regard to the body, therefore, it is in all cases requisite to observe the oriental horizon, and to ascertain what planets may preside or have dominion over it, and also to pay particular attention to the Moon. For, from both these places,[188] and from their rulers, as well as from the natural formation and contemperament appertaining to every species of the human race, and also from the figure ascribed to those fixed stars which may be co-ascending, the conformation of the body is to be inferred. The planets possessing dominion have the chief influence, and the proper qualities of their places co-operate with them. And, in order to simplify these instructions, and as the planets are first to be treated of, each planet is individually to be considered as follows, viz.:

In terms of the body, it's essential to look at the eastern horizon and find out which planets have influence over it, as well as pay special attention to the Moon. From these locations, [188] and their rulers, along with the natural traits and temperaments of all human beings, as well as the characteristics of the fixed stars that may be rising, you can infer the shape of the body. The planets that hold dominion have the strongest impact, and the qualities of their locations work together with them. To make these instructions clearer, and since we will first discuss the planets, we will consider each planet individually as follows:

Saturn, when oriental, acts on the personal figure by producing a yellowish complexion and a good constitution; with black and curled hair, a broad and stout chest, eyes of ordinary quality, and a proportionate size of body, the temperament of which is compounded principally of moisture and cold. Should he be occidental, he makes the personal figure black or dark, thin and small, with scanty hair on the head; the body without hair, but well shaped; the eyes black or dark; and the bodily temperament consisting chiefly of dryness and cold.

Saturn, when it's in the east, affects a person's appearance by giving them a yellowish complexion and a strong constitution; they'll have black, curly hair, a broad and muscular chest, average-looking eyes, and a body that's well proportioned, mostly made up of moisture and cold. If Saturn is in the west, it makes the person have a dark or black complexion, a thin and small frame, little hair on their head; their body is hairless but well-shaped; their eyes will be black or dark; and their body will mainly have a temperament that's dry and cold.

Jupiter ruling, when oriental, makes the person white or fair, with a clear complexion, moderate growth of hair, and large eyes, and of good and dignified stature; the temperament being chiefly of heat and moisture. When occidental, he still causes a fair complexion, but not of equal clearness; and he produces long straight hair, with baldness on the forehead or on the crown of the head; and he then also gives a middle stature to the body, with a temperament of more moisture.

Jupiter ruling in the east tends to make a person light-skinned or fair, with a clear complexion, moderate hair growth, large eyes, and a good, dignified stature; their temperament is mostly warm and moist. When Jupiter is in the west, he still results in a fair complexion, but it’s not as clear; he then creates long, straight hair, with baldness either on the forehead or at the crown of the head; he also gives a medium stature to the body, accompanied by a more moist temperament.

Mars, ascending, gives a fair ruddiness to the person, with large size, a healthy constitution, blue or grey eyes, a sturdy figure, and a moderate growth of hair, with a temperament principally of heat and dryness. When occidental, he makes the complexion simply ruddy, and the personal figure of moderate stature, with small eyes; the body without hair, and the hair of the head light or red, and straight; the bodily temperament being chiefly dry.

Mars, when rising, gives a healthy reddish hue to a person, who tends to be large, strong, with blue or gray eyes, a robust build, and moderate hair growth, usually with a temperament that is mostly hot and dry. When in the west, he simply makes the complexion ruddy, often resulting in a person of average height with smaller eyes; the body tends to be hairless, and any hair on the head is light or red and straight, with a primarily dry bodily temperament.

Venus operates in a manner similar to that of Jupiter, but, at the same time, more becomingly and more gracefully; producing qualities of a nature more applicable to women and female beauty, such as softness, juiciness, and greater delicacy. She also peculiarly makes the eyes beautiful, and renders them of an azure tint.

Venus works in a way that's similar to Jupiter, but, at the same time, more elegantly and gracefully; creating qualities that align more with women and female beauty, like softness, juiciness, and delicacy. She also uniquely enhances the beauty of the eyes, giving them a blue hue.

Mercury, when oriental, makes the personal figure of a yellowish complexion, and of stature proportionate and well shaped, with small [Pg 102] eyes and a moderate growth of hair; and the bodily temperament is chiefly hot. If occidental, he gives a complexion white or fair, but not altogether clear; straight, dark hair, a thin and slight figure, some squint or defect in the eyes, and a long visage[189] faintly red; the temperament being chiefly dry.

Mercury, when in the eastern position, creates a person with a yellowish complexion, well-proportioned stature, and a nice shape, along with small eyes and a moderate amount of hair; their body type is mainly hot. When in the western position, it gives a complexion that is white or light, but not completely clear; with straight, dark hair, a slim build, some squint or flaw in the eyes, and a long face that is slightly red; the body type is mostly dry.

The Sun and Moon, when configurated with any one of the planets, also co-operate: the Sun adds a greater nobleness to the figure, and increases the healthiness of the constitution; and the Moon, especially when holding or delaying her separation,[190] generally contributes better proportion and greater delicacy of figure, and greater moisture of temperament; but, at the same time, her influence in this latter particular is adapted to the proper ratio of her illumination; as referred to in the modes of temperament mentioned in the beginning of this treatise.[191]

The Sun and Moon, when positioned with any of the planets, also work together: the Sun adds a greater nobility to the chart and improves overall health; meanwhile, the Moon, especially when holding back or delaying her separation, usually contributes to a better shape and finer details, as well as increased moisture in temperament. However, her effect in this regard depends on the appropriate balance of her illumination, as discussed in the temperament modes mentioned at the start of this treatise.

Again, should the planets be matutine, and fully conspicuous,[192] they will cause the body to be large; if in their first station, they will make it strong and vigorous; if they should precede or be in advance, it will be disproportionate; if in their second station, it will be weaker, and, if vespertine, altogether mean and subservient to evil treatment and oppression. At the same time, the places of the planets,[193] as has been already said, co-operate especially in producing the shape of the personal figure, and contribute also towards the temperament.

Again, if the planets are visible in the morning, they will cause the body to be large; if they are in their first position, they will make it strong and vigorous; if they come before or are ahead, the body will be disproportionate; if they are in their second position, it will be weaker, and if they are visible at night, it will be totally average and subject to mistreatment and oppression. At the same time, the positions of the planets, as mentioned earlier, particularly influence the shape of the body and also contribute to the temperament.

And further, it is the general tendency of the quadrant comprised between the vernal equinox and the summer tropic to produce good complexions, advantageous stature, fine constitutions, and fine eyes; with a temperament abounding in heat and moisture. The quadrant from the summer tropic to the autumnal equinox tends to produce an ordinary complexion, proportionate stature, a healthy constitution, large eyes, a stout person, with curled hair, and a temperament abounding in heat and dryness. The quadrant from the autumnal equinox to the winter tropic causes yellowish complexions, slender, thin, and sickly persons, with a moderate growth of hair, fine eyes, and a temperament abundantly dry and cold. The other quadrant, from the winter tropic to the vernal equinox, gives a dark complexion, proper stature, straight hair on the head and none on the body, a goodly figure, and a temperament abounding in cold and moisture. [Pg 103]

And additionally, the general trend of the section between the spring equinox and the summer solstice tends to create good complexions, appealing heights, strong health, and attractive eyes; with a temperament rich in warmth and moisture. The section from the summer solstice to the autumn equinox tends to produce a normal complexion, average height, healthy body, large eyes, a stout build, with curly hair, and a temperament rich in warmth and dryness. The section from the autumn equinox to the winter solstice leads to yellowish complexions, slender, thin, and unhealthy individuals, with moderate hair growth, fine eyes, and a temperament that is very dry and cold. The final section, from the winter solstice to the spring equinox, results in a dark complexion, appropriate height, straight hair on the head and none on the body, a pleasing figure, and a temperament rich in cold and moisture. [Pg 103]

To speak, however, more particularly, all constellations of human form, both those within and those without the zodiac, act in favour of giving a handsome shape to the body, and due proportion to the figure; while those not of human form vary its due proportions, and incline it towards their own shape; assimilating it, in some measure, to their own peculiarities, either by enlarging or diminishing its size, by giving it additional strength or weakness, or by otherwise improving or disfiguring it. Thus, for example, Leo, Virgo, and Sagittarius enlarge the person; and Pisces, Cancer, and Capricorn tend to make it diminutive; and thus, again, the upper and anterior parts of Aries, Taurus, and Leo increase its strength and their lower and posterior parts render it weaker: while, on the other hand, Sagittarius, Scorpio, and Gemini act conversely; for their anterior parts produce greater debility, and their posterior parts greater vigour. In like manner, Virgo, Libra, and Sagittarius contribute to render the person handsome and well-proportioned; and Scorpio, Pisces, and Taurus incline it to be misshapen and disfigured.

To be more specific, all constellations of human shape, both those inside and outside the zodiac, help create an attractive body shape and proper proportions. In contrast, those that aren't human can alter these proportions, influencing the body to take on their characteristics by either increasing or decreasing its size, adding or taking away strength, or by enhancing or distorting its appearance. For instance, Leo, Virgo, and Sagittarius make a person appear larger, while Pisces, Cancer, and Capricorn tend to make them shorter. Similarly, the upper and front parts of Aries, Taurus, and Leo boost strength, while their lower and back parts diminish it. On the flip side, Sagittarius, Scorpio, and Gemini have the opposite effect; their front parts lead to more weakness, and their back parts produce more strength. Likewise, Virgo, Libra, and Sagittarius help make a person attractive and well-proportioned, while Scorpio, Pisces, and Taurus tend to create a misshapen and unattractive appearance.

The other constellations[194] also operate on similar principles; and all these influences it is necessary to bear in mind, in order that the peculiar properties, observed in their joint temperament, may be so compounded as to authorize an inference therefrom, concerning the form and temperament of the body.

The other constellations[194] also work on similar principles, and all these influences need to be considered so that the unique characteristics observed in their combined temperament can be analyzed to draw conclusions about the form and temperament of the body.


CHAPTER XVII
THE PAINS, INJURIES, AND ILLNESSES OF THE BODY

Next in succession to the foregoing chapter, the circumstances relating to bodily hurts, injuries, and diseases, claim to be discussed; and they require to be considered in the following mode.

Next in line after the previous chapter, the issues regarding physical injuries, harm, and illnesses need to be addressed; and they should be examined in the following manner.

For the investigation of these circumstances, the two angles on the horizon, both the ascendant and the western, must in all cases be remarked; but more especially the western angle and its preceding house,[195] which is inconjunct with the ascendant. After these angles have been noted, it must be observed in what manner the malefic planets may be configurated with them: for, if both the malefics, or even if one of them, should be stationed bodily on any of the successive degrees composing the said angles, or be configurated with such degrees in quartile or in opposition, some bodily disorders or injuries will attach to the native or person then born: and this will especially happen if, also, both the luminaries, either together or in opposition, or even if one of them, should be angularly posited in the manner [Pg 104] described. Because, in such a case, not only a malefic which may have ascended in succession to the luminaries, but also any one which may have pre-ascended, if placed in an angle, has power to inflict certain diseases and injuries, such as may be indicated by the places of the horizon and of the signs, as well as by the natures of the planets themselves; whether malefics, or others evilly afflicted and configurated with them.

To investigate these situations, you need to pay attention to both angles on the horizon: the ascendant and the western angle. It's especially important to focus on the western angle and its preceding house, which is inconjunct with the ascendant. Once you've noted these angles, observe how the malefic planets are aligned with them. If both malefics, or even just one, are positioned on any of the degrees that make up those angles, or align with those degrees in a square or opposition, the person born at that time may suffer from physical disorders or injuries. This is particularly likely if both luminaries are angularly positioned, either together or in opposition, or if just one of them is. In such cases, any malefic that corresponds with the luminaries or has risen before them, when placed in an angle, can cause specific diseases and injuries. These will be indicated by the locations on the horizon and the signs, as well as by the characteristics of the planets involved, whether they are malefics or otherwise negatively influenced in their configurations.

Such parts of the signs, as contain the afflicted part of the horizon, will show in what part of the body the misfortune will exist, whether it be a hurt, or disease, or both: and the natures of the planets, in operating the misfortune, also regulate its particular form or species. For, among the chief parts of the human body, Saturn rules the right ear, the spleen, the bladder, the phlegm, and the bones; Jupiter governs the hand, the lungs, the arteries, and the seed; Mars, the left ear, the kidneys, the veins, and the privities; the Sun rules the eyes, the brain, the heart, the sinews or nerves, and all the right side; Venus, the nostrils, the liver, and the flesh; Mercury, the speech, the understanding, the bile, the tongue, and the fundament; and the Moon governs the palate, the throat, the stomach, the belly, the womb, and all the left parts.

Parts of the signs that relate to the affected area of the horizon will indicate where in the body the misfortune will occur, whether it's an injury, illness, or both. The characteristics of the planets involved in the misfortune also determine its specific type or nature. Among the major parts of the human body, Saturn rules the right ear, spleen, bladder, phlegm, and bones; Jupiter governs the hand, lungs, arteries, and reproductive organs; Mars rules the left ear, kidneys, veins, and genitals; the Sun governs the eyes, brain, heart, nerves, and the entire right side; Venus oversees the nostrils, liver, and flesh; Mercury rules speech, understanding, bile, tongue, and the anus; and the Moon governs the palate, throat, stomach, abdomen, womb, and all the left side.

It generally happens that some casual hurt, or injurious affection of the body, is the utmost that takes effect when the malefics may be oriental, and that considerable diseases occur only when the malefics may be occidental. And a hurt is distinct from a disease, inasmuch as the pain, which it induces at the time, is not afterwards continued; while a disease is, on the other hand, imposed on the sufferer either constantly or at repeated intervals. These remarks are applicable to all cases; but, in order to inquire particularly into the nature of the hurt or disease, a further attention must be paid to the figures, or schemes, with which the effects, about to be produced, will for the most part correspond in character.

It often happens that minor injuries or physical issues are the worst effects when the malefics are rising, while serious illnesses tend to occur when the malefics are setting. An injury is different from an illness because the pain it causes is temporary, whereas an illness persists either continually or intermittently. These observations apply to all situations, but to specifically investigate the nature of the injury or illness, more attention needs to be given to the charts or diagrams that generally correspond with the effects that are about to occur.

For instance, blindness of one eye will ensue, when the Moon may be in the before-mentioned angles, either operating her conjunction, or being at the full: it will also happen should she be configurated with the Sun in any other proportional aspect, and be at the same time connected with any one of the nebulous collections in the zodiac; such as the cloudy spot of Cancer, the Pleiades of Taurus, the arrow-head of Sagittarius, the sting of Scorpio, the parts about the mane of Leo, or the urn of Aquarius. Moreover, both eyes will be injured should the Moon be in an angle, and in her decrease, and Mars or Saturn, being matutine, ascend in succession to her; or, again, if the Sun be in an angle, and these planets pre-ascend before him, and be configurated with both luminaries, whether the luminaries be in one and the same sign, or in opposition; provided also the said planets, although oriental of the Sun, be occidental of the Moon. Under these circumstances, therefore, Mars will cause blindness by a stroke or blow, or by the sword or by burning; and, if he be configurated with [Pg 105] Mercury, it will be effected either in a place of exercise or sport, or by the assault of robbers. Saturn, however, under the same circumstances, produces blindness by cataract, or cold, by a white film, or by other similar disorders.

For example, losing vision in one eye can happen when the Moon is in the previously mentioned positions, either during her conjunction or at full moon. This can also occur if she forms a specific aspect with the Sun while being connected to any of the nebulae in the zodiac, like the cloudy patch in Cancer, the Pleiades in Taurus, the arrowhead in Sagittarius, the sting in Scorpio, the area around the mane in Leo, or the urn in Aquarius. Additionally, both eyes can be harmed if the Moon is in a significant position and waning, and Mars or Saturn rises in succession to her; or if the Sun is in a significant position and these planets rise before him and align with both luminaries, whether they are in the same sign or opposing each other; provided that these planets, even though they rise before the Sun, are still positioned after the Moon. In these situations, Mars can cause blindness from a hit or blow, or through a sword or fire; and if he is aligned with Mercury, it will likely occur during a physical activity or sports event, or through a robbery. Saturn, on the other hand, under the same conditions, causes blindness from cataracts, cold, a white film, or other similar issues.

Venus, if in one of the angles before-mentioned, and especially if she be in that of the west, and Saturn be in conjunction or in configuration with her, or be changing place with her,[196] while Mars, at the same time, is in elevation above her, or in opposition to her, will produce impotence in the native, if a male; and, if a female, will render her liable to abortion, or to produce children stillborn, or not capable of being extracted except in mangled parts. Such misfortunes especially happen under Cancer, Virgo, and Capricorn; even though the Moon may be in the ascendant, in conjunction with Mars. And if, under the same circumstances, Venus be also configurated with Mercury, as well as Saturn, Mars again being in elevation above her, or in opposition to her, the native will be either an eunuch or hermaphrodite, or devoid of the natural channels and vents. And, when these positions occur, should the Sun also partake in the configuration, the luminaries and Venus being all masculinely constituted, the Moon in her decrease, and the malefics brought up in the degrees next successively ascending, the males will be born maimed or crippled, or injured in their private members (particularly under Aries, Leo, Scorpio, Capricorn, and Aquarius); and the females will remain childless and unprolific. And it also occasionally happens that the natives, under such a configuration, are likewise injured in the face or eyes.

Venus, if positioned in one of the previously mentioned angles, especially in the west, and if she is aligned or interacting with Saturn, or exchanging places with her, while Mars is positioned above her or in opposition to her, will cause impotence in males. For females, this configuration may lead to miscarriage, stillbirth, or birthing children that cannot be delivered without being severely damaged. These unfortunate outcomes tend to occur particularly when the signs are Cancer, Virgo, and Capricorn, even if the Moon is rising and aligned with Mars. Furthermore, if, under the same circumstances, Venus is also coordinated with Mercury as well as Saturn, with Mars again positioned above her or opposing her, the result may be that the individual is either a eunuch or hermaphrodite, or lacks the natural reproductive organs. When these alignments happen, if the Sun is also included in the configurations, with all the luminaries and Venus being in a masculine aspect, the Moon waning, and the malefic planets positioned in the degrees that are next in line, male offspring will be born deformed or crippled, or injured in their private areas (especially under Aries, Leo, Scorpio, Capricorn, and Aquarius), while females will remain barren and unable to conceive. Additionally, it sometimes occurs that individuals under these configurations may also suffer injuries to their face or eyes.

If Saturn and Mercury, in conjunction with the Sun, be in the before-mentioned angles, the native will have some defect in the tongue, and stammer or speak with difficulty: especially if Mercury be occidental, and both he and Saturn configurated with the Moon. Should Mars, however, be found together with them, he will for the most part remove the defect in the tongue, after the Moon shall have completed her approach to him.

If Saturn and Mercury, together with the Sun, are in the previously mentioned positions, the person will have some issue with their tongue, and they might stammer or speak with difficulty, especially if Mercury is in the west and both he and Saturn are aligned with the Moon. However, if Mars is also present with them, he will mostly fix the speech problem once the Moon has completed her approach to him.

Further, should the malefics be in angles, and the luminaries, either together or in opposition, be brought up to them; or, if the malefics be brought up to the luminaries, especially when the Moon may be in her nodes, or in her bend,[197] or in obnoxious signs, such as Aries, Taurus, Cancer, Scorpio, and Capricorn, the body will then be afflicted with excrescences, distortions, lameness or paralysis.

Further, if the malefic planets are in strong positions, and the luminaries, either together or opposing each other, are brought to them; or if the malefics come to the luminaries, especially when the Moon is at her nodes or in her bend, or in challenging signs like Aries, Taurus, Cancer, Scorpio, and Capricorn, the body will then suffer from growths, deformities, lameness, or paralysis.

If the malefics be in conjunction with the luminaries, the calamity will take effect from the very moment of birth: but should they be in the mid-heaven, in elevation above the luminaries, or in opposition to each other, it will then arise out of some great and dangerous accident; [Pg 106] such as a fall from some height or precipice, an attack of robbers, or of quadrupeds. And thus, if Mars hold dominion, he will produce the misfortune by means of fire or wounds, through quarrels, or by robbers; and if Saturn, it will be caused by a fall, by shipwreck, or by convulsive fits or spasms.

If the malefic planets are aligned with the luminaries, the disaster will begin at the moment of birth. However, if they are at the mid-heaven, elevated above the luminaries, or in opposition to each other, it will come from some major and dangerous incident; [Pg 106] such as a fall from a height or cliff, an attack by robbers, or by animals. Therefore, if Mars is in control, he will cause misfortune through fire or injuries, due to fights or by robbers; and if Saturn is in control, it will occur because of a fall, shipwreck, or convulsive fits or spasms.

The minor bodily disorders mostly occur on the Moon’s being posited in a tropical or equinoctial sign; and, if in that of the vernal equinox, these disorders usually arise from the white leprosy; in that of the summer tropic, from tetters; in that of the autumnal equinox, from leprosy; and in that of the winter tropic, from the eruption of pimples, and similar inconveniences.

The minor bodily issues mostly happen when the Moon is in a tropical or equinoctial sign. If it's in the sign of the vernal equinox, these issues usually come from white leprosy; if in the summer tropic, from skin problems; if in the autumnal equinox, from leprosy; and if in the winter tropic, from pimples and other similar irritations.

Considerable diseases, however, take effect when the malefics may be configurated in the same situations as those before prescribed, yet differing in one respect; that is to say, being occidental of the Sun and oriental of the Moon. In such cases, Saturn will generally produce cold in the bowels, excessive phlegm, rheumatism, emaciation, sickliness, jaundice, dysentery, cough, obstruction, colic, or scurvy; and, in women, besides these diseases, he produces complaints of the womb. Mars will cause expectoration of blood, atrabilarious attacks, pulmonary complaints, sores, and diseases in the private parts (which will be rendered still more painful by surgical burning or incision), such as fistula, hæmorrhoids, or knots in the fundament, and also inflamed and putrifying ulcers. In women, to these calamities, he adds abortion, excision of the fœtus or its mortification.

Significant illnesses can occur when the malefic planets are aligned in the same ways mentioned earlier, with one difference: they are on the western side of the Sun and the eastern side of the Moon. In these cases, Saturn usually causes coldness in the intestines, excessive phlegm, rheumatism, weight loss, general sickness, jaundice, dysentery, cough, blockages, colic, or scurvy. In women, alongside these issues, he causes problems related to the womb. Mars will lead to coughing up blood, depressive episodes, lung issues, sores, and diseases in the genital area (which become even more painful with surgical burning or cutting), such as fistulas, hemorrhoids, or lumps in the rectum, as well as inflamed and rotting ulcers. In women, he adds to these troubles the risk of miscarriage, removal of the fetus, or its decay.

And, even though these planets should not be properly configurated towards the particular parts of the body, their qualities will still operate. Mercury also will act with them, and contribute to the increase of the evil: thus, if he be in familiarity with Saturn, he will much augment the coldness, and promote the continuance of rheumatism, and the disturbance of the fluids; especially in the chest, throat, and stomach. If in familiarity with Mars, he will tend to produce greater dryness, and will increase ulcers, abscesses, loss of hair, scarified sores, erysipelas, tetters, blackness of bile, insanity, epilepsy,[198] and similar disorders.

And even though these planets may not be perfectly aligned with specific parts of the body, their qualities still have an effect. Mercury will also interact with them and worsen the situation: if it’s close to Saturn, it will significantly increase coldness and exacerbate issues like rheumatism and fluid disturbances, especially in the chest, throat, and stomach. If it’s close to Mars, it will likely cause greater dryness and worsen conditions like ulcers, abscesses, hair loss, skin sores, erysipelas, rashes, dark bile, insanity, epilepsy, [198] and similar ailments.

Some of the properties, peculiar to disease, arise out of the various character of the signs which may contain the above mentioned configurations in the two angles. Thus Cancer, Capricorn, and Pisces, and, in short, all signs ascribed to terrestrial animals and fishes, appropriately cause diseases of putridity, tetters, excoriation, scrofula, fistula, leprosy, and the like; while Sagittarius and Gemini produce disease by falling fits and epilepsy. And if the planets happen to be posited in the latter degrees of the signs containing them, the [Pg 107] extremities of the body will then be chiefly affected by the disease or hurt; which will arise from humours or accidents, producing leprosy, gout, or other infirmities, in the hands and feet.

Some characteristics unique to diseases come from the different types of signs that may include the configurations mentioned in the two angles. For example, Cancer, Capricorn, and Pisces, along with all the signs associated with land animals and fish, typically lead to diseases like rot, rashes, skin irritation, scrofula, fistulas, leprosy, and similar issues. Meanwhile, Sagittarius and Gemini can cause diseases through seizures and epilepsy. If the planets are located in the last degrees of the signs they occupy, the [Pg 107] extremities of the body will be primarily affected by the illness or injury, which could result from imbalances or incidents causing leprosy, gout, or other ailments in the hands and feet.

Under the circumstances above detailed, the disease or hurt will be incurable, provided there shall be not one of the benefics in configuration with the malefics which effect the evil, nor with the luminaries posited in angles; and even though the benefics may be so configurated, the misfortune will still be incapable of remedy, if the malefics be well fortified, and in elevation above them.

Under the circumstances described above, the disease or injury will be incurable, as long as none of the favorable planets are in alignment with the harmful ones that cause the affliction, or with the luminaries positioned in the angles; and even if the favorable planets are aligned, the misfortune will still be beyond remedy if the harmful planets are strong and positioned above them.

Should the benefics, however, hold principal situations, and be in elevation above the obnoxious malefics, the disease or hurt will then be moderate, and have neither deformity nor disgrace attached to it; and it will sometimes be altogether prevented and set aside, if the benefics be oriental. Jupiter, for instance, by means of human aid, such as wealth or rank can command, will conceal and soothe hurts and diseases; and, if Mercury be joined with him, the assistance will be further improved by the addition of skilful physicians and good medicine. Venus, likewise, through the mediation of deities and oracles, will cause hurts to appear in a manner neither ungraceful nor unbecoming, and will ameliorate diseases by medicines granted by the gods.

If the beneficial planets are in strong positions and above the harmful ones, the illness or injury will be mild, without any deformity or shame linked to it; and sometimes it can even be completely prevented if the beneficial planets are in an eastern position. For example, Jupiter, with the help of resources or status that people can provide, can hide and soothe injuries and illnesses; and if Mercury is with him, the aid will be enhanced by the expertise of skilled doctors and effective treatments. Similarly, Venus, through the help of deities and prophecies, will cause injuries to manifest in a way that is neither awkward nor inappropriate, and will improve health issues with remedies provided by the gods.

Lastly, should Saturn be present in the configuration, the afflicted persons will move abroad to show their maladies, and to complain; and if Mercury also be present, they will do so for the sake of deriving support and profit from the exhibition.

Lastly, if Saturn is in the mix, the affected individuals will go abroad to display their issues and express their grievances; and if Mercury is also present, they will do this to gain support and benefit from the situation.


CHAPTER XVIII
THE QUALITY OF THOUGHT

The consideration of circumstances applicable to the body is practised under the foregoing rules.

The consideration of circumstances related to the body is practiced under the rules mentioned above.

Of the spiritual qualities, however, all those which are national and intellectual are contemplated by the situation of Mercury; while all others, which regard the mere sensitive faculties, and are independent of reason, are considered rather by other luminaries of a less subtle constitution and more ponderous body; for instance, by the Moon and such stars as she may be configurated with, as well by separation,[199] as by application.

Of the spiritual qualities, all those that are national and intellectual are influenced by the position of Mercury. In contrast, the qualities that relate to basic sensory experiences and aren't based on reason are more often associated with other celestial bodies that have a less refined structure and a heavier presence, like the Moon and any stars it’s aligned with, whether through separation or conjunction.

Now the mind is liable to impulse in a multiplicity of directions, and the investigation of them cannot be summarily nor hastily performed, but must be conducted by means of many various observations: for the [Pg 108] different qualities of the signs, containing Mercury and the Moon, or such stars as hold any influence over those two, are well competent to contribute towards the properties of the mind; so likewise are the configurations made with the Sun and the angles, by stars bearing any relation to the point in question; besides, also, the peculiar nature exercised by each star in operating upon the mental movements.

Now the mind is prone to sudden urges in many different ways, and examining these cannot be done quickly or carelessly; it requires a lot of diverse observations. The different qualities of the signs that include Mercury and the Moon, or any stars that influence those two, can significantly affect the characteristics of the mind. Similarly, the arrangements involving the Sun and the angles, along with stars that relate to the matter at hand, also play a crucial role, as does the unique influence each star has on mental processes. [Pg 108]

Thus, the tropical signs generally dispose the mind to enter much into political matters, rendering it eager to engage in public and turbulent affairs, fond of distinction, and busy in theology; at the same time, ingenious, acute, inquisitive, inventive, speculative, and studious of astronomy and divination.

Thus, the tropical signs usually make people more interested in political issues, leading them to actively participate in public and chaotic affairs, seek out recognition, and engage in theological discussions; at the same time, they are clever, sharp, curious, creative, thoughtful, and interested in astronomy and fortune-telling.

Bicorporeal signs render the mind variable, versatile, not easy to be understood, volatile, and unsteady; inclined to duplicity, amorous, wily, fond of music, careless, full of expedients, and regretful.[200]

Bicorporeal signs make the mind changeable, adaptable, hard to grasp, unstable, and unpredictable; prone to deception, romantic, clever, love music, carefree, full of tricks, and remorseful.[200]

Fixed signs make the mind just, uncompromising, constant, firm of purpose, prudent, patient, industrious, strict, chaste, mindful of injuries, steady in pursuing its object, contentious, desirous of honour, seditious, avaricious, and pertinacious.

Fixed signs create a mind that is fair, unyielding, consistent, determined, thoughtful, patient, hardworking, disciplined, virtuous, aware of grievances, steadfast in its goals, argumentative, eager for recognition, rebellious, greedy, and persistent.

Oriental positions, and those in the ascendant, especially if made by planets in their proper faces,[201] make men liberal, frank, self-confident, brave, ingenious, unreserved, yet acute. Oriental stations, and positions on the mid-heaven, or culminations, make men reflective, constant, of good memory, firm, prudent, magnanimous, successful in pursuing their desires, inflexible, powerful in intellect, strict, not easily imposed upon, judicious, active, hostile to crime, and skilful in science.

Oriental positions, as well as those in ascendance, particularly when occupied by planets in their rightful places, make people generous, open, self-assured, courageous, clever, straightforward, yet shrewd. Oriental positions and those at the mid-heaven, or peaks, make individuals thoughtful, reliable, good at remembering, steadfast, cautious, generous, successful in achieving their goals, unyielding, intellectually strong, discerning, not easily fooled, wise, proactive, opposed to wrongdoing, and skilled in science.

Precedent and occidental positions make men unsteady, irreverent, imbecile, impatient of labour, easily impressed, humble, doubting, wavering, boastful, and cowardly, slothful, lazy, and hard to rouse. Occidental stations, and positions on the lower heaven (as well as Mercury and Venus, when making vespertine descension by day, and rising in the night), will render the mind ingenious and sagacious, but not capable of great recollection, nor very industrious; yet inquisitive in occult matters, such as magic and sacred mysteries; also studious of mechanics, and mechanical instruments: addicted to the observation of meteors, to philosophy, to augury by means of birds, and to the judgment of dreams.

Precedent and western influences make people unstable, disrespectful, foolish, impatient with work, easily influenced, humble, doubtful, indecisive, boastful, and cowardly, lazy, sluggish, and hard to motivate. Western positions and placements in the lower heavens (as well as Mercury and Venus, when setting in the evening and rising at night) will make the mind clever and insightful, but not very good at remembering or very hard-working; however, they will be curious about hidden matters, like magic and sacred mysteries; they will also be interested in mechanics and mechanical devices, observant of weather phenomena, engaged in philosophy, interpreting omens from birds, and analyzing dreams.

Further, should the planets having dominion be in places of their own, and in conditions suitable to their own qualities, the mental properties will be rendered exquisite, unimpeded, and successful: and especially if these planets rule at the same time over both places; that is to say, be by some mode configurated with Mercury, and holds [Pg 109] separation from, or application to the Moon. Should the said planets, however, not be thus constituted, but be posited in places not particularly appropriate to themselves, they will yet, even then, infuse into the composition of the mental energy the properties of their own nature; but obscurely and imperfectly, and not with such force and strong evidence as in the other case.

Additionally, if the planets in charge are positioned in their own areas and in conditions that match their qualities, the mental attributes will become refined, unhindered, and effective. This is especially true if these planets simultaneously oversee both areas; meaning they are configured in a way that relates to Mercury and are either distanced from or connected to the Moon. However, if these planets are not arranged this way and are in locations that aren’t particularly suitable for them, they will still contribute to the formation of mental energy with their inherent qualities, but in a vague and incomplete manner, lacking the intensity and clarity found in the other scenario. [Pg 109]

The peculiar qualities of planets in dominion, or in elevation, are powerfully impressed upon the mental energy: for instance, persons, who, in consequence of the familiarity of the malefics, become wicked and dishonest, have their impulse to commit evil, free and unrestrained, when the said familiarity is not governed by any contrary influence. But, should a contrary condition impede and govern that familiarity, the impulse will be frustrated, and the culprits will be easily overtaken, and undergo punishment. In like manner, persons endowed with goodness and virtue, by the familiarity between the benefics and the before-mentioned places,[202] and when no contrary influence in elevation may interpose, will exert themselves with cheerfulness and alacrity in performing good actions, will be subject to no injustice, but enjoy the advantages of their honesty and virtue. If, however, this familiarity should be superseded by some contrary condition, the very mildness and humanity of these persons will operate to their disadvantage, exposing them to contempt and accusation, and rendering them liable to be wronged by the multitude.

The unique traits of planets in control or in a high position have a strong effect on mental energy. For example, people who become wicked and dishonest due to the influence of negative forces feel free and unrestrained to act on their impulses when there's no opposing influence. However, if a conflicting situation hinders and controls that influence, their urges will be blocked, and they will be easily caught and punished. Similarly, individuals with goodness and virtue, due to the influence of positive forces in those same positions, will eagerly engage in good deeds when there’s no opposing influence. They will face no injustice and will benefit from their honesty and virtue. Yet, if this positive influence is disrupted by a contrary condition, their kindness and humanity might work against them, making them vulnerable to disrespect and blame, and subjecting them to mistreatment by others.

The foregoing observations, relative to the moral habit, apply generally; and the particular properties, created in the mental energies by the actual nature of the planets, according to the respective dominion of each, remain to be treated of.

The previous observations about moral habits apply broadly, and the specific traits formed in the mind by the true nature of the planets, based on each one's influence, still need to be discussed.

The planet Saturn, therefore, when alone possessing dominion of the mind, and governing Mercury and the Moon, and if posited in glory, both cosmically and with respect to the angles,[203] will make men careful of their bodies,[204] strong and profound in opinion, austere, singular in their modes of thinking, laborious, imperious, hostile to crime, avaricious, parsimonious, accumulators of wealth, violent, and envious: but, if he be not in glory, cosmically, and as regards the angles, he will debase the mind, making it penurious, pusillanimous, ill-disposed, indiscriminating, malignant, timorous, slanderous, fond of solitude, repining, incapable of shame, bigoted, fond of labour, void of natural affection, treacherous in friendship and in family connections, incapable of enjoyment, and regardless of the body.[205] Connected with Jupiter in the mode before-mentioned, being also situated [Pg 110] in glory, Saturn will render the mind virtuous, respectful, well-intentioned, ready to assist, judicious, frugal, magnanimous, obliging, solicitous of good, affectionate in all domestic ties, mild, prudent, patient, and philosophical: but, if thus connected and posited ingloriously, he makes men outrageous, incapable of learning, timorous, highly superstitious, yet regardless of religion, suspicious, averse to children, incapable of friendship, cunning, misjudging, faithless, foolishly wicked, irascible, hypocritical, idle and useless, without ambition, yet regretful, morose, highly reserved, over-cautious, and dull. Conciliated with Mars, and posited in glory, Saturn renders men reckless, over-diligent, free in speech, turbulent, boastful, austere in their dealings, pitiless, contemptuous, fierce, warlike, bold, fond of tumults, insidious, deceitful, and implacable; promoters of faction, tyrannical, rapacious, hostile to the commonwealth, delighting in strife, vindictive, profound in guilt, strenuous, impatient, insolent, mischievous, overbearing, evil, unjust, obstinate, inhuman, inflexible, immutable in opinion, busy, able in office, active, submitting to no opposition, and on the whole successful in their undertakings; but, if thus connected, and not placed in glory, he will make men plunderers, robbers, adulterers, submissive to evil, seeking gain by their turpitude, infidels in religion, void of the common affections, mischievous, treacherous, thievish, perjurers, and sanguinary; eaters of unlawful food, familiar with guilt, assassins, sorcerers, sacrilegious, impious, violators of the tomb, and, in short, thoroughly depraved. Conciliated with Venus, and being again in glory, Saturn makes men averse to women, and renders them fond of governing, prone to solitude, highly reserved, regardless of rank, indifferent to beauty, envious, austere, unsociable, singular in opinion, addicted to divination and to religious services and mysteries; solicitous of the priesthood, fanatical, and subservient to religion; solemn, reverential, sedate, studious of wisdom, faithful in friendship, continent, reflective, circumspect, and scrupulous in regard to female virtue: but, if he be thus conciliated, and not posited in glory, he makes men licentious and libidinous, practisers of lewdness, careless, and impure in sexual intercourse; obscene, treacherous to women, especially to those of their own families; wanton, quarrelsome, sordid, hating elegance; slanderous, drunken, superstitious, adulterous, and impious; blasphemers of the gods, and scoffers at holy rites; calumniators, sorcerers, hesitating at nothing. If conciliated with Mercury, and if in a glorious position, Saturn makes men inquisitive, loquacious, studious of law and of medicine, mystical, confederate in secrecy, fabricators of miracles, impostors, improvident, cunning, familiar with business, quick in perception, petulant, accurate, vigilant, meditative, fond of employment, and tractable: but, if connected with Mercury, and not posited gloriously, he causes men to be frivolous, vindictive, laborious, alienated from their families, fond of tormenting, and void of enjoyment; night-wanderers, insidious, [Pg 111] treacherous, pitiless, and thievish; magicians, sorcerers, forgers of writings, cheats, unsuccessful in their undertakings, and quickly reduced to adversity. Such are the effects of Saturn.

The planet Saturn, when it has complete control over the mind and influences Mercury and the Moon, especially when it's in a strong position both in the cosmos and regarding the angles, will make people careful about their bodies, strong and deep in their opinions, serious, unique in their thinking, hardworking, commanding, opposed to crime, greedy, stingy, and collectors of wealth. However, if it’s not in a strong position, it will degrade the mind, making it poor, timid, ill-disposed, indecisive, malicious, fearful, prone to slander, enjoying solitude, resentful, shameless, narrow-minded, overly focused on work, lacking natural affection, treacherous in friendships and family relationships, unable to enjoy life, and neglectful of the body. When connected to Jupiter in the previously mentioned manner and positioned strongly, Saturn will make the mind virtuous, respectful, well-meaning, eager to help, wise, frugal, generous, accommodating, focused on good, loving in domestic relationships, gentle, prudent, patient, and philosophical. However, if connected like this but not positioned strongly, it will lead to people being outrageous, unable to learn, fearful, superstitious yet indifferent to religion, suspicious, averse to children, incapable of friendship, crafty, judgmental, untrustworthy, foolishly wicked, irritable, hypocritical, lazy and useless, lacking ambition but regretful, gloomy, overly reserved, excessively cautious, and dull. When aligned with Mars and in a strong position, Saturn makes people reckless, overly diligent, outspoken, turbulent, boastful, strict in their dealings, ruthless, contemptuous, fierce, warlike, bold, fond of chaos, deceitful, and unforgiving; they become promoters of faction, tyrannical, greedy, hostile to the common good, reveling in conflict, vengeful, deeply guilty, vigorous, impatient, arrogant, troublesome, oppressive, evil, unjust, stubborn, inhumane, unyielding in their beliefs, busy, competent in their jobs, active, resistant to opposition, and generally successful in their endeavors. But if connected in this way while not in a strong position, they will turn into plunderers, robbers, adulterers, submissive to wrongdoing, seeking gain through their depravity, unfaithful in religion, lacking basic affections, mischievous, treacherous, thieves, perjurers, and bloodthirsty; indulging in illegal food, familiar with wrongdoing, killers, sorcerers, sacrilegious, impious, tomb violators, and, in short, thoroughly corrupted. When connected to Venus and again in a strong position, Saturn makes men averse to women, inclined to governance, prone to solitude, highly reserved, indifferent to social status, unconcerned with beauty, envious, strict, unsociable, unique in their opinions, devoted to divination and religious practices; they become eager for the priesthood, fanatical, and submissive to religion; serious, respectful, composed, focused on wisdom, loyal in friendship, self-controlled, reflective, careful, and scrupulous about female virtue. However, if connected like this but not in a strong position, it leads men to be immoral and lascivious, indulging in lewdness, careless and impure in sexual matters; they become obscene, treacherous to women, especially those in their own families; licentious, quarrelsome, filthy, hating refinement; slanderous, drunken, superstitious, adulterous, and wicked; they blaspheme the gods and mock holy rituals; they are slanderers, sorcerers, and hesitate at nothing. If connected to Mercury and in a glorious position, Saturn makes men curious, talkative, interested in law and medicine, mystical, secretive, miracle-makers, impostors, careless, cunning, business-savvy, quick to understand, irritable, precise, alert, contemplative, industrious, and easily manageable. However, if linked with Mercury but not in a strong position, it causes people to be trivial, vengeful, hardworking, alienated from their families, fond of tormenting, and devoid of enjoyment; they become night wanderers, deceitful, cruel, and thieving; magicians, sorcerers, forgers, con artists, unsuccessful in their pursuits, and quickly falling into hardship. These are the effects of Saturn.

When Jupiter alone has dominion of the mind, and is gloriously situated, he renders it generous, gracious, pious, reverent, joyous, courteous, lofty, liberal, just, magnanimous, noble, self-acting, compassionate, fond of learning, beneficent, benevolent, and calculated for government: and, if posited ingloriously, he will endow the mind with qualities apparently similar to these, but not of such virtue and lustre: as, instead, of generosity, he will then cause profusion; instead of piety, bigotry; for modesty, timidity; for nobleness, arrogance; for courteousness, folly; for elegance, voluptuousness; for magnanimity, carelessness; and for liberality, indifference. Conciliated with Mars, and being in glory, Jupiter will make men rough, warlike, skilful in military affairs, dictatorial, refractory, impetuous, daring, free in speech, able in action, fond of disputation, contentious, imperious, generous, ambitious, irascible, judicious, and fortunate: but, if thus connected, and not placed in glory, he makes men mischievous, reckless, cruel, pitiless, seditious, quarrelsome, perverse, calumnious, arrogant, avaricious, rapacious, inconstant, vain and empty, unsteady, precipitate, faithless, injudicious, inconsiderate, senseless, and officious; inculpators, prodigals, triflers, altogether without conduct, and giving way to every impulse. When conciliated with Venus, and in a glorious position, Jupiter will render the mind pure, joyous, delighting in elegance, in the arts and sciences, and in poetry and music; valuable in friendship, sincere, beneficent, compassionate, inoffensive, religious, fond of sports and exercises, prudent, amiable, and affectionate, gracious, noble, brilliant, candid, liberal, discreet, temperate, modest, pious, just, fond of glory, and in all respects honourable and worthy; but, if posited ingloriously, when so connected, he makes men luxurious, soft, effeminate, fond of dancing, indulgent in expenses, incapable of managing women, yet amorous and lascivious; mean, slanderous, adulterous, fond of dress, dissolute, dull, wasteful, without energy, enervated, fond of personal adornment, womanish in mind, yet observant of holy rites and ceremonies, faithful, harmless, pleasant, affable, cheerful, and liberal to misfortune. If connected with Mercury, and posited in glory, Jupiter will render men fit for much business, fond of learning, and of geometry and the mathematics; poetical, public orators, acute, temperate, well-disposed, skilful in counsel, politic, beneficent, able in government, pious, religious, valuable in all useful professions, benevolent, affectionate in their families, ready in acquiring knowledge, philosophical, and dignified: but when so connected, and placed ingloriously, he will produce contrary effects, rendering men frivolous, empty, contemptible, credulous of falsehood, senseless, fanatical, trifling, petulant, affectors of wisdom, stupid, arrogant, pretenders in art, magicians, and vacillating: Yet he will [Pg 112] also produce men skilled in various learning, and of strong memory, capable of imparting instruction, and pure in their enjoyments.

When Jupiter has control of the mind and is in a great position, he makes it generous, kind, religious, respectful, joyful, polite, grand, open-minded, just, noble, independent, compassionate, eager to learn, charitable, helpful, and good at governing. If he is not in a good position, he will still give the mind qualities that seem similar but are less virtuous and brilliant: instead of generosity, he brings excess; instead of piety, he brings bigotry; instead of modesty, he brings timidity; for nobility, he brings arrogance; for courtesy, he brings foolishness; for elegance, he brings indulgence; instead of magnanimity, he brings carelessness; and instead of liberality, he brings indifference. When aligned with Mars and in a strong position, Jupiter makes people tough, warrior-like, skilled in military affairs, dictatorial, rebellious, impulsive, bold, outspoken, capable, argumentative, contentious, commanding, generous, ambitious, irritable, wise, and fortunate. However, if connected but not in a strong position, he makes people mischievous, reckless, cruel, ruthless, rebellious, quarrelsome, perverse, slanderous, arrogant, greedy, merciless, inconsistent, vain, fickle, hasty, untrustworthy, unwise, inconsiderate, senseless, and meddlesome; they become blamers, spendthrifts, triflers, entirely without self-control, and act on every impulse. When aligned with Venus and in a good position, Jupiter purifies the mind, bringing joy, an appreciation for elegance, the arts and sciences, poetry, and music; he cultivates valuable friendships, sincerity, kindness, compassion, non-offensiveness, spirituality, love for sports and exercise, prudence, amiability, affection, grace, nobility, brilliance, honesty, generosity, discretion, moderation, modesty, piety, justice, love of glory, and overall honor and worth. But when in a poor position, he causes people to become indulgent, soft, effeminate, fond of dancing, reckless with money, unable to manage women, yet still romantic and lustful; they may become petty, slanderous, unfaithful, vain about their appearance, dissolute, dull, wasteful, lacking energy, weakened, obsessed with personal grooming, and effeminate in thought, while still observing religious rituals, being faithful, harmless, pleasant, friendly, cheerful, and generous towards those in misfortune. If connected with Mercury and in a strong position, Jupiter makes people capable of handling many tasks, love learning, enjoy geometry and mathematics, be poetic, good public speakers, sharp, moderate, well-disposed, skilled in advice, diplomatic, charitable, capable in governance, religious, valuable in useful professions, benevolent, and affectionate within their families, quick to acquire knowledge, philosophical, and dignified. But when in a poor position, he produces opposite results, making people trivial, shallow, contemptible, gullible, senseless, fanatical, petty, irritable, pretentious in wisdom, foolish, arrogant, fakers in art, charlatans, and inconsistent: Yet he will also create people skilled in various disciplines, with strong memories, capable of teaching, and pure in their pleasures.

Mars alone having dominion of the mind, and placed with glory, makes men noble, imperious, irascible, warlike, versatile, powerful in intellect, daring, bold, refractory, careless, obstinate, acute, self-confident, contemptuous, tyrannical, strenuous, stern and able in government: but, posited ingloriously, he makes men cruel, mischievous, sanguinary, tumultuous, extravagant in expense, boisterous, ruffian-like, precipitate, drunken, rapacious, pitiless, familiar with crime, restless, outrageous, hostile to their families, and infidels in religion. Should he be conciliated with Venus, and posited in glory, he renders the mind cheerful, docile, friendly, complacent, joyous, playful, frank, delighting in songs and dancing, amorous, fond of the arts, and of dramatic personation, voluptuous, brave, libidinous in desire, sensible, cautious, and discreet; disposed to free sexual intercourse,[206] quick in anger, extravagant in expense, and jealous: but, if he have an inglorious position when thus conciliated, he makes men overbearing, lascivious, sordid, opprobrious, adulterous, mischievous, liars, fabricators of deceit, cheats of their own families as well as others, eager in desire, and at the same time soon satiated, debauchers of wives and virgins, daring, impetuous, ungovernable, treacherous, faithless, dangerous, fickle and weak in mind; and occasionally also wasteful, fond of dress, audacious, and shameless. Connected with Mercury, and placed in glory, Mars renders men skilful in command, cautious, strenuous, active, obstinate, yet versatile, inventive, sophistical, laborious, busy in all things, eloquent, imposing, deceitful, inconstant, overknowing, maliciously artful, quick witted, seductive, hypocritical, treacherous, habituated to evil, inquisitive, fond of strife, and successful; fair dealers with persons of habits similar to their own, and, in short, altogether mischievous to their enemies, though beneficial to their friends: but, if Mars be posited ingloriously, and thus connected, he makes men prodigal, yet avaricious, cruel, daring, bold, regretful and vacillating; liars, thieves, infidels in religion, perjurers, and impostors; seditious, incendiaries, frequenters of theatres, covered with infamy, robbers, housebreakers, sanguinary, forgers of writings, familiar with crime, jugglers, magicians, sorcerers, and assassins.

Mars alone ruling the mind and positioned gloriously makes people noble, commanding, quick-tempered, warrior-like, adaptable, intellectually powerful, daring, bold, rebellious, careless, stubborn, sharp, self-assured, contemptuous, tyrannical, vigorous, strict, and capable in leadership. However, when placed poorly, he causes men to be cruel, mischievous, bloodthirsty, chaotic, extravagant, loud, thuggish, hasty, drunk, greedy, merciless, familiar with crime, restless, outrageous, hostile to their families, and unfaithful in religion. If he is harmonized with Venus and positioned gloriously, he makes the mind cheerful, obedient, friendly, accommodating, joyful, playful, honest, fond of singing and dancing, romantic, passionate about the arts and performance, indulgent, courageous, sexually driven, sensible, cautious, and discreet; inclined to open sexual relationships, quick to anger, extravagant in spending, and jealous. But if he is poorly positioned in this harmony, he turns men into arrogant, lustful, filthy, disgraceful, adulterous, mischievous, deceitful, betrayers of their families and others, eager but soon satisfied in desires, seducers of spouses and virgins, daring, impulsive, uncontrollable, treacherous, disloyal, dangerous, fickle, and weak-minded, sometimes also wasteful, fashion-conscious, bold, and shameless. Connected with Mercury and positioned gloriously, Mars makes men skilled in leadership, cautious, energetic, stubborn yet adaptable, inventive, clever, hardworking, busy with everything, eloquent, impressive, deceitful, inconsistent, overly knowledgeable, maliciously crafty, quick-witted, seductive, hypocritical, treacherous, prone to evil, inquisitive, fond of conflict, and successful; fair with those of similar character, overall troublesome to their enemies while being helpful to their friends. But if Mars is poorly positioned in this connection, he makes men wasteful yet greedy, cruel, bold, regretful, and indecisive; liars, thieves, unfaithful in religion, perjurers, and impostors; rebellious, arsonists, frequent theatergoers, infamous, robbers, burglars, bloodthirsty, forgers, familiar with crime, con artists, magicians, sorcerers, and assassins.

When Venus rules alone in a position of glory, she renders the mind benignant, good, voluptuous, copious in wit, pure, gay, fond of dancing, jealous, abhorring wickedness, delighting in the arts, pious, modest, well-disposed, happy in dreams, affectionate, beneficent, compassionate, refined in taste, easily reconciled, tractable, and entirely amiable: but, if contrarily posited, she renders the mind dull, amorous, effeminate, timorous, indiscriminating, sordid, faulty, obscure, and ignominious. Conciliated with Mercury, and posited with [Pg 113] glory, Venus makes men lovers of the arts, philosophical, of scientific mind and good genius, poetical, delighting in learning and elegance, polite, voluptuous, luxurious in their habits of life, joyous, friendly, pious, prudent, fitted for various arts, intelligent, not misled by error, quick in learning, self-teaching, emulous of worth, followers of virtue, copious and agreeable in speech, serene and sincere in manner, delighting in exercise, honest, judicious, high-minded, and continent in desire as regards women[207]; but, when so conciliated and posited adversely, she will make men oppressive, fit for various arts, evil-tongued, unsteady, malevolent, fraudulent, turbulent, liars, calumniators, faithless, crafty, insidious, practised in evil, uncourteous, debauchers of women, corrupters of youth,[208] fond of personal adornment, dissolute, infamous, notoriously offensive and publicly complained of, yet striving after all things.

When Venus is in a powerful position on her own, she makes the mind kind, good, indulgent, witty, pure, cheerful, fond of dancing, a little jealous, opposed to wickedness, loves the arts, pious, modest, well-disposed, happy in dreams, affectionate, generous, compassionate, refined in taste, easy to reconcile, agreeable, and completely pleasant. However, if she's positioned unfavorably, she makes the mind dull, overly romantic, weak, fearful, indiscriminate, greedy, flawed, obscure, and dishonorable. When aligned with Mercury and situated in glory, Venus encourages people to love the arts, be philosophical, possess a scientific mind and good creativity, be poetic, enjoy learning and refinement, be polite, indulgent, luxurious in habits, joyful, friendly, pious, wise, skilled in various arts, intelligent, not easily misled, quick learners, self-taught, inspired by worth, followers of virtue, articulate and pleasant in conversation, calm and sincere in demeanor, love exercise, honest, prudent, high-minded, and moderate in desires regarding women. However, when she is misaligned in this way, she can cause people to be oppressive, skilled in various arts, critical, unstable, malicious, deceitful, turbulent, liars, slanderers, unfaithful, cunning, treacherous, experienced in wrongdoing, rude, corruptors of women, detractors of youth, concerned with personal appearance, dissolute, infamous, notoriously offensive and publicly criticized, yet still chasing after everything.

Mercury, alone, having dominion of the mind, and being in a glorious position, renders it prudent, clever, sensible, capable of great learning, inventive, expert, logical, studious of nature, speculative, of good genius, emulous, benevolent, skilful in argument, accurate in conjecture, adapted to sciences and mysteries, and tractable: but, when placed contrarily, he makes men busy in all things, precipitate, forgetful, impetuous, frivolous, variable, regretful, foolish, inconsiderate, void of truth, careless, inconstant, insatiable, avaricious, unjust; and altogether of slippery intellect, and predisposed to error.

Mercury, when in a strong position, influences the mind to be wise, clever, sensible, capable of learning, inventive, skilled, logical, curious about nature, thoughtful, good-natured, competitive, kind, skilled in debate, accurate in guesses, suited for sciences and mysteries, and easy to guide. However, when in a weaker position, it leads people to be overly busy, hasty, forgetful, rash, superficial, changeable, regretful, foolish, thoughtless, untruthful, careless, inconsistent, insatiable, greedy, unjust; and overall leads to a slippery mind prone to mistakes.

To these influences and their effects, as above detailed, the Moon also contributes: for, should she be in the bends of her southern or northern boundary,[209] she will render the properties of the mind more various, more versatile in art, and more susceptible of change: if she be in her nodes, she will make them more acute, more practical, and more active. Also, when in the ascendant, and during the increase of her illumination, she augments their ingenuity, perspicuity, firmness and expansion; but, when found in her decrease, or in occultation, she renders them more heavy, more obtuse, more variable of purpose, more timid, and more obscure.

To these influences and their effects, as described above, the Moon also plays a role: when she is at her southern or northern bending points, she makes the mind's traits more diverse, adaptable in art, and prone to change. If she's at her nodes, she sharpens their senses, making them more practical and active. Additionally, when she is rising and her light is increasing, she enhances their creativity, clarity, determination, and growth; however, when she is waning or hidden, she makes them heavier, less perceptive, more indecisive, more timid, and less clear.

The Sun likewise co-operates, when conciliated with the lord of the mental temperament; contributing, if he be in a glorious position, to increase probity, industry, honour, and all laudable qualities; but, if adversely situated, he increases debasement, depravity, obscurity, cruelty, obstinacy, moroseness, and all other evil qualities.

The Sun also plays a role when harmonized with the ruler of the mind; when it’s in a favorable position, it boosts integrity, hard work, honor, and all positive traits. However, if it’s in a negative position, it enhances corruption, immorality, obscurity, cruelty, stubbornness, gloominess, and all other negative traits.


[Pg 114]

[Pg 114]

CHAPTER XIX
Mental illnesses

In connection with the foregoing discussion on the properties of the mind, the circumstances relating to eminent mental disorders, such as madness, epilepsy,[210] and others of the like formidable nature, duly claim attention.

In relation to the previous discussion about the characteristics of the mind, the conditions associated with serious mental disorders, like madness, epilepsy, [210] and other similarly severe issues, definitely deserve attention.

Now, with reference to these, it is always essential to consider the planet Mercury and the Moon, and to observe in what mode they may be disposed towards each other, and towards the angles, and also towards the malefics: for, if the Moon and Mercury be unconnected with each other, or with the oriental horizon, and provided such planets as may be adversely and noxiously configurated should be in elevation above them, or overrule them, or be in opposition to them, the mental properties will then consequently become impregnated with various disorders: the characters of which may be clearly known by the qualities of the stars thus controlling the places.[211]

Now, when considering these factors, it's always important to think about the planet Mercury and the Moon, and to observe how they relate to each other, to the angles, and to the malefic planets. If the Moon and Mercury are not connected to each other or to the eastern horizon, and if planets that are negatively configured are situated above them, dominate them, or oppose them, then mental attributes may become influenced by various disorders. The nature of these disorders can be clearly identified by the qualities of the stars that control those positions.[211]

It is true that there are many disorders of a moderate nature, capable of being distinguished by what has been already stated, in the preceding chapter, regarding the mental qualities: for it is by the increase and growth of certain of those qualities, that an injurious excess is produced; and every irregularity of the moral habit, whether by deficiency or superabundance, may be fitly termed a moral disorder, But, at the same time, there are other disorders of so vast and manifold a disproportion, that they quite, as it were, overpower the natural course of the intellect and passions of the mind. And of these greater disorders it is now proposed to treat.

It's true that there are many moderate disorders that can be identified by what was discussed in the previous chapter about mental qualities. These disorders arise from an excessive increase of certain qualities, and any irregularity in moral behavior, whether from a lack or an excess, could be labeled a moral disorder. However, there are also other disorders that are so overwhelming and diverse that they completely disrupt the natural functioning of the mind's intellect and emotions. This text aims to address those more significant disorders.

For example, epilepsy generally attaches to all persons born when Mercury and the Moon may be unconnected either with each other, or with the oriental horizon, while Saturn and Mars may be in angles and superintend the scheme; that is to say, provided Saturn be so posited by day, and Mars by night: otherwise, when the converse may happen in these schemes, viz. when Saturn may have dominion by night, but Mars by day (especially if in Cancer, Virgo or Pisces), the persons born will become insane. And they will become demoniac, and afflicted with moisture of the brain, if the Moon, being in face to the Sun, should be governed by Saturn when operating her conjunction, but by Mars when effecting her opposition; and particularly when it may happen in Sagittarius and in Pisces. [Pg 115]

For example, epilepsy usually affects people born when Mercury and the Moon are not connected to each other or to the eastern horizon, while Saturn and Mars are in strong positions overseeing the chart. This means Saturn should be positioned during the day and Mars at night. Otherwise, if the opposite occurs—where Saturn has control at night and Mars during the day (especially if in Cancer, Virgo, or Pisces)—the people born will become insane. They will also become possessed and suffer from excessive moisture in the brain if the Moon, being opposite the Sun, is influenced by Saturn during her conjunction but by Mars during her opposition; this is particularly true when it happens in Sagittarius and Pisces. [Pg 115]

If the malefics, only, should have ruled the scheme, in the manner described, the said disorders of the mind will become irremediable, although at the same time not eminent, but doubtful, and not openly displayed; but, should the benefics, Jupiter and Venus, be conciliated, and be posited in eastern parts and in angles, while the malefics may be in western parts, the disorders, although highly conspicuous, will then be susceptible to cure. For instance, under Jupiter’s influence, they will be healed by means of medical or surgical aid, and by diet and medicine; under Venus, by the guidance of oracles and by divine interposition.

If only the harmful planets had influenced the situation as described, those mental disorders would become impossible to fix, even though they wouldn't be obvious but rather uncertain and not openly shown. However, if the helpful planets, Jupiter and Venus, are appeased and are positioned in the eastern areas and in significant aspects, while the harmful planets are in the western areas, the disorders, although very noticeable, would then be treatable. For example, under Jupiter’s influence, they can be healed through medical or surgical treatment, along with diet and medication; under Venus, through guidance from oracles and divine intervention.

Should the benefics, however, be occidental, and the malefics be found in eastern parts and in angles, the disorders will then become not only incurable, but most conspicuous: the epileptic persons will then be subjected to constant fits, and to danger of death; the insane will become outrageous and unmanageable, breaking away from their families, raving and wandering in nakedness: the demoniacs and those afflicted with moisture of the brain will become furious, uttering mysterious sayings, and wounding themselves.

Should the benefactors be in the western part, and the harmful influences be in the eastern areas and in key positions, the problems will not only become incurable but also very obvious: people with epilepsy will experience constant seizures with a risk of death; those who are insane will behave violently and uncontrollably, breaking away from their families, raving, and running around without clothes: the possessed and those troubled with fluid on the brain will become furious, speaking in riddles and hurting themselves.

The several places of position in the scheme also afford co-operation: for instance, those of the Sun and Mars contribute to insanity; those of Jupiter and Mercury, to epilepsy; those of Venus, to the fury of enthusiasm; and those of Saturn and the Moon, to demoniac affections and moisture of the brain.

The various positions in the scheme also allow for collaboration: for example, those of the Sun and Mars can lead to madness; those of Jupiter and Mercury can lead to epilepsy; those of Venus can cause intense enthusiasm; and those of Saturn and the Moon can result in demonic affections and brain moisture.

It is by such configurations, as those just described, that any morbid deviation, occurring in the active or reasoning faculties of the mind, is produced; but a deviation of the passive, or merely sensitive faculties, is discernible chiefly in the excess and deficiency (as the case may be) of the masculine and feminine genders; that is to say, in the superabundance, or deficiency, of the power of either gender, to produce a conformation agreeable to its own proper nature: and a knowledge of this latter deviation is to be acquired by means of the following rules.

It’s through these configurations, like the ones just mentioned, that any unhealthy changes in the active or reasoning parts of the mind happen; however, changes in the passive, or purely sensitive parts, are mainly noticeable in the excess or lack (depending on the situation) of the masculine and feminine traits. In other words, it's about having too much or too little of the ability of either gender to create a form that aligns with its true nature: and understanding this latter change can be achieved through the following guidelines.

When the Sun, instead of Mercury, may be with the Moon, and if Mars, together with Venus, be then in familiarity with them, in that case, provided the luminaries only be found in masculine signs, men will excel in their nature, or, in other words, will possess in full plenitude the properties becoming their sex; while the properties of women, who are thus constituted more masculinely and more actively, will deviate from the usual limits of nature. But, if both Mars and Venus, or if only one of them, be likewise masculinely situated, men will be freely and promptly inclined to natural intercourse and connexion; and women will be, in like manner, licentious and intemperate in intercourse beyond nature. Their desires will be practised in privacy, and not openly, should only Venus be situated masculinely; but shamelessly and publicly, if Mars also masculinely placed, together with Venus.

When the Sun, instead of Mercury, is with the Moon, and if Mars and Venus are also in close relation with them, then, as long as the luminaries are in masculine signs, men will be more in tune with their true nature, meaning they will fully embody the qualities associated with their gender; meanwhile, the qualities of women, who are more masculine and active in this scenario, will deviate from the typical expectations of nature. However, if either Mars, Venus, or both are also in masculine signs, men will feel free and eager to engage in natural relationships; women, in turn, will also be uninhibited and excessive in relationships beyond what is natural. Their desires will be satisfied in private if only Venus is in a masculine position, but will be expressed openly and without shame if Mars is also in a masculine position along with Venus.

But, if the luminaries only be in feminine signs, women will then [Pg 116] possess their natural functions in greater plenitude, and men will deviate from the limits of nature towards effeminacy and wantonness. And, if Venus be femininely posited, women will be lustful and licentious, and men wanton and soft; seeking connexion contrary to nature; yet in privacy and not openly: but, if Mars be posited femininely, they will then put their desires in practice shamelessly and publicly.

But if the planets are only in feminine signs, women will have their natural abilities to a greater extent, while men will stray from natural boundaries toward softness and indulgence. If Venus is positioned in a feminine way, women will be more lustful and carefree, while men will become indulgent and gentle, seeking relationships that go against nature, but doing so discreetly. However, if Mars is positioned in a feminine way, they will act on their desires openly and without shame. [Pg 116]

The oriental and diurnal positions of Mars and Venus also contribute to more masculine and more reputable qualities; and their occidental and vespertine[212] positions to qualities more feminine, and more sordid.

The eastern and daytime positions of Mars and Venus also add to more masculine and respectable qualities; while their western and evening positions contribute to more feminine and less respectable qualities.

Lastly, if Saturn be in familiarity with them, he will likewise co-operate, by tending to produce greater impurity and obscenity, and greater evil altogether; but Jupiter, if in familiarity, tends to greater decency and modesty, and altogether to better conduct; and Mercury to greater mobility, diversity, activity, and notoriety of the passions.

Lastly, if Saturn is close to them, he will also contribute by creating more impurity and obscenity, and overall more evil; but Jupiter, if close, leads to greater decency and modesty, and overall better behavior; and Mercury leads to more movement, variety, activity, and visibility of the passions.

End of the Third Book

Conclusion of Book Three

[Pg 117]

[Pg 117]


BOOK THE FOURTH


CHAPTER I
INTRODUCTION

All those circumstances have now been set forth, which occur previously to the birth, as well as at the actual birth, and after it, and which it seemed necessary to mention, as conducing to a knowledge of the general quality of the contemperament produced. And of the other points, now remaining, by which extrinsic events[213] are contemplated, those regarding the several fortunes of wealth and of rank claim to be taken first into consideration. Each of these fortunes has a distinct relationship; for instance, that of wealth relates to the body, and that of rank to the mind.

All those circumstances have now been outlined, which happen before the birth, at the moment of birth, and afterward, and which seemed important to mention as they contribute to understanding the overall quality of the temperament produced. As for the other points that remain, concerning external events[213], those related to the different fortunes of wealth and rank should be considered first. Each of these fortunes has a unique connection; for example, wealth pertains to the body, while rank pertains to the mind.


CHAPTER II
THE LUCK OF WEALTH

The circumstances regulating the fortune of wealth are to be judged of from that part alone, which is expressly denominated the Part of Fortune; the position of which is, in all cases, whether arising in the day or in the night, always as far removed from the ascendant as the Sun is distant from the Moon.[214]

The circumstances that control wealth should be judged solely by what is specifically called the Part of Fortune; its position is, in all cases, whether it occurs during the day or at night, always as far away from the ascendant as the Sun is from the Moon.[214]

When the Part of Fortune has been determined, it must be ascertained to what planets the dominion of it belongs; and their power and connexion, as also the power and connexion of others configurated with them, or in elevation above them, whether of the same or of an adverse condition, are then to be observed: for, if the planets which assume dominion of the Part of Fortune be in full force, they will create much wealth, and especially should the luminaries also give them suitable testimony in addition.

When the Part of Fortune has been established, it’s important to find out which planets have control over it; also, look at their strength and connections, as well as those of other planets that are aspecting them or positioned above them, regardless of whether they’re friendly or hostile. This is crucial because if the planets that govern the Part of Fortune are strong, they will generate a lot of wealth, especially if the luminaries also provide favorable support.

In this manner, Saturn will effect the acquirement of wealth by means of buildings, agriculture, or navigation; Jupiter, by holding some government, or office of trust, or by the priesthood; Mars, by the army [Pg 118] and military command; Venus by means of friends, by the dowry of wives, or by other gifts proceeding from women[215]; and Mercury by the sciences and by trade.

In this way, Saturn will lead to the acquisition of wealth through buildings, farming, or shipping; Jupiter, by holding a government position, office of trust, or through the priesthood; Mars, through the military and command; Venus through friendships, dowries from wives, or other gifts from women; and Mercury through knowledge and trade. [Pg 118]

Should Saturn, however, when thus in influence over the fortune of wealth, be also configurated with Jupiter, he particularly provides wealth through inheritance; especially, if the configuration should exist in the superior angles, Jupiter being also in a bicorporeal sign and receiving the application of the Moon; for, in such a case, the native will also be adopted by persons unallied to him, and will become heir to their property.

Should Saturn, however, when influencing the fortune of wealth, also be aligned with Jupiter, he specifically brings wealth through inheritance; especially if this alignment occurs in the higher angles, with Jupiter also in a dual-sign and receiving the influence of the Moon; in this situation, the person will also be adopted by those not related to them and will become an heir to their property.

And, further, if other stars, of the same condition as those which rule the Part of Fortune, should likewise exhibit testimonies of dominion, the wealth will be permanent: but, on the other hand, if stars of an adverse condition should either be in elevation above the ruling places, or ascend in succession to them, the wealth will not continue. The general period of its duration is, however, to be calculated by means of the declination of the stars, which operate the loss, in respect of the angles and succedent houses.[216]

And, additionally, if other stars, similar to those that influence the Part of Fortune, also show signs of control, the wealth will be lasting. However, if harmful stars are either positioned higher than the ruling places or align with them, the wealth won't last. The overall duration of it should be calculated by looking at the movement of the stars that cause the loss, in terms of the angles and the succedent houses.[216]


CHAPTER III
THE POWER OF STATUS

The disposition of the luminaries and the respective familiarities, exercised by the stars attending them, are to be considered as indicative of the degree of rank or dignity.[217]

The arrangement of the stars and their associated characteristics should be seen as a sign of their rank or status.[217]

For example, should the two luminaries be found in masculine signs and in angles, or even if only one of them be in an angle,[218] they being at the same time specially attended by a doryphory[219] composed of all the five planets; the Sun by such as are oriental, but the Moon by occidental, the persons then about to be born will [Pg 119] consequently become kings or princes. And, if the attendant stars themselves should also be in angles, or configurated with the angle above the earth,[220] the said persons will become great, powerful, and mighty in the world: and even yet more abundantly so, provided the configurations, made by the attendant stars with the angles above the earth, be dexter. But, when both luminaries may not be found in masculine signs as aforesaid, but the Sun only in a masculine and the Moon in a feminine sign, and only one of them posited in an angle, the other concomitant circumstances still existing in the mode above described, the persons about to be born will then become merely chieftains, invested with the sovereignty of life and death.

For example, if both the Sun and Moon are in masculine signs and located in important positions, or even if just one of them is, and they are being supported by five planets—where the Sun is represented by those that are eastern and the Moon by those that are western—then the individuals about to be born will consequently become kings or princes. Furthermore, if the supporting stars are also in important positions or are aligned with the positions above the earth, those individuals will become great, powerful, and influential in the world. They will be even more so if the alignments of the supporting stars with the positions above the earth are favorable. However, if both the Sun and Moon aren't in masculine signs as mentioned, with the Sun only in a masculine sign and the Moon in a feminine one, and only one of them is in a significant position, while the other necessary conditions are still present as described, then the individuals about to be born will only become leaders, with the authority over life and death.

And if the attendant stars, while the luminaries may be situated in the manner last-mentioned, should be neither actually in angles, nor bear any testimony to the angles, the persons then born, although they will still enjoy eminence, will attain only some limited dignity or distinction; such as that of a delegated governor, or commander of an army, or dignitary of the priesthood; and they will not be invested with sovereignty.

And if the surrounding stars, even if the main ones are positioned as mentioned earlier, are not actually in angles or showing any signs of those angles, then the people born at that time, while they will achieve some level of prominence, will only reach a certain limited status or recognition; like that of a appointed governor, a military leader, or a high-ranking priest; and they will not hold sovereign power.

If, however, neither of the luminaries be in an angle, and it happen that most of the attendant stars be either themselves in angles, or configurated with the angles, the persons then born will not attain to any very eminent rank; yet they will take a leading part in ordinary civil and municipal affairs: but, should the attendant stars have no configuration with the angles, they will then remain altogether undistinguished and without advancement; and provided, further, that neither of the luminaries be found situated in a masculine sign, nor in an angle, nor be attended by any benefics, they will be born to complete obscurity and adversity.

If neither of the major celestial bodies is in a prominent position and most of the accompanying stars are either positioned in prominent points or related to them, then the individuals born will not achieve greatness. However, they will play a significant role in regular civil and local matters. If the accompanying stars have no relation to those prominent points, they will remain completely unnoticed and stagnant. Moreover, if neither celestial body is located in a masculine sign, in a prominent position, or accompanied by any beneficial stars, they will be born into total obscurity and hardship.

The general appearance of exaltation or debasement of rank is to be contemplated as before stated, but there are many gradations intermediate to those already specified, and requiring observation of the particular interchanges and variations, incidental to the luminaries themselves and their doryphory, and also to the dominion of [Pg 120] the planets which compose their doryphory. For instance, should the benefics, or stars of the same condition, exercise the chief dominion, the dignities to be acquired will be not only important, but also more securely established; and, on the other hand, if the chief dominion be claimed by the malefics, or by stars of an adverse condition, the dignities will be more subordinate, and more dangerous and evanescent.

The overall look of uplift or lower status should be considered as mentioned earlier, but there are many levels in between those already mentioned that require careful observation of the specific interactions and changes related to the luminaries themselves and their supporters, as well as to the influence of the planets that make up their entourage. For example, if the beneficial planets, or stars of the same nature, hold the most influence, the positions gained will be not only significant but also more securely established; conversely, if the main influence is held by the malefic planets or stars of a conflicting nature, the positions will be more subordinate, and thus more risky and fleeting.

The species of dignity may be inferred by observing the peculiar qualities of the attendant stars. And, if Saturn have chief dominion of the doryphory, the power and authority derived therefrom will lead to wealth and profit: authority proceeding from Jupiter and Venus will be pleasurable, and attended by presents and honours: that proceeding from Mars will consist in commanding armies, in obtaining victories, and in overawing the vanquished: and that proceeding from Mercury will be intellectual, superintending education and study, and directing the management of business.

The type of dignity can be understood by noticing the unique characteristics of the accompanying stars. If Saturn primarily governs the doryphory, the power and influence that come from it will result in wealth and gain: authority coming from Jupiter and Venus will be enjoyable, accompanied by gifts and honors: authority from Mars will involve leading armies, achieving victories, and dominating the defeated: and authority from Mercury will be intellectual, overseeing education and learning, and managing business affairs.


CHAPTER IV
JOB QUALITY

The dominion of the employment, or profession, is claimed in two quarters; viz. by the Sun, and by the sign on the mid-heaven.

The control over the job or profession is asserted in two areas; namely, by the Sun and by the sign at the top of the chart.

It is, therefore, necessary to observe whether any planet may be making its oriental appearance nearest to the Sun,[221] and whether any be posited in the mid-heaven; especially, when also receiving the application of the Moon. And if one and the same planet possess both these qualifications, that is to say, make its nearest appearance to the Sun, and be also in the mid-heaven, that one alone must be elected to determine the present inquiry: and, likewise, though the planet should not be thus doubly qualified, but only singly, in whichever respect, even then that planet alone must still be elected provided itself alone should possess such single qualification. If, however, there should be one planet presenting its nearest appearance, and another in the mid-heaven conciliating the Moon, both must then be noticed; and whichever of two may have greater sway, and possess greater rights of dominion, that one must be preferred. But where not any planet may be found so situated, neither making its appearance as above described, nor being in the mid-heaven, then that one, possessing the dominion of the mid-heaven,[222] is to be considered as lord of the[Pg 121] employment: it is, however, only some occasional occupation which can be thus denoted; because persons, born under such a configuration, most commonly remain at leisure and unemployed.

It is therefore important to check if any planet is appearing closest to the Sun, [221] and if any are located at the mid-heaven, particularly when the Moon is interacting with them. If one single planet meets both these criteria—closest appearance to the Sun and located at the mid-heaven—then that planet should be chosen to address the current inquiry. Similarly, if a planet only meets one of these criteria, it should still be selected if it stands out in that regard. If one planet is closest and another is at the mid-heaven influencing the Moon, both should be taken into account; the one with more influence and power should be preferred. However, if no planet is found in those positions, whether closest or at the mid-heaven, then the planet that holds dominion over the mid-heaven, [222] should be considered the ruling one in this context. It’s worth noting that this configuration usually indicates that people born under it tend to be idle and unemployed.

What has now been said, relates to the election of the lord of the employment or profession; but the species of the employment will be distinguished by means of the respective properties of the three planets, Mars, Venus, and Mercury, and of the signs in which they may be posited.

What has been stated now pertains to the selection of the leader of the job or profession; however, the type of job will be identified by the specific characteristics of the three planets, Mars, Venus, and Mercury, and the signs in which they may be located.

Mercury, for instance, produces writers, superintendents of business, accountants, teachers in the sciences, merchants and bankers: also, soothsayers, astrologers, and attendants on sacrifices, and, in short, all who live by the exercise of literature, and by furnishing explanation or interpretation; as well as by stipend and salary, or allowance. If Saturn bear testimony jointly with Mercury, persons then born will become managers of the affairs of others, or interpreters of dreams, or will be engaged in temples for the purpose of divination, and for the sake of their fanaticism. But, if Jupiter join testimony, they will be painters, orators, or pleaders in argument, and occupied with eminent personages.

Mercury, for example, creates writers, business managers, accountants, science teachers, merchants, and bankers. It also influences soothsayers, astrologers, and those involved in sacrifices, essentially anyone who makes a living through literature or by providing explanations or interpretations, as well as through wages, salaries, or allowances. If Saturn is also influential with Mercury, those born at that time will manage other people's affairs, interpret dreams, or work in temples for divination due to their fervent belief. However, if Jupiter is involved as well, they will be painters, speakers, or legal advocates, and will deal with prominent individuals.

Should Venus have dominion of the employment, she will cause persons to be engaged in the various perfumes of flowers, in unguents and wines, and also in colours, dyes, and in spices: thus she will produce vendors of unguents, garland-makers,[223] wine-merchants, dealers in medical drugs, weavers, dealers in spices, painters, dyers, and vendors of apparel. If Saturn add his testimony to hers, he will cause persons to be employed in matters belonging to amusement and decoration; and will also produce jugglers, sorcerers and charlatans, and all such as practise similarly. But, if Jupiter join testimony with Venus, persons will become prize-wrestlers, and garland-wearers,[224] and will be advanced in honour through female interest.

If Venus controls employment, she will get people involved in various floral perfumes, oils, wines, colors, dyes, and spices: she will create sellers of oils, garland makers, wine sellers, drug dealers, weavers, spice merchants, artists, dyers, and clothing vendors. If Saturn backs her up, he will lead people to work in entertainment and decoration; he will also create performers, magicians, and con artists, along with anyone else in similar fields. But, if Jupiter supports Venus, people will become wrestlers and wear garlands, gaining honor through women's favor.

Mars, ruling the employment, and being configurated with the Sun, will produce persons who operate by means of fire; for instance, cooks, as [Pg 122] well as those who work in copper, brass, and other metals, by melting, burning, and casting: if Mars be separated from the Sun, he will make shipwrights, smiths, agriculturists, stonemasons, carpenters, and subordinate labourers. If Saturn bear testimony, in addition to Mars, persons will become mariners, workers in wells, vaults or mines, painters, keepers of beasts or cattle, cooks or butchers, and attendants on baths or on exhibitions. And, if Jupiter join testimony, they will be soldiers, or mechanics, collectors of revenue, inn-keepers, toll-gatherers, or attendants on sacrifices.

Mars, influencing careers, and being aligned with the Sun, will create individuals who work with fire; for example, cooks, as well as those who work with copper, brass, and other metals through melting, burning, and casting. If Mars is separated from the Sun, he will produce shipbuilders, blacksmiths, farmers, stonemasons, carpenters, and various laborers. If Saturn also plays a role alongside Mars, individuals will become sailors, workers in wells, vaults, or mines, painters, animal caretakers, cooks, butchers, and attendants at baths or exhibitions. Additionally, if Jupiter is involved, they will be soldiers, skilled tradespeople, tax collectors, innkeepers, toll collectors, or attendants at religious sacrifices.

Further, should it happen that two arbiters of employment may be found together, and provided they should be Mercury and Venus, they will then produce musicians, melodists, and persons engaged in music, poetry, and songs: they will also produce (especially if changed in their places)[225], mimics, actors, dealers in slaves, makers of musical instruments, choristers and musical performers, dancers, weavers, modellers in wax, and painters. And if Saturn join testimony with Mercury and Venus, the preparation and sale of female ornaments will be added to the aforesaid occupations. But, if Jupiter give testimony, the persons will become administrators of justice, guardians of public affairs, instructors of youth, and magistrates of the people.

Further, if it happens that two employment arbiters come together, and if they are Mercury and Venus, they will create musicians, songwriters, and people involved in music, poetry, and singing. They will also produce (especially if their positions are switched) [225], actors, slave traders, makers of musical instruments, choir members, performers, dancers, weavers, wax modelers, and painters. And if Saturn joins Mercury and Venus, the making and selling of women's accessories will be added to those jobs. But if Jupiter joins in, the people will become judges, public officials, teachers, and community leaders.

Should Mercury and Mars together be lords of the employment, persons will become statuaries, armour-makers, sculptors,[226] modellers of animals, wrestlers, surgeons, spies or informers, adulterers, busy in crime, and forgers. And, if Saturn also bear testimony in addition to Mercury and Mars, he will produce assassins, highwaymen, thieves, robbers lurking in ambush, marauders on cattle, and swindlers. But, if Jupiter afford testimony, he will engage persons in honourable warfare, and in industry; making them cautious and diligent in business, curious in foreign matters, and deriving profit from their pursuits.

Should Mercury and Mars be in charge of jobs, people will become sculptors, armor-makers, animal modelers, wrestlers, surgeons, spies, informants, criminals, and forgers. If Saturn also plays a role alongside Mercury and Mars, he will lead to the creation of assassins, highway robbers, thieves, ambushers, cattle raiders, and con artists. However, if Jupiter has any influence, he will engage people in honorable military service and productive work, making them careful and hardworking in their business, interested in foreign affairs, and able to earn profits from their endeavors.

When Venus and Mars exercise the dominion together, persons will become dyers, dealers in unguents and perfumes, workers in tin, lead, gold, and silver, mock combatants or dancers in armour, dealers in medical drugs, agriculturists, and physicians, healing by means of medicine. And if Saturn add testimony to Venus and Mars, he will produce persons attendant on animals consecrated to religion; also grave-diggers and undertakers, mourners and musicians at funerals, and fanatics occupied in religious ceremonies, lamentations, and blood. But, if Jupiter add testimony, the persons will become regulators of sacrifices, augurs, holders of sacred offices, governors placed over women, and interpreters; and they will derive support from such occupations.

When Venus and Mars work together, people will become dyers, sellers of ointments and fragrances, workers with tin, lead, gold, and silver, performers in mock battles or dancers in armor, sellers of medical drugs, farmers, and doctors who heal with medicine. If Saturn adds his influence to Venus and Mars, it will produce people who care for animals dedicated to religion; also gravediggers and funeral directors, mourners and musicians at funerals, and fanatics involved in religious rituals, mourning, and blood. But if Jupiter contributes his influence, these individuals will become organizers of sacrifices, diviners, holders of sacred roles, overseers of women, and interpreters; and they will find support through these professions.

The properties of the signs, in which the lords of the employment may be posited, are also influential in varying the employment. For example, [Pg 123] the signs of human shape promote all scientific pursuits, and such as are of utility to mankind; the quadrupedal signs contribute to produce employment among metals, in business and trade, in house-building, and in the work of smiths and mechanics: the tropical and equinoctial signs tend to give employment in translation or interpretation, in matters of exchange, in mensuration and agriculture, and in religious duties: the terrestrial and watery signs tend to employment in water, and in connection with water, as well in regard to the nurture of plants, as to ship-building; they likewise contribute to employment in funerals, in embalming and preserving, and also in salt.

The characteristics of the signs, where the lords of the job may be found, also influence the type of work available. For instance, [Pg 123] the signs associated with human form encourage all scientific endeavors and those beneficial to humanity; the signs representing four-legged animals lead to jobs related to metals, commerce, construction, and work done by blacksmiths and mechanics. The tropical and equatorial signs are connected to work in translation or interpretation, trade, measurement, agriculture, and religious duties. The earth and water signs are associated with jobs involving water, including plant care and shipbuilding; they also play a role in funeral services, embalming, preservation, and salt production.

Moreover, should the Moon herself actually occupy the place regulating the employment,[227] and, after her conjunction, continue in course with Mercury, being at the same time in Taurus, Capricorn, or Cancer, she will then produce soothsayers, attendants on sacrifices, and diviners by the basin.[228] If she be in Sagittarius or Pisces, she will make necromancers, and evokers of dæmons: if in Virgo or Scorpio, magicians, astrologers, and oracular persons, possessing prescience: and, if in Libra, Aries, or Leo, she will produce fanatics, interpreters of dreams, and makers of false vows and adjurations.

Moreover, if the Moon actually takes on the role of regulating employment, [227] and, after her conjunction, continues on her path with Mercury while also being in Taurus, Capricorn, or Cancer, she will then create soothsayers, those who assist in sacrifices, and diviners using water. [228] If she is in Sagittarius or Pisces, she will produce necromancers and summoners of spirits; if in Virgo or Scorpio, magicians, astrologers, and those with foresight; and if in Libra, Aries, or Leo, she will generate fanatics, dream interpreters, and those who make false promises and oaths.

From the foregoing rules, the various forms of employment are to be inferred; and its magnitude or importance will be manifested by the existing power of the ruling planets. For instance, if the said planets be oriental, or in angles, they will give the person eminence and authority in his employment; but, if occidental or cadent, they will render him subordinate. And should the benefics be in elevation, the employment will be important, lucrative, secure, honourable, and agreeable; but, on the other hand, if the malefics be in elevation above the lords of the employment, it will then be mean, disreputable, unprofitable, and insecure: thus, Saturn brings an adverse influence in coldness or tardiness, and in the composition or mixture of colours[229]; and Mars produces opposition by audacity and publicity in enterprise: [Pg 124] and both planets are alike hostile to proficiency and prosperity.

From the rules mentioned earlier, we can draw conclusions about the different types of jobs a person may have, and their significance will be shown by the influence of the ruling planets. For example, if these planets are in a prominent position, they will grant the individual distinction and authority in their work; however, if they are in a less favorable position, they will make the person subordinate. If the beneficial planets are elevated, the job will be significant, profitable, secure, respectable, and enjoyable; conversely, if the harmful planets are elevated above those associated with the job, it will be lowly, disreputable, unprofitable, and unstable. In this way, Saturn brings negative effects with coldness or delays, and in the blending or combination of colors[229]; while Mars causes conflict through boldness and exposure in ventures: [Pg 124] and both planets are similarly detrimental to success and prosperity.

The general period, at which any increase or diminution of the employment may take place, must, again in this case also, be determined by the disposition of the stars, which operate the effect towards the oriental and occidental angles.

The overall time when any increase or decrease in employment can happen must also be determined by the positioning of the stars, which influence the effects towards the eastern and western angles.


CHAPTER V
MARRIAGE

The consideration of circumstances relating to marriage, or the cohabitation of husband and wife, as sanctioned by law, succeeds to the foregoing details, and must be pursued in the following method.

The examination of situations related to marriage, or the living together of husband and wife, as allowed by law, follows the previous details and should be carried out in the following way.

With regard to men, it is to be observed in what manner the Moon may be disposed; for, in the first place, if she be found in the oriental quadrants, she will cause men either to marry early in life, or, after having over-passed their prime, to marry young women; “but, should she be situated in either of the occidental quadrants, men will then marry either late in life, or to women advanced in age[230]”: and if she be found under the Sun’s beams, and configurated with Saturn, she then entirely denies marriage. Secondly, should she be in a sign of single form, and in application to only one of the planets, she will cause men to marry only once; but, if she be in a bicorporeal or multiform sign, or in application to several planets, she will cause them to be married several times; and, provided also that the planets, which thus, either by adjacency or by testimony,[231] receive her application, be benefic, men will then obtain good wives; but if, on the contrary, the said planets be malefic, bad. For example, if Saturn receive the Moon’s application, the wives whom he will provide will be troublesome and morose; but, if Jupiter receive it, they will be decorous and economical; if Mars, bold and refractory; if Venus, cheerful, handsome, and agreeable; and, if Mercury, sensible, prudent, and clever. Moreover, should Venus be found connected with Jupiter, Saturn,[232] or Mercury, she will render wives provident, and attached to their husbands and children; but, if she be found connected with Mars, they will be irascible, unsteady, and indiscreet. Thus far in reference to the marriage of men.

With regard to men, it’s important to observe how the Moon is positioned; for, first of all, if she is located in the eastern quadrants, men will either marry early in life or, after their prime, marry younger women. However, if she is positioned in either of the western quadrants, men will marry either late in life or to older women. If she is found under the Sun’s rays and aligned with Saturn, marriage is completely denied. Secondly, if she is in a sign of single form and aligned with only one planet, men will marry only once; but if she is in a sign with dual or multiple forms, or aligned with several planets, men will marry multiple times. Additionally, if the planets that receive her alignment, either by proximity or influence, are benefic, men will have good wives; but if these planets are malefic, they will have bad ones. For example, if Saturn receives the Moon’s alignment, the wives he provides will be troublesome and moody; if Jupiter receives it, they will be proper and thrifty; if Mars, bold and rebellious; if Venus, cheerful, attractive, and pleasant; and if Mercury, sensible, wise, and clever. Moreover, if Venus is associated with Jupiter, Saturn, or Mercury, she will make wives caring and devoted to their husbands and children; but if she is connected to Mars, they will be irritable, unstable, and indiscreet. This concludes the discussion on men's marriages.

But, in the case of women, the Sun must be observed, instead of the Moon: and, should he be posited in the oriental quadrants, women will [Pg 125] be married either in their own youth, or to men younger than themselves; but, if he be in the occidental quadrants, they will either be married late in life, or to men who have passed their prime, and are advanced in years. And should the Sun be in a sign of single form, or configurated with only one oriental planet, he will cause them to enter into matrimony only once; but, if in a bicorporeal or multiform sign, or configurated with several oriental planets, he will then cause them to be often married. And Saturn, being configurated with the Sun, will provide husbands steadfast, advantageous, and industrious; Jupiter, such as are honourable and noble-minded; Mars, severe husbands void of affection and intractable; Venus, amiable and handsome husbands; and Mercury, such as are provident and expert in business. But, if Venus be found connected with Saturn, she will indicate dull and timid husbands; “if with Jupiter, the husbands will be good, just, and modest[233];” if with Mars, hasty, lustful, and adulterous; and if with Mercury, they will be extravagantly desirous of young persons.[234]

But for women, you need to look at the Sun instead of the Moon. If the Sun is in the eastern quadrants, women will get married either while they are young or to men who are younger than they are. However, if the Sun is in the western quadrants, they will marry later in life or to men who are past their prime and older. If the Sun is in a sign that represents a single form or is aligned with only one eastern planet, it will lead them to marry only once; but if it's in a dual-sign or a sign with multiple forms or is aligned with several eastern planets, it will cause them to be married multiple times. If Saturn is aligned with the Sun, it will bring them steadfast, well-off, and hardworking husbands; Jupiter will provide husbands who are honorable and noble; Mars will bring harsh husbands who lack affection and are difficult; Venus will bring charming and attractive husbands; and Mercury will bring those who are savvy and skilled in business. However, if Venus is connected with Saturn, it will suggest husbands who are dull and timid; if with Jupiter, the husbands will be good, just, and modest; if with Mars, they will be quick-tempered, lustful, and unfaithful; and if with Mercury, they will have an excessive desire for young people.

In regard to the Sun, those quadrants which precede the ascending and descending points of the zodiac, and, in respect of the Moon, those which are measured from her conjunction and opposition[235] to her intermediate quarters, are called oriental quadrants: the occidental quadrants are, of course, those lying opposite to the oriental.

In relation to the Sun, the quadrants that come before the rising and setting points of the zodiac, and concerning the Moon, those measured from her conjunction and opposition to her middle phases, are referred to as the eastern quadrants. The western quadrants are simply those that are opposite the eastern ones.

Whenever both nativities, viz. that of the husband and that of the wife, may exhibit the luminaries configurated together in concord, that is to say, either in trine or in sextile to each other, the cohabitation will most usually be lasting; especially if the said concord exist by means of interchange[236]; but its duration will be also much more securely established, provided the Moon in the husband’s nativity should correspond or agree with the Sun in the wife’s nativity.[237] If, however, the relative positions of the luminaries be in signs inconjunct, or in opposition, or in quartile, the cohabitation will be speedily dissolved upon slight causes, and the total separation of the parties will ensue.

Whenever both horoscopes, specifically that of the husband and that of the wife, show the planets aligned positively together, meaning they are in a harmonious aspect like a trine or sextile, their living together will usually be long-lasting; especially if this harmony is mutual[236]. Additionally, their bond will be even more secure if the Moon in the husband’s chart connects well with the Sun in the wife’s chart.[237] However, if the alignment of the planets falls into signs that are inconjunct, opposite, or in a square, their relationship is likely to break down quickly over minor issues, leading to complete separation.

And should the configuration of the luminaries, when made in concord, be aspected by the benefics, the cohabitation will continue in respectability, comfort, and advantage; but, on the other hand, it will abound in strife, contention, and misfortune, if the malefics be in aspect to the said configuration.

And if the arrangement of the stars is aligned harmoniously and influenced by the positive ones, the relationship will thrive with respect, comfort, and benefits. However, if the negative influences align with that arrangement, it will be filled with conflict, struggle, and bad luck.

In like manner, even though the luminaries may not be favourably [Pg 126] configurated in concord, should the benefics still offer testimony to them, the cohabitation will then not be entirely broken off, nor totally destroyed for ever, but will be again renewed, and re-established as before. But if, on the contrary, the malefics bear testimony to such discordant disposition of the luminaries, a dissolution of the cohabitation will take place, accompanied by scorn and injury. Should Mercury alone be conjoined with the malefics, it will be effected by means of some public inculpation; and if Venus also be found with them, it will be on the ground of adultery, or sorcery, or some similar offence.

In the same way, even if the stars aren’t aligned in a positive way, if the beneficial planets still have a good connection with them, the relationship won’t be completely broken or permanently damaged, but will be renewed and restored like before. However, if the harmful planets indicate a troubled relationship among the stars, then the relationship will break down, filled with contempt and harm. If Mercury is only connected with the harmful planets, it will likely result from some public accusation; and if Venus is also involved, it will be due to infidelity, witchcraft, or a similar wrongdoing.

There are, however, other varieties in the married state, which are to be contemplated by means of Venus, Mars, and Saturn. And should these planets act in familiarity with the luminaries, the cohabitation will be appropriate and domestic, and authorised by law; because Venus holds a certain affinity both to Mars and Saturn: her affinity to Mars, for instance, consists in each having exaltation in a sign belonging to the other’s triplicity,[238] and it operates in the cases of youthful and vigorous persons: while her affinity to Saturn arises from their respective houses being in the signs, again also, belonging to each other’s triplicity,[239] and relates to persons of more advanced age.

There are, however, different types of marriage that can be understood through the influences of Venus, Mars, and Saturn. If these planets interact positively with the luminaries, the relationship will be suitable and harmonious, and recognized by law; because Venus has a special connection to both Mars and Saturn: her relationship with Mars, for example, comes from both having exaltation in a sign that belongs to the other’s triplicity,[238] and it affects younger, more energetic individuals; while her relationship with Saturn comes from their respective houses being in signs that also belong to each other’s triplicity,[239] and relates to older individuals.

Hence, if Venus be in concurrence with Mars, she will produce entire love and affection in the cohabiting parties; and if Mercury also coincide with the said planets, such affection will become publicly notorious. Should Venus be found in a sign mutually common and familiar, such as Capricorn, or Pisces,[240] she will effect marriages between brothers and sisters and kindred by blood: and, provided she be also in the presence of the Moon, when the native may be male, she will cause him to connect himself with two sisters, or other near relatives; but, if the native be a female, a similar contract on her part, with two brothers or near relatives, will be indicated, when Venus may be also with Jupiter.[241]

If Venus aligns with Mars, it will inspire deep love and affection between the people involved; and if Mercury also joins these planets, that affection will become widely known. If Venus is in a sign that is commonly shared, like Capricorn or Pisces, she will facilitate marriages among siblings and blood relatives: And if she’s also near the Moon when the person is male, it will lead him to connect with two sisters or other close relatives; if the person is female, a similar situation will occur with two brothers or close relatives when Venus is also with Jupiter.

Again, if Venus be with Saturn, the cohabitation will be established entirely in happiness and constancy; and if Mercury be present with them, it will be profitable; but, should Mars be present, it will be unsettled, calamitous, and afflicted by jealousy. And if Mars be configurated on equal terms with Venus, Saturn, and Mercury, he will effect marriage between persons of equal age; but, on the other hand, should he be more oriental, marriage will take place with a younger man or woman; and, if more occidental, with an older person. Should Venus [Pg 127] and Saturn be found in signs common to each other, that is to say, in Capricorn and Libra,[242] marriage will be contracted between persons kindred by blood: and, when the said position may happen in the ascendant, or in the mid-heaven, provided the Moon also should present herself there, men will become connected with their mothers, or maternal aunts, or with their mothers-in-law; and women with their own sons, or the sons of their brothers, or with their daughters’ husbands. But if, instead of the Moon, the Sun should be in concurrence with the said position, and especially should it happen that the planets in question may be occidental, men will then connect themselves with their daughters, or the wives of their sons; and women with their fathers, or paternal uncles, or the husbands of their daughters.

Again, if Venus is with Saturn, the relationship will be established entirely in happiness and stability; and if Mercury is present with them, it will be beneficial; but, if Mars is present, it will be unstable, disastrous, and troubled by jealousy. And if Mars is equally aligned with Venus, Saturn, and Mercury, he will facilitate marriage between people of the same age; however, if he is more to the east, marriage will occur with a younger person; and if more to the west, with an older person. If Venus and Saturn are found in signs common to each other, that is to say, in Capricorn and Libra, marriage will occur between relatives by blood: and, when this alignment happens in the ascendant or mid-heaven, provided the Moon is also there, men will become connected with their mothers, or maternal aunts, or with their mothers-in-law; and women with their own sons, or the sons of their brothers, or with their daughters’ husbands. But if, instead of the Moon, the Sun is in line with this position, especially if the planets in question are to the west, men will then connect themselves with their daughters, or the wives of their sons; and women with their fathers, or paternal uncles, or the husbands of their daughters. [Pg 127]

When the aforesaid configurations,[243] although not existing in signs of affinity to each other,[244] should be found in feminine places, they will render the parties obscene, lustful and shameless; for instance, when found in the anterior and hinder parts of Aries, and near the Hyades of Taurus, about the urn of Aquarius, in the hinder parts of Leo, and in the face of Capricorn. And should the last-named planets, Venus and Saturn, be posited in angles, they will then, if posited in the first two angles, the eastern and southern, produce a total exposure of the passions, and cause them to be publicly canvassed; but, if in the last two angles, the western and northern, they will produce eunuchs, or persons unprolific, and not possessing the proper channels of nature.

When the mentioned configurations, [243] even if they don't have any signs of connection to each other, [244] are found in feminine places, they will make the individuals indecent, lustful, and shameless; for example, when located in the front and back parts of Aries, near the Hyades of Taurus, around the urn of Aquarius, in the back parts of Leo, and in the face of Capricorn. And if the previously mentioned planets, Venus and Saturn, are positioned in angles, then, if they are in the first two angles, the eastern and southern, they will lead to a complete exposure of passions, and cause them to be publicly discussed; but if they are in the last two angles, the western and northern, they will result in eunuchs or individuals who are unproductive and lack the proper channels of nature.

The passions, liable to operate in males, are to be considered by observation of Mars: for should he be separated from Venus and Saturn, but yet, at the same time, be supported by the testimony of Jupiter, he will make men pure and decorous in sexual intercourse, and incline them to natural usages only: and, if he attach himself to Saturn only, he will render them cold in blood and dull in appetite; if, however, when Saturn and Mars may be thus connected together, Venus and Jupiter should also be configurated with them, men will then become easily excited and eager in desire, although they will still be continent, and restrain themselves in order to avoid reproach. But should Saturn be absent, and Mars be with Venus alone, or even although Jupiter also be with her, men will become highly licentious, and attempt to gratify their desires in every mode.[245] And further, if Venus be found more occidental, men will connect [Pg 128] themselves with low women, female servants, and aliens or vagabonds; but, should Mars be found occidental, with women of rank, and gentlewomen; or with women living with their husbands, or under the protection of men. Thus far with regard to males.

The passions that affect men should be looked at through the lens of Mars: if he is separated from Venus and Saturn, but supported by the influence of Jupiter, he will make men pure and proper in sexual relations, steering them towards natural behaviors only. If he aligns solely with Saturn, he will make them cold-blooded and lacking in desire. However, if Saturn and Mars are together and Venus and Jupiter are also in alignment, men will become easily aroused and eager for desire, though they will still show restraint to avoid shame. If Saturn is absent and Mars is with Venus alone, or even if Jupiter is with her, men will become very promiscuous, seeking to satisfy their desires in any way possible. Additionally, if Venus is more to the west, men will get involved with lower-class women, female servants, and outsiders or drifters; but if Mars is to the west, they will associate with women of high status, genteel women, or those living with their husbands or under the protection of men. This covers the behavioral tendencies of males.

In the case of females, Venus requires attention: for, if she be configurated with Jupiter, or with Mercury, she will cause women to be temperate and pure in sexual intercourse; still, however, when she may be thus connected with Mercury, if Saturn be not present also, she will cause them to be easily excited to desire; although they will control their desires, and avoid reproach. But, should Venus be conjoined or configurated with Mars alone, she will render women licentious and lustful; and if, to both these planets, when thus conjoined or configurated, Jupiter also present himself, Mars being at the same time under the rays of the Sun, women will then mingle in intercourse with servants, and persons meaner than themselves, or with aliens, or vagabonds: but, should it happen that Venus may be under the rays of the Sun, they will then connect themselves with their superiors or masters. And, further, should the planets be in feminine places, or configurated femininely, they will be content with their passive faculties only.[246]

In the case of women, Venus needs attention: if she is aligned with Jupiter or Mercury, she will make women moderate and pure in their sexual relationships. However, if she is aligned with Mercury without Saturn being present as well, she will make them easily aroused, although they will manage their desires and avoid shame. But if Venus is joined or aligned with Mars alone, she will make women wanton and lustful. And if Jupiter also appears alongside these two planets in this configuration, with Mars under the influence of the Sun, women will then engage in sexual relations with servants, people of lower status, or outsiders. However, if Venus is under the influence of the Sun, they will then connect with their superiors or masters. Furthermore, if the planets are in feminine signs or are configured in a feminine way, they will be satisfied with only their passive roles.

Saturn, in being conciliated with such positions as those now described, tends to produce greater obscenity; Jupiter, greater decency; and Mercury, greater publicity, and greater fickleness, or instability.

Saturn, by being aligned with such positions as those just described, tends to create more obscenity; Jupiter, more decency; and Mercury, more publicity and greater fickleness or instability.

CHAPTER VI
KIDS

The next point to be investigated is that concerning children: and, to accomplish this, observation must be made of the planets posited in, or configurated with the place on the zenith,[247] or its succedent house, which latter is called the place of the good dæmon. And should it happen that not any planets may be present in the said places, nor configurated with them, it will then be necessary to take into consideration such as may be in opposition thereto.

The next point to look into is about children: to do this, we need to observe the planets located in or aligned with the position at the zenith, [247] or its next house, which is referred to as the place of the good spirit. If there are no planets present in those places or aligned with them, we then need to consider those that may be in opposition to them.

Now the Moon, Jupiter, and Venus are esteemed as givers of offspring; but the Sun, Mars, and Saturn are considered as denying children altogether, or as allowing but few: while Mercury, being in quality common to both parties, lends co-operation to that with which he may be configurated, and gives offspring, when oriental, but withholds, when occidental. [Pg 129]

Now the Moon, Jupiter, and Venus are regarded as symbols of fertility; however, the Sun, Mars, and Saturn are thought to either deny children altogether or grant very few. Meanwhile, Mercury, having qualities that align with both sides, supports whichever influence he is connected to, giving offspring when positioned in the east but withholding them when in the west. [Pg 129]

To speak briefly, if the planets, which grant progeny, be so posited as described,[248] and placed singly, the gift of progeny will be single only[249]; but should they be in bicorporeal or in feminine signs, they will grant double offsprings[250]: so likewise if they should be in prolific or seminal signs, such as Pisces, Cancer, and Scorpio, they will grant twins, or even more. And provided they should also be masculinely constituted, as well by configuration with the Sun, as by being in masculine signs, they will grant male children; but otherwise, if femininely constituted, female.

To keep it short, if the planets that influence childbirth are positioned as mentioned, and they're alone, the result will be only one child; however, if they are in dual or feminine signs, they will result in multiple children. Similarly, if they are in fruitful or reproductive signs like Pisces, Cancer, and Scorpio, they will lead to twins or even more. Additionally, if they are also configured with the Sun in a masculine way or located in masculine signs, they will result in male children; otherwise, if they are feminine, they will result in female children.

But, although the said planets, even if beneath the malefics in elevation, or, even if found in barren places, or in signs such as those of Leo and Virgo, will still grant children; yet such children, thus indicated, will neither be healthy, nor continue in life. Should it happen, however, that the Sun and the malefics may be in entire possession of the places above mentioned, viz. that on the zenith, or the succedent house allotted to the good dæmon; and provided they be, at the same time, in masculine or barren signs, and the benefics be not in elevation above them, a total privation of offspring is thereby indicated; but, should they be in feminine or prolific signs, or supported by the testimony of the benefics, children will then be granted; yet they will be liable to disease, and short-lived.

But even if the mentioned planets are below the malefics in elevation, or found in barren places, or in signs like Leo and Virgo, they can still grant children; however, those children will neither be healthy nor have a long life. If it happens that the Sun and the malefics occupy the aforementioned places, namely the zenith or the house where the good spirit resides, and if they are also in masculine or barren signs and the benefics are not elevated above them, it indicates a complete lack of offspring. However, if they are in feminine or fruitful signs, or supported by the benefics, children will be granted; yet, they will be prone to illness and not live long.

If, however, planets of each condition should be configurated with, and have prerogative in prolific signs, there will then ensue a loss of either all the children, or only few, or else the major part of them; in the same proportion as that in which the planets, bearing testimony to either condition, may preponderate on one side rather than the other; by excelling in number, or in influence, in consequence of being posited more orientally, more genuinely in angles, higher in elevation, or successively ascending.

If, however, planets in each condition are aligned with and have power in productive signs, there will then be a loss of either all the children, just a few, or most of them; in the same proportion as the planets that reflect either condition may outweigh the other side; by being more numerous or more influential, due to being positioned more to the east, more firmly in angles, at a higher elevation, or moving up consecutively.

When the lords of the aforesaid signs[251] may be such as are givers of offspring, and be either oriental, or in places proper to themselves, the children thus granted will become eminent and illustrious: but, if occidental, or in places not proper to themselves, the children will then become undistinguished and abject. Should the said lords also be in concord with the part of fortune, and with the ascendant, they will render the children amiable, and cause them to be beloved by their parents, and to inherit their parents’ substance: but, if found inconjunct, and not in concord with the said parts, the children will then become odious and mischievous to their parents, and will forfeit the inheritance of their substance. [Pg 130]

When the rulers of the mentioned signs[251] are those who can bear children, and are either in the east or in their proper locations, the children born from them will become prominent and respected. However, if they are in the west or in unsuitable places, the children will end up being ordinary and unremarkable. If these rulers are also in harmony with the part of fortune and the ascendant, they will make the children pleasant and cause them to be loved by their parents, who will then pass on their wealth to them. But if they are not in harmony and are misaligned with these aspects, the children will become disliked and troublesome to their parents, losing their right to inherit their wealth. [Pg 130]

Further, should the planets which grant progeny be appropriately configurated with each other, they will promote brotherly love, and mutual regard and affection among the children; but, if inconjunct, or in opposition, they will excite in them mutual hatred, deceit, and treachery.

Moreover, if the planets that bring about children are well-aligned with each other, they will encourage brotherly love and mutual respect and affection among the kids; however, if they are poorly aligned or in opposition, they will stir up feelings of hatred, deceit, and betrayal among them.

The general investigation regarding children is to be conducted in the foregoing method: but, in order to enquire into particular circumstances consequent on the above, it will be necessary to assume, as an ascendant, the position of each planet which gives offspring, and to observe the separate schemes; drawing inferences therefrom as in the case of a nativity.

The overall study of children will be carried out using the method described above. However, to look into specific situations that arise from this, it will be important to consider the positions of each planet associated with childbirth and examine their individual charts to draw conclusions, similar to how one would analyze a birth chart.


CHAPTER VII
Friends and foes

With respect to friendship and enmity, it may be observed that great and lasting familiarities, or disagreements, are respectively called sympathies and enmities; while the smaller, such as arise occasionally, and subsist for a short time only, are denominated casual intimacies and strifes: the whole are to be contemplated according to the following rules.

Regarding friendship and hostility, it can be noted that deep and long-lasting relationships or disputes are referred to as sympathies and enmities, respectively; whereas the smaller ones, which occur from time to time and last only for a brief period, are called casual intimacies and conflicts. All of this should be considered according to the following guidelines.

Indications of great and lasting friendships, or enmities, may be perceived by observation of the ruling places, exhibited in the respective nativities of both the persons, between whom the friendship or enmity may subsist. It is consequently essential to observe the places of the Sun, the Moon, the ascendant, and the part of fortune; for, should all these in both nativities be in the same signs, or should either all or most of them be counterchanged in position in each nativity, and especially should the two ascendants be within the distance of seventeen degrees from each other,[252] they will create fixed and indissoluble friendship. On the other hand, should they be in signs inconjunct, or in opposition, they will produce great and lasting enmity. If, however, they be not constituted in either of the modes above mentioned, but merely configurated in signs,[253] they will then produce minor friendship; provided such configuration exist by trine or sextile; but, if by quartile, they will excite minor enmity, so as to take effect at certain particular times, in which the friendship remains, as it were, inactive and subdued, while the malefics transit the configuration: and, in a similar manner, enmity also will be softened and abated, when the benefics may enter upon the configuration.[254]

Signs of strong and lasting friendships, or hostilities, can be seen by looking at the key positions in the birth charts of both individuals involved. Therefore, it's important to examine the positions of the Sun, the Moon, the rising sign, and the part of fortune; if all of these are in the same signs in both charts, or if most of them switch places in each chart, and especially if the two rising signs are no more than seventeen degrees apart, they will establish a deep and unbreakable friendship. Conversely, if they are in signs that are incompatible or opposite, they will lead to significant and enduring enmity. However, if they are not in either of those conditions, but merely positioned in the same signs, they will create a weaker friendship; as long as this configuration is by trine or sextile, but if it’s by square, it will stir up minor hostilities that can arise at certain times, during which the friendship feels dormant and subdued while the malefic planets pass through the configuration; similarly, hostilities will lessen when benefic planets come into play.

[Pg 131] The friendship and enmity, which men bear towards each other, may be classed under three general heads. One kind is suggested by spontaneous wilfulness; another, by the idea of profit; and another, by pain and pleasure mutually excited.

[Pg 131] The friendships and rivalries that people have with one another can be categorized into three main types. One type comes from natural desire; another stems from the idea of gaining something; and the third is based on the mutual feelings of pleasure and pain.

And, therefore, should either all or most of the aforesaid places be in familiarity with each other, friendship of all the three kinds will be established: so, also, should the places be entirely without familiarity, similar enmity will be established. If, however, familiarity, or absence of familiarity (as the case may be), exist only as regards the places of the luminaries, friendship or enmity will then be established by spontaneous will; and friendship thus produced is the best and most secure; while, on the other hand, enmity so arising is, in like manner, the worst and most dangerous. The friendship, or enmity, consequent on the familiarity or non-familiarity of the respective parts of Fortune, will be established on the idea of profit; and that, consequent on a similar disposition of the respective ascendants, will arise from pain or pleasure mutually excited between the parties.

And so, if all or most of the mentioned places are familiar with each other, friendship of all three kinds will develop; similarly, if the places have no familiarity, enmity will result. However, if familiarity or lack of familiarity (depending on the situation) exists only concerning the positions of the luminaries, then friendship or enmity will arise as a matter of free will; the friendship that forms this way is the best and most secure, while the enmity that arises is, likewise, the worst and most dangerous. The friendship or enmity that comes from the familiarity or unfamiliarity of the respective parts of Fortune will be based on the idea of gain; meanwhile, the friendship or enmity that stems from a similar disposition of the respective ascendants will come from the mutual feelings of pain or pleasure between the parties.

It will, however, be necessary to pay still further attention to the places in question, in order to observe whether any and what planets may be in elevation above them, or in aspect to them; because, among all the said places, that particular one, to which any planet in elevation, or in succession, may be adjacent, whether in the same sign, or in the next, will possess the more powerful influence over friendship or enmity: and whichever place may have its aspecting planets more powerfully benefic, will operate in a greater degree[255] to advantage in friendship, and to the relaxation of enmity. The foregoing instructions are applicable to such friendships or enmities as are great and lasting.

It will be necessary to pay more attention to the specific places in question to see if any planets might be above them or in relation to them. This is important because, among all the mentioned places, the one close to any elevated planet, whether in the same sign or the next, will have a stronger influence on friendship or hostility. Whichever place has aspecting planets that are more positively aligned will have a greater impact on friendship and will help ease any hostilities. These guidelines apply to significant and lasting friendships or rivalries.

But, in the case of others, which subsist only occasionally, and which have been defined as casual intimacies and strifes, it is essential to make observation of the motions of the planets, as exhibited by each nativity; that is to say, the times are to be calculated, on the completion of which the motions of the planets of one nativity will cause them to enter on certain places of the other nativity; for it is at such periods that certain particular friendships and enmities occur, continuing for a short time, until the said ingress of the planets shall have passed over.

But for others that only exist from time to time, which we've called casual relationships and conflicts, it's important to observe the movements of the planets as shown by each birth chart. In other words, we need to calculate the times when the movements of the planets in one chart will lead them into specific areas of another chart. It's during these times that certain friendships and rivalries emerge, lasting for a short period until the planets have moved on.

For instance, Saturn and Jupiter, when making ingress upon each other’s places, produce friendship by certain agreements, or engagements, relating either to agriculture or to inheritance: Saturn and Mars create contention and treachery spontaneously entertained: Saturn and Venus, friendship between kindred; liable, however, soon to grow cool: Saturn and Mercury, friendship on account of business, or profit, or some secret art or mystery.

For example, when Saturn and Jupiter enter each other's realms, they create friendships through specific agreements related to farming or inheritance. Saturn and Mars, on the other hand, bring about conflict and betrayal. Saturn and Venus foster friendships among family, though these relationships may quickly fade. Saturn and Mercury promote friendships based on business, profit, or some hidden skill or knowledge.

Jupiter and Mars create friendship in the direction of affairs, and by means of dignities; Jupiter and Venus also create friendship by means of [Pg 132] female persons, or attendants on religion, or on oracles: Jupiter and Mercury, friendship by means of eloquence and science, and philosophical inclinations.

Jupiter and Mars foster friendships in relation to actions and through their statuses; Jupiter and Venus also build friendships through

Mars and Venus cause friendship in the course of amours, adultery, and fornication: Mars and Mercury excite hatred and strife by offences committed in business and trade, or by sorcery.

Mars and Venus foster friendship during love affairs, infidelity, and casual encounters. Mars and Mercury stir up hatred and conflict through wrongs done in work and commerce, or through magic.

And Venus and Mercury produce communion by means of the arts and sciences, by a mutual interest in literature, or by female persons.

And Venus and Mercury bring people together through arts and sciences, shared interests in literature, or through women.

It is in this manner that the planets operate in producing friendship or enmity. And their comparative intensity or relaxation of vigour is to be distinguished by the situation of the places, which they occupy, with regard to the four principal and ruling places[256]: for, should they be posited in angles, at the places of the respective parts of Fortune, or at those of the luminaries, they will render the casual intimacies or strifes more eminent and remarkable; but, if they be remote from these places, their effects will not be highly conspicuous. The comparative degree of injury or advantage, liable to be received, is to be discerned by means of the good or evil properties of such planets as may be thus in aspect to the aforesaid places.

The planets influence friendship and conflict like this. Their strength or weakness is determined by where they are located in relation to the four main power spots: A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0. If they're positioned in the key areas, like at the angles or at the points associated with Fortune or the luminaries, their impact on connections or conflicts will be more noticeable. However, if they're far from these spots, their effects won't stand out as much. You can figure out the level of harm or benefit by looking at the good or bad traits of the planets that are aligned with those important areas.

With respect to servants,[257] the sign of the evil dæmon[258] is considered as the place to which the disposition ruling over them must be referred; and it is to be observed what planets are in aspect to that place, both at the actual time of nativity, and at that of any ingresses made upon it, or oppositions to it; and also, especially, whether the lords of the said sign may be configurated in familiarity with the ruling places of the nativity, or not in familiarity.

With regard to servants, [257] the sign of the evil demon [258] is seen as the point that the ruling influence over them must be connected to; it’s important to note which planets are in relation to that point, both at the time of birth and during any movements or oppositions to it. Additionally, it’s especially important to see whether the lords of that sign are in a positive relationship with the ruling points of the birth chart or not.


CHAPTER VIII
TRAVELING

The circumstances indicative of travel are to be considered by means of the situation held by both the luminaries, in respect to the angles, and especially, by means of that held by the Moon. For, should she be descending, or cadent from the angles, she will cause journeys and changes of residence: Mars, also, if descending, or cadent from the zenith, will sometimes do the same, provided he may occupy a situation in quartile, or in opposition to the luminaries. And, if the part of Fortune, also, should happen to be placed in signs which produce travelling, the course and practice of the whole life will be engaged [Pg 133] in foreign lands. And further, provided the benefics superintend the aforesaid places, or ascend in succession to them, the engagements abroad will be honourable and lucrative, and the return home speedy and unobstructed: but if, on the contrary, the malefics superintend or ascend in succession to those places, the journey outward will then lead to peril and misfortune, and the return will be replete with difficulty. But it is, at the same time, necessary in all cases to consider the contemperament also, and to observe such of the existing configurations as are more predominant.

The circumstances that suggest travel should be examined based on the positions of both the luminaries regarding their angles, and especially the Moon's position. If the Moon is descending or out of the angles, she will bring about journeys and changes in residence. Mars, too, if he is descending or out of the zenith, can have a similar effect, especially if he is in a square or opposite position to the luminaries. Additionally, if the part of Fortune is placed in signs that indicate travel, a person’s entire life will be focused on foreign lands. Furthermore, if the benefics govern these places or move into them in sequence, the experiences abroad will be honorable and profitable, and the return home will be quick and smooth. However, if the malefics govern or move into those places, the outward journey will lead to danger and misfortune, and the return will be full of challenges. It is also essential in all cases to consider the temperament and observe the more dominant configurations that exist. [Pg 133]

It most usually happens, that, if the luminaries be posited in the cadent houses of the oriental quadrants, the travel will take place in the eastern or southern quarters of the world; and that, if placed in western situations, or in an occidental quadrant, travel will be then prosecuted in the northern or western parts. And, should the signs, which operate travel, be themselves single in form, or should the planets, having dominion of them, be singly posited, the journeys will then take place after long intervals, and occasionally only: but, if the said signs be bicorporeal, or double in form or figure, travel will be constantly repeated and continued.

It usually happens that if the planets are in the cadent houses of the eastern quadrants, the travel will be toward the east or south. If they are in western positions, or in a western quadrant, the journey will take place in the north or west. Moreover, if the signs that influence travel are single in nature, or if the planets ruling them are positioned singly, the journeys will happen infrequently and after long gaps. However, if the signs are bicorporeal or double in form, travel will be frequent and continuous.

Thus, when Jupiter and Venus may be in dominion over the luminaries, and over the places producing travel, they will render the journeys agreeable, as well as free from danger: for the traveller will be joyfully forwarded on his way by the magistrates of the country, and by the concurrent assistance of friendly persons; the state of the atmosphere will also be favourable, and he will meet with abundance of accommodation. And, provided Mercury also be present with the planets above specified, utility, profit, presents and honours will likewise be derived from the journey.

Thus, when Jupiter and Venus are in control of the celestial bodies and the areas associated with travel, they will make journeys enjoyable and safe. The traveler will be happily supported on his way by local officials and the help of friendly people. The weather will also be favorable, and he will find plenty of accommodations. Additionally, if Mercury is involved with the previously mentioned planets, the journey will also bring utility, profit, gifts, and honors.

Saturn and Mars, if controlling the luminaries, and, especially, if placed distant from each other,[259] will produce great dangers, and at the same time render the journey fruitless and unavailing. Should they be in watery signs, the dangers will arise by shipwreck, or among deserts and wilderness[260]; if in fixed signs, by precipices, and adverse blasts of wind; in tropical and equinoctial signs, by want of food and other necessaries, and by some unwholesome state of the atmosphere; in signs of human form, by robbery, treachery, and various depredations; and, if in terrestrial signs, by the attack of wild beasts, or from earthquakes. And, should Mercury also lend concurrence, the traveller will incur further danger from accusations made against him, as well as from reptiles and venomous stings or bites.

Saturn and Mars, if they're dominating the luminaries, and especially if they’re far apart from each other, [259] will create serious dangers and make the journey pointless and unproductive. If they’re in watery signs, the dangers will come from shipwrecks or from being lost in deserts and wilderness [260]; if in fixed signs, from cliffs and harsh winds; in tropical and equatorial signs, from lack of food and other essentials, and from some unhealthy atmospheric conditions; in signs associated with humans, from theft, betrayal, and various attacks; and if in earth signs, from wild animals or earthquakes. And if Mercury also plays a role, the traveler will face even more dangers from accusations against him, as well as threats from reptiles and venomous bites or stings.

The question, whether the events will be advantageous or injurious in quality, must, however, be further considered by observation (made in [Pg 134] the forms already detailed), of the peculiar properties of the places, in which the lords of employment, of wealth, of the body, or of rank, may be posited. And the periods, at which travelling will take place, are to be considered by the occasional ingress of the five planets.[261]

The question of whether the events will be beneficial or harmful needs to be further examined through observations (as detailed earlier) of the unique characteristics of the locations where those in charge of jobs, wealth, health, or status may be found. Additionally, the timing of trips should take into account the occasional movements of the five planets.[261]


CHAPTER IX
THE TYPE OF DEATH

It now remains to treat of the kind and species of death. It is, however, first to be determined, by the rules already delivered regarding the duration of life,[262] whether death will ensue from an oriental or occidental position of the predominating influence. And, if death ensue from some oriental position, or meeting of rays, the place of such meeting must be observed, and by means of that place the kind of death is to be distinguished; if from the descension, or setting, of the significator, or prorogator, the place of descension[263] must be considered: because death is to be expected conformable in character to the influences, whatever they may be, which preside over the said places; or, if not any influences should directly preside, it will then be conformable to the influences, of whatever kind, which may be brought first in succession to the places in question: the configuration of the stars, the property of the aforesaid anæretic places, and the nature of the signs and of the terms,[264] are, also, all of them co-operative.

It is now important to discuss the types and categories of death. However, it must first be determined, based on the rules we’ve already established about the length of life, whether death will result from an eastern or western position of the prevailing influence. If death arises from some eastern position or alignment of rays, the location of that alignment should be noted, and based on that location, the type of death can be identified. If it comes from the descent or setting of the significator or prorogator, the location of the descent must be taken into account. This is because the nature of death is expected to correspond to the influences, whatever they may be, that govern those locations; if no specific influences are directly governing, it will then align with the influences, of whatever type, that may first appear in relation to the locations in question. The arrangement of the stars, the characteristics of the specified positions, and the nature of the signs and terms are all also important factors.

Thus, for example, if the dominion of death be vested in Saturn, he will produce death by means of lingering diseases; cough, rheumatism, flux, ague, disorder of the spleen, dropsy, colic, and complaints in the womb; and, in short, by all such diseases as proceed from the superabundance of cold.

Thus, for example, if the control over death is held by Saturn, he will bring about death through prolonged illnesses: cough, rheumatism, diarrhea, chills, spleen disorders, edema, colic, and issues related to the womb; and, in general, through all diseases that come from an excess of cold.

Jupiter effects death by quinsey, inflammation of the lungs, apoplexy, spasm, pains in the head, morbid performance of the heart, and by all diseases arising from the superabundance of air, and from immoderate and impure respiration.

Jupiter causes death from quinsy, lung inflammation, stroke, spasms, headaches, abnormal heart function, and from all diseases caused by too much air and from excessive or impure breathing.

Mars causes death by constant fevers, semitertians, sudden and spontaneous wounds, diseases of the kidneys, expectoration of blood, and hæmorrhages of various kinds; by miscarriage, or abortion, and by childbirth, by erysipelas, and, in short, by such diseases as proceed from abundant and immediate heat.

Mars leads to death through constant fevers, irregular bouts of fever, sudden and unexpected wounds, kidney diseases, coughing up blood, and various types of bleeding; through miscarriage or abortion, and childbirth, through erysipelas, and, in general, through diseases caused by excessive and immediate heat.

Venus produces death by disorders of the stomach, and of the liver, by [Pg 135] scurvy and dysentry: also by consumption or wasting away,[265] and by fistula and poison, and by all diseases incident on the superabundance or poverty of moisture, and its corruption.

Venus causes death through stomach and liver issues, as well as scurvy and dysentery. It can also lead to wasting away, fistulas, poisoning, and all diseases resulting from either excessive or insufficient moisture and its decay. [Pg 135]

Lastly, Mercury causes death to proceed from fury, madness, melancholy, epilepsy, falling fits, coughs, and obstructions, and by such diseases as arise from superabundant or disproportionate dryness.

Lastly, Mercury causes death to result from rage, insanity, depression, epilepsy, seizures, coughs, and blockages, as well as from diseases that stem from excessive or imbalanced dryness.

When the lords of death may fully possess their own peculiar and natural properties, and when neither of the malefics may be in elevation above them, death will ensue in the modes above detailed, and in the ordinary course of nature. But a violent and remarkable death will occur when both the malefics, either in conjunction, or in quartile or opposition to each other, may be lords of the anæretic places; or if both, or only one of the two, should attack either both the luminaries, or even only the Sun or the Moon. In such a case, the evil character of the death will proceed from the concurrence of the malefic influence, and its magnitude or remarkable nature from the additional testimony of the luminaries: its quality, also, will be known by means of the rest of the planets and stars in configuration, and by the signs which contain the malefic influence.[266]

When the lords of death can fully express their unique and natural qualities, and when neither of the malefic planets is elevated above them, death will occur in the ways mentioned earlier, following the natural order. However, a sudden and extraordinary death will happen when both malefics, either together or in a square or opposition to each other, govern the critical points; or if both, or just one of them, targets both luminaries, or even just the Sun or the Moon. In this scenario, the negative nature of the death will arise from the combined malefic influence, and its significance or unusual aspect will be highlighted by the involvement of the luminaries: its nature will also be determined by the other planets and stars in alignment, and by the signs that carry the malefic influence.[266]

Hence, if it happen that Saturn be in fixed signs, and in quartile or opposition to the Sun, and contrary in condition, he will produce death by suffocation, occasioned either by multitudes of people, or by hanging or strangulation: so, likewise, should he be occidental, and the Moon be succedent to him, he will operate the same effects. If he be posited in places or signs of bestial form, the native will be destroyed by wild beasts: and, if Jupiter also offer testimony, being at the same time badly afflicted, the death will then occur in public, and by day; for example, by being exposed to combats with wild beasts. If Saturn be posited in opposition to either of the luminaries in the [Pg 136] ascendant,[267] he will cause death in prison: if he be configurated with Mercury, and especially if near the constellation of the Serpent in the sphere, and in terrestrial signs of the zodiac, he will produce death by venomous wounds or bites, and by reptiles and wild beasts. And, should Venus also attach herself to Saturn and Mercury thus combined, death will then ensue by poison or female treachery. If Saturn be in Virgo or Pisces, or watery signs, and configurated with the Moon, he will operate death by means of water, by drowning and suffocation; and, if found near Argo, by shipwreck. Should he be in tropical or quadrupedal signs, and the Sun be either in conjunction with him, or in opposition; or if, instead of the Sun, Mars should so present himself, death will be caused by the fall of houses or buildings; and, if posited in the mid-heaven, death will happen by falls from heights or precipices. These are the various effects of Saturn, when configurated as described.

Therefore, if Saturn is in fixed signs and in a square or opposition to the Sun, and has a conflicting condition, it will lead to death by suffocation, caused either by large crowds or by hanging or strangulation. Likewise, if he is in a western position and the Moon is in a following position to him, he will have the same outcomes. If he is placed in signs or areas associated with animals, the person will be killed by wild animals. If Jupiter also indicates a bad influence at the same time, the death will occur publicly during the day; for instance, by being involved in fights with wild beasts. If Saturn opposes either of the luminaries in the ascendant, he will cause death in prison. If he is aligned with Mercury, especially if close to the constellation of the Serpent in the sky and in earth signs of the zodiac, he will bring about death through poisonous wounds or bites, as well as by reptiles and wild animals. And if Venus is also connected to Saturn and Mercury in this way, death will result from poison or betrayal by a woman. If Saturn is in Virgo or Pisces, or in water signs, and aligned with the Moon, he will cause death by water, through drowning and suffocation; and, if near Argo, by shipwreck. If he is in tropical or quadrupedal signs, and the Sun is either in conjunction with him or in opposition; or if, instead of the Sun, Mars appears, death will result from buildings collapsing; if he is positioned at the mid-heaven, death will occur from falls from heights or cliffs. These are the various effects of Saturn when positioned as described.

Mars, if in signs of human form, and posited in quartile or in opposition to the Sun or Moon, and contrary in condition, will operate death by slaughter, either in civil or foreign war, or by suicide: if Venus add her testimony, death will be inflicted by women, or by assassins in the employment of women: and, should Mercury also be configurated with them, death will happen from robbers, thieves, or highwaymen. If Mars be in mutilated or imperfect signs, or near the Gorgon[268] of Perseus, he will produce death by decapitation, or by mutilation of limb. If found in Scorpio or Taurus, he will cause death by surgical amputation, burning or searing, or also by spasms or convulsions. Should he be found in the mid-heaven, either above or below the earth, death will be inflicted by crucifixion or impalement, and especially if he be in the vicinity of Cepheus or Andromeda. If descending, or in opposition to the ascendant,[269] he will produce death by fire: and, if in quadrupedal signs, by falls and fractures. Should Jupiter, however, bear testimony to Mars, and be at the same time afflicted, death will ensue from the wrath of princes and kings, and from judicial condemnation.

Mars, when positioned in signs that represent human form and in a square or opposition to the Sun or Moon, especially if in a conflicting state, will lead to death by violence, either through civil or foreign wars, or by suicide. If Venus is also present, death will be caused by women or assassins working for women. Additionally, if Mercury is aligned with them, death will occur due to robbers, thieves, or highwaymen. If Mars appears in weakened or incomplete signs, or near the Gorgon of Perseus, he will result in death by decapitation or mutilation of limbs. If located in Scorpio or Taurus, he will cause death through surgical amputation, burning, or by spasms or convulsions. If he is positioned at the mid-heaven, whether above or below the earth, death will come from crucifixion or impalement, particularly if he is near Cepheus or Andromeda. If he is descending or in opposition to the ascendant, he will bring death by fire; and if in signs of quadrupeds, by falls and fractures. However, if Jupiter is in conjunction with Mars and is also afflicted, death will result from the anger of princes and kings, and from judicial sentences.

If it happen that the malefics be in concurrence with each other in the first instance, and afterwards in mutual opposition, in any of the aforesaid situations, the evil character of the death will be yet further augmented; but its species or quality, and its dominion, will depend upon that one which may be in occupation of the anæretic place. And, if both the malefics claim prerogative in the anæretic places, the bodies of persons who thus die will be cast abroad without interment, and will be devoured by beasts and birds: these circumstances will especially ensue, when the malefics may be found in signs similar in form to beasts and birds; and provided not any one of the benefics should offer testimony to the place below the earth,[270] nor to the anæretic places. [Pg 137]

If the malevolent planets align with each other at first and then oppose each other, the negative nature of the death will be even more intensified. However, the type and quality of the death, as well as its influence, will depend on whichever one occupies the death-relevant position. If both malevolent planets hold power in these critical positions, the bodies of those who die in this way will be left unburied and will be consumed by animals and birds. This will particularly happen when the malevolent planets are in signs that resemble animals and birds, unless one of the beneficial planets intervenes regarding the place below the earth or the critical positions. [Pg 137]

Lastly, death will occur in foreign lands, when it may happen that the planets controlling the anæretic places may be posited in cadent houses; especially if the Moon be present in the said places also, or if she be found in quartile or in opposition.[271]

Lastly, death can happen in foreign countries, especially when the planets influencing the critical areas are positioned in weaker houses; particularly if the Moon is also in those areas, or if she is in a square or opposition aspect.[271]


CHAPTER X
TIME DIVISIONS

In addition to the foregoing brief observations, applicable to the various forms of death, further attention is demanded with respect to the division of time, which requires to be contemplated in its natural order and succession.

In addition to the brief observations mentioned above, we also need to focus on the division of time, which should be considered in its natural order and progression.

Now as, in all genethlialogical cases, a certain common and general arrangement, affecting the region or country and the race or generation, is pre-supposed to be in operation, to which arrangement particular inferences, relating to the form of the body, the properties of the mind, and national habits and variations, must each be subservient; and as, in these respects, certain causes more general and predominating are pre-supposed in existence before particular causes, due care must consequently be taken, in order to make an inference consistent with the course of nature, to observe always the original and predominating cause, and never to lose sight of it; lest some similarity in nativities (if any such should exist) might induce an assertion when the original predominating cause proceeding from the region itself has been overlooked, that the native of Æthiopia will be born of white complexion, and with long and straight hair; or, on the other hand, that the native of Germany or of Gaul will be black in [Pg 138] complexion, and have curled hair; or, that the said nations are polished in manners, and cultivate learning, but that the people of Greece are barbarous and illiterate: and so, in short, of any other countries; without duly considering the national differences and variations in their several courses of life. So also, with regard to the division of time, it is in the same manner essential to consider the different qualities of the several ages of life, and to pre-determine the appropriate fitness of every age to such events as may be expected: in order to avoid the gross error which might arise from a merely vague consideration of the subject, by attributing to infancy some deed or circumstance of too complete a nature and belonging rather to manhood, or by ascribing to extreme old age the procreation of children, or some other action belonging to youth; and to adapt, on the contrary, to each separate age such circumstances as seem, by due observation of the periods, to be suitable and appropriate thereto.

Now, in all cases related to astrology, it’s assumed that there’s a common and general influence at play affecting the region, country, and race or generation. This influence must support specific conclusions about physical traits, mental characteristics, and national habits and differences. Certain broad and dominant causes are presumed to exist before any specific causes are considered. Therefore, to make an inference that aligns with the natural order, it’s crucial to always keep the original and dominant cause in mind and not overlook it; otherwise, a similarity in births (if any exists) might lead to incorrect conclusions, such as claiming that a native of Ethiopia will have white skin and straight hair, or that a person from Germany or Gaul will be dark-skinned with curly hair, or that those nations are refined and educated while the people of Greece are uncivilized and uneducated. This applies similarly to any other countries, without properly considering the national differences and variations in their lifestyles. Likewise, when it comes to the division of time, it’s essential to consider the different qualities of the various stages of life and to ensure that each age is suited for the events that can be expected. This helps to avoid serious errors that could come from a vague understanding of the subject, such as attributing an act or circumstance meant for adulthood to infancy, or suggesting that elderly people contribute to having children or engage in activities meant for the young. Instead, we should align each distinct age with situations that seem appropriate based on careful observation of life stages.

The mode of consideration[272] applicable to human nature is universally one and the same; and it is analogous to the arrangement of the seven planetary orbs.[273] It, therefore, duly commences with the first age of human life, and the first sphere next above the earth, that of the Moon; and it terminates with the final age of man, and the last of the planetary spheres, which is that of Saturn; and, in fact, it accordingly happens that the appropriate qualities of each sphere take effect in a corresponding age of life, each age being subjected to one particular sphere. These observations are necessary, because the general divisions of time must be considered by means of the spheres, as a primary arrangement; although minor distinctions are to be made by means of the existing peculiarities found in nativities.

The way we think about human nature is basically the same everywhere; it’s similar to the setup of the seven planets. It starts with the first stage of human life and the first celestial body above the Earth, which is the Moon, and it ends with the last stage of life and the final planet, which is Saturn. Each stage of life corresponds to the qualities of a specific planet, with each age influenced by one particular sphere. These insights are important because we need to look at the main divisions of time through the lens of the planets as a foundational framework, even though we should also pay attention to the unique traits found in individual birth charts.

Hence, the first age of infancy, which endures for four years, agreeing in number with the quadrennial period of the Moon, is consequently adapted to her; being in its nature moist and incompact, presenting rapidity of growth, being nourished by moist things, and possessing a highly variable habit. Its mental incompleteness is likewise in accordance with its familiar relation to the Moon, and her operative influence.

Hence, the first stage of infancy lasts for four years, which matches the four-year cycle of the Moon. This phase is naturally fluid and unstructured, showing quick growth, sustained by wet nutrients, and having a highly changeable nature. Its mental immaturity also aligns with its connection to the Moon and her active influence.

The age after this continues for ten years, and accommodates itself to the second sphere, that of Mercury. In this period, the intellectual and reasoning faculties of the mind begin to take their character, imbibing the seeds of learning, and developing, as it were, the elements and germs of the genius and abilities, and their peculiar quality. The mind is also roused to discipline and instruction, and to its first exercises.

The age that follows lasts for ten years and aligns with the second sphere, that of Mercury. During this time, the mind's intellectual and reasoning abilities start to take shape, absorbing the fundamentals of learning and developing the elements and seeds of talent and skills, each with its unique traits. The mind also becomes engaged with discipline and teaching, marking its initial practices.

Venus corresponds with the next and third age, which lasts throughout the following eight years, the number of her own period: from her, the movement of the seminal vessels originates, as well as an unrestrained impetuosity and precipitancy in amours. [Pg 139]

Venus is linked to the next and third phase, which continues for the following eight years, matching her own cycle: from her, the flow of the reproductive vessels begins, along with a wild eagerness and haste in romantic affairs. [Pg 139]

The fourth and adult age next succeeds, and is subject to the fourth sphere, that of the Sun: it endures for nineteen years, according to the Sun’s number. Authority of action now commences in the mind, the career of life is entered upon, distinction and glory are desired, and puerile irregularities are relinquished for more orderly conduct, and the pursuit of honour.

The fourth and adult stage follows, and is associated with the fourth sphere, that of the Sun: it lasts for nineteen years, according to the Sun’s cycle. At this point, the authority of action begins in the mind, a career path is started, people seek distinction and glory, childish behaviors are left behind for more orderly conduct, and the pursuit of honor takes precedence.

Mars, next after the Sun, claims the fifth age, that of manhood, agreeing in duration with his own period, viz. fifteen years. He induces greater austerity of life, together with vexation, care, and trouble.

Mars, following the Sun, represents the fifth stage, which is manhood, lasting the same length as its own period, specifically fifteen years. It brings about a stricter way of life, along with frustration, worry, and hardship.

Jupiter occupies the sixth sphere, and influences the maturer age, during the twelve years corresponding to his own period. He operates the relinquishment of labour, of hazardous employment and tumult, and produces greater gravity, foresight, prudence, and sagacity, favouring the claim to honour, respect, and privilege.

Jupiter is in the sixth sphere and influences adulthood during the twelve years that match his own cycle. He encourages stepping back from hard work, risky jobs, and chaos, and brings about increased seriousness, foresight, wisdom, and good judgment, supporting the pursuit of honor, respect, and privilege.

Saturn, moving in the last sphere, regulates the final old age, as agreeing with its chilliness. He obstructs the mental movements, the appetites and enjoyments; rendering them imbecile and dull, in conformity with the dullness of his own motion.

Saturn, moving in the final sphere, governs the last phase of old age, in line with its coldness. It hinders mental activity, desires, and pleasures, making them weak and lifeless, reflecting the slowness of its own movement.

The common properties attributable to the various times of life are subject, in a general manner, to this previous adaptation; but there are particular periods, arising from the respective peculiarities of nativities, which also require determination, and must be ascertained from the ruling prorogations; that is to say, from the whole of them, and not from any single one only, as in the case of the duration of life. For example, prorogation made from the ascendant is to be applied to events affecting the body, and to travelling, or change of residence; that from the part of Fortune, to incidents affecting the substance or wealth; that from the Moon, to actions of the mind, and to communion[274] and cohabitation; that from the Sun, to dignities and glory; and that from the mid-heaven, to other particular circumstances of life, such as employment, friendship, and the possession of children. So that thus, at one and the same time any single planet, whether benefic or malefic, will not possess the sole dominion; for many conflicting events frequently occur at the same period, and a person may, at one and the same time, lose a kinsman, yet inherit his substance; or be at once ill in health, yet prosperous and advantageously established in regard to fortune; or be struggling with adversity and in want, yet, notwithstanding, be also a father and beget children; or he may experience other similar contrarieties: because individuals are subject to occurrences which may affect either the body, the mind, the rank, or the condition of wealth, and which are not altogether fortunate or unfortunate at the same period. Something of the kind will, however, frequently happen in cases of perfect good fortune or distress, when [Pg 140] meetings of all the benefics or malefics may concur in all or most of the prorogations. Still such cases are but rare, because human nature in general is not subjected to the extremity either of good or evil, but rather to their moderate alteration and counter-change.

The common traits associated with different stages of life are generally influenced by previous adaptations; however, there are specific times, based on unique birth characteristics, that also need to be defined and must be determined from all significant influences, not just one, similar to how we consider the length of life. For instance, influences from the ascendant relate to events affecting physical well-being, travel, or changes in living situation; those from the part of Fortune pertain to matters concerning assets or wealth; influences from the Moon cover mental activities and social connections; those from the Sun relate to status and recognition; and those from the mid-heaven pertain to various life circumstances such as career, friendships, and parenthood. Thus, at any given moment, no single planet, whether beneficial or harmful, will hold exclusive power. Many conflicting events can happen simultaneously; for example, a person might lose a relative while inheriting their assets, or be in poor health yet thriving financially, or face hardship and want while also becoming a parent. Similar contradictions can occur because people can experience events that impact their body, mind, status, or finances, which may not be entirely good or bad at the same time. However, situations of complete good or bad fortune do happen, especially when all benefic or malefic planets align with most influences. Still, such instances are rare, as humanity generally experiences a balance of good and bad rather than extremes.

The prorogatory places must, therefore, be separately distinguished in the mode before pointed out; and the planets meeting the prorogations must again be all taken into consideration: not only those which may be anæretic (as in the case of the duration of life), nor those only which may be configurated bodily,[275] or in opposition or quartile, but also those in trine or sextile. And, first, the times in each prorogation will be governed by the planet occupying or configurated with the actual prorogatory degree itself: if, however, there be found no planet thus constituted, the nearest preceding planet will govern the times until another, which may be in aspect to the degree following in the order of the signs, shall take them; and this one, again, will do the same until the next in succession shall take them.[276] The like rule obtains with respect to any other planets received into dominion, and with respect to those in occupation of the terms.

The prorogatory places must, therefore, be separately identified in the way mentioned earlier; and the planets involved with the prorogations must all be considered again: not just those that may be anæretic (like in the case of life duration), or those that may be physically configured, or in opposition or quartile, but also those in trine or sextile. First, the times in each prorogation will be influenced by the planet occupying or configured with the actual prorogatory degree itself. However, if no planet is found in that configuration, the closest preceding planet will govern the times until another planet that may have an aspect to the following degree in the order of the signs takes over; this one will continue to do the same until the next one in line assumes responsibility. The same rule applies to any other planets that hold dominion and to those occupying the terms.

Further, in prorogations of the ascendant, the degrees of distances will be equal in number to the ascensional times of the particular latitude; but, in prorogation, from the mid-heaven, to the times of culmination; and, in other prorogations, they will be in proportion to the ascensions, or descensions, or culminations, and will depend on their proximity to the angles; as has been already said in treating of the duration of life.[277]

Further, when extending the rising signs, the distance in degrees will match the rising times for the specific latitude. However, when extending from the mid-heaven to the culmination times, and in other extensions, they will relate to the rising, setting, or culmination points, depending on how close they are to the angles, as previously mentioned while discussing lifespan.[277]

The arbiters of general times are to be determined by the foregoing method; but arbiters of annual periods as follows: viz. after the number of years which have elapsed since the birth has been ascertained, the amount is to be projected from each place of prorogation, in the succession of the signs, at the rate of one sign for a year,[278] and the lord[Pg 141] of the last sign[279] is to be assumed as arbiter. And, with regard to periods reckoned by months, the same rule is to be observed: for in this case also, the number of the month, as counted from the month of the nativity, is to be projected from such places as possess the dominion of the year, in the proportion of twenty-eight days per sign. So, likewise, in the case of periods reckoned by days, the number of the day, counted from the day of birth, must be projected from the monthly places of dominion, allowing for each sign two days and a third.[280]

The way to determine general time periods is through the method mentioned earlier, but for annual periods, it works like this: once you know how many years have passed since birth, you take that number and project it from each point of delay, following the order of the signs, at a rate of one sign per year, [278] and the ruler of the last sign [279] is considered the decision-maker. For monthly periods, you should apply the same principle: here too, the month number, starting from the month of birth, should be projected from places that have control over the year, assuming twenty-eight days for each sign. Similarly, when dealing with periods measured in days, you need to project the day count from the day of birth using the monthly control points, counting two days and a third for each sign.[280]

It is, however, necessary to notice the ingresses made on places allotted to different periods; for they take effect in no small degree on the events of the period. Thus, the ingresses made by Saturn, on places of general periods, require special observation; those made by Jupiter, on places of annual periods; those made by the Sun, Mars, Venus, and Mercury, on monthly places; and the Moon’s transit over daily places. It must also be remembered, that arbiters of general periods are chiefly paramount over the events; and that, to their influence, the arbiters of particular periods (each of whom acting by its own proper nature) present either co-operation or obstruction; and that the ingresses also operate on events, by increasing or diminishing their force and extent.[281]

It is important to pay attention to the movements affecting the areas assigned to different timeframes because they significantly influence events during those times. The movements of Saturn in the general timeframes should be noted; those of Jupiter in the annual timeframes; the Sun, Mars, Venus, and Mercury in the monthly timeframes; and the Moon’s passage over daily timeframes. It's also essential to remember that the rulers of general timeframes primarily dictate the events, and their influence is either supported or hindered by the rulers of specific timeframes, each acting according to its own nature. Additionally, these movements affect events by either amplifying or reducing their power and impact.[281]

The general characteristic property, and the duration of the period, will be indicated by the place of prorogation, as also by the lord of the general times, and by the planet in possession of the terms; by means of the familiarity subsisting, from the actual birth, between each planet, and the places of which they may have respectively and originally taken dominion. The arbiters of time will also give indication whether the event will be good or evil, by means of their own naturally benefic or malefic property and temperament, and by their original familiarity or variance with the place of which they have become lords. But the period, at which the event will become more [Pg 142] strongly evident, is shown by the relative positions of the annual and monthly signs towards the places wherein the causes exist, and also by the ingresses of the planets.[282]

The general characteristics and the duration of the period will be indicated by the place of extension, as well as by the ruler of the general times, and by the planet controlling the terms. This is based on the connection established from birth between each planet and the places over which they originally held dominion. The arbiters of time will also indicate whether the event will be positive or negative, based on their naturally good or bad nature and by their original relationship with the place they govern. However, the time when the event will become most apparent is determined by the relative positions of the yearly and monthly signs in relation to the places where the causes exist, as well as by the entrances of the planets. [Pg 142]

The mode in which the Sun and Moon may be disposed, in reference to the signs relating to annual and monthly periods, is also indicative. For example, should they, from the date of the nativity, be posited in concord with the operative places, and keep a position of concord at the ingresses, they will produce good; but, if adversely posited, evil. And also, if they be not in concord with the said places, and provided they be contrary in condition, and in opposition or in quartile, to the transits, they will cause evil: should they, however, not be in quartile, nor in opposition, but otherwise configurated, their influence then will not be equally malefic.

The way the Sun and Moon are positioned in relation to the signs that represent yearly and monthly cycles is also telling. For instance, if they are aligned with the relevant places from the time of birth and maintain that alignment during the shifts, they will bring about positive results; however, if they are positioned unfavorably, the outcomes will be negative. Additionally, if they are not aligned with those places and are in a conflicting condition, such as being in opposition or at a square angle to the transits, they will lead to negative effects. However, if they are neither at a square angle nor in opposition but configured differently, their influence won’t be as harmful.

Should it happen that the same planets may be lords of the times,[283] as well as of the ingresses, the effect will be extreme and unalloyed, if of a favourable nature; and more particularly unmitigated, if evil. And should the said planets be not only lords of the times, but likewise hold dominion from the date of the nativity, and provided also that all the prorogations, or most of them, should tend to, or depend on, one and the same place, or, should the prorogations not be so constituted, yet notwithstanding, if the meetings occurring at the periods be found to be either all, or most of them, benefic or malefic, they will wholly produce, in all respects, good or evil fortune, respectively.

If the same planets are in charge of both the times and the ingresses, their effects will be very strong and pure if they are positive, and especially intense if they are negative. If those planets not only govern the times but also have authority from the moment of birth, and if most of the prorogations align with one specific area, or even if the prorogations are not structured that way but the events during those times are mostly good or bad, they will fully bring about either good or bad fortune, respectively.

It is in this method, which preserves a natural order and succession, that times and seasons require to be contemplated. [Pg 143]

It is through this method, which maintains a natural order and progression, that times and seasons need to be considered. [Pg 143]

And now, in adverting to the scope allotted to this work in its commencement, all further adaptation of the forms of events liable to take effect at particular times will here be relinquished; because the operative influences which the stars exercise in all events, whether general or particular, may be arranged in proper order, if care be taken that the causes set forth by the Rules of Science, and the causes arising from any existing commixture, be duly combined and blended together.

And now, looking back at the purpose assigned to this work at the beginning, all further adjustments to the forms of events that might happen at specific times will be abandoned here; because the active influences that the stars have on all events, whether general or specific, can be organized properly, as long as we ensure that the causes outlined by the Rules of Science and the causes arising from any current mixtures are effectively combined and blended.

THE END

THE END


[Pg 144]

[Pg 144]

APPENDIX

NO. I
ALMAGEST; BOOK 8, CH. IV

The various constellations of the fixed stars having now been duly described, their aspects remain to be investigated.

The different constellations of the fixed stars have now been properly described, and it’s time to explore their appearances.

Independently of the steadfast and immutable aspects which the said stars preserve among themselves, either rectilinearly, or triangularly, or by other similar forms,[284] they have also certain aspects considered as referring exclusively to the planets and the Sun and Moon, or parts of the zodiac; certain others to the earth only; and others, again, to the earth, the planets and the Sun and Moon, or parts of the zodiac, combined.

Independently of the constant and unchanging aspects that these stars maintain among themselves, whether in straight lines, triangles, or other similar shapes, [284] they also have specific aspects that relate only to the planets and the Sun and Moon, or to parts of the zodiac; some aspects relate solely to the Earth; and others involve a combination of the Earth, the planets, the Sun and Moon, or parts of the zodiac.

With regard to the planets only, and parts of the zodiac, aspects are properly considered as made to them by the fixed stars, when the said planets and fixed stars may be posited on one and the same of those circles which are drawn through the poles of the zodiac; or, also, if they be posited on different circles, provided a trinal or sextile distance between them may be preserved; that is to say, a distance equal to a right angle and a third part more, or a distance equal to two-thirds of a right angle; and provided, also, that the fixed stars be on such parts of the circle as are liable to be transited by any one of the planets. These parts are situated within the latitude of the zodiac, which circumscribes the planetary motions. And as far as the five planets are concerned, the aspects of the fixed stars depend upon the visible mutual conjunctions, or configurations, made in the forms above prescribed; but, with respect to the Sun and Moon, they depend on occultations, conjunctions, and succedent risings of the stars. Occultation is when a star becomes invisible by being carried under the rays of the luminary; conjunction, when it is placed under the luminary’s centre; and succedent rising, when it begins to reappear on issuing out beyond the rays.

Regarding the planets and parts of the zodiac, aspects are properly seen as made to them by the fixed stars when these planets and fixed stars are located on the same circles that pass through the poles of the zodiac. They can also be on different circles, as long as there's a trine or sextile distance between them. This means a distance equal to a right angle plus a third more, or a distance equal to two-thirds of a right angle; and it's important that the fixed stars be in parts of the circle that can be transited by any of the planets. These parts are found within the latitude of the zodiac, which surrounds the planetary motions. For the five planets, the aspects of the fixed stars depend on the visible mutual conjunctions or configurations made in the previously mentioned forms. However, for the Sun and Moon, they rely on occultations, conjunctions, and succedent risings of the stars. An occultation occurs when a star becomes invisible because it’s covered by the rays of the luminary; a conjunction happens when it’s positioned under the center of the luminary; and a succedent rising is when it starts to reappear after moving out from behind the rays.

In regard to the earth only, the aspects of the fixed stars are four in number, and are known by the common term of angles: to speak, however, more particularly, they are the oriental horizon, the meridian or mid-heaven above the earth, the occidental horizon, and the meridian or mid-heaven below the earth. And in that part of the earth where the equator is in the zenith, the whole of the fixed stars are found to rise [Pg 145] and set, and to be above as well as below the earth, once in each revolution; because the situation of the poles of the equator, being in this manner on the plane of the horizon, thereby prevents the constant visibility or invisibility of any one of the parallel circles. But in other parts of the earth, where the pole of the equator is in the zenith, the fixed stars can never set nor rise; because the equator itself is then on the plane of the horizon, and circumscribes the two hemispheres (which it thus creates, one above and the other below the earth) in such a manner, that in one revolution every star must twice transit the meridian, some of them above, others below the earth. In other declinations, however, between these extreme positions of the equator, as just mentioned, there are certain of the circles always visible, and others never visible; consequently, the stars intercepted between the first of such circles and the poles can neither rise not set, but must, in the course of one revolution, twice transit the meridian; above the earth, if the said stars be on a circle always visible; but below the earth, if on a circle never visible. The other stars, however, situated on the greater parallels, both rise and set, and are found in each revolution once on the meridian above the earth, and once on that below the earth. In all these cases, the time occupied in proceeding round from any angle to the same again, must be everywhere equal in its duration, for it is marked by one sensible revolution; and the time occupied in passing from either meridianal angle to the angle diametrically opposite, is also everywhere equal; because it is marked by the half of one revolution. So, also, the passage from either horizontal angle to its opposite angle is again effected in the same equal portion of time, wherever the equator may be in the zenith, for it is then likewise marked by the half of an entire revolution; because on such a position of the equator, all the parallels are then divided, as well by the horizon as by the meridian, into two equal parts. But in all other declinations, the time of passage of a semicircle above the earth is not equal to that of its passage below the earth, except only in the case of the equinoctial circle itself, which, in an oblique sphere, is the only one divided by the horizon into two equal parts, all others (its parallels) being bisected into dissimilar and unequal arcs. It follows, accordingly, that the time contained in the space between rising or setting, and either meridian, must be equal to the time between the same meridian and rising and setting; because the meridian divides equally such portions of the parallels as are above or under the earth. But in proceeding in an oblique sphere, from rising or setting to either meridian, the time occupied must be unequal; and in a right sphere, equal, because the entire portions above the earth are, in a right sphere only, equal to those below the earth; whence, for instance, in a right sphere, whatever stars may be together on the meridian must also all rise and set together, until their progress becomes perceptible by the poles of the zodiac; while, on the other hand, in an oblique sphere, whatever stars may be together on the [Pg 146] meridian can neither all rise together nor set together; for the more southern stars must always rise later than those which are more northern, and set earlier.[285]

Regarding the Earth, the aspects of the fixed stars are four and are commonly known as angles: specifically, they are the eastern horizon, the meridian or high point in the sky above the Earth, the western horizon, and the meridian or low point in the sky below the Earth. In the part of the Earth where the equator is directly overhead, all fixed stars can be seen rising and setting and are visible above as well as below the Earth once during each rotation. This is because the position of the equator's poles lies on the plane of the horizon, preventing any parallel circle from being constantly visible or invisible. However, in other locations where the equator's pole is directly overhead, fixed stars never rise or set; that's because the equator itself lies on the horizon's plane, dividing the two hemispheres it forms—one above and one below the Earth—so that every star crosses the meridian twice during one rotation, some above and others below the Earth. In other declinations, between the extreme positions of the equator already mentioned, there are certain circles that are always visible and others that are never visible; therefore, stars located between the first of those circles and the poles cannot rise or set but must transit the meridian twice during one rotation: above the Earth if they are on a circle that is always visible, or below the Earth if they are on a circle that is never visible. The other stars on the higher parallels do rise and set, appearing once above the Earth and once below during each rotation. In all these cases, the time it takes to move from any angle back to the same angle must be equal everywhere since it measures one full rotation; the time taken to move from one meridian angle to the opposite angle is also equal everywhere, as it measures half of a rotation. Likewise, the time taken to move from any horizontal angle to its opposite is completed in the same amount of time, no matter where the equator is in the zenith; it is again marked by half a full rotation because when the equator is in this position, all parallels are divided equally by both the horizon and meridian. But in other declinations, the time taken to travel a semicircle above the Earth isn’t equal to the time taken below it, except for the equinoctial circle itself, which in an oblique sphere is the only circle divided by the horizon into two equal parts, while all other parallels are split into unequal arcs. As a result, the time between rising or setting and either meridian must equal the time from the same meridian to rising and setting; this is because the meridian equally divides those portions of the parallels above and below the Earth. However, in an oblique sphere, moving from rising or setting to either meridian will take unequal time, while in a right sphere it takes equal time, because in a right sphere, the portions above the Earth are equal to those below it; thus, for instance, in a right sphere, any stars aligned on the meridian must also all rise and set together until their motion becomes noticeable from the zodiac poles. In contrast, in an oblique sphere, stars aligned on the meridian cannot all rise or set simultaneously; the more southern stars will always rise later than those that are more northern and will set earlier.

The aspects made by the fixed stars, in regard to the planets or parts of the zodiac, and the earth combined, are considered, in a general manner, by the rising, or meridianal position, or setting of the same fixed stars in conjunction with any planet or part of the zodiac; but their aspects are properly distinguishable, by means of the Sun, in the nine following modes:—

The aspects created by the fixed stars concerning the planets or sections of the zodiac, along with the earth, are generally considered based on the rising, midheaven position, or setting of those fixed stars in relation to any planet or section of the zodiac. However, their aspects can be properly identified through the Sun in the following nine ways:—

1. The first is called matutine subsolar, when the star is found together with the Sun in the oriental horizon. Of this aspect, one species is called the oriental, invisible, and succedent rising; when the star, at the commencement of its occultation, rises immediately after the Sun: another is called the precise oriental co-rising; when the star is found in partile conjunction with the Sun in the oriental horizon: another is the oriental, precedent, and visible rising; when the star, beginning to appear, rises before the Sun.

1. The first is called the morning subsolar, when the star is seen with the Sun on the eastern horizon. There are different types of this aspect: one is called the eastern, invisible, and subsequent rising; this happens when the star rises immediately after the Sun begins to set. Another is known as the exact eastern co-rising; in this case, the star is in exact alignment with the Sun on the eastern horizon. Finally, there is the eastern, preceding, and visible rising; this occurs when the star starts to become visible and rises before the Sun.

2. The second aspect is termed matutine location in the mid-heaven; when the star is found on the meridian, either above or below the earth, while the Sun is on the oriental horizon. And of this aspect, one species is called a succedent and oriental location in the mid-heaven, invisible; when, immediately after the Sun’s rising, the star shall be found on the meridian: another is the precise oriental location in the mid-heaven; when, exactly as the Sun rises, the star is at the same time on the meridian; another is the oriental precedent location in the mid-heaven; when the star first shall come to the meridian above the earth, and the Sun may then immediately rise.

2. The second aspect is called matutine location in the mid-heaven; when the star is positioned on the meridian, either above or below the earth, while the Sun is on the eastern horizon. Of this aspect, one type is referred to as a succedent and oriental location in the mid-heaven, which is invisible; when, right after the Sun rises, the star is found on the meridian. Another type is the precise oriental location in the mid-heaven; when, just as the Sun rises, the star is also on the meridian at the same time. Another is the oriental precedent location in the mid-heaven; when the star first reaches the meridian above the earth, and then the Sun rises immediately after.

3. The third, called matutine setting, is when the Sun may be actually in the oriental horizon, but the star in the occidental. One of the forms of this aspect is called the oriental, succedent setting, invisible; when the star sets immediately after the Sun’s rising: another is the precise oriental co-setting, when the star sets at the moment of the Sun’s rising: another is the oriental, precedent, and visible setting, when the Sun does not rise until immediately after the setting of the star.

3. The third, known as the matutine setting, occurs when the Sun is on the eastern horizon, but the star is on the western. One version of this scenario is called the oriental, succedent setting, which is invisible; this happens when the star sets right after the Sun rises. Another is the precise oriental co-setting, when the star sets at the exact moment the Sun rises. Yet another is the oriental, precedent, and visible setting, where the Sun doesn’t rise until just after the star has set.

4. The fourth aspect is named meridianal subsolar, and takes place when the Sun is actually on the meridian, but the star on the oriental horizon. Of this, one is diurnal and invisible; when the star rises while the Sun is posited on the meridian above the earth: another is nocturnal and visible; when the star rises while the Sun is placed on the meridian below the earth.

4. The fourth aspect is called meridianal subsolar, and it happens when the Sun is directly overhead at the meridian, but the star is on the eastern horizon. This has two scenarios: one is during the day and is invisible; when the star rises while the Sun is positioned on the meridian above the Earth. The other is at night and is visible; when the star rises while the Sun is placed on the meridian below the Earth.

5. The fifth is called meridianal location in the mid-heaven; when the Sun, as well as the star, may be at the same time on the meridian. Of this aspect, two sorts are diurnal and invisible; when the star is on the meridian above the earth, together with the Sun, or on that below [Pg 147] the earth, diametrically opposite to the Sun. Two also are nocturnal, and of these, one is invisible; when the star is on the meridian under the earth, together with the Sun: the other, however, is visible; when the star is on the meridian above the earth, diametrically opposite to the Sun.

5. The fifth is called mid-heaven location; it’s when the Sun and the star are simultaneously on the meridian. There are two types of this aspect: diurnal and invisible. The diurnal happens when the star is on the meridian above the earth at the same time as the Sun, or when it’s underneath the earth, directly opposite the Sun. There are also two nocturnal types, one of which is invisible; this occurs when the star is on the meridian beneath the earth with the Sun. The other is visible; this occurs when the star is on the meridian above the earth, directly opposite the Sun. [Pg 147]

6. The sixth is meridianal setting; when the star is found on the occidental horizon, while the Sun is on the meridian. Of this, one species is diurnal and invisible; when the star sets while the Sun is above the earth on the meridian: the other is nocturnal and visible; when the star sets while the Sun is on the meridian below the earth.

6. The sixth is meridianal setting; when the star is located on the western horizon, while the Sun is at its highest point in the sky. There are two types: one is daytime and invisible; when the star sets while the Sun is above the horizon. The other is nighttime and visible; when the star sets while the Sun is below the horizon.

7. The seventh aspect is called vespertine subsolar; when the star is found on the oriental horizon, while the Sun is posited on the occidental horizon. One form of this aspect is the vespertine succedent rising, visible; when the star rises immediately after sunset: another is the precise vespertine co-rising; when the star rises and the Sun sets at one and the same time: another is the precedent, vespertine rising, invisible; when the star rises immediately before the Sun sets.

7. The seventh aspect is called vespertine subsolar; when the star is on the eastern horizon, while the Sun is on the western horizon. One type of this aspect is the vespertine succedent rising, which is visible; when the star rises right after sunset: another type is the precise vespertine co-rising; when the star rises and the Sun sets at the same time: another type is the precedent, vespertine rising, which is invisible; when the star rises just before the Sun sets.

8. The eighth is named vespertine location in the mid-heaven; when the star is on the meridian, either above or below the earth, while the Sun is placed on the occidental horizon. Of this aspect, one kind is called a visible vespertine location in the mid-heaven; when the star is found there immediately after sunset: another is the precise vespertine location in the mid-heaven; when the star is found there at the moment of sunset; another is the vespertine precedent location in the mid-heaven, invisible; when the star arrives there immediately before sunset.

8. The eighth is called the vespertine position in the mid-heaven; when the star is on the meridian, either above or below the earth, while the Sun is on the western horizon. Of this aspect, one type is known as the visible vespertine position in the mid-heaven; when the star is there right after sunset: another is the exact vespertine position in the mid-heaven; when the star is there at the moment of sunset; another is the vespertine previous position in the mid-heaven, invisible; when the star reaches that point just before sunset.

9. The ninth aspect is called vespertine setting; when the star, together with the Sun, is on the occidental horizon. One form of this aspect is the vespertine, succedent and visible setting; when the star, at the commencement of its occultation, sets immediately after the Sun: another is the precise vespertine setting; when the star sets at the same moment with the Sun: another is the precedent, invisible setting; when the star, before it emerges from its occultation, sets before the Sun.

9. The ninth aspect is called vespertine setting; when the star, along with the Sun, is on the western horizon. One type of this aspect is the vespertine, succedent, and visible setting; when the star, at the start of its occultation, sets right after the Sun: another is the precise vespertine setting; when the star sets at the exact same moment as the Sun: yet another is the precedent, invisible setting; when the star, before it comes out of its occultation, sets before the Sun.


NO. II
ALMAGEST; BOOK II.
EXCERPT FROM CHAP. IX

Of Circumstances regulated by Ascensions

Of Situations Controlled by Elevations

In any climate whatever, the magnitude of a given day or night is to be computed by the number of ascensional times proper to that particular climate. For example, the magnitude of the day will be ascertained by numbering the times between the Sun’s zodiacal degree and the degree [Pg 148] diametrically opposite, in the succession of the signs; and that of the night, by numbering the times, from the degree diametrically opposite to the Sun, onwards, in the order of the signs, to be the degree actually occupied by the Sun: because, by dividing the respective amounts of these times so obtained, by fifteen, the number of equatorial hours belonging to each space will be exhibited; and if the division be made by twelve, instead of fifteen, the result will show the numbers of degrees equivalent to one temporal hour of either of the said spaces respectively.[286]

In any climate, the significance of a specific day or night is determined by the number of ascensional times relevant to that climate. For instance, the significance of the day can be figured out by counting the times between the Sun’s zodiac position and the position directly opposite it in the sequence of the signs; and for the night, by counting the times from the position directly opposite to the Sun, moving forward through the signs to the position currently occupied by the Sun. By dividing the respective amounts of these counted times by fifteen, you can see the number of equatorial hours for each period. If you divide by twelve instead of fifteen, the result will indicate the number of degrees that equal one temporal hour for each of the mentioned periods. [Pg 148]

The magnitude of any temporal hour may be, however, more easily found by referring to the annexed Table of Ascensions, and taking the difference between the respective aggregate numbers, inserted therein under the heads of the equinoctial parallel or right sphere, and of any particular climate for which the magnitude of the temporal hour is required; and, if the said hour be a diurnal hour, the aggregate times as stated against the zodiacal degree occupied by the Sun; but, if nocturnal, those stated against the degree diametrically opposite, are to be compared; and the sixth part of the difference between them is to be added, if the said degree be in the northern signs, to the fifteen times of an equatorial hour; but subtracted therefrom, if in the southern signs. The amount thus obtained will be the required number of degrees of the temporal hour in question.[287]

The length of any hour in time can be more easily determined by looking at the attached Table of Ascensions and calculating the difference between the total numbers listed there under the equinoctial parallel or right sphere, and any specific climate for which you need the hour's length; if the hour is a daytime hour, use the total times next to the zodiacal degree where the Sun is located; if it’s a nighttime hour, use the times next to the degree directly opposite. Then, if that degree is in the northern signs, add a sixth of the difference to fifteen times an equatorial hour; if it's in the southern signs, subtract it from that. The result will give you the number of degrees of the temporal hour you're looking for.[287]

[Pg 149] And if it be required to reduce the temporal hours of any given day or night, in a certain climate, into equatorial hours, they must be multiplied by their proper horary times, whether diurnal or nocturnal, as the case may be; the product is then to be divided by fifteen, and the quotient will necessarily be the number of equatorial hours in the climate in question, on the given day or night.[288] On the other hand, equatorial hours are also to be reduced into temporal hours by being multiplied by fifteen, the product of which is to be divided by the horary times proper to the given day or night in the said climate.

[Pg 149] If you need to convert the local hours of a specific day or night in a certain climate to equatorial hours, you should multiply them by their appropriate hourly times, whether it's day or night. Then, divide the result by fifteen to get the number of equatorial hours for that climate on the specified day or night.[288] Conversely, to convert equatorial hours back to local hours, multiply by fifteen and then divide by the hourly times relevant to that particular day or night in the given climate.

The degree ascending in the ecliptic, at any given temporal hour, may also be ascertained by multiplying the number of temporal hours since sunrise, if the given hour be diurnal, but if nocturnal, since sunset, by their proper horary times; and the product is to be added, in the succession of the signs, to the aggregate number (as shown by the ascensions proper to the climate) of the Sun’s degree, if the given hour be diurnal, but, if nocturnal, to that of the degree diametrically opposite, and that particular degree of the ecliptic which shall correspond with the total number thus found in the ascensions of the climate will be the degree then ascending.[289]

The degree of the ecliptic rising at any specific time can be determined by multiplying the number of hours since sunrise if it's daytime, or since sunset if it's nighttime, by their respective hour times. Add the result to the total number of degrees (according to the climate) of the Sun's degree for daytime, or to that of the directly opposite degree for nighttime. The specific degree of the ecliptic that corresponds to the total calculated from the ascensions in that climate will be the degree currently rising.[289]

But, in order to ascertain the degree on the meridian above the earth, the number of temporal hours since the preceding noon are also to be multiplied by their proper horary times, and the product is to be added to the aggregate number of the Sun’s right ascension; and that degree of the ecliptic, with which the total number as found in the aggregate [Pg 150] times of right ascension shall correspond, will then be on the meridian.[290] The degree on the oriental horizon will, however, also show what degrees occupy the meridian; for, by subtracting 90 times (the amount of the quadrant) from the aggregate number ascribed to the said ascending degree in the Table proper to the climate, the number so reduced will be found, in the aggregate times of the Table of Right Ascension, to correspond with the degree on the meridian. And again, on the other hand, by adding 90 to the aggregate times ascribed by right of ascension to the degree on the meridian above the earth, the degree ascending may be obtained, for it will be that degree which corresponds to that total number, as stated in the Table proper to the climate.[291]

To determine the degree on the meridian above the Earth, you need to multiply the number of hours since the last noon by their specific hour values, then add that result to the total right ascension of the Sun. The degree of the ecliptic that matches this total will be at the meridian. However, the degree on the eastern horizon will also indicate what degrees are at the meridian. By subtracting 90 times the quadrant amount from the total assigned to that ascending degree in the climate-specific table, you will find a number that matches the degree on the meridian in the total times of the Right Ascension Table. Conversely, by adding 90 to the total times assigned to the degree on the meridian, you can find the ascending degree, which will correspond to that total number as indicated in the climate-specific table.

The Sun always preserves an equal distance in equatorial hours from all parts of the same meridian; but his distance in equatorial hours from different meridians varies according to the degrees of distance between meridian and meridian.

The Sun always maintains the same distance in equatorial hours from all parts of the same meridian; however, its distance in equatorial hours from different meridians changes based on the degrees of separation between each meridian.

The foregoing extracts have been made to show the entire agreement between the astronomy of the Tetrabiblos and that of the Almagest. The Tables herein given from the latter work are, of course, now, in some degree, superseded by others of modern calculation, infinitely more complete. [Pg 151]

The excerpts above are intended to demonstrate the full agreement between the astronomy in the Tetrabiblos and that in the Almagest. The tables included from the latter work are, of course, now somewhat outdated compared to more modern calculations, which are far more comprehensive. [Pg 151]

Table of Latitudes, as Shown by the
Duration of the Longest Day

Table of Latitudes, as Shown by the
Duration of the Longest Day

[From the Almagest.]

[From the Almagest.]

  LONGEST DAY.     LATITUDE.  
H. M. D. M.
12  0  0  0
12 15  4 15
12 30  8 25
12 45 12 30
13  0 16 27
13 15 20 14
13 30 23 51
13 45 27 40
14  0 [292]30 22
14 15 33 18
14 30 36  0
14 45 38 35
15  0 40 56
15 15 43  5
15 30 45  1
15 45 46 51
16  0 48 32
16 15 50 15
16 30 [293]51 35
16 45 52 50
17  0 54  1
17 15 55  0
17 30 56  0
17 45 57  0
18  0 58  0
18 30 59 30
19  0 61  0
19 30 62  0
20  0 63  0
21  0 64 30
22  0 65 30
23  0 66  0
24  0 66 10

[Pg 152]

[Pg 152]


Extract from the Table of Ascension
(Contained in the Almagest),
Calculated for every Tenth Degree
of the Zodiac.

Extract from the Table of Ascension
(Contained in the Almagest),
Calculated for every Tenth Degree
of the Zodiac.

SIGNS   Tenth
 Degree 
In a Right
 Sphere under 
the Equator,
Diurnal Arc
12 Hours.
3rd Climate,
thro’ Lower
Ægypt,
Lat. 30° 22′ N.
Diurnal Arc
14 Hours.
8th Climate
thro’ Southern
Britain,
Lat. 51° 30′ N.
Diurnal Arc
16 Hs. 20 Mts.
Times
of
Ascen.
Aggregate
Times.
Times
of
Ascen.
Aggregate
Times.
Times
of
Ascen.
Aggregate
Times.
    D. M. D. M. D. M.
Aries 10  9.10   9.10  6.48   6.48  4.05   4.05
20  9.15  18.25  6.55  13.43  4.12   8.17
30  9.25  27.50  7.10  20.53  4.31  12.48
Taurus 10  9.40  37.30  7.33  28.26  4.56  17.44
20  9.58  47.28  8.02  36.28  5.34  23.18
30 10.16  57.44  8.37  45.05  6.25  29.43
Gemini 10 10.34  68.18  9.17  54.22  7.29  37.12
20 10.47  79.05 10.00  64.22  8.49  46.01
30 10.55  90.00 10.38  75.00 10.14  56.15
Cancer 10 10.55 100.55 11.12  86.12 11.36  67.51
20 10.47 111.42 11.34  97.46 12.45  80.36
30 10.34 122.16 11.51 109.37 13.39  94.15
Leo 10 10.16 132.32 11.55 121.32 14.07 108.22
20  9.58 142.30 11.54 133.26 14.22 122.44
30  9.40 152.10 11.47 145.13 14.24 137.08
Virgo 10  9.25 161.35 11.40 156.53 14.19 151.27
20  9.15 170.50 11.35 168.28 14.16 165.45
30  9.10 180.00 11.32 180.00 14.15 180.00
Libra 10  9.10 189.10 11.32 191.32 14.15 194.15
20  9.15 198.25 11.35 203.07 14.18 208.33
30  9.25 207.50 11.40 214.47 14.19 222.52
Scorpio 10  9.40 217.30 11.47 226.34 14.24 237.16
20  9.58 227.28 11.54 238.28 14.22 251.38
30 10.16 237.44 11.55 250.23 14.07 265.45
Sagittarius 10 10.34 248.18 11.51 262.14 13.39 279.24
20 10.47 269.05 11.34 273.48 12.45 292.09
30 10.55 270.00 11.12 285.00 11.36 303.45
Capricornus  10 10.55 280.55 10.38 295.38 10.14 313.59
20 10.47 291.42 10.00 305.38  8.49 322.48
30 10.34 302.16  9.17 314.55  7.29 330.17
Aquarius 10 10.16 312.32  8.37 323.32  6.25 336.42
20  9.58 322.30  8.02 331.34  5.34 342.16
30  9.40 332.10  7.33 339.07  4.56 347.12
Pisces 10  9.25 341.35  7.10 346.17  4.31 351.43
20  9.15 350.50  6.55 353.12  4.12 355.55
30  9.10 360.00  6.48 360.00  4.05 360.00

[Pg 153]

[Pg 153]

NO. III
THE CENTILOQUY,
OR
HUNDRED APHORISMS OF CLAUDIUS PTOLEMY __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
ALSO KNOWN AS,
THE FRUIT OF HIS FOUR BOOKS

I. Judgment must be regulated by thyself, as well as by the science; for it is not possible that particular forms of events should be declared by any person, however scientific; since the understanding conceives only a certain general idea of some sensible event, and not its particular form. It is, therefore, necessary for him who practices herein to adopt inference. They only who are inspired by the deity can predict particulars.

I. You need to regulate your own judgment as well as rely on knowledge; it’s impossible for anyone, no matter how knowledgeable, to declare specific outcomes of events. Our understanding can only grasp a general idea of a certain event, not its specific details. Therefore, anyone practicing in this area must use inference. Only those inspired by the divine can predict the specifics.

II. When an enquirer shall make mature search into an expected event, there will be found no material difference between the event itself and his idea of it.

II. When someone looks closely into an expected event, they will find that there is no significant difference between the event itself and their idea of it.

III. Whosoever may be adapted to any particular event or pursuit, will assuredly have the star indicative thereof very potent in his nativity.

III. Whoever is suited to a specific event or pursuit will definitely have a strong indicator of that in their birth chart.

IV. A mind apt in knowledge will discover truth more readily than one practised in the highest branches of science.

IV. A knowledgeable mind will find the truth more easily than one that's focused on advanced science.

V. A skilful person, acquainted with the nature of the stars, is enabled to avert many of their effects, and to prepare himself for those effects before they arrive.

V. A skilled person who understands the nature of the stars can avoid many of their effects and get ready for those effects before they happen.

VI. It is advantageous to make choice of days and hours at a time well constituted by the nativity. Should the time be adverse, the choice will in no respect avail, however favourable an issue it may chance to promise.

VI. It’s beneficial to choose days and hours that are aligned with the natal chart. If the timing is unfavorable, it won’t matter how promising the outcome seems; the choice will not help at all.

VII. The mingled influences of the stars can be understood by no one who has not previously acquired knowledge of the combinations and varieties existing in nature.

VII. No one can understand the mixed influences of the stars without first having knowledge of the combinations and varieties that exist in nature.

VIII. A sagacious mind improves the operation of the heavens, as a skilful farmer, by cultivation, improves nature.

VIII. A wise mind enhances the workings of the universe, just as a skilled farmer improves nature through cultivation.

[Pg 154]

[Pg 154]

IX. In their generation and corruption forms are influenced by the celestial forms, of which the framers of talismans consequently avail themselves, by observing the ingresses of the stars thereupon.

IX. In their creation and destruction, forms are influenced by celestial forms, which the makers of talismans take advantage of by observing the movements of the stars.

X. In the election of days and hours, make use of the malefics, to the same moderate extent as the skilful physician would use poisons in order to perform cures.

X. In choosing the right days and times, use the malefics just as a skilled physician would carefully use poisons to achieve healing.

XI. A day and hour are not to be elected until the quality of the object proposed shall be known.

XI. A day and time shouldn't be chosen until we know the details of the proposed object.

XII. Love and hatred prohibit the true accomplishment of judgments; and, inasmuch as they lessen the most important, so likewise they magnify the most trivial things.

XII. Love and hate prevent us from making fair judgments; they diminish what's really important and blow up the smallest issues.

XIII. In every indication made by the constitution of the heavens, secondary stars, whether auxiliary or injurious thereto, are also to be used.

XIII. In every sign given by the structure of the universe, secondary stars, whether helpful or harmful to it, should also be considered.

XIV. The astrologer will be entangled in a labyrinth of error, when the seventh house and its lord shall be afflicted.

XIV. The astrologer will get caught in a maze of mistakes when the seventh house and its ruler are negatively influenced.

XV. Signs cadent from the ascendant of any kingdom are the ascendants of that kingdom’s enemies. But the angles and succedent houses are the ascendants of its friends. It is the same in all doctrines and institutions.

XV. Signs falling from the ascendant of any kingdom represent the ascendants of that kingdom’s enemies. Meanwhile, the angles and succedent houses are the ascendants of its friends. This principle applies across all doctrines and institutions.

XVI. When the benefics may be controlled in the eighth house, they bring mischief by means of good men: if, on the other hand, they be well affected, they will prevent mischief.

XVI. When the positive influences can be managed in the eighth house, they cause trouble through well-meaning people; however, if they are positive, they will stop problems.

XVII. Give no judgment as to the future life of an aged person, until the number of years he may live shall have been reckoned.

XVII. Don’t judge the future life of an elderly person until you’ve figured out how many years they might have left.

XVIII. If, while a benefic may ascend, both the luminaries should be in the same minute[295], the native will be equally and highly prosperous in all things which can befall him. So, likewise, if the luminaries be mutually opposed by the east and west. But the contrary effect will be produced, should a malefic be on the ascendant.

XVIII. If a benefic is rising and both luminaries are in the same minute [295], the person will be very successful in all aspects of life. Similarly, if the luminaries are directly opposed in the east and west, the same high level of prosperity will occur. However, if a malefic is on the ascendant, the opposite outcome will happen.

XIX. The efficacy of purgation is impeded by the Moon’s conjunction with Jupiter.

XIX. The effectiveness of cleansing is hindered by the Moon being aligned with Jupiter.

XX. Pierce not with iron that part of the body which may be governed by the sign actually occupied by the Moon.

XX. Don't poke that part of the body with iron that is ruled by the zodiac sign where the Moon is currently located.

XXI. When the Moon may be in Scorpio or Pisces, purgation may be advantageously used, provided the lord of the ascendant be coupled with some star posited below the earth. If he be coupled with a star placed above the earth, the potion swallowed will be vomited up.

XXI. When the Moon is in Scorpio or Pisces, purging can be beneficial, as long as the ruler of the ascendant is aligned with a star positioned below the earth. If it is aligned with a star above the earth, any potion taken will be thrown up.

XXII. Neither put on nor lay aside any garment for the first time, when the Moon may be located in Leo. And it will be still worse to do so, should she be badly affected.

XXII. Don't put on or take off any clothing for the first time when the Moon is in Leo. It’s even worse to do so if the Moon is in a bad position.

[Pg 155]

[Pg 155]

XXIII. Aspects between the Moon and stars give the native much activity; and, if the stars be in power, they indicate an efficient, but if weak an inert, excitation to action.

XXIII. Aspects between the Moon and stars give the person a lot of energy; and, if the stars are strong, they indicate an active drive, but if weak, they suggest a lack of motivation to act.

XXIV. An eclipse of the luminaries, if in the angles of the nativity, or of an annual revolution, is noxious; and the effects take place according to the space between the ascendant and the place of eclipse. And as, in a solar eclipse, a year is reckoned for an hour, so likewise, in a lunar eclipse, a month is reckoned for an hour.

XXIV. An eclipse of the celestial bodies, whether in the angles of the birth chart or during an annual cycle, is harmful; and its effects occur based on the distance between the rising sign and the location of the eclipse. Just as in a solar eclipse, one year is considered equivalent to one hour, in a lunar eclipse, one month is considered equivalent to one hour.

XXV. The progression of a significator, posited in the mid-heaven, is to be made by right ascension; of another posited in the ascendant, by the oblique ascension of the particular latitude.

XXV. The movement of a significator located in the mid-heaven is determined by right ascension; for another located in the ascendant, it is determined by the oblique ascension of the specific latitude.

XXVI. There is obvious concealment in the case, if the star significative of any particular affair be in conjunction with the Sun, either under the earth or in a place foreign to its own nature. On the other hand, there is manifestation, should the star be raised to elevation out of its depression, and be located in its own place.

XXVI. It's clear there's something hidden in the situation if the star associated with a specific matter is aligned with the Sun, whether it's below the earth or in a place that's not natural for it. Conversely, there is clarity if the star rises from its low position and is found in its rightful place.

XXVII. Venus gives pleasure to the native in that part of the body which may be ruled by the sign she occupies. It is the same with other stars.

XXVII. Venus brings pleasure to the individual in the area of the body associated with the sign she occupies. The same goes for other planets.

XXVIII. When the Moon may not hold a familiarity with two planets, as is desirable, care should be taken to connect her, if possible, with some fixed star combining their qualities.

XXVIII. When the Moon might not have a strong connection with two planets, as is preferable, care should be taken to link her, if possible, with some fixed star that embodies their qualities.

XXIX. The fixed stars grant extremely good fortune, unconnected with the understanding; but it is most commonly marked by calamities, unless the planets also agree in the felicity.

XXIX. The fixed stars bring about very good fortune, unrelated to one’s understanding; however, it is often accompanied by misfortunes, unless the planets are also aligned favorably.

XXX. Observe the creation of the first king of any dynasty; for if the ascendant at that creation should agree with the ascendant of the nativity of the king’s son, he will succeed his father.

XXX. Watch the rise of the first king of any dynasty; because if the rising sign at that time matches the rising sign at the birth of the king’s son, he will inherit his father’s throne.

XXXI. When the star ruling over any kingdom shall enter into a climacterical place, either the king, or some one of the chief men of his kingdom, will die.

XXXI. When the star that governs a kingdom moves into a significant position, either the king or one of the leading figures in his realm will die.

XXXII. Concord between two persons is produced by an harmonious figuration of the stars, indicative of the matter whereby good will is constituted, in the nativity of either person.

XXXII. Harmony between two people is created by a compatible arrangement of the stars, which signals the factors that contribute to goodwill in the birth chart of each individual.

XXXIII. Love and hatred are discernible, as well from the concord and discord of the luminaries, as from the ascendants of both nativities: but obeying signs increase good will.

XXXIII. Love and hatred can be seen in the harmony and conflict of the stars, as well as in the rising signs of both birth charts: but following the signs enhances goodwill.

XXXIV. If the lord of the place of the new Moon be in an angle, he is indicative of the events liable to happen in that month.

XXXIV. If the ruler of the location of the new Moon is in a corner, he indicates the events that are likely to occur in that month.

XXXV. When the Sun arrives at the place of any star, he excites the influence of that star in the atmosphere.

XXXV. When the Sun reaches the position of any star, it activates the effects of that star in the atmosphere.

XXXVI. In the foundation of cities, consider the fixed stars which may seem to contribute thereto; but in the erection of houses, observe the planets. The kings of every city which has Mars in culmination will most commonly perish by the sword.

XXXVI. When establishing cities, take into account the fixed stars that might seem to influence the process; but when building houses, pay attention to the planets. The rulers of any city where Mars is at its peak will often meet their end by violence.

[Pg 156]

[Pg 156]

XXXVII. If Virgo or Pisces be on the ascendant, the native will create his own dignity; but if Aries or Libra is on the ascendant, he will cause his own death. The other signs are to be contemplated in the same way.

XXXVII. If Virgo or Pisces is rising, the person will build their own reputation; but if Aries or Libra is rising, they will bring about their own death. The other signs should be considered in the same way.

XXXVIII. Mercury, if established in either house of Saturn, and in power, gives the native a speculative and inquisitive intellect: if in a house of Mars, and especially if in Aries, he gives eloquence.

XXXVIII. Mercury, when located in either house of Saturn and in a strong position, provides the person with a curious and analytical mind; if it's in a house of Mars, particularly in Aries, it grants eloquence.

XXXIX. Affliction of the eleventh house, in the creation of a king, indicates damage in his household and his treasury: affliction of the second house denotes the detriment of his subject’s wealth.

XXXIX. Affliction of the eleventh house, in the creation of a king, indicates problems in his household and his treasury: affliction of the second house signifies harm to his subject’s wealth.

XL. When the ascendant is oppressed by the malefics, the native will delight in sordid things, and approve ill-favoured odours.

XL. When the rising sign is negatively influenced by harmful planets, the person will take pleasure in lowly things and have a liking for unpleasant smells.

XLI. Beware the affliction of the eighth house and its lord, at a time of departure; and that of the second house and its lord, at a time of return.

XLI. Be cautious of the troubles from the eighth house and its ruler during times of departure, and from the second house and its ruler during times of return.

XLII. Should a disease begin when the Moon may be in a sign occupied at the birth by some malefic, or in quartile or opposition to any such sign, such disease will be most severe; and if the malefic also behold the said sign, it will be dangerous. On the other hand, there will be no danger if the Moon be in a place held at the time of birth by some benefic.

XLII. If a disease starts when the Moon is in a sign that was occupied at birth by a malefic, or in a quarter or opposition to such a sign, that disease will be very serious; and if the malefic also looks at that sign, it will be risky. On the flip side, there will be no risk if the Moon is in a place that was occupied at birth by a benefic.

XLIII. The malefic figures of a nation are strengthened by adverse figurations of existing times.

XLIII. The harmful figures of a nation are reinforced by the negative circumstances of the present times.

XLIV. It is an evil case if the ascendant of a sick person resist the figuration of his own nativity; and if the time should not bring up any benefic.

XLIV. It’s a bad situation if the rising sign of a sick person opposes the setup of their own birth chart; and if the timing doesn’t bring any beneficial influences.

XLV. If the ascendant, or principal significators, be not in human signs, the native himself will be also estranged from human nature.

XLV. If the ascendant or main significators are not in human signs, the person will be disconnected from human nature as well.

XLVI. In nativities much happiness is conferred by the fixed stars; and also by the angles of the new Moon, and by the place of a kingdom’s Part of Fortune, should the ascendant be found in any of them.

XLVI. In birth charts, a lot of happiness comes from the fixed stars; also from the angles of the new Moon, and from the location of a kingdom’s Part of Fortune, if the ascendant is located in any of them.

XLVII. If a malefic in one nativity fall on the place of a benefic in another nativity, he who has the benefic will suffer damage from him who has the malefic.

XLVII. If a harmful planet in one chart aligns with the position of a positive planet in another chart, the person with the positive planet will experience some negative effects from the person with the harmful planet.

XLVIII. If the mid-heaven of a prince be the ascendant of his subject, or if their respective significators be configurated in a benevolent form, they will continue long inseparable. It will be the same, also, should the sixth house of a subject or servant be the ascendant of his prince or master.

XLVIII. If a prince's mid-heaven aligns with the ascendant of his subject, or if their corresponding significators are configured in a positive way, they will remain close for a long time. The same applies if a subject's or servant's sixth house is the ascendant of their prince or master.

[Pg 157]

[Pg 157]

XLIX. If the ascendant of a servant be the mid-heaven in his master’s nativity, the master will place so much confidence in that servant as to be ruled by him.

XLIX. If a servant’s ascendant is at the mid-heaven in their master’s birth chart, the master will trust that servant so much that they will be governed by him.

L. Overlook none of the hundred and nineteen conjunctions; for on them depends the knowledge of worldly operations, whether of generation or of corruption.

L. Don't overlook any of the hundred and nineteen conjunctions; they are essential for understanding worldly matters, whether it’s about creation or decay.

LI. Make the sign occupied by the Moon at the time of birth the sign ascending at the conception; and consider that in which she may be posited at the conception, or the opposite one, as the sign ascending at the birth.

LI. Make the sign in which the Moon was located at the time of birth the ascendant sign at conception; and consider the sign in which it may be positioned at conception, or the opposite one, as the ascendant sign at birth.

LII. Men of tall stature have their lords of nativity in elevation, and their ascendants in the beginnings of signs; but the lords of men of short stature will be found in declination.[296] It must also be seen whether the signs be right or oblique.

LII. Tall individuals have their ruling planets in higher positions, and their influences at the start of the zodiac signs; but the ruling planets for shorter individuals will be found in lower positions.[296] It's also important to consider whether the signs are direct or angled.

LIII. The lords of nativity of slight or thin men have no latitude, but those of stout or fat men have; and, if the latitude be south, the native will be active; if north, inactive.

LIII. The rulers of the birth charts of slender men have no latitude, but those of robust or heavier men do; and if the latitude is to the south, the person will be active; if it is to the north, they will be inactive.

LIV. In the construction of a building, the principal rulers, if coupled with a star below the earth, will impede the erection.

LIV. In building construction, the main influences, if aligned with a star underground, will hinder the process.

LV. Mars’ evil influence over ships is diminished if he be neither in the mid-heaven nor in the eleventh house; but if in either of those places, he renders the ship liable to be captured by pirates. And if the ascendant be afflicted by any fixed star of the nature of Mars, the ship will be burned.

LV. Mars' negative impact on ships is reduced if he is not in the mid-heaven or the eleventh house; however, if he is in either of those positions, he makes the ship vulnerable to pirate capture. Also, if the ascendant is affected by any fixed star associated with Mars, the ship could be set on fire.

LVI. While the Moon is in her first quarter, withdrawing from her conjunction with the Sun, the bodily humours expand until her second quarter: in her other quarters they decrease.

LVI. While the Moon is in her first quarter, moving away from her alignment with the Sun, the body's fluids expand until her second quarter: in her other quarters they decrease.

LVII. If, during a sickness, the seventh house and its lord be afflicted, change the physician.

LVII. If, during an illness, the seventh house and its ruler are troubled, switch doctors.

LVIII. Observe the place of an aspect, and its distance from the ascendant of the year; for the event will happen when the profection may arrive thither.

LVIII. Pay attention to the location of an aspect and its distance from the year's ascendant; the event will occur when the profection reaches that point.

LIX. Before pronouncing that an absent person shall die, observe whether he may not become intoxicated; before declaring that he shall receive a wound, see whether he may not be let blood; and before saying that he shall find treasure, examine whether he may not receive his own deposit; for the figures of all these things may be similar.

LIX. Before saying that someone who isn't present will die, check if they might get drunk; before stating that they will be wounded, consider if they might just bleed; and before claiming they will find treasure, see if they might just get back something they lost; because the signs of all these events can look alike.

LX. In cases of sickness, observe the critical days, and the Moon’s progress in the angles of a figure of sixteen sides. If those angles be well affected, it is favourable for the invalid; if they be afflicted, unfavourable.

LX. When someone is sick, pay attention to the critical days and the Moon’s position in the angles of a sixteen-sided chart. If those angles are positive, it’s good for the person’s health; if they’re negative, it’s not.

[Pg 158]

[Pg 158]

LXI. The Moon is significative of bodily matters, which, in respect of motion, resemble her.

LXI. The Moon represents physical matters, which, in terms of movement, are similar to her.

LXII. By marking exactly the beginning of a conjunction,[297] judgment may be made of the variation of the weather in the ensuing month. It will depend upon the lord of the angle of every figure, for he controls the nature of the atmosphere; assuming also at these times the quality of the existing weather.

LXII. By pinpointing the start of a conjunction, [297] a forecast can be made about the weather changes in the coming month. It will rely on the ruler of the angle of each chart, as they influence the atmospheric conditions, while also considering the current state of the weather.

LXIII. In the conjunction of Saturn and Jupiter, pronounce according to the nature of that one which may be higher in elevation. Follow the same rule with other stars.

LXIII. When Saturn and Jupiter come together, speak based on which one is higher in the sky. Apply the same principle to other stars.

LXIV. After ascertaining the lord of the inquiry, see what power he may have in the annual revolution, or in the ascendant of the new Moon; and pronounce accordingly.

LXIV. After figuring out the lord of the inquiry, check what influence he might have in the yearly cycle or in the rising of the new Moon; and make your judgment accordingly.

LXV. In the least conjunction, the difference of the mean conjunction, and in the mean conjunction the difference of the greatest conjunction.[298]

LXV. In the smallest connection, the difference of the average connection, and in the average connection the difference of the greatest connection.[298]

LXVI. Consider no profection by itself alone, but make reference also to the qualifications and impediments of the stars.

LXVI. Don’t consider any movement on its own; also take into account the qualities and obstacles of the stars.

LXVII. Years are diminished by the imbecility of the receiver.

LXVII. Years lose their value due to the foolishness of the person receiving them.

LXVIII. A malefic, when matutine, signifies an accident; when vespertine, a disease.

LXVIII. A harmful influence, when seen in the morning, means an accident; when seen in the evening, it indicates an illness.

LXIX. The native’s sight will be impaired if the Moon be opposed to the Sun, and joined with nebulous stars; and if the Moon be in the western angle, and both the malefic stars in the eastern angle, the Sun being in an angle also, the native will become blind.

LXIX. The person's vision will be affected if the Moon is opposite the Sun and next to cloudy stars; and if the Moon is in the western position, with both negative stars in the eastern position, while the Sun is also in a significant position, the person will become blind.

LXX. Insanity is produced if the Moon have no connection with Mercury; and, if neither of them be connected with the ascendant, Saturn being in occupation of the angle by night, but Mars by day, especially if in Cancer, Virgo, or Pisces, a dæmoniac affection will be produced.

LXX. Insanity occurs if the Moon has no connection to Mercury; and if neither of them is linked to the ascendant, with Saturn occupying the angle at night and Mars during the day, especially if in Cancer, Virgo, or Pisces, a demonic influence will be manifested.

LXXI. If both luminaries may be in masculine signs, in the nativities of males, their actions will be consonant with nature; but if so placed in the nativities of females, they increase their action. And Mars and Venus, if matutine, incline to the masculine gender; if vespertine, to the feminine.

LXXI. If both luminaries are in masculine signs in the horoscopes of males, their actions will align with nature; but if positioned that way in the horoscopes of females, they enhance their influence. Mars and Venus, if in the morning sky, lean towards the masculine gender; if in the evening sky, towards the feminine.

LXXII. Matters of education are to be considered by the ascending lords of triplicity; matters of life, by the lords of the conditionary luminary’s triplicity.

LXXII. Issues related to education should be considered by the higher ranking lords of triplicity; matters concerning life should be addressed by the lords of the conditionary luminary’s triplicity.

[Pg 159]

[Pg 159]

LXXIII. If the Sun be found with the Gorgon’s head (Caput Medusæ), and not aspected by any benefic star, and if there be no benefic present in the eighth house, and the lord of the conditionary luminary be opposed to Mars, or in quartile to him, the native will be beheaded. If the luminary culminate, his body will be maimed or mangled; and if the aspect in quartile be from Gemini or Pisces, his hands and feet will be amputated.

LXXIII. If the Sun is seen with the Gorgon's head (Caput Medusæ) and isn’t connected to any positive star, and if there aren’t any positive influences in the eighth house, and the ruler of the significant luminary is in opposition to Mars or in a square aspect to him, the person will be executed. If the luminary is at its peak, their body will be injured or disfigured; and if the square aspect comes from Gemini or Pisces, their hands and feet will be removed.

LXXIV. Mars, if ascending, uniformly gives a scar in the face.

LXXIV. When Mars is rising, it consistently leaves a scar on the face.

LXXV. If the Sun be in conjunction with the lord of the ascendant, in Leo, and Mars has no prerogative in the ascendant, and if there be no benefic in the eighth house, the native will be burned.

LXXV. If the Sun is aligned with the ruler of the ascendant in Leo, and Mars has no power in the ascendant, and if there’s no benefic in the eighth house, the person will be at risk of being burned.

LXXVI. If Saturn hold the mid-heaven, and the conditionary luminary be opposed to him, the native will perish in the ruins of buildings, provided the sign on the lower heaven be an earthly sign; if it be a watery sign, he will be drowned or suffocated by water: if a human sign, he will be strangled by men, or will perish by the halter or the scourge. Should there, however, be a benefic in the eighth house, he will not suffer death, although he will be brought near it.

LXXVI. If Saturn is at the top of the sky, and the ruling planet is in opposition to him, the person will die in a building collapse, as long as the sign in the lower sky is an earth sign; if it’s a water sign, they will drown or suffocate in water. If it’s a human sign, they will be strangled by others or die by hanging or beating. However, if there is a benefic planet in the eighth house, they will not die, although they will come close to it.

LXXVII. Profection of the ascendant is to be made for matters affecting the body; of the Part of Fortune, for extrinsic circumstances; of the Moon, for the connection between the body and the spirit; and of the mid-heaven, for the employment or profession.

LXXVII. The movement of the ascendant is to be observed for issues related to the body; the Part of Fortune for external circumstances; the Moon for the relationship between the body and the spirit; and the mid-heaven for career or profession.

LXXVIII. A star often dispenses influence in a place in which it has no prerogative, thus bringing unexpected advantage to the native.

LXXVIII. A star often exerts influence in a place where it has no authority, bringing unexpected benefits to the person born under it.

LXXIX. Whoever has Mars in the eleventh house, does not govern his master.

LXXIX. Whoever has Mars in the eleventh house doesn’t control his master.

LXXX. If Venus be in conjunction with Saturn, and have any lord of house in the seventh house, the native will be of spurious origin.

LXXX. If Venus is in conjunction with Saturn, and has any ruling planet of the house in the seventh house, the person will be of questionable parentage.

LXXXI. Times are reckoned in seven ways; viz. by the space between two significators; by the space between their mutual aspects; by the approach of one to the other; by the space between either of them and the place appropriated to the proposed event; by the descension of a star, with its addition or diminution; by the changing of a significator; and by the approach of a planet to its place.

LXXXI. Times are measured in seven ways: by the distance between two significators; by the distance between their aspects; by how one approaches the other; by the distance between either of them and the designated place for the event; by the rise of a star, along with its increase or decrease; by the change of a significator; and by the approach of a planet to its position.

LXXXII. When a figure may be equipoised, observe the horoscope (or figure) at the new or full moon, and, if that also be equipoised, be not hasty in giving judgment.

LXXXII. When a chart can be balanced, check the horoscope (or chart) at the new or full moon, and if that is also balanced, don't rush to make a decision.

LXXXIII. The time of obtaining a grant indicates the affection between the applicant and his prince; but the seat[299] shows the nature of the office;—

LXXXIII. The timing of receiving a grant reflects the relationship between the applicant and his ruler; however, the position[299] reveals the character of the role;—

[Pg 160]

[Pg 160]

LXXXIV. And if Mars be lord of the ascendant at the time of entering on possession, and posited in the second house, or coupled with the lord of the second, he brings much mischief.

LXXXIV. And if Mars is the ruler of the ascendant when entering into possession, and located in the second house, or combined with the ruler of the second, he causes a lot of trouble.

LXXXV. Should the lord of the ascendant be configurated with the lord of the second house, the prince will spontaneously create many charges.

LXXXV. If the ruler of the ascendant is aligned with the ruler of the second house, the prince will naturally take on many responsibilities.

LXXXVI. The Sun is the source of the vital power; the Moon, of the natural power.

LXXXVI. The Sun is the source of life-giving energy; the Moon is the source of natural energy.

LXXXVII. Monthly revolutions are made in twenty-eight days, two hours and about eighteen minutes. Judgment is also made by some persons by means of the Sun’s progress; that is to say, by his partial equations to that degree and minute which he might hold at the beginning.

LXXXVII. Monthly cycles occur in twenty-eight days, two hours, and about eighteen minutes. Some people also make judgments based on the Sun’s movement; that is, by comparing its position to the specific degree and minute it held at the start.

LXXXVIII. In making profection of the part of Fortune for a whole annual revolution, a space equal to that between the Sun and Moon is to be reckoned from the ascendant.

LXXXVIII. In representing the role of Fortune for a full year, a distance equal to that between the Sun and Moon should be measured from the ascendant.

LXXXIX. Consider the grandfather’s affairs from the seventh house and the uncle’s from the sixth.

LXXXIX. Look at the grandfather’s matters from the seventh house and the uncle’s from the sixth.

XC. Should the significator be in aspect to the ascendant, the hidden event or object will correspond in its nature with the ascendant; but if the ascendant be not so aspected, the nature of the event will accord with that of the place in which the significator is posited. The lord of the hour shows its colour; the place of the Moon its time; and, if above the earth, it will be a novel thing; if below, old. The part of Fortune indicates its quantity, whether long or short. The lords of the terms, and of the lower heaven and mid-heaven, and of the Moon, shows its substance or value.

XC. If the significator is in aspect to the ascendant, the hidden event or object will have characteristics that match the ascendant; however, if the ascendant is not aspected, the nature of the event will align with the location of the significator. The lord of the hour reveals its color; the position of the Moon indicates its timing; if it’s above the earth, it will be something new; if it’s below, it will be something old. The part of Fortune shows its quantity, whether it's long or short. The lords of the terms, the lower heaven, the mid-heaven, and the Moon reveal its substance or value.

XCI. Should the ruler of a sick person be combust, it is an evil portent; and especially if the part of Fortune be afflicted.

XCI. If the ruler of a sick person is in a bad position, it is a bad sign; especially if the part of Fortune is affected.

XCII. Saturn, if oriental, is not so highly noxious to a sick person; nor Mars, if occidental.

XCII. Saturn, when it's in the east, isn't as harmful to an ill person; nor is Mars when it's in the west.

XCIII. Judgment is not to be drawn from any figure until the next conjunction shall have been considered: for principles are varied by every conjunction; and therefore, to avoid error, both the last and the next should be combined.

XCIII. Judgment should not be made based on any figure until the next conjunction has been taken into account: because principles change with every conjunction; therefore, to avoid mistakes, both the last and the next should be analyzed together.

XCIV. The place of the more potent significator indicates the thoughts of the inquirer.

XCIV. The position of the stronger signifier shows the thoughts of the person asking.

XCV. The stars rising with the tenth house prove how far the native may be fitted to the occupation which he follows.

XCV. The stars rising with the tenth house indicate how well the person may be suited for the job they have.

XCVI. In an eclipse, such significations as are made nearest the angles, show the events decreed. The nature of the stars in accordance with the eclipse, plants as well as fixed stars, and also the appearances co-ascending, are likewise to be considered, and judgment is to be given accordingly.

XCVI. During an eclipse, the meanings indicated closest to the angles reveal the events that are destined to happen. The characteristics of the stars, according to the eclipse—both planets and fixed stars—as well as the celestial appearances that are rising together, should also be taken into account, and conclusions should be drawn based on this.

[Pg 161]

[Pg 161]

XCVII. The event inquired about will be speedily accomplished, should the lord of the new or full Moon be in an angle.

XCVII. The event in question will happen quickly if the lord of the new or full Moon is in a house.

XCVIII. Shooting stars, and meteors like flowing hair, bear a secondary part in judgments.

XCVIII. Shooting stars and meteors that look like flowing hair play a minor role in judgments.

XCIX. Shooting stars denote the dryness of the air; and, if they are projected to one part only, they indicate wind therefrom: if to various parts, they indicate diminution of waters, a turbulent atmosphere, and incursions of armies.

XCIX. Shooting stars signify dry air; and if they appear in one area only, they suggest wind coming from that direction: if they are seen in multiple areas, they indicate a decrease in water, a turbulent atmosphere, and the movement of armies.

C. If comets, whose distance is eleven signs behind the Sun, appear in angles, the king of some kingdom, or one of the princes or chief men of a kingdom, will die. If in a succedent house, the affairs of the kingdom’s treasury will prosper, but the governor or ruler will be changed. If in a cadent house, there will be diseases and sudden deaths. And if comets be in motion from the west towards the east, a foreign foe will invade the country: if not in motion, the foe will be provincial, or domestic.

C. If comets, located eleven signs behind the Sun, appear in angles, a king, or one of the princes or leaders of a kingdom, will die. If they are in a succedent house, the kingdom's treasury will thrive, but the governor or ruler will be replaced. If they are in a cadent house, there will be illnesses and unexpected deaths. If comets are moving from the west to the east, a foreign enemy will invade the country; if they are not in motion, the threat will be local or domestic.

End of the Centiloquy

End of the Centiloquy


NO. IV
THE ZODIACAL STAR CHART

The Reader is desired to refer to the Plate at end of book containing diagrams of the Zodiacal Planisphere, which has been spoken of in the Note in p. 99.

The reader is encouraged to check the plate at the end of the book with diagrams of the Zodiacal Planisphere, which has been mentioned in the Note in p. 99.

Fig. 1 is the Planisphere adjusted for the northern latitude of 30° 22′ (where the longest day consists of fourteen equatorial hours), agreeably to the “Exemplification” given by Ptolemy in Chapter XV, Book 3. It represents that portion of the celestial sphere which is contained between the tropics: the central horizontal line is the equator; the curved line extending longitudinally from east to west is the ecliptic; the central perpendicular line is the meridian, or cusp of the 10th house; the other short lines, cutting the equator transversely, are the cusps of the other houses; that of the 1st house being the eastern horizon; that of the 7th, the western horizon. Hence, the distance from the 1st house to the meridian, or from the meridian to the 7th house, shows the semi-diurnal arc of any parallel of declination in the ecliptic; and the distance of the 7th house to the 4th, or from the 4th to the 1st, shows the semi-nocturnal arc. The distance from the cusp of one house to that of the next, taken on the [Pg 162] same parallel, is also equal to two temporal hours; thus, for instance, in the latitude above quoted, the semi-diurnal arc of 0° ♊ is 6 h. 50 m., or 102° 39′ of the equator; consequently the diurnal temporal hour is equal to one equatorial hour and eight minutes, or to 17° 6′ of the equator.

Fig. 1 is the Planisphere adjusted for the northern latitude of 30° 22′ (where the longest day has fourteen hours of daylight at the equator), according to the “Exemplification” provided by Ptolemy in Chapter XV, Book 3. It shows the part of the sky located between the tropics: the central horizontal line is the equator; the curved line running from east to west is the ecliptic; the central vertical line is the meridian, or cusp of the 10th house; the shorter lines that cross the equator are the cusps of the other houses, with the cusp of the 1st house being the eastern horizon and the cusp of the 7th house being the western horizon. Therefore, the distance from the 1st house to the meridian, or from the meridian to the 7th house, represents the semi-diurnal arc of any parallel of declination in the ecliptic; and the distance from the 7th house to the 4th, or from the 4th to the 1st, indicates the semi-nocturnal arc. The distance from the cusp of one house to the next, measured along the same parallel, equals two temporal hours; for example, in the latitude mentioned, the semi-diurnal arc of 0° ♊ is 6 h. 50 m., or 102° 39′ of the equator; therefore, the diurnal temporal hour is equal to one equatorial hour and eight minutes, or 17° 6′ of the equator.

In his first example, Ptolemy directs 0° ♉ to be placed on the ascendant, so that the beginning of ♑ may be on the mid-heaven; 0° ♊ must, therefore, fall on the point A, distant from the mid-heaven 147° 44′ of the equator, as measured by the line AB; because every point in the sphere always preserves one and the same parallel with the equator; and 0° ♊, in passing to the mid-heaven, must proceed along the line AB. In the present case, however, it is required to know how long 0° ♊ will be in coming to the ascendant, the given position of 0° ♉. Now 0° ♊ will be on the ascendant when it arrives at the point G; therefore the distance from A to C is the amount of the prorogation between 0° ♉ (when posited on the ascendant) and 0° ♊, and it is equal to 45° 5′ of the equator. In the second example, 0° ♉ is placed on the mid-heaven, which position must be at D, so that 0° ♊ must necessarily be at E; and the distance from E to B, equal to 57° 44′ of the equator, is the prorogation between 0° ♉ and 0° ♊, when 0⁴ ♉ is on the mid-heaven. In the third example, 0° ♉ is supposed to be on the 7th house, descending, at F, so that ♓ is on the mid-heaven, and 0° ♊ at the point G, in advance of the mid-heaven 32° 16′ of the equator, as shown by the distance BG. Now it is required to bring 0° ♊ to the 7th house (the place of 0° ♉), and it will be there on arriving at H, distant from B 102° 39′ of the equator; but as 0° ♊ is already at G, the distance from G to H, equal to 70° 23′ of the equator, is the amount of the prorogation between 0° ♉ and 0° ♊, when 0° ♉ is on the 7th house. The fourth example places 0° ♉ at I, three temporal hours past the meridian; 0° ♊ therefore falls on the point K, at the distance of 13 equatorial degrees before the meridian or mid-heaven, and will be three temporal hours past the meridian (the position of 0° ♉) on arriving at L, distant 51 equatorial degrees from the mid-heaven: the whole distance from K (the first position of 0° ♊) to L, its second position, equal to 64 degrees of the equator, is therefore the prorogation between 0° ♉ and 0° ♊, when 0° ♉ is past the meridian at the distance of three temporal hours. Ptolemy has also instanced two other positions for 0° ♉; viz. at two temporal hours past the meridian, and at two temporal hours before the occidental angle; or, in other words, on the cusp of the 9th house, and on that of the 8th. Now, if 0° ♉ be on the cusp of the 9th house, it must be at M, and 0° ♊ will be at N, distant 62 equatorial degrees from Q, which is also on the cusp of the 9th. If 0° ♉ be on the cusp of the 8th, it must be at O, and 0° ♊ will be at P, distant 66 equatorial degrees from R, which is also on the cusp of the 8th: these two several numbers of degrees will be the respective prorogations between 0° ♉ and 0° ♊, when 0° ♉ is placed on the 9th and 8th houses. [Pg 163]

In his first example, Ptolemy places 0° Taurus on the ascendant so that the start of Capricorn is at the mid-heaven; therefore, 0° Gemini must fall on point A, which is 147° 44′ from the mid-heaven along the equator, as indicated by line AB. This is because every point on the sphere always maintains a constant parallel with the equator, and 0° Gemini, while moving towards the mid-heaven, must follow line AB. In this situation, it's necessary to find out how long it will take for 0° Gemini to reach the ascendant at the specified position of 0° Taurus. 0° Gemini will reach the ascendant when it gets to point G; thus, the distance from A to C indicates the measure of the progression between 0° Taurus (when it’s on the ascendant) and 0° Gemini, which equals 45° 5′ along the equator. In the second example, 0° Taurus is positioned at the mid-heaven, which will be at D, meaning that 0° Gemini must be at E; the distance from E to B, which equals 57° 44′ along the equator, represents the progression between 0° Taurus and 0° Gemini when 0° Taurus is at the mid-heaven. In the third example, 0° Taurus is thought to be at the 7th house, descending, at F, placing Pisces at the mid-heaven, and 0° Gemini at point G, ahead of the mid-heaven by 32° 16′ along the equator, as shown by distance BG. Now, we need to calculate how to bring 0° Gemini to the 7th house (where 0° Taurus is), which it will reach at H, 102° 39′ away from B along the equator; since 0° Gemini is already at G, the distance from G to H, which equals 70° 23′ along the equator, represents the progression between 0° Taurus and 0° Gemini when 0° Taurus occupies the 7th house. The fourth example places 0° Taurus at I, three temporal hours past the meridian; hence, 0° Gemini is at point K, 13 equatorial degrees before the meridian or mid-heaven, and will also be three temporal hours past the meridian (where 0° Taurus is) when it reaches L, which is 51 equatorial degrees from the mid-heaven: the total distance from K (the initial position of 0° Gemini) to L, its second position, amounts to 64 degrees along the equator, representing the progression between 0° Taurus and 0° Gemini when 0° Taurus is three temporal hours past the meridian. Ptolemy also mentions two other positions for 0° Taurus; that is, two temporal hours past the meridian and two temporal hours before the western horizon, or in other words, on the cusp of the 9th house and the cusp of the 8th. If 0° Taurus is on the cusp of the 9th house, it must be at M, with 0° Gemini at N, 62 equatorial degrees away from Q, which is also on the cusp of the 9th. If 0° Taurus is on the cusp of the 8th, it must be at O, with 0° Gemini at P, which is 66 equatorial degrees away from R, also on the cusp of the 8th: these two different degree measurements will be the respective progressions between 0° Taurus and 0° Gemini when 0° Taurus is positioned in the 9th and 8th houses. [Pg 163]

Ptolemy’s “Exemplification” has been followed thus minutely in order to show how perfectly Mr. Ranger’s invention is adapted to assist (if not to supersede) arithmetical calculation; for, after the Planisphere has once been accurately laid down, a line drawn parallel to the equator, from the significator to the promittor, or to the promittor’s pole of position, and measured by degrees of the equator, will accomplish the whole operation of ascertaining the amount of prorogation.

Ptolemy’s “Exemplification” has been followed this closely to show how perfectly Mr. Ranger’s invention is designed to aid (if not replace) mathematical calculation; because, once the Planisphere has been accurately established, a line drawn parallel to the equator, from the significator to the promittor, or to the promittor’s pole of position, measured in degrees of the equator, will complete the entire process of determining the amount of prorogation.

Fig. 2 is the Equator extended, in plano, on a scale proportionate to the planispheres in Figs. 1 and 3: it is divided into 360 degrees, and into equal time, as measured by the 24 hours of the earth’s daily rotation on its axis, and by smaller portions of four minutes each, corresponding with degrees of the equator.

Fig. 2 is the Equator stretched out, in plano, on a scale that matches the maps in Figs. 1 and 3: it’s split into 360 degrees and equal time, based on the 24 hours of the Earth’s daily spin on its axis, and into smaller increments of four minutes each, which align with the degrees of the equator.

Fig. 3 is the Planisphere set for the latitude of Southern Britain, 51° 30′ N., where the longest day is 16 h. 30 m., the semi-diurnal arc of 0° ♊ being consequently 7 h. 52 m., or 118° of the equator, and its diurnal temporal hour equal to one hour and nearly nineteen minutes of equatorial time, or to 19° 40′ of the equator. In applying Ptolemy’s examples, given in Chapter XV, Book 3, to this latitude, it will follow that, when 0° ♉ may be on the ascendant, 0° ♊ will be at A, and will subsequently arrive at the ascendant at C, after the passage of 29° 43′ of the equator. When 0° ♉ may be on the mid-heaven at D, 0° ♊ will be at E, and will arrive at B, on the mid-heaven, after the passage of 57° 44′ of the equator, as in Fig. 1. When 0° ♉ may be on the 7th house, at F, 0° ♊ will be at G, and will come to the 7th house, at H, after the passage of 85° 45′ of the equator. If 0° ♉ be three temporal hours past the meridian, at I, 0° ♊ would be at K, again 13 equatorial degrees before the meridian, as in Fig. 1, and will be three temporal hours past the meridian, a position similar to that assumed for 0° ♉, on arriving at L, distant from the mid-heaven 59 equatorial degrees; thus making the whole distance, from K to L, 17 equatorial degrees. If 0° ♉ be on the 9th house, at M, 0° ♊ will be at N, distant from Q (also on the 9th house) about 67 equatorial degrees. If 0° ♉ be on the 8th house, at O, 0° ♊ will be at P, distant from R (also on the 8th house) about 76 equatorial degrees.

Fig. 3 is the Planisphere set for the latitude of Southern Britain, 51° 30′ N., where the longest day lasts 16 hours and 30 minutes. The semi-diurnal arc of 0° ♊ is therefore 7 hours and 52 minutes, or 118° of the equator, and its diurnal temporal hour equals one hour and nearly nineteen minutes of equatorial time, or 19° 40′ of the equator. When applying Ptolemy’s examples from Chapter XV, Book 3, to this latitude, it follows that when 0° ♉ is rising, 0° ♊ will be at A and will eventually reach the ascendant at C after moving through 29° 43′ of the equator. When 0° ♉ is at the mid-heaven at D, 0° ♊ will be at E and will reach B, on the mid-heaven, after moving through 57° 44′ of the equator, as in Fig. 1. When 0° ♉ is in the 7th house at F, 0° ♊ will be at G and will come to the 7th house at H after covering 85° 45′ of the equator. If 0° ♉ is three temporal hours past the meridian at I, 0° ♊ would be at K, which is again 13 equatorial degrees before the meridian, as in Fig. 1, and will be three temporal hours past the meridian when it reaches L, which is 59 equatorial degrees away from the mid-heaven; thus, making the total distance from K to L 17 equatorial degrees. If 0° ♉ is in the 9th house at M, 0° ♊ will be at N, around 67 equatorial degrees distant from Q (also in the 9th house). If 0° ♉ is in the 8th house at O, 0° ♊ will be at P, about 76 equatorial degrees distant from R (also in the 8th house).

By taking the trouble to calculate the distances between the several positions given by Ptolemy, the Reader may satisfy himself of the sufficiency of this Planisphere for the purpose for which it was first projected; viz. for the more expeditious measurement of the arcs of direction. The Tables of Ascensions, extracted from the Almagest, in p. 152, will show that the arcs, as measured in Figs. 1 and 2 of the plate, exactly tally with the amounts of distance obtained by calculating arithmetically, according to the respective latitudes, as quoted in the Tables.

By taking the time to calculate the distances between the different locations provided by Ptolemy, the reader can confirm the effectiveness of this Planisphere for its original purpose: to measure the arcs of direction more efficiently. The Tables of Ascensions, taken from the Almagest on page 152, will demonstrate that the arcs, as recorded in Figs. 1 and 2 of the plate, match perfectly with the distance results obtained through arithmetic calculations based on the respective latitudes listed in the Tables.

The slight view which has been here given of the Zodiacal Planisphere invented by Mr. Ranger, must not be considered as pretending to offer a [Pg 164] complete idea of its powers: they are so manifold and various, that another volume would be required to detail them fully; and it has now been used only in order to give a better illustration of Ptolemy’s examples of the spaces of prorogation than mere words can do. To persons conversant with the mathematical part of astronomy, the facility with which a complete representation of zodiacal latitude, declination, the poles of position, crepusculine circles, and other phenomena, may be made by this Planisphere, will be sufficiently obvious from the accompanying Figures.

The brief overview provided here of the Zodiacal Planisphere created by Mr. Ranger shouldn't be seen as a complete presentation of its capabilities. They are so numerous and diverse that another volume would be necessary to explain them all. It has primarily been used to better illustrate Ptolemy’s examples of the areas of prolongation, which words alone cannot convey. For those familiar with the mathematical aspects of astronomy, the ease of creating a full representation of zodiacal latitude, declination, the poles of position, crepuscular circles, and other phenomena using this Planisphere will be clear from the accompanying Figures.

Finis

Done


Fig. 1.

**Figure 1.**

Fig. 2.

Figure 2.

Fig. 3.

Fig. 3.


Footnotes:

References:

[1] Sir Isaac Newton has the following remarks in regard to the origin of Astrology:—“After the study of Astronomy was set on foot for the use of navigation, and the Ægyptians, by the heliacal risings and settings of the stars, had determined the length of the solar year of 365 days, and by other observations had fixed the solstices, and formed the fixed stars into asterisms, all which was done in the reigns of Ammon, Sesac, Orus, and Memnon,” (about 1000 years before Christ), “it may be presumed that they continued to observe the motions of the planets, for they called them after the names of their gods; and Nechepsos, or Nicepsos, King of Sais,” (772 b.c.), “by the assistance of Petosiris, a priest of Ægypt, invented astrology, grounding it upon the aspects of the planets, and the qualities of the men and women to whom they were dedicated;† and in the beginning of the reign of Nabonassar, King of Babylon, about which time the Æthiopians, under Sabacon, invaded Ægypt” (751 b.c.), “those Ægyptians who fled from him to Babylon, carried thither the Ægyptian year of 365 days, and the study of astronomy and astrology, and founded the æra of Nabonassar, dating it from the first year of that king’s reign” (747 b.c.), “and beginning the year on the same day with the Ægyptians for the sake of their calculations. So Diodorus: ‘they say that the Chaldæan in Babylon, being colonies of the Ægyptians, became famous for astrology, having learned it from the priests of Ægypt.’”—Newton’s Chronology, pp. 251, 252.

[1] Sir Isaac Newton makes the following comments about the origins of Astrology:—“Once the study of Astronomy began for navigation purposes, the Egyptians figured out the solar year was 365 days long by observing the heliacal risings and settings of the stars. They also established the solstices and created asterisms with the fixed stars during the reigns of Ammon, Sesac, Orus, and Memnon,” (around 1000 years before Christ). “It’s likely they kept tracking the movements of the planets, naming them after their gods; and Nechepsos, or Nicepsos, King of Sais,” (772 B.C.), “with the help of Petosiris, a priest from Egypt, created astrology based on the positions of the planets and the characteristics of the people they were linked to;† and at the start of the reign of Nabonassar, King of Babylon, around the time the Ethiopians invaded Egypt under Sabacon” (751 B.C.), “those Egyptians who fled to Babylon brought with them the Egyptian year of 365 days, along with their study of astronomy and astrology, and established the era of Nabonassar, dating it from the first year of that king’s reign” (747 B.C.), “and began the year on the same date as the Egyptians for their calculations. Diodorus states: ‘they say that the Chaldeans in Babylon, being colonies of the Egyptians, became well-known for astrology, having learned it from the priests of Egypt.’”—Newton’s Chronology, pp. 251, 252.

Again, in p. 327: “The practice of observing the stars began in Ægypt in the days of Ammon, as above, and was propagated from thence, in the reign of his son Sesac, into Afric, Europe, and Asia, by conquest; and then Atlas formed the sphere of the Libyans” (956 b.c.), “and Chiron that of the Greeks (939 b.c.); and the Chaldæans also made a sphere of their own. But astrology was invented in Ægypt by Nichepsos, or Necepsos, one of the Kings of the Lower Ægypt, and Petosiris his priest, a little before the days of Sabacon, and propagated thence into Chaldæa, where Zoroaster, the legislator of the Magi, met with it: so Paulinus;

Again, in p. 327: “The practice of observing the stars began in Egypt during the time of Ammon, as mentioned earlier, and spread from there during the reign of his son Sesac into Africa, Europe, and Asia through conquest; and then Atlas created the sphere of the Libyans” (956 B.C.), “and Chiron created that of the Greeks (939 B.C.); and the Chaldeans also made their own sphere. However, astrology was invented in Egypt by Nichepsos, or Necepsos, one of the Kings of Lower Egypt, and his priest Petosiris, shortly before the time of Sabacon, and it spread from there to Chaldea, where Zoroaster, the legislator of the Magi, encountered it: so Paulinus;

Quique magos docuit mysteria vana Necepsos.’”

Quique magos docuit mysteria vana Necepsos.’”

The arcana of Astrology constituted a main feature in the doctrines of the Persian Magi; and it further appears, by Newton’s Chronology, p. 347, that Zoroaster (although the æra of his life has been erroneously assigned to various remoter periods) lived in the reign of Darius Hystaspis, about 520 b.c., and assisted Hystaspes, the father of Darius, in reforming the Magi, of whom the said Hystaspes was Master. Newton adds, p. 352, that “about the same time with Hystaspes and Zoroaster, lived also Ostanes, another eminent Magus: Pliny places him under Darius Hystaspis, and Suidas makes him the follower of Zoroaster: he came into Greece with Xerxes about 480 b.c., and seems to be the Otanes of Herodotus. In his book, called the Octateuchus, he taught the same doctrine of the Deity as Zoroaster.”

The secrets of Astrology were a key part of the beliefs of the Persian Magi. According to Newton’s Chronology, p. 347, Zoroaster (even though the period of his life has been inaccurately linked to various earlier times) lived during the reign of Darius Hystaspis, around 520 B.C., and helped Hystaspes, Darius’s father, in reforming the Magi, of whom Hystaspes was the Master. Newton adds, p. 352, that “around the same time as Hystaspes and Zoroaster lived Ostanes, another notable Magus: Pliny places him under Darius Hystaspis, and Suidas identifies him as a follower of Zoroaster. He came to Greece with Xerxes around 480 B.C., and he seems to be the Otanes mentioned by Herodotus. In his book, called the Octateuchus, he taught the same beliefs about the Deity as Zoroaster.”

Having quoted thus far from Newton, it seems proper to subjoin the following extract from the “Ancient Universal History:”—“In the reign of Gushtasp” (the oriental name of Darius Hystaspis), “King of Persia, flourished a celebrated astrologer, whose name was Gjamasp, surnamed Al Hakim, or the wise. The most credible writers say that he was the brother of King Gushtasp, and his confidant and chief minister. He is said to have predicted the coming of the Messiah; and some treatises under his name are yet current in the East. Dr. Thomas Hyde, in speaking of this philosopher, cites a passage from a very ancient author, having before told us that this author asserted there had been among the Persians ten doctors of such consummate wisdom as the whole world could not boast the like. He then gives the author’s words: ‘Of these, the sixth was Gjamasp, an astrologer, who was counsellor to Hystaspis. He is the author of a book intitled Judicia Gjamaspis, in which is contained his judgment on the planetary conjunctions. And therein he gave notice that Jesus should appear; that Mohammed should be born; that the Magian religion should be abolished, etc.; nor did any astrologer ever come up to him.’ (E. lib. Mucj. apud Hyde.) Of this book there is an Arabic version, the title of which runs thus: The Book of the Philosopher Gjamasp, containing Judgments on the Grand Conjunctions of the Planets, and on the Events produced by them. This version was made by Lali; the title he gave it in Arabic was Al Keranai, and he published it a.d. 1280. In the preface of his version it is said that, after the times of Zoroaster, or Zerdusht, reigned Gushtasp, the son of Lohrasp,†† a very powerful prince; and that in his reign flourished in the city of Balch, on the borders of Chorassan, a most excellent philosopher, whose name was Gjamasp, author of this book; wherein is contained an account of all the great conjunctions of the planets which had happened before his time, and which were to happen in succeeding ages; and wherein the appearances of new religions and the rise of new monarchies were exactly set down. This author, throughout his whole piece, styles Zerdusht, or Zoroaster, our Prophet. (D’Herbelot, Bibl. Orient. Art. Gjamasp.) The notion of predicting the rise and progress of religions from the grand conjunctions of the planets, has been likewise propagated in our western parts: Cardan was a bold assertor of this doctrine. The modern Persians are still great votaries of astrology, and although they distinguish between it and astronomy, they have but one word to express astronomer and astrologer; viz. manegjim, which is exactly equivalent to the Greek word αςτρολογος. Of all the provinces of Persia, Chorassan is the most famous for producing great men in that art; and in Chorassan there is a little town called Genabed, and in that town a certain family which, for 6 or 700 years past, has produced the most famous astrologers in Persia; and the king’s astrologer is always either a native of Genabed, or one brought up there. Sir John Chardin affirms that the appointments in his time for these sages amounted to six millions of French livres per annum.—Albumazar of Balch scholar of Alkendi, a Jew, who was professor of judicial astrology at Bagdad, in the Caliphate of Almamoum††† became wonderfully famous. He wrote expressly from the Persian astrologers, and it may be from the works of Gjamasp, since he also reports a prediction of the coming of Christ in the following words: viz. ‘In the sphere of Persia, saith Aben Ezra, there ariseth upon the face of the sign Virgo a beautiful maiden, she holding two ears of corn in her hand, and a child in her arm: she feedeth him, and giveth him suck, &c. This maiden,’ saith Albumazar, ‘we call Adrenedefa, the pure Virgin. She bringeth up a child in a place which is called Abrie (the Hebrew land), and the child’s name is called Eisi (Jesus).’ This made Albertus Magnus believe that our Saviour, Christ, was born in Virgo; and therefore Cardinal Alliac, erecting our Lord’s nativity by his description, casteth this sign into the horoscope. But the meaning of Albumazar was, saith Friar Bacon, that the said virgin was born, the Sun being in that sign, and so it is noted in the calendar; and that she was to bring up her son in the Hebrew land. (Mr. John Gregory’s Notes on various Passages of Scripture.)”—Ancient Universal History, vol. 5, pp. 415 to 419.

Having quoted so far from Newton, it seems appropriate to add the following excerpt from the “Ancient Universal History:”—“During the reign of Gushtasp” (the eastern name for Darius Hystaspis), “King of Persia, there was a renowned astrologer named Gjamasp, also known as Al Hakim, or the wise. Most credible writers say he was the brother of King Gushtasp and his trusted advisor and chief minister. He is said to have predicted the coming of the Messiah; and some writings attributed to him are still recognized in the East. Dr. Thomas Hyde, in discussing this philosopher, cites a passage from a very ancient author, who previously mentioned that among the Persians, there were ten doctors of such extraordinary wisdom that the whole world could not boast of their equals. He then gives the author’s words: ‘Of these, the sixth was Gjamasp, an astrologer, who was an advisor to Hystaspis. He authored a book titled Judicia Gjamaspis, which contains his insights on planetary conjunctions. In it, he predicted the appearance of Jesus, the birth of Mohammed, the abolition of the Magian religion, and more; no astrologer ever matched his brilliance.’ (E. lib. Mucj. apud Hyde.) There is an Arabic version of this book, titled The Book of the Philosopher Gjamasp, containing Judgments on the Grand Conjunctions of the Planets, and the Events they produce. This version was created by Lali, who named it Al Keranai in Arabic, and published it AD 1280. In the preface of his version, it’s noted that after the times of Zoroaster, or Zerdusht, Gushtasp, the son of Lohrasp, reigned as a very powerful prince; and in his time, a remarkable philosopher named Gjamasp emerged in the city of Balch, on the borders of Chorassan, authoring this book, which details all the major planetary conjunctions that occurred before his time and those expected in later ages; and it accurately notes the emergence of new religions and the rise of new monarchies. Throughout his entire work, this author refers to Zerdusht, or Zoroaster, as our Prophet. (D’Herbelot, Bibl. Orient. Art. Gjamasp.) The idea of predicting the rise and development of religions based on the grand conjunctions of the planets has also appeared in our Western regions: Cardan was a strong supporter of this doctrine. Modern Persians continue to be great followers of astrology, and although they differentiate between astrology and astronomy, they use one word for both astronomer and astrologer; that is, manegjim, which perfectly matches the Greek term αςτρολογος. Of all the provinces of Persia, Chorassan is the most renowned for producing great figures in this field; there is a small town in Chorassan called Genabed, home to a family that has produced the most famous astrologers in Persia for the past 600 or 700 years; the king’s astrologer is always either a native of Genabed or trained there. Sir John Chardin claims that the salaries for these scholars in his time totaled six million French livres per year.—Albumazar of Balch, a student of Alkendi, a Jewish professor of judicial astrology in Baghdad during the Caliphate of Almamoum, became incredibly famous. He wrote specifically from the Persian astrologers, possibly from the works of Gjamasp, as he also reports a prediction of Christ’s coming with these words: ‘In the sphere of Persia, Aben Ezra says, there arises on the sign Virgo a beautiful maiden, holding two ears of corn in her hand, and a child in her arm: she nourishes him, and gives him suck, etc. This maiden,’ says Albumazar, ‘we call Adrenedefa, the pure Virgin. She raises a child in a place called Abrie (the Hebrew land), and the child is named Eisi (Jesus).’ This led Albertus Magnus to believe that our Saviour, Christ, was born in Virgo; therefore, Cardinal Alliac, referring to our Lord’s birth by his description, included this sign in the horoscope. However, the meaning of Albumazar, according to Friar Bacon, was that the aforementioned virgin was born with the Sun in that sign, as noted in the calendar; and that she was to raise her son in the Hebrew land. (Mr. John Gregory’s Notes on various Passages of Scripture.)”—Ancient Universal History, vol. 5, pp. 415 to 419.

† It is maintained by astrologers, that the planets, having been observed to produce certain effects, were consequently dedicated to the several personages whose names they respectively bear.

† Astrologers believe that the planets, having been observed to create certain effects, were consequently assigned to the various figures whose names they carry.

†† This caliph reigned in the earlier part of the 9th century, and caused Ptolemy’s Great Construction to be translated into Arabic, as hereafter mentioned.

†† This caliph ruled in the early part of the 9th century and had Ptolemy’s Great Construction translated into Arabic, as mentioned later.

††† This seems to be a mistake of the Arabian author, for Gushtasp was identical with Darius Hystaspis, and Lohrasp (otherwise Cyaxares) was father of Darius the Mede, who was overcome by Cyrus, 536 b.c.—See Newton.

††† This appears to be an error by the Arabian author, as Gushtasp was the same person as Darius Hystaspis, and Lohrasp (also known as Cyaxares) was the father of Darius the Mede, who was defeated by Cyrus in 536 B.C.—See Newton.

[2] To this view of the case, the following remarks seem not inapplicable: they are taken from a periodical work of deserved reputation:—

[2] To this perspective on the case, the following comments appear relevant: they are sourced from a well-respected publication:—

“The study of astrology itself, as professing to discover, by celestial phenomena, future mutations in the elements and terrestrial bodies, ought, perhaps, not to be despised.† The theory of the tides, for example, is altogether an astrological doctrine, and, long before the days of Sir Isaac Newton, was as well understood as it is at this moment. The correspondence alleged by the ancient physicians to exist between the positions of the Moon and the stages of various diseases, is so far from being rejected by the modern faculty, that it has been openly maintained.”†† The writer then recounts sundry incidents, asserted by the astrologers to be dependent on the Moon, and he adds these words: “The fact of these allegations might be so easily ascertained, that it is surprising they should still be pronounced incredible, and denied rather than contradicted.”

“The study of astrology, which claims to uncover future changes in elements and earthly bodies through celestial events, shouldn’t be dismissed outright. For instance, the theory of tides is entirely based on astrological principles, and long before Sir Isaac Newton, it was understood just as well as it is today. The supposed link between the Moon’s position and the progression of various diseases, which ancient doctors talked about, isn’t rejected by modern medical professionals; in fact, it’s still openly discussed.” The writer then shares several incidents that astrologers attributed to the Moon, adding, “The truth behind these claims could be so easily verified that it's surprising they are still deemed unbelievable and denied rather than contradicted.”

† “Sir Christopher Heydon’s Defence of Astrology, p. 2, edit. 1603.”

† “Sir Christopher Heydon’s Defense of Astrology, p. 2, edit. 1603.”

†† “Dr. Mead on the Influence of the Sun and Moon upon Human Bodies. See also Edinb. Rev. vol. 12, p. 36—Balfour on Sol-Lunar Influence.” Blackwood’s Magazine for Dec., 1821, Part 2, No. 59.

†† “Dr. Mead on the Influence of the Sun and Moon on Human Bodies. See also Edinb. Rev. vol. 12, p. 36—Balfour on Sol-Lunar Influence.” Blackwood’s Magazine for Dec., 1821, Part 2, No. 59.

[3] In the 51st No. of the Quarterly Review, Art. “Astrology and Alchymy,” the following observations are made:—

[3] In the 51st issue of the Quarterly Review, Art. “Astrology and Alchymy,” the following observations are made:—

“Certainly, if man may ever found his glory on the achievements of his wisdom, he may reasonably exult in the discoveries of astronomy; but the knowledge which avails us has been created solely by the absurdities which it has extirpated. Delusion became the basis of truth. Horoscopes and nativities have taught us to place the planet in its sure and silent path; and the acquirements which, of all others, now testify the might of the human intellect, derived their origin from weakness and credulity” (p. 181). Again; “Astrology, like alchymy, derives no protection from sober reason; yet, with all its vanity and idleness, it was not a corrupting weakness. Tokens, predictions, prognostics, possess a psychological reality. All events are but the consummation of preceding causes, clearly felt, but not distinctly apprehended. When the strain is sounded, the most untutored listener can tell that it will end with the key-note, though he cannot explain why each successive bar must at last lead to the concluding chord. The omen embodies the presentiment, and receives its consistency from our hopes or fears.” (p. 208).

“Surely, if humans can ever take pride in their achievements through wisdom, they can rightfully celebrate the discoveries of astronomy; however, the knowledge that benefits us has been developed only through the foolishness it has eliminated. Delusion formed the foundation of truth. Horoscopes and birth charts have shown us how to place the planet in its steady and quiet course; and the knowledge that, above all else, demonstrates the power of human intellect originated from weakness and gullibility” (p. 181). Again; “Astrology, like alchemy, doesn't get any support from sound reasoning; yet, despite its vanity and pointless nature, it wasn’t a harmful flaw. Signs, predictions, and forecasts have a psychological reality. All events are just the result of prior causes, clearly sensed but not fully understood. When a tune is played, even the most untrained listener can tell it will end on the main note, even if they can't explain why each successive measure must ultimately lead to the final chord. The omen captures the intuition, gaining its meaning from our hopes or fears.” (p. 208).

It may, perhaps, be difficult to assent to all of the propositions involved in these extracts; but there are among them some which are clearly unquestionable.

It might be a bit hard to agree with all the ideas in these excerpts, but there are some that are definitely beyond doubt.

[4] This edition was printed in double columns, one containing Proclus’s Greek Paraphrase, the other the Latin translation of Leo Allatius; and William Lilly (no light authority in these matters) thus wrote of it in the year 1647: “Indeed Ptolemy hath been printed in folio, in quarto, in octavo, in sixteens: that lately printed at Leyden” (where cthe Elzevirs were established) “I conceive to be most exact; it was performed by Allatius.” To the said edition is prefixed an anonymous address to the reader, in Latin, and to the following effect:—

[4] This edition was printed in two columns, one featuring Proclus’s Greek Paraphrase and the other the Latin translation by Leo Allatius. William Lilly (a respected authority in these matters) wrote about it in 1647: “Ptolemy has been printed in folio, quarto, octavo, and sixteens: the one recently printed in Leyden” (where the Elzevirs operated) “I believe to be the most accurate; it was done by Allatius.” This edition includes an anonymous address to the reader in Latin, which states the following:—

“I have reckoned it part of my duty to give you, benevolent reader, some short information as to the publication of this little work, which, having hitherto existed only in Greek,† is now, in its Latin dress, accessible to the curiosity of all persons. This Paraphrase of Proclus on the Tetrabiblos of Ptolemy was translated a few years ago by Leo Allatius, a Greek by birth, eminently skilled in the learning of his own nation, as well as in Latin literature, and already celebrated for other writings in both languages. He lives, I have understood, in Rome, in the family of Cardinal Biscia, and holds some office in the Vatican Library. He undertook his present work, however, for his own private gratification, and that of certain friends; but when writings compiled with this view have once quitted their author’s hands, it will often happen that they have also, at the same time, escaped his control. So this offspring of Allatius, having emerged from Rome, arrived at Venice, from whence it was forwarded to me by a certain great personage of illustrious rank, in order that I might cause it to be printed. The names of Ptolemy and Proclus, so celebrated among mathematicians and philosophers, besides the subject of the work itself, seemed to me a sufficient warrant for committing it to the press. Whereupon I delayed not to avail myself of the advantages I possessed in having access to our excellent and most accurate typographers, the Elzevirs, and I earnestly solicited them to publish it: they, in their love for the commonwealth of letters, took upon themselves the charge of printing it in the form you see. You will learn from it, inquisitive Reader, how much power the stars have over the atmosphere and all sublunary things: for the stars, and those brighter bodies of heaven, must not be imagined to be idle. The whole doctrine of the stars is not, however, here treated of, but only that distinct part of it which the Greeks call judicial and prognostic, and which, while confined within certain limits is as entertaining as it is useful, and is partly considered to be agreeable to nature. But should it pretend to subject to the skies such things as do not depend thereupon, and should it invite us to foresee by the stars such things as are above the weakness of our apprehension, it will assuredly deserve to be reprehended as a vain and empty art, which has been demonstrated in many learned books by the great Picus of Mirandola. The Chaldæans, Genethliacs, and Planetarians, have been always held in disrepute, because they professed to know not only more than they actually did know, but also more than is allowed to man to know. Even Ptolemy, while he employs himself in his present work upon the Doctrine of Nativities, is scarcely free from the charge of superstition and vanity: perhaps, in a Pagan, this may be forgiven; but it is hardly to be tolerated, that persons professing Christianity should be led away by such an empty study, in which there is no solid utility, and the whole pleasure of which is puerile. Finally, I warn you that some persons doubt whether this was really produced by Ptolemy††: nevertheless, it has certainly appeared to Porphyry and Proclus (who were doubtless great philosophers, although hostile to the Christian faith) to be worthy of receiving elucidation by their Commentaries upon it.††† Peruse it, however, friendly reader, with caution, having first shaken off the weakness of credulity, for the sinew of wisdom is not to believe rashly. Farewell.”

“I felt it was my duty to share some brief information with you, kind reader, about the publication of this little work, which, until now, existed only in Greek, and is now, in its Latin form, available to the curiosity of everyone. This Paraphrase of Proclus on Ptolemy’s Tetrabiblos was translated a few years ago by Leo Allatius, a Greek by birth, who is highly skilled in his own nation’s knowledge as well as Latin literature, and is already well-known for other writings in both languages. I’ve heard that he lives in Rome, in the household of Cardinal Biscia, and holds some position at the Vatican Library. However, he took on this project for his own enjoyment and that of a few friends; but once writings meant for such purposes leave the author’s hands, they often escape his control. So this work of Allatius, having come out of Rome, reached Venice, from where it was sent to me by a certain distinguished personage of high rank, so that I could arrange for its printing. The names of Ptolemy and Proclus, both celebrated among mathematicians and philosophers, along with the subject of the work itself, seemed to me enough reason to get it published. I quickly took advantage of my access to our excellent and precise printers, the Elzevirs, and earnestly asked them to publish it; in their love for the literary community, they agreed to take on the task of printing it in the form you see. You will discover from it, curious Reader, the extent of the stars' influence over the atmosphere and all things beneath the moon: for the stars, and those brighter celestial bodies, should not be thought of as inactive. However, not the entire study of the stars is covered here, but only that specific part that the Greeks call judicial and prognostic, which, when kept within certain limits, is both entertaining and useful, and is somewhat aligned with nature. But if it tries to assert that it can control matters that don’t depend on the stars, or if it leads us to predict by the stars things that exceed our understanding, it certainly deserves criticism as a futile and empty art, as has been shown in many scholarly texts by the great Picus of Mirandola. The Chaldeans, Genethliacs, and Planetarians have always been looked down upon because they claimed to know not only more than they actually did but also more than is permissible for humans to know. Even Ptolemy, while working on this Doctrine of Nativities, is hardly free from charges of superstition and vanity: perhaps in a Pagan, this can be forgiven; but it’s hardly acceptable for those who profess Christianity to be led astray by such an empty pursuit, which offers no real benefit, and whose entire enjoyment is trivial. Lastly, I must warn you that some people question whether this was truly authored by Ptolemy; however, it has certainly seemed worthy to Porphyry and Proclus (who were undoubtedly great philosophers, albeit critical of the Christian faith) to receive further explanation through their Commentaries on it. Read it, though, dear reader, with caution, having first shaken off the tendency to believe too readily, for the essence of wisdom is to avoid rash belief. Farewell.”

In addition to the remarks made in the foregoing address regarding Leo Allatius, it may be observed that he was appointed Keeper of the Vatican Library by Pope Alexander VII, with whom he was in high favour. It is said of him, that he had a pen with which he had written Greek for forty years, and that he shed tears on losing it. Another story of him states, that the Pope had often urged him to take holy orders, that he might be advanced in the church, and one day asked him why he had not done so: “Because,” said Allatius, “I would be free to marry.”—“Why, then, do you not marry?”—“Because I would be free to take orders.”—Chalmer’s Biographical Dictionary.

In addition to the comments made in the previous speech about Leo Allatius, it’s worth noting that he was appointed Keeper of the Vatican Library by Pope Alexander VII, who was very much in his favor. It’s said that he had a pen with which he wrote in Greek for forty years and that he cried when he lost it. Another story about him mentions that the Pope often encouraged him to become a priest so he could advance in the church, and one day asked him why he hadn’t done it: “Because,” Allatius replied, “I would be free to marry.” —“Then why don’t you marry?” —“Because I would be free to take orders.”—Chalmer’s Biographical Dictionary.

† This assertion is applicable only to Proclus’s Paraphrase. There were several prior translations of the original Tetrabiblos in Latin and Arabic; and it appears by an extract from the Bibliotheca Græca of Fabricius (which will be found in a subsequent page), that a Latin version, done from the Arabic, was printed at Venice as early as the year 1493.

† This statement only applies to Proclus’s Paraphrase. There were several earlier translations of the original Tetrabiblos in Latin and Arabic; and it appears from an excerpt in Fabricius's Bibliotheca Græca (which can be found on a later page), that a Latin version, translated from the Arabic, was printed in Venice as early as 1493.

†† The reader is again referred to the extract from Fabricius (inserted in a subsequent page), containing that learned person’s account of this book among the other works of Ptolemy.

†† The reader is again directed to the excerpt from Fabricius (included on a later page), which includes that scholar’s description of this book alongside Ptolemy's other works.

††† Their Commentaries were printed at Basle, in 1559.

††† Their Commentaries were published in Basel in 1559.

[5] This translation from the Perugio press has been serviceable in presenting certain various readings; but it does not seem to possess any other peculiar merit. It professes to be a translation from the original text of Ptolemy; and so likewise does the translation printed at Basle, as above quoted.

[5] This translation from the Perugio press has been helpful in showing some different interpretations; however, it doesn’t appear to have any other notable value. It claims to be a translation from Ptolemy's original text, and the translation printed in Basle makes the same claim, as mentioned above.

[6] It appears by the printed works of this author, that he was named Didacus Placidus de Titis. He was a native of Bologna, by profession a monk, and was styled Mathematician to the Archduke Leopold William of Austria. He wrote in the earlier part of the 17th century, and his work, now cited, is considered to contain the most successful application of Ptolemy’s astrological rules to practice. The original is extremely scarce; but a new English edition, by Cooper, may be had of the Publishers of this work.

[6] According to the published works of this author, he was named Didacus Placidus de Titis. He was from Bologna, worked as a monk, and was known as the Mathematician to Archduke Leopold William of Austria. He wrote in the early part of the 17th century, and his work, now referenced, is considered to be the most effective application of Ptolemy’s astrological rules in practice. The original is very rare; however, a new English edition by Cooper is available from the publishers of this work.

[7] Printed at Basle, 1541.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Printed in Basel, 1541.

[8] Chalmer’s Biographical Dictionary.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Chalmer’s Biography Dictionary.

[9] In France, about the beginning of the 16th century, Oronce Finé, the Royal Reader, attempted, under the patronage of Francis I, to produce an astronomical clock, in which everything moved according to the principles of Ptolemy. It was kept, about fifty years ago, in the monastery of St. Geneviéve, at Paris. In Lilly’s Catalogue of Astrological Authors, Orontius Finæus is mentioned as the writer of a work on the twelve houses of heaven, printed in Paris, 1553.

[9] In France, around the start of the 16th century, Oronce Finé, the Royal Reader, tried to create an astronomical clock under the support of Francis I, where everything moved according to Ptolemy's principles. About fifty years ago, it was housed in the St. Geneviève monastery in Paris. In Lilly’s Catalogue of Astrological Authors, Orontius Finæus is noted as the author of a work on the twelve houses of heaven, published in Paris in 1553.

[10] Spectacle de la Nature.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Nature's Spectacle.

[11] The objection which has been urged against astrology, that the signs are continually moving from their positions, cannot invalidate this conclusion. That objection has, in fact, no real existence; for Ptolemy seems to have been aware of this motion of the signs, and has fully provided for it in the 25th Chapter of the 1st Book of the Tetrabiblos. From that chapter it is clear that the respective influences he ascribes to the twelve signs (or divisions of the zodiac) were considered by him as appurtenant to the places they occupied, and not to the stars of which they were composed. He has expressly and repeatedly declared that the point of the vernal equinox is ever the beginning of the zodiac, and that the 30 degrees following it ever retain the same virtue as that which he has in this work attributed to Aries, although the stars forming Aries may have quitted those degrees: the next 30 degrees are still be accounted as Taurus, and so of the rest. There is abundant proof throughout the Tetrabiblos, that Ptolemy considered the virtues of the constellations of the zodiac distinctly from those of the spaces they occupied.

[11] The argument against astrology, stating that the signs are constantly shifting from their original positions, doesn't undermine this conclusion. That argument doesn't really hold up; Ptolemy seemed to understand this movement of the signs and addressed it thoroughly in Chapter 25 of Book 1 of the Tetrabiblos. From that chapter, it’s clear that the influences he attributes to the twelve signs (or divisions of the zodiac) were linked to the positions they held, rather than to the stars they're made up of. He has explicitly stated several times that the point of the vernal equinox is always the start of the zodiac, and that the following 30 degrees maintain the same qualities as those he has assigned to Aries in this work, even if the stars that form Aries have moved from those degrees: the next 30 degrees are still considered Taurus, and so on for the others. There is plenty of evidence throughout the Tetrabiblos that Ptolemy viewed the qualities of the constellations of the zodiac as separate from the areas they occupied.

[12] The French say 813, but 827 is the date given by English chronologists.

[12] The French say 813, but English chronologists provide 827 as the date.

[13] This scientific man was a Mathurine Friar, and a professor in the University of Paris: he died in 1256. It is pointed out in the Edinburgh Review, No. 68, that he was a native of Yorkshire, and his real name John Holywood, euphonized, in Paris, into Sacrobosco.

[13] This scholar was a Mathurine Friar and a professor at the University of Paris; he passed away in 1256. The Edinburgh Review, No. 68, notes that he was originally from Yorkshire, and his real name was John Holywood, which was adapted in Paris to Sacrobosco.

[14] Chalmers.—The Tetrabiblos was among these works.

[14] Chalmers.—The Tetrabiblos was one of these works.

[15] To such readers as may be curious to know in what manner this book was promulgated in Europe, after the revival of letters, the following extract from the Bibliotheca Græca of Fabricius will furnish information:—

[15] For those readers who might be interested in how this book was published in Europe after the revival of learning, the following excerpt from Fabricius's Bibliotheca Græca will provide information:—

“Lib. IV. Cap. XIV. §4. Τετραβιβλος, Συνταξις Μαθηματικη Quadripartitum, sive quatuor libri de apotelesmatibus et judiciis astrorum, ad Syrum (h). Græce primum editi a Joachimo Camerario, cum versione suâ duorum priorum librorum, et præcipuorum e reliquis locorum. Norimb. 1535, 4to.—Hinc cum versione Phil. Melancthonis, qui in præfat, ad Erasmum Ebnerum Senatorem Norimbergensem testatur se editionem Camerarii multis mendis purgasse, tum numeros in locis apheticis tam Græci quam Latini textus emendasse. Basil, 1553; 8vo.—Latine pridem verterat Ægidius Tebaldinus, sive latino-barbaré ex Hispanica versione, Alfonsi Castellæ Regis jussu, ex Arabico (i) confectâ. Vertit et Antonius Gogava, Lovan. 1548, 4to; Patavii, 1658, 12mo; Pragæ, 1610, 12mo. Commentario illustravit Hieron. Cardanus prioribus duobus libris Camerarii, posterioribus Gogavæ versione servatâ, Basil, 1554, fol.; 1579, fol.; Lugd. 1555, 8vo, et in Cardani opp.—Georgii Vallæ commentarius, anno 1502 editus, nihil aliud est, quam Latina versio scholiorum Græcorum, sive exegeseos jejunæ Demophili in tetrabiblon, quæ cum Porphyrii sive Antiochi isagoge, Græce et Latine, addita Hieron Wolfii versione, lucem vidit Basil. 1559, his scholiis Dorotheus allegatur, p. 48, 110, et 139; Cleopatra, p. 88; Porphyrius Philosophus, p. 169. Meminit et auctor Petosiridis ac Necepso, p. 112:—λεγει δε παλαιον τον Νεχεψω (ita leg, pro χεψω ut p. 112) και Πετοσιριν, ουτοι χαρ πρωτοι το δι αςρολογιας εχηπλωσαν προγνωςικον† Paraphrasin tetrabibli a Proclo concinnatam Græce edidit Melancthon, Basil. 1554, 8vo. Græce et Latine cum versione suâ Leo Allatius, Lugd. Batav. 1654,†† 8vo. Locum Ptolemæi e codice Græco MS. in collegio Corporis Christi Oxon, feliciter restituit Seldenus, p. 35 ad Marmora Arundeliana. Haly Heben Rodoan Arabis commentarium laudat Cardanus, cum Demophilo Latine editum.”

“Lib. IV. Cap. XIV. §4. Τετραβιβλος, Συνταξις Μαθηματικη Quadripartitum, or four books on the effects and judgments of the stars, for the Syrus (h). First published in Greek by Joachim Camerarius, with his translation of the first two books, and key passages from the others. Nuremberg, 1535, 4to.—Then with a translation by Phil. Melanchthon, who in the preface, to Erasmus Ebner, Senator of Nuremberg, states that he has edited Camerarius's edition to remove many errors, and has corrected the numerals in both the Greek and Latin texts in aphoristic locations. Basel, 1553; 8vo.—Previously translated into Latin by Ægidius Tebaldinus, or medieval Latin from the Spanish version, by order of King Alfonso of Castile, based on the Arabic (i). Also translated by Antonius Gogava, Leuven, 1548, 4to; Padua, 1658, 12mo; Prague, 1610, 12mo. It was clarified with commentary by Hieron. Cardanus on the first two books of Camerarius, maintaining Gogava's version for the latter books, Basel, 1554, fol.; 1579, fol.; Lyon, 1555, 8vo, and in Cardano's works.—The commentary by Georgius Valla, published in 1502, is merely a Latin translation of Greek glosses, or a bare interpretation of Demophilus on the four books, which, along with Porphyry's or Antiochus's introduction, in both Greek and Latin, was accompanied by Hieron Wolfius's translation, published in Basel, 1559. In these glosses, Dorotheus is referenced, p. 48, 110, and 139; Cleopatra, p. 88; Porphyry the Philosopher, p. 169. The author also mentions Petosiris and Nechepsos, p. 112:—λεγει δε παλαιον τον Νεχεψω (read as χεψω as on p. 112) και Πετοσιριν, ουτοι χαρ πρωτοι το δι αςρολογιας εχηπλωσαν προγνωςικον† A paraphrase of the four books made by Proclus was published in Greek by Melanchthon, Basel, 1554, 8vo. In Greek and Latin with his own translation, Leo Allatius, Leiden, 1654,†† 8vo. Selden successfully restored the passage of Ptolemy from the Greek MS. in the Corpus Christi College, Oxford, p. 35 to the Arundelian Marbles. Haly Heben Roduan praised the commentary from the Arab, which was published by Cardanus along with the Latin version of Demophilus.”

“(h) Schol. Græc.—Προσφωνει τω Συρω ο Πτολεμαιος το βιβλιον, προς ον και τας αλλας αντου πασας πραγματειας προσφωνησεν. Λεγουσι δε τινες ως πεπλαςαι αυτο το του Συρω ονομα. Αλλοι δε οτι ον πεπλαςαι, αλλ’ ιατρος ην ουτος αχθεις και δια τουτων των μαθηματων.”

“(h) Schol. Græc.—Ptolemy addresses the book to Syria, to which he has also addressed all his other works. Some say that this is the name of the one from Syria. Others say that it is indeed the name, but this person was a doctor who became involved with these subjects.”

“(i) Selden. Uxor Hebr. p. 342. Cæterum de Alphonsi Regis curâ in promovenda Arabica Quadripartiti versione, vide, si placet, Nic: Antonium in Bibl. veteri Hispana, t. 2, p. 55, vel Acta Erud. A. 1697, p. 302. Latino versio ex Arabico facta lucem vidit Venet, 1493, fol. Viderit porro Gassendus qui in Philosophia Epicuri, ubi contra Astrologos disputat. t. 2, p. 501, contendit tetrabiblon indignum esse Ptolemæi genio et subdititum. Equidem Jo. Pico judice, l. 1, contra Astrologos, p. 285, Ptolemæus malorum sive Apotelesmaticorum est optimus.”

“(i) Selden. Uxor Hebr. p. 342. By the way, regarding King Alphonso's efforts to promote the Arabic version of the Quadripartite, see Nic: Antonium in Bibl. veteri Hispana, t. 2, p. 55, or Acta Erud. A. 1697, p. 302 if you please. The Latin version translated from Arabic was published in Venice, 1493, fol. Also, check Gassendus who, in his work on Epicurus’ philosophy, where he debates against astrologers, t. 2, p. 501, argues that the Tetrabiblon is unworthy of Ptolemy's genius and is subordinate. Indeed, according to Jo. Pico, in l. 1, against astrologers, p. 285, Ptolemy is the best of the malorum or Apotelesmaticorum.”

† “Nechepsos and Petosiris are anciently spoken of, for they first explained prognostication by Astrology.”

† “Nechepsos and Petosiris have been talked about for a long time because they were the first to explain forecasting using Astrology.”

†† This was perhaps a reprint of the edition of 1635, from which the present translation has been made; unless there may have been an error of the press in stating 1654 instead of 1635, which seems probable, as the edition of 1635 is unnoticed by Fabricius.

†† This might have been a reprint of the 1635 edition, which is the source of the current translation; unless there was a printing mistake listing 1654 instead of 1635, which seems likely since Fabricius doesn't mention the 1635 edition.

[16] It will be seen by the preceding note, that Proclus’s Paraphrase of the Tetrabiblos should properly be considered as superior to the other readings of that book; since it appears, on the authority of Fabricius, that Melancthon, after having been at the pains of correcting and republishing, in 1553 (with his own emendations), the edition of Camerarius, containing the reputed original text, still deemed it advisible, in the following year, to edit Proclus’s Paraphrase. This Paraphrase must, therefore, necessarily have had claims to his attention not found in the text he had previously edited.†

[16] As noted earlier, Proclus’s Paraphrase of the Tetrabiblos is considered to be better than other versions of that book. According to Fabricius, Melancthon went through the effort of correcting and republishing the 1553 edition by Camerarius, which included the supposed original text, but thought it was still important to edit Proclus’s Paraphrase the following year. This indicates that the Paraphrase had merits that were not present in the text he had edited before.†

† “Ptolemy addresses the book to Syrus, to whom he has also addressed all his other treatises. Some say that this name of Syrus was feigned; others, that it was not feigned, but that he was a physician, and educated in these sciences.”

† “Ptolemy dedicates the book to Syrus, to whom he has also dedicated all his other works. Some people say that the name Syrus is made up; others say it’s real and that he was a physician educated in these fields.”

[17] Chalmer’s Biographical Dictionary.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Chalmer’s Biography Dictionary.

[18] It will, of course, be understood that this Commentary is distinct from his Paraphrase, now translated.

[18] It should be clear that this Commentary is different from his Paraphrase, which has now been translated.

[19] The Almagest, or Magna Constructio.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ The Almagest, or *Great Construction*.

[20] The following extract from an old geographical work, framed on the rules of Ptolemy, explains the system on which this action of the æther is made to depend:—

[20] The following excerpt from an old geographic work, based on Ptolemy's principles, explains the system that this action of the ether relies on:—

“Chap. 2. The world is divided into two parts, the elemental region and the æthereal. The elemental region is constantly subject to alteration, and comprises the four elements; earth, water, air and fire. The æthereal region, which philosophers call the fifth essence, encompasses, by its concavity, the elemental; its substance remains always unvaried, and consists of ten spheres; of which the greater one always spherically environs the next smaller, and so on in consecutive order. First, therefore, around the sphere of fire, God, the creator of the world, placed the sphere of the Moon, then that of Mercury, then that of Venus, then that of the Sun, and afterwards those of Mars, of Jupiter, and of Saturn. Each of these spheres, however, contains but one star: and these stars, in passing through the zodiac, always struggle against the primum mobile, or the motion of the tenth sphere; they are also entirely luminous. In the next place follows the firmament, which is the eighth or starry sphere, and which trembles or vibrates (trepidat) in two small circles at the beginning of Aries and Libra (as placed in the ninth sphere); this motion is called by astronomers the motion of the access and recess of the fixed stars.” (Probably in order to account for the procession of the equinoxes.) “This is surrounded by the ninth sphere, called the chrystalline or watery heaven, because no star is discovered in it. Lastly, the primum mobile, styled also the tenth sphere, encompasses all the before-mentioned æthereal spheres, and is continually turned upon the poles of the world, by one revolution in twenty-four hours, from the east through the meridian to the west, again coming round to the east. At the same time, it rolls all the inferior spheres round with it, by its own force; and there is no star in it. Against this primum mobile, the motion of the other spheres, running from the west through the meridian to the east, contends. Whatever is beyond this, is fixed and immovable, and the professors of our orthodox faith affirm it to be the empyrean heaven which God inhabits with the elect.”—Cosmographia of Peter Apianus (named Benewitz), dedicated to the Archbishop of Salzburg, edited by Gemma Frisius, and printed at Antwerp 1574.

“Chap. 2. The world is split into two parts: the elemental region and the ethereal. The elemental region is always changing and consists of the four elements: earth, water, air, and fire. The ethereal region, which philosophers refer to as the fifth essence, surrounds the elemental region; its substance is always the same and consists of ten spheres, with each larger sphere encompassing the one smaller than it, in a sequential order. First, around the sphere of fire, God, the creator of the world, placed the sphere of the Moon, followed by Mercury, Venus, the Sun, then Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn. Each of these spheres contains only one star, and as they move through the zodiac, they constantly struggle against the primum mobile, or the motion of the tenth sphere; they are also completely luminous. Next comes the firmament, which is the eighth or starry sphere, and it shakes or vibrates (trepidat) in two small circles at the beginning of Aries and Libra (as positioned in the ninth sphere); this movement is referred to by astronomers as the motion of the access and recess of the fixed stars.” (Probably to account for the procession of the equinoxes.) “This is surrounded by the ninth sphere, known as the crystalline or watery heaven, because no stars are seen in it. Lastly, the primum mobile, also called the tenth sphere, surrounds all the aforementioned ethereal spheres and continuously rotates around the world's poles, completing one revolution in twenty-four hours, moving from the east through the meridian to the west, then returning to the east. At the same time, it rolls all the lower spheres with it, by its own force; and there are no stars in it. Against this primum mobile, the movement of the other spheres, moving from the west through the meridian to the east, pushes back. Whatever exists beyond this is fixed and unmovable, and those who adhere to our orthodox faith declare it to be the empyrean heaven where God resides with the elect.”—Cosmographia of Peter Apianus (named Benewitz), dedicated to the Archbishop of Salzburg, edited by Gemma Frisius, and printed at Antwerp 1574.

[21] It will be recollected that the Ptolemaic astronomy attributes motion and a regular course to those stars which we now call fixed, but which the Greeks merely termed απλανεις, undeviating.

[21] It can be remembered that Ptolemaic astronomy assigns motion and a steady path to the stars that we now refer to as fixed, but which the Greeks simply called απλανεις, undeviating.

[22] There seems reason to suppose that this was a favourite speculation among the ancients. In Scipio’s Dream, as related by Cicero, the phantom of his illustrious grandfather is made to speak of this entire return of all the celestial bodies to some original position which they once held, as being the completion of the revolution of one great universal year: and the phantom adds, “but I must acquaint you that not one-twentieth part of that great year has been yet accomplished.”

[22] It seems likely that this was a popular idea among the ancients. In Scipio’s Dream, as described by Cicero, the spirit of his distinguished grandfather discusses the complete return of all the celestial bodies to a position they once occupied, referring to it as the fulfillment of one great universal year. The spirit adds, “but I must let you know that not even one-twentieth of that great year has been completed yet.”

This quotation is from memory, and perhaps may not be verbally correct.

This quote is from memory and might not be word-for-word accurate.

[23] In this passage the author seems to have anticipated, and exposed the absurdity of an argument now considered very forcible against astrology: viz. that “if the art were true, then any two individuals born under the same meridian, in the same latitude, and at the same moment of time, must have one and the same destiny; although one were born a prince, and the other a mendicant.” Such a monstrous conclusion is nowhere authorized by any astrological writer; it is, on the contrary, always maintained by all of them, that the worldly differences and distinctions, alluded to in the text, inevitably prevent this exact resemblance of destiny; and all that they presume to assert is, that, in their respective degrees, any two individuals, so born, will have a partial similarity in the leading features of their fate. Whether their assertion is uniformly borne out, I will not take upon me to determine, but it would be unfair not to subjoin the following fact:—

[23] In this passage, the author appears to have anticipated and highlighted the ridiculousness of a strong argument against astrology: that “if astrology were true, then any two people born at the same meridian, in the same latitude, and at the exact same moment, must share the same destiny; even if one was born a prince and the other a beggar.” Such an outrageous conclusion isn't supported by any astrologer; rather, they all consistently argue that the social differences mentioned in the text prevent exactly the same destiny. What they claim is that, to some extent, any two people born in that manner will have some similarities in the key aspects of their fate. Whether this claim is uniformly supported, I'm not in a position to decide, but it would be unfair not to add the following fact:—

In the newspapers of the month of February, 1820, the death of a Mr. Samuel Hemmings is noticed: it was stated that he had been an ironmonger, and prosperous in trade; that he was born on the 4th of June, 1738, at nearly the same moment as his late Majesty, and in the same parish of St. Martin’s-in-the-Fields; that he went into business for himself in October, 1760; that he married on the 8th September, 1761; and finally, after other events of his life had resembled those which happened to the late King, that he died on Saturday, the 29th January, 1820.

In the newspapers from February 1820, the death of a Mr. Samuel Hemmings was reported: it mentioned that he had been an ironmonger and successful in business; that he was born on June 4, 1738, around the same time as the late King, and in the same area of St. Martin’s-in-the-Fields; that he started his own business in October 1760; that he got married on September 8, 1761; and finally, after various events in his life mirrored those of the late King, he passed away on Saturday, January 29, 1820.

These coincidences are, at least, highly remarkable.

These coincidences are definitely quite striking.

[24] The Greek word for this, γοναι, though found in the Elzevir edition from which this translation is made, does not appear in other copies; the Basle edition of 1553 says merely, η τε τιμη και το αξιωμα, “honour and rank,” which is the sense also given in the Latin translation of Perugio, 1646, without any mention of “offspring.”

[24] The Greek word for this, γοναι, although found in the Elzevir edition from which this translation is made, doesn't appear in other copies; the Basle edition of 1553 simply states, η τε τιμη και το αξιωμα, “honour and rank,” which is the same meaning provided in the Latin translation by Perugio, 1646, without any reference to “offspring.”

[25] In allusion to the sympathetic powers anciently attributed to certain stones.

[25] Referring to the healing qualities that were once believed to be inherent in certain stones.

[26] Whalley, in translating this chapter, makes the following remark on this mention of the magnet: “However much later it was that the loadstone became known in Europe, what is mentioned of it in this chapter makes it evident that it was known in Ægypt, where Ptolemy lived, in his time.”—That worthy translator forgot (if indeed he ever knew) that the loadstone’s property of attracting iron was known to Thales, and commented on by Plato and Aristotle, all of whom lived some centuries, more or less, before Ptolemy. It is its polarity that was not known until the 11th or 12th century; and the French say that the earliest notice of that polarity is found in a poem of Guyot of Provence, who was at the Emperor Frederick’s Court at Mentz in 1181.—See the French Encyclopædia, &c.

[26] Whalley, while translating this chapter, makes the following comment about the mention of the magnet: “Regardless of how much later the loadstone was recognized in Europe, what’s mentioned in this chapter clearly shows that it was known in Egypt, where Ptolemy lived, during his time.” —That diligent translator overlooked (if he ever knew) that the loadstone’s ability to attract iron was recognized by Thales, and discussed by Plato and Aristotle, all of whom lived several centuries before Ptolemy. It was its polarity that wasn’t understood until the 11th or 12th century; and the French claim the earliest mention of that polarity can be found in a poem by Guyot of Provence, who was at Emperor Frederick’s Court in Mentz in 1181. —See the French Encyclopædia, &c.

[27] Respecting the effect here asserted to be produced on the magnet by garlick, I have found the following mention in a book called “The Gardener’s Labyrinth,” printed at London in 1586. “Here also I thought not to ouerpasse the maruellous discord of the adamant-stone and garlike, which the Greeks name to be an Antipatheia or naturall contrarietie betweene them; for such is the hatred or contrarietie between these two bodies (lacking both hearing and feeling), that the adamant rather putteth away, than draweth to it, iron, if the same afore be rubbed with garlike; as Plutarchus hath noted, and, after him, Claudius Ptolemæus. Which matter, examined by divers learned, and founde the contrarie, caused them to judge, that those skilful men (especially Ptolemie) ment the same to be done with the Egyptian Garlike; which Dioscorides wrote to be small garlike, and the same sweete in taste, possessing a bewtifull head, tending unto a purple colour. There be which attribute the same to Ophioscoridon, which Antonius Microphonius Biturix, a singular learned man, and wel practised in sundry skilles, uttered this approoued secrete to a friend whom he loued.”

[27] Regarding the effect that garlic is said to have on magnets, I found the following mention in a book called “The Gardener’s Labyrinth,” printed in London in 1586. “Here, I didn’t want to overlook the remarkable contradiction between the lodestone and garlic, which the Greeks refer to as Antipatheia or natural opposition between them; for such is the animosity or opposition between these two substances (which have neither hearing nor feeling) that the lodestone repels rather than attracts iron if the iron has been rubbed with garlic, as Plutarch noted, and later Claudius Ptolemy. This issue, examined by several scholars and found to be the opposite, led them to conclude that those knowledgeable individuals (especially Ptolemy) meant this to be the case with Egyptian garlic, which Dioscorides described as small garlic with a sweet taste, having a beautiful bulb that tends toward a purple color. Some attribute this to Ophioscoridon, which Antonius Microphonius Biturix, an exceptionally learned man well-versed in various fields, revealed as a well-known secret to a friend whom he cared for.”

In the same book, the “Ophioscoridon” is thus spoken of: “There is another wild garlike which the Greeks name Ophioscoridon; in English Ramsies; growing of the owne accord in the fallow fieldes.”

In the same book, the “Ophioscoridon” is described like this: “There is another wild garlic which the Greeks call Ophioscoridon; in English, Ramsies; growing on its own in the uncultivated fields.”

Cornelius Agrippa (according to the English translation) has stated that the presence of the diamond also neutralizes the attractive power of the magnet. But as that great magician was somewhat inclined to quibbling, it is not impossible that by the word he uses for “diamond” (viz. adamas) he may mean the adamant or loadstone; which would reduce his assertion merely to this, that one magnet will counteract another.

Cornelius Agrippa (according to the English translation) has said that the presence of the diamond also neutralizes the attractive power of the magnet. However, since that great magician was somewhat prone to quibbling, it's possible that by the term he uses for "diamond" (namely, adamas), he might actually be referring to the adamant or loadstone, which would simply mean that one magnet can counteract another.

[28] This seems to explain the origin of the old alliance between medicine and astrology, so universally preserved until almost within the last century.

[28] This appears to clarify the origin of the long-standing connection between medicine and astrology, which was widely maintained until just about the last century.

[29] It will be recollected that the Ptolemaic hypothesis considers the Sun as a planetary orb, in consequence of his apparent progress through the zodiac.

[29] It's worth remembering that the Ptolemaic theory views the Sun as a planetary body due to its observable movement through the zodiac.

[30] “Astronomers call the planets matutine, when, being oriental from the Sun, they are above the earth when he rises; and vespertine, when they set after him.” Moxon’s Mathematical Dictionary.

[30] “Astronomers refer to planets as matutine when they are positioned east of the Sun and are visible above the earth at sunrise, and vespertine when they set after the Sun.” Moxon’s Mathematical Dictionary.

[31] Whalley here appends the following note: “To this chapter may be properly added, that a planet is said to be diurnal, when, in a diurnal nativity, above the earth; and, in a nocturnal nativity, under the earth: but nocturnal, when, in a nocturnal nativity, above the earth; or, in a diurnal nativity, under the earth.”

[31] Whalley adds the following note: “A planet is considered diurnal when, in a diurnal birth, it is above the earth; and, in a nocturnal birth, it is below the earth. It's called nocturnal when, in a nocturnal birth, it is above the earth; or when, in a diurnal birth, it is below the earth.”

[32] Although all the positions mentioned in this paragraph are not applicable to Venus and Mercury, which can never rise at night, that is to say, at sunset, and although the author in the beginning of the chapter speaks only of the Moon and the three superior planets, there yet seems no reason why the orbits of Venus and Mercury should not be similarly divided by their inferior and superior conjunctions, and their greatest elongations.

[32] Although not all the positions mentioned in this paragraph apply to Venus and Mercury, since they can never be seen at night—meaning, at sunset—and even though the author starts the chapter by discussing only the Moon and the three outer planets, there doesn't seem to be any reason why the orbits of Venus and Mercury can't also be divided in a similar way by their inferior and superior conjunctions, as well as their greatest elongations.

The following is from Whalley: “The first station, in this chapter mentioned, is when a planet begins to be retrograde; and the second station when, from retrogradation, a planet becomes direct. They” (the planets) “begin to rise at night when in opposition to the Sun.”

The following is from Whalley: “The first station mentioned in this chapter is when a planet starts to go retrograde; and the second station is when a planet goes direct after being retrograde. They” (the planets) “begin to rise at night when they are opposite the Sun.”

[33] The little Torch; now known by the name of Aldebaran.

[33] The small Torch; now referred to as Aldebaran.

[34] Castor.

Castor.

[35] Pollux.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Pollux.

[36] Cor Leonis.

Cor Leonis.

[37] Called by the ancients χηλαι, Chelæ, or the claws of Scorpio; which sign they made to consist of 60 degrees, omitting Libra. Thus Virgil in the first Georgic, line 33, &c.

[37] Referred to by the ancients as χηλαι, Chelæ, or the claws of Scorpio; this sign was defined to cover 60 degrees, leaving out Libra. Thus Virgil in the first Georgic, line 33, &c.

Quo locus Erigonen inter, Chelasque sequentes
Panditur: ipse tibi jam brachia contrahit ardens
Scorpius, et cœli justâ plus parte reliquit.

Ovid, likewise, takes the following notice of Scorpio:—

Ovid also mentions Scorpio in the following way:—

Porrigit in spatium signorum membra duorum.
Met. 2, l. 198.

[38] Adams’s Treatise on the Globes calls this star “Kalb al Akrab, or the Scorpion’s heart,” and adds, that “the word Antares (if it is not a corruption) has no signification.” But it should be observed that Ptolemy states that this star partakes of the nature of Mars: it seems therefore not improbable that Antares may be a regular Greek word, compounded of αντι pro and αρης Mars, and signifying Mars’s deputy, or lieutenant, or one acting for Mars.

[38] Adams’s Treatise on the Globes refers to this star as “Kalb al Akrab, or the Scorpion’s heart,” and notes that “the word Antares (if it isn’t a corruption) has no meaning.” However, it’s important to note that Ptolemy mentions this star has qualities of Mars: therefore, it’s quite possible that Antares is a legitimate Greek word, made up of αντι pro and αρης Mars, meaning Mars’s deputy, or lieutenant, or one acting for Mars.

[39] Salmon, in his “Horæ Mathematicæ, or Soul of Astrology” (printed by Dawks, 1679) divides each sign of the zodiac into six faces of five degrees each, “because that in every sign there are various stars of differing natures”; and he gives a particular description to each face, depending on its ascension or culmination. This seems an attempt to adapt Ptolemy’s signification of the several stars, composing the different signs, to some general rule or mode of judgment: but it does not merit the implicit assent of astrologers. It is understood that Salmon was not the inventor of this division of the signs into faces, but that it came originally from the Arabian schools.

[39] Salmon, in his “Horæ Mathematicæ, or Soul of Astrology” (printed by Dawks, 1679), divides each zodiac sign into six sections of five degrees each, “because in every sign there are various stars of different natures”; and he provides a specific description for each section based on its ascension or culmination. This seems like an attempt to align Ptolemy’s meanings of the various stars that make up the different signs with a general rule or method of judgment: but it doesn’t deserve the unquestioning acceptance of astrologers. It is known that Salmon was not the originator of this division of the signs into sections, as it originally came from the Arabian schools.

[40] Canis Minor.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Canis Minor.

[41] “Of the fixed stars in general,” Whalley says, “Those of the greatest magnitude are the most efficacious; and those in, or near, the ecliptic, more powerful than those more remote from it. Those with north latitude and declination affect us most. Those in the zenith, influence more than others, more remote. Likewise such as are in partial conjunction with, or in the antiscions of any planets, or which rise and set, or culminate with any planet, or are beheld by any planet, have an increase of power: but of themselves the fixed stars emit no rays.”

[41] “Talking about fixed stars in general,” Whalley says, “the largest ones are the most effective; and those located in or near the ecliptic are more powerful than those farther away. Stars with north latitude and declination have the greatest impact on us. Those in the zenith influence us more than others that are farther away. Similarly, those that are in partial conjunction with, or in the antiscions of any planets, or that rise and set, or culminate with any planet, or are observed by any planet, have increased power: however, fixed stars on their own emit no rays.”

[42] This sentence shows the futility of the objection raised against astrology (and mentioned in the Preface to this translation) that the signs have changed and are changing places. It is clear from this sentence that Ptolemy ascribes to the 30 degrees after the vernal equinox, that influence which he has herein mentioned to belong to Aries; to the next 30 degrees, the influence herein said to belong to Taurus; and so of the rest of the zodiac. We should rather say that the stars have changed places, than that the parts of heaven, in which they were once situated, have done so. Ptolemy himself seems to have foreseen this groundless objection of the moderns, and has written, in the 25th chapter of this book, what ought completely to have prevented it. It has certainly been one of the misfortunes of astrology to be attacked by people entirely ignorant of its principles.

[42] This sentence illustrates the pointless objection raised against astrology (mentioned in the Preface to this translation) that the signs have changed and are continuing to change positions. It is clear from this sentence that Ptolemy attributes to the 30 degrees after the vernal equinox the influence he attributes to Aries; to the next 30 degrees, the influence he links to Taurus; and so on for the rest of the zodiac. We should say that the stars have changed positions, rather than that the areas of the sky where they were once located have changed. Ptolemy himself seems to have anticipated this baseless objection from modern critics and has written, in the 25th chapter of this book, what should have completely countered it. Unfortunately, astrology has often faced attacks from those who are completely unaware of its principles.

[43] In other words, the Sun then begins to diminish his declination, which, at the first points of the said signs, is at its greatest amount.

[43] In other words, the Sun then starts to reduce its declination, which, at the initial points of the mentioned signs, is at its highest point.

[44] Whalley, in his note upon this chapter, seems to have been surprised that no mention is made here by Ptolemy of the conjunction; but he overlooked the fact that the chapter treats only of parts of the zodiac configurated with each other; and that it was not possible for Ptolemy to conceive how any part could be configurated with itself. It is, therefore, by no means wonderful that the conjunction is not inserted here along with the rest of the aspects; although it is frequently adverted to in subsequent chapters, and its efficacy particularly described.

[44] Whalley, in his note on this chapter, seems surprised that Ptolemy doesn't mention the conjunction; however, he overlooked the fact that this chapter only discusses parts of the zodiac that are configured with each other. Ptolemy likely couldn’t conceive of a part being configured with itself. So, it’s not surprising that the conjunction isn’t included here along with the other aspects, even though it is mentioned frequently in later chapters, where its effectiveness is specifically described.

[45] From the tenor of this chapter it was formerly doubted whether the author intended to admit in his theory only zodiacal aspects, and to reject those which are called mundane; but Placidus has referred to the 4th Chapter of the 8th Book of the Almagest (which will be found in the Appendix to this translation) to prove that Ptolemy distinctly taught two kinds of aspect; one in the zodiac and one in the world. Whalley quotes the opinion of Placidus, which he says is farther confirmed by the 12th Chapter of the 3rd Book of this very treatise, where it is stated that the ascendant and the eleventh house are in sextile to each other; the ascendant and the mid-heaven in quartile; the ascendant and the ninth house in trine; and the ascendant and the occidental angle in opposition; all which certainly seems to be applicable to mundane aspects in particular.

[45] In the context of this chapter, it was previously unclear whether the author meant to include only zodiacal aspects in his theory while dismissing the ones known as mundane. However, Placidus referenced the 4th Chapter of the 8th Book of the Almagest (which can be found in the Appendix to this translation) to demonstrate that Ptolemy clearly taught about two types of aspects: one in the zodiac and another in the world. Whalley mentions Placidus’s viewpoint, which he claims is further supported by the 12th Chapter of the 3rd Book of this very treatise, where it’s noted that the ascendant and the eleventh house are in sextile to one another; the ascendant and the mid-heaven are in quartile; the ascendant and the ninth house are in trine; and the ascendant and the occidental angle are in opposition, all of which definitely seems to be particularly relevant to mundane aspects.

[46] Whalley has a very lengthy note upon this and the preceding chapter, to show that Ptolemy here speaks of zodiacal parallels, or parallels of declination, and to point out the necessity of observing a planet’s latitude, in order to ascertain its true parallels. It is, however, to be recollected, that the parallels now alluded to are distinct from the mundane parallels, which are equal distances from the horizon or meridian, and are considered by Ptolemy in the 14th and 15th Chapters of the 3rd Book of this work; although not under the express name of mundane parallels.

[46] Whalley has a very detailed note about this and the previous chapter to explain that Ptolemy is discussing zodiacal parallels, or parallels of declination, and to highlight the need to observe a planet’s latitude to determine its true parallels. However, it should be noted that the parallels being referenced here are different from the mundane parallels, which are equal distances from the horizon or meridian, and which Ptolemy discusses in Chapters 14 and 15 of Book 3 of this work, although not specifically using the term mundane parallels.

[47] It has never been very clearly shown how the followers of Ptolemy have reconciled the new aspects (called the semiquadrate, quintile, sesquiquadrate, biquintile, &c.) with the veto pronounced in this chapter. Kepler is said to have invented them, and they have been universally adopted; even Placidus, who has applied Ptolemy’s doctrine to practice better than any other writer, has availed himself of them,† and, if the nativities published by him are to be credited, he has fully established their importance.

[47] It has never been very clearly explained how the followers of Ptolemy have reconciled the new aspects (like the semiquadrate, quintile, sesquiquadrate, biquintile, etc.) with the veto mentioned in this chapter. Kepler is said to have invented them, and they have been widely accepted; even Placidus, who has applied Ptolemy’s teachings in a practical way better than any other author, has used them. If we can trust the nativities he published, he has fully demonstrated their significance.

Salmon, in his “Horæ Mathematicæ,” before-mentioned, gives a long dissertation (from p. 403 to p. 414) on the old Ptolemaic aspects, illustrative of their foundation in nature and in mathematics; and, although his conclusions are not quite satisfactorily drawn, some of his arguments would seem appropriate, if he had but handled them more fully and expertly; particularly where he says that the aspects are derived “from the aliquot parts of a circle, wherein observe that, although the zodiac may have many more aliquot parts than these four (the sextile, quartile, trine, and opposition), yet those other aliquot parts of the circle, or 360 degrees, will not make an aliquot division of the signs also, which in this design was sought to answer, as well in the number 12, as in the number 360.” The passage in which he endeavours to show that they are authorized by their projection, also deserves attention.

Salmon, in his “Horæ Mathematicæ,” mentioned earlier, provides a lengthy discussion (from p. 403 to p. 414) on the old Ptolemaic aspects, illustrating their basis in nature and mathematics. Although his conclusions are not entirely convincing, some of his arguments seem valid if he had explored them more thoroughly and expertly; especially where he states that the aspects come from “the aliquot parts of a circle. Note that while the zodiac may have more aliquot parts than these four (the sextile, quartile, trine, and opposition), those other aliquot parts of the circle, or 360 degrees, won't create an aliquot division of the signs, which is what was intended to be addressed, both in the number 12 and in the number 360.” The section where he tries to demonstrate that they are validated by their projection also deserves attention.

All Salmon’s arguments, however, in support of the old Ptolemaic aspects, militate against the new Keplerian ones; and so does the following extract from the “Astrological Discourse” of Sir Christopher Heydon: “For thus, amongst all ordinate planes that may be inscribed, there are two whose sides, joined together, have pre-eminence to take up a semicircle, but only the hexagon, quadrate, and equilateral triangle, answering to the sextile, quartile, and trine irradiated. The subtense, therefore, of a sextile aspect consisteth of two signs, which, joined to the subtense of a trine, composed of four, being regular and equilateral, take up six signs, which is a complete semicircle. In like manner, the sides of a quadrate inscribed, subtending three signs, twice reckoned, do occupy likewise the mediety of a circle. And what those figures are before said to perform” (that is, to take up a semicircle) “either doubled or joined together, may also be truly ascribed unto the opposite aspect by itself; for that the diametral line, which passeth from the place of conjunction to the opposite point, divideth a circle into two equal parts: the like whereof cannot be found in any other inscripts; for example, the side of a regular pentagon” (the quintile) “subtendeth 72 degrees, of an octagon” (the semiquadrate) “but 45; the remainders of which arcs, viz. 108 and 135 degrees, are not subtended by the sides of any ordinate figure.”

All of Salmon’s arguments supporting the old Ptolemaic views conflict with the new Keplerian ideas; this is also evident in the following excerpt from the “Astrological Discourse” by Sir Christopher Heydon: “Among all regular figures that can be inscribed, there are two whose sides, when combined, are best suited to form a semicircle, but only the hexagon, square, and equilateral triangle—corresponding to the sextile, quartile, and trine aspects—are included. Thus, the span of a sextile aspect consists of two signs, which, when added to the span of a trine made up of four signs that are regular and equilateral, total six signs, completing a semicircle. Similarly, the sides of a square inscribed span three signs, counted twice, also cover the midpoint of a circle. The figures mentioned that achieve this (that is, that take up a semicircle) either when doubled or combined, can also be accurately attributed to the opposite aspect alone; as the diameter that runs from the point of conjunction to the opposite point divides the circle into two equal halves: this condition cannot be found in any other inscribed figures; for instance, the side of a regular pentagon (the quintile) subtends 72 degrees, while that of an octagon (the semiquadrate) subtends only 45; the remaining arcs of 108 and 135 degrees are not subtended by the sides of any regular shape.”

† Except the semiquadrate, which he has not at all noticed.

† Except for the semiquadrate, which he hasn’t noticed at all.

[48] Saturn being also malefic in his nature.

[48] Saturn is also harmful by nature.

[49] The planets, having two houses, are said to be more powerful in one by day and in the other by night: thus,

[49] The planets, having two houses, are thought to be stronger in one during the day and in the other at night: so,

Saturn’s day house is Aquarius, his night house Capricorn
Jupiter’s   Sagittarius   Pisces
Mars’s Aries Scorpio
Venus’s Taurus Libra
Mercury’s Gemini Virgo

The above is from Whalley; but the same disposition is to be found in all modern astrological writers.

The above is from Whalley; but the same tendency can be found in all modern astrological writers.

[50] The “lunar condition” here spoken of refers to the position of Aries (Mars’s house) in the lunar semicircle.

[50] The “lunar condition” mentioned here refers to the position of Aries (Mars’s house) in the lunar semicircle.

[51] Capricorn being in the solar semicircle.

[51] Capricorn is in the solar semicircle.

[52] The reason for making Saturn diurnal lord of this triplicity may be found in Chap. vii.

[52] The reason for making Saturn the daytime ruler of this group can be found in Chapter vii.

[53] This familiarity seems to arise from the sextile aspect between Aquarius, the diurnal house of Saturn, and Sagittarius, the diurnal house of Jupiter.

[53] This familiarity appears to come from the sextile relationship between Aquarius, the daytime sign of Saturn, and Sagittarius, the daytime sign of Jupiter.

[54] In reference to the terms of the planets, Placidus has these words (according to Cooper’s translation): “The dignity of the planets in the signs and their parts, which are called the bounds and terminations” (quasi, terms), “have a real and natural foundation; to wit, the powerful aspect or proportional influxes to the movable points in which the stars begin to produce the primary qualities. So that, according to those things we have explained in the philosophy of the heavens, these are found to agree so well with the Ægyptian boundaries” (terms), “that they are highly deserving of admiration.”

[54] Regarding the terms of the planets, Placidus says (based on Cooper’s translation): “The dignity of the planets in the signs and their parts, known as the bounds and terminations” (quasi, terms), “is built on a real and natural foundation; namely, the strong aspect or proportional influences to the moving points where the stars start to manifest their primary qualities. Therefore, based on what we’ve discussed about the philosophy of the heavens, these align so closely with the Egyptian boundaries” (terms) “that they are truly deserving of admiration.”

[55] This total is the 360 degrees of the zodiac, requiring to be divided according to correspondent portions of the equator; by which all time is reckoned.

[55] This total is the 360 degrees of the zodiac, which need to be divided into corresponding portions of the equator, by which all time is measured.

[56] The degrees here mentioned are degrees of the equator.

[56] The degrees mentioned here are degrees of the equator.

[57] See, in the Appendix, an extract from these tables; the whole of which are to be found in the Almagest.

[57] See, in the Appendix, an extract from these tables; the complete works of which are available in the Almagest.

[58] The cause of this disposition is that Cancer, the house of the Moon, partakes of moisture, and counteracts Mars’s dryness; while Leo, the Sun’s house, is hot, and counteracts Saturn’s cold.—Vide Chap. iv, and conclusion of Chap. vii of this book.

[58] The reason for this tendency is that Cancer, which is ruled by the Moon, has a lot of moisture that balances out Mars's dryness; meanwhile, Leo, ruled by the Sun, is warm and balances out Saturn's cold.—Vide Chap. iv, and conclusion of Chap. vii of this book.

It may further be observed, that Jupiter’s right, by triplicity, to the first degrees in Leo, is of course surrendered to Saturn, on the principle that the malefics have greater potency in the houses of the luminaries.

It can also be noted that Jupiter’s right, by triplicity, to the first degrees in Leo is obviously given up to Saturn, based on the idea that the malefics are more powerful in the houses of the luminaries.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ and __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.

[60] Vide Chapter xx. It of course follows that Saturn is in his proper face when he is five signs, or in quintile, after the Sun or before the Moon; that Jupiter is so when in trine; Mars when in quartile; Venus when in sextile; and Mercury when only one sign (or in modern phrase, in semi-sextile), after the Sun or before the Moon.

[60] Vide Chapter xx. It naturally follows that Saturn is in his correct position when he is five signs away, or in quintile, either after the Sun or before the Moon; that Jupiter is in the right spot when in trine; Mars when in quartile; Venus when in sextile; and Mercury when he is just one sign away (or in modern terms, in semi-sextile) after the Sun or before the Moon.

[61] This has been understood to mean, when the planets or luminaries are within each other’s orbs; Saturn’s orb being 10 degrees, Jupiter’s 12, Mars’s 7 degrees 30 minutes, the Sun’s 17 degrees, Venus’s 8, Mercury’s 7 degrees 30 minutes, and the Moon’s 12 degrees 30 minutes.

[61] This is understood to mean when the planets or celestial bodies are within each other’s ranges: Saturn’s range is 10 degrees, Jupiter’s is 12, Mars’s is 7 degrees 30 minutes, the Sun’s is 17 degrees, Venus’s is 8, Mercury’s is 7 degrees 30 minutes, and the Moon’s is 12 degrees 30 minutes.

[62] Astrologers generally agree, that the inferior planets always apply to the superior, but the superior never to the inferior, except when the inferior be retrograde. In the present instance it seems most probable that the author means the planet which is more occidental, by “the planet which precedes.” He often uses “precedent” as equivalent to “occidental” in regard to the daily revolution of the heavens: and thus a planet in the first degree of Aries would precede, and be more occidental than one in the sixth degree of Aries, to which latter it would, by the regular planetary motion, be applying.

[62] Astrologers generally agree that the inferior planets always move towards the superior ones, but the superior never moves towards the inferior ones, except when the inferior is retrograde. In this case, it’s likely that the author is referring to the planet that is further west when he says "the planet that precedes." He often uses "precedent" to mean "occidental" in the context of the daily movement of the heavens. So, a planet in the first degree of Aries would be considered to precede and be more occidental than one in the sixth degree of Aries, which, under normal planetary motion, it would be moving towards.

[63] On this, Whalley says that “the less the difference of latitude of the planets in conjunction, the more powerful will be the influence: for if two planets in conjunction have each considerable latitude of different denomination, the influence of such conjunction will be much lessened.”

[63] Whalley states that “the smaller the difference in latitude between planets in conjunction, the stronger their influence will be: for if two planets in conjunction have a significant latitude of differing values, the influence of that conjunction will be greatly reduced.”

[64] Τουτ εσι επι το κεντρον της γης. The precise meaning of the word κεντρον is “centre,” rather than “angle”; but Ptolemy uses it throughout this work, in speaking of the four angles of heaven, and I conceive he uses it here to signify an angle at, or on, the earth. The following definition of an aspect, by Kepler, strengthens my opinion: “An aspect is an angle formed on the earth, by the luminous rays of two planets; efficacious in stimulating sublunary nature.”

[64] This is at the center of the earth. The exact meaning of the word center is “centre,” not “angle”; but Ptolemy uses it throughout this work when talking about the four angles of heaven, and I believe he uses it here to refer to an angle at, or on, the earth. The following definition of an aspect by Kepler reinforces my view: “An aspect is an angle formed on the earth by the light rays of two planets; effective in influencing the earthly nature.”

[65] Placidus (Cooper’s translation) says that “the three superiors are supposed to be stronger, if they are found to be matutine, or eastern, from the Sun; the three inferiors, vespertine, or western; for then they have a greater degree of light, in which consists their virtual influence, and then they are called oriental; but occidental if otherwise. Every one knows how largely, yet to no purpose, authors have treated of the orientality of the planets.”

[65] Placidus (Cooper’s translation) says that “the three higher positions are believed to be stronger if they are found in the morning, or to the east, by the Sun; the three lower positions are in the evening, or to the west; because then they receive a greater amount of light, which is where their potential influence comes from, and they are referred to as eastern; but western if it’s the other way around. Everyone knows how extensively, yet ineffectively, authors have discussed the eastern positions of the planets.”

Moxon’s Mathematical Dictionary has the following words on the same subject: “Now the three superior planets are strongest, being oriental and matutine; but the three inferior when they are occidental and vespertine. The reason is, because the first in the first case, but the last in the second, do then descend to the lowest part of their orbit, are increased in light, and approaching nearer the earth; and so on the contrary, the inferiors matutine, the superiors vespertine are weakened.”

Moxon’s Mathematical Dictionary has the following words on the same subject: “Now the three superior planets are strongest when they are in the east and visible in the morning; but the three inferior ones are strongest when they are in the west and visible in the evening. The reason is that in the first case, the superior planets are descending to the lowest part of their orbit, gaining brightness and getting closer to the earth; and conversely, the inferior planets are weaker in the morning, while the superior ones are weaker in the evening.”

[66] In a note on the 6th Chapter of this Book, Whalley says that, “according to Ptolemy, such as are between the ascendant and mid-heaven obtain the first place of strength, and are said to be in their oriental orientality: but, between the western horizon and the lower heaven, in their occidental orientality, which is the second place of strength: between the lower heaven and the ascendant, in their oriental occidentality, the first degree of weakness; and between the mid-heaven and western horizon, in their occidental occidentality, the weakest place of all.” This is all very pretty jargon, but certainly not “according to Ptolemy,” who distinctly says, on the contrary, that if a planet “is on the actual horizon, or succedent to the horizon, it is also powerful, and particularly if in the eastern quarter.” The last member of this sentence, as well as the conclusion of this 27th Chapter, shows that Ptolemy did not consider a situation between the mid-heaven and western horizon to be “the weakest place of all.”

[66] In a note on the 6th Chapter of this Book, Whalley states that, “according to Ptolemy, those located between the ascendant and mid-heaven hold the strongest position and are said to be in their eastern orientation; while those between the western horizon and the lower heaven, in their western orientation, have the second strongest position; those between the lower heaven and the ascendant, in their eastern western orientation, occupy the first degree of weakness; and those between the mid-heaven and western horizon, in their western western orientation, are in the weakest position of all.” This is all very fancy talk, but certainly not “according to Ptolemy,” who clearly states, on the contrary, that if a planet “is on the actual horizon, or just after the horizon, it is also powerful, and especially if in the eastern quarter.” The last part of this sentence, as well as the conclusion of this 27th Chapter, indicates that Ptolemy did not view a position between the mid-heaven and western horizon as “the weakest position of all.”

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

[68] “Under the Bears,” in the Greek.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ “Under the Bears” in Greek.

[69] Or, perhaps, Bastarnia, a part of the ancient European Sarmatia.

[69] Or, maybe, Bastarnia, a region of the ancient European Sarmatia.

[70] This should probably be understood to mean in a mundane point of view, agreeably to Chaps. VI and XV, Book I. For when Aries is on the ascendant, it is, of course, oriental and masculine; and Sagittarius must consequently then be in the eighth house, occidental, and therefore feminine.

[70] This should probably be interpreted from a practical perspective, in line with Chapters VI and XV, Book I. When Aries is rising, it is, of course, an eastern and masculine sign; therefore, Sagittarius must be in the eighth house, which is western and, as a result, feminine.

[71] The customs of nations have, in some degree, altered since Ptolemy made this severe charge against us and our brethren in the north and west of Europe. The following passage also occurs in this part of the original text:—Προς δε τας συνουσιας των αρσενικων ανακινουμενοι και ζηλουντες, και μητε αισχρον μητε αναλδρον τουτο νομιζοντες. δια τουτο ουδε εκλυονται, οτι ουδε ως πασχοντες διακεινται επι τοντω, αλλα φυλαττουσι τας ψυχας ανδρειους.

[71] The customs of nations have changed somewhat since Ptolemy made this harsh accusation against us and our counterparts in northern and western Europe. The following passage also appears in this part of the original text:—Προς δε τας συνουσιας των αρσενικων ανακινουμενοι και ζηλουντες, και μητε αισχρον μητε αναλδρον τουτο νομιζοντες. δια τουτο ουδε εκλυονται, οτι ουδε ως πασχοντες διακεινται επι τοντω, αλλα φυλαττουσι τας ψυχας ανδρειους.

[72] The Greek is as follows: και τα μορια αυτων τα γεννητικα ανατιθεασι τοις θεοις· διοτι ο σχηματισμος των ειρημενων αςερων φυσει σπερματικος εσιν· Follies, similar in their kind to these, are still practised by the Faquirs of Hindostan, and by other religious sects in Asia.

[72] The Greek translates to: and their reproductive elements are entrusted to the gods; for the formation of the aforementioned beings is inherently reproductive. Foolish behaviors similar to these are still practiced by the Fakirs of Hindostan and other religious groups in Asia.

[73] Φανερως ποιουμενοι τας προς τας γυναικας συνουσιας·

[73] Φανερως ποιουμενοι τας προς τας γυναικας συνουσιας·

[74] The author gives a singular reason for this incest: μισουσι δε τας (συνουσιας) προς τους αρσενας. δια τουτο και οι πλειςοι αυτων εκ των μητερων τεκνοποιουσι·

[74] The author provides a unique reason for this incest: they hate the relationships with males. That’s why most of them have children with their mothers;

[75] The epithet is remarkable, not only as being, in the opinion of a Gentile, merited by the Jews, among other nations, but also at a period scarcely exceeding a century after their most heinous crime had been committed, expressly under the cloak of religion. It seems, however, that the Jews were charged with atheism by other writers also, and on account of their neglect of the false gods of the heathens; viz. “falsorium deorum neglectus: quam candem causam etiam Judæis maledicendi Tacitus habuit, et Plinius Major, cui Judæi dicuntur gens contumeliâ numinum insignis.” See Clark’s Notes on Grotius de Verit. Relig. Christ. Lib. 2, §2.

[75] The description is significant, not just because, in the view of a non-Jewish person, it was deserved by the Jews among other nations, but also considering it was written about a century after their most terrible crime was committed, all under the guise of religion. However, it seems that other writers also accused the Jews of atheism because of their disregard for the false gods of the pagans; for example, “neglect of false gods: the same reason that Tacitus had for criticizing the Jews, as did Pliny the Elder, who called the Jews a people marked by the insult to deities.” See Clark’s Notes on Grotius de Verit. Relig. Christ. Lib. 2, §2.

[76] Other editions say “Saturn.”

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Other editions say "Saturn."

[77] It is usually understood that the male deity, coupled by the Phrygians with Cybele, “the mother of the Gods,” was called by them Atys; and that Adonis was the name used by the Phœnicians in addressing the associate of Venus. It has been said that these divinities were identical with the Isis and Osiris of the Ægyptians.

[77] It's generally accepted that the male god, associated by the Phrygians with Cybele, “the mother of the Gods,” was referred to as Atys; and that Adonis was the name used by the Phoenicians when talking about the companion of Venus. Some have claimed that these gods were the same as the Isis and Osiris of the Egyptians.

[78] The name of Africa was, in Ptolemy’s time, limited to those parts of the coast on the Mediterranean which contained the ancient Utica, and in which Tunis now stands. Josephus says the name is derived from Afer (one of the posterity of Abraham by Cethurah), who is stated to have led an army into Libya, and to have established himself in the country. This Afer is, of course, the same with Epher, mentioned in the fourth verse of the 25th chapter of Genesis, as a son of Midian, one of the sons of Abraham by his concubine Keturah.

[78] In Ptolemy’s time, the name Africa referred only to the coastal areas along the Mediterranean that included the ancient Utica and where Tunis is located today. Josephus claims the name comes from Afer, a descendant of Abraham through Cethurah, who is said to have led an army into Libya and settled there. This Afer is, of course, the same as Epher, mentioned in Genesis 25:4, as a son of Midian, one of Abraham's sons by his concubine Keturah.

[79] It does not appear why this practice should have been remarked as a national peculiarity, unless in distinction from the custom of burning the dead among the Greeks and Romans. Interment is recorded as having been usual among the Jews, and it is known to have been common among many ancient barbarous nations.

[79] It’s unclear why this practice was noted as a national trait, except to distinguish it from the tradition of cremating the dead among the Greeks and Romans. Burial is documented as a common practice among the Jews and was also known to be widespread among various ancient barbarian groups.

A conjecture may perhaps be allowed, that the author, when he wrote this passage, had in his mind the magnificent subterranean palaces, constructed for the dead, in parts of the region in question; some of which have been recently made known to the modern world by the sagacity and enterprise of the celebrated Belzoni.

A guess can probably be made that the author, when he wrote this part, was thinking about the magnificent underground palaces built for the dead in that area; some of which have recently been revealed to the modern world by the insight and efforts of the famous Belzoni.

[80] Τινες δε και καταφρονουσι των γεννητικων μελων.—The “contempt” here expressed by καταφρονουσι has been taken by all translators (except Whalley) to signify “mutilation.”

[80] Some, however, look down on the reproductive organs.—The “contempt” indicated by καταφρονουσι has been interpreted by all translators (except Whalley) to mean “mutilation.”

[81] History warrants the high enconium here given to the natives of these countries. Ægypt was the acknowledged mother of the arts and sciences, and at one time the great depot of all the learning of the world: her school of astronomy (a science which our author may be supposed to have placed in the first rank), founded at Alexandria by Ptol. Philadelphus, maintained its superior reputation for a thousand years. Cyrenaica gave birth to many illustrious philosophers, and, among them, to Eratosthenes, who is said to have invented the armillary sphere. This great man measured the obliquity of the ecliptic, and, though he erroneously reckoned it at only 20½ degrees, it should be recollected that he lived 200 years before the Christian æra. He also measured a degree of the meridian, and determined the extent of the earth, by means similar to those adopted by the moderns.

[81] History justifies the high praise given to the natives of these countries. Egypt was recognized as the birthplace of arts and sciences, and at one time, it was the main center of knowledge in the world: its astronomy school, founded in Alexandria by Ptolemy Philadelphus, maintained its esteemed reputation for a thousand years. Cyrenaica produced many famous philosophers, among them Eratosthenes, who is credited with inventing the armillary sphere. This great thinker measured the tilt of the ecliptic, and although he mistakenly calculated it to be only 20½ degrees, it's important to note that he lived 200 years before the Christian era. He also measured a degree of the meridian and determined the size of the Earth using methods similar to those used by modern scientists.

[82] Whalley remarks on this passage, that the gradual progress of the fixed stars “from one sign to another, is in an especial manner to be regarded in considering the mutations, manners, customs, laws, government, and fortune of a kingdom.”

[82] Whalley comments on this passage that the slow movement of the fixed stars “from one sign to another is particularly important when examining the changes, behaviors, customs, laws, governance, and fate of a kingdom.”

[83] As shown in the Table at page 51.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ As shown in the __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

[84] It does not appear that the text here warrants the conclusion which Whalley has drawn from it, viz. “that wherever eclipses are not visible, they have no influence, and therefore subterranean eclipses cannot have any.” Ptolemy declares, that all countries in familiarity with the ecliptical place will be comprehended in the event; and, with regard to the visibility or invisibility of the eclipse, he says merely that its effects will be principally felt in such of the said countries as might have obtained a view of the eclipse.

[84] It doesn't seem like the text here justifies the conclusion that Whalley has drawn from it, namely, “that where eclipses aren't visible, they have no effect, and so subterranean eclipses can't have any.” Ptolemy states that all countries that are familiar with the ecliptical position will be included in the event; and concerning the visibility or invisibility of the eclipse, he only notes that its effects will be primarily felt in those countries that could observe the eclipse.

[85] Temporal or solar hours are duodecimal parts of the Sun’s diurnal or nocturnal arc, and are numbered by day from sunrise to sunset; by night, from sunset to sunrise.

[85] Temporal or solar hours are divided into twelve parts of the Sun's daily or nightly path, and they are counted from sunrise to sunset during the day; at night, they are counted from sunset to sunrise.

[86] Equatorial hours are the twenty-four hours of the earth’s revolution on its axis. Each of them is equal in duration to the passage of 15 degrees of the Equator; and they are numbered from noon to noon. A particular explanation of the astronomical use, both of temporal and equatorial hours, is to be found in the 9th Chapter of the second Book of the Almagest; an extract from which is given in the Appendix.

[86] Equatorial hours are the twenty-four hours it takes for the Earth to rotate on its axis. Each hour corresponds to the passage of 15 degrees of the Equator, and they are counted from noon to noon. A specific explanation of the astronomical use of both temporal and equatorial hours can be found in Chapter 9 of Book 2 of the Almagest; an excerpt from that is included in the Appendix.

[87] The three periods of four months each, stated in this paragraph, are applicable to solar eclipses only; for lunar eclipses, these periods may be reckoned at ten days each; that number of days bearing the same proportion to a month, as four months to a year. On this point, Whalley, with his usual inaccuracy, has asserted, that “in eclipses of the Moon, two days, or thereabouts, are equal to the four months” here reckoned in eclipses of the Sun. He adds, however, what perhaps may be true, that “lunar eclipses are by no means so powerful as those of the Sun, although more so than any other lunation.”

[87] The three periods of four months each mentioned in this paragraph only apply to solar eclipses; for lunar eclipses, these periods can be considered as ten days each. That number of days has the same relation to a month as four months do to a year. Regarding this, Whalley, showing his usual lack of precision, claimed that “in eclipses of the Moon, two days or so are equal to the four months” counted for solar eclipses. He does note, however, that it might be true that “lunar eclipses are definitely not as impactful as solar eclipses, although they are more powerful than any other lunar phase.”

[88] That is to say, from any combinations of the Sun and Moon which may take place after the date of the eclipse, but before the close of its effect.

[88] In other words, from any combinations of the Sun and Moon that could happen after the eclipse date but before its effects end.

[89] The edition of Allatius does not contain the words here marked by inverted commas; but they are found in other editions of the text, and seem necessary to complete the sense of the passage.

[89] The edition of Allatius doesn’t include the words marked by inverted commas, but those words are found in other editions of the text and seem essential to complete the meaning of the passage.

[90] “When planets, in election for Lords of the eclipse, are found of equal strength and dignity, those which are direct are to be preferred before those which are retrograde; and the oriental before the occidental.”—Whalley’s “Annotations.”

[90] “When planets are chosen as Lords of the eclipse and they have equal strength and status, those that are moving forward are favored over those that are moving backward; and those that are in the east are preferred over those in the west.”—Whalley’s “Annotations.”

[91] That is to say, in the Almagest, Book VIII, Chap. IV; which chapter is given, entire, in the Appendix.

[91] In the Almagest, Book VIII, Chapter IV; this chapter is included in its entirety in the Appendix.

[92] “In electing fixed stars, Cardan directs to observe the angle which the eclipse follows, and that which it precedes: as, if the eclipse be between the seventh house” (or occidental angle) “and the mid-heaven, the stars which are in the seventh shall be preferred; and next, those in the mid-heaven; but, if between the mid-heaven and the ascendant, those in the mid-heaven shall have the preference; and next, those in the ascendant.”—Whalley’s “Annotations.”

[92] “In choosing fixed stars, Cardan advises to look at the angle that the eclipse comes after and the angle that it comes before: for example, if the eclipse falls between the seventh house” (or western angle) “and the mid-heaven, the stars in the seventh should be favored; and then, those in the mid-heaven; but if it’s between the mid-heaven and the ascendant, those in the mid-heaven should be prioritized; and then, those in the ascendant.” —Whalley’s “Annotations.”

[93] It is perhaps unnecessary to remark, that, in speaking of ruling places, as liable to be situated in Aquila, Delphinus or Argo, Ptolemy alludes only to the places of the fixed stars in dominion: since the ecliptical place and the planets must be confined to the zodiacal signs.

[93] It's probably unnecessary to mention that when referring to ruling places, potentially located in Aquila, Delphinus, or Argo, Ptolemy is only talking about the positions of the fixed stars in terms of influence: since the ecliptical location and the planets should be limited to the zodiac signs.

[94] According to Whalley, Cardan, in reference to the nine modes of configuration, applicable to the fixed stars, says, “When a fixed star is with any planet, or in any angle, consider whether it be by any of these ways; if not, it is most weak; if it be, consider whether it be with the Sun, and not to be seen; then it is very weak. Or if it is to be seen, and is with the Sun occidental, it is indifferent. Or if it be seen, and is not with the Sun, it is stronger; or if it be seen, and is oriental, then it is strongest.”

[94] According to Whalley, Cardan refers to the nine ways of configuration that apply to the fixed stars, saying, “When a fixed star is near any planet or at any angle, check if it aligns in any of these ways; if not, it’s very weak. If it does align, see if it’s with the Sun and not visible; then it’s very weak. If it’s visible and with the Sun in the west, it’s average. If it’s visible and not with the Sun, it’s stronger; and if it’s visible and in the east, then it’s the strongest.”

[95] That is to say (technically speaking), by reception, or by being posited in a sign in which another planet has a certain dignity or prerogative.

[95] In other words (to be precise), through reception, or by being placed in a sign where another planet holds a certain status or privilege.

[96] In conformity to the rule laid down in Chap. VI of this Book, those individuals whose nativities may thus resemble the position of the heavens at the time of an eclipse, and who are here stated to be chiefly liable to the effects of the eclipse, will be more affected by it, if it should be visible to them.

[96] According to the rule outlined in Chapter VI of this Book, individuals whose births align with the position of the heavens during an eclipse, and who are noted to be particularly susceptible to the eclipse's effects, will be more influenced by it if they can see it.

To the precepts contained in this chapter, Placidus makes the following allusion in his remarks on the nativity of Cardinal Pancirole. “Any significator whatever, together with the other stars, whilst they are moved by a converse universal motion, change the aspect alternately, and consequently the mundane rays, as it likewise happens when they acquire parallels: the rays thus acquired are of a long continuance, and denote a certain universal disposition of the things signified, either good or bad, according to the nature of the aspecting stars; as it happened to this Cardinal, who some years before his death was always sickly: and this observation is wonderful in the changes of the times and weather; for this principle Ptolemy adhered to in the Almagest, lib. VIII, cap. 4; and this doctrine he also mentions in the 2nd Book of Judgments, in the chapter on the Nature of Events.”—(Cooper’s Translation, p. 272.)

To the principles in this chapter, Placidus makes the following reference in his comments on the birth of Cardinal Pancirole. “Any significator, along with the other stars, while they are influenced by a universal motion, alternately change their appearance, and therefore the worldly rays, as happens when they gain parallels: the rays gained in this way last for a long time and indicate a certain universal condition of the things represented, whether good or bad, depending on the nature of the stars involved; as happened to this Cardinal, who was often ill in the years leading up to his death: and this observation is remarkable in the shifts of time and weather; for this principle was upheld by Ptolemy in the Almagest, book VIII, chapter 4; and he also mentions this teaching in the 2nd Book of Judgments, in the chapter on the Nature of Events.”—(Cooper’s Translation, p. 272.)

[97] When a comet appears out of the zodiac, a line should be drawn from one zodiacal pole to the other, through the spot where it appears; and that spot is to be considered as being in familiarity with the same countries as those parts of the zodiac which may be on the same line.—Vide Chap. IV of this Book, relative to the manner in which fixed stars out of the zodiac hold familiarity with certain regions and countries.

[97] When a comet shows up outside the zodiac, you should draw a line from one zodiac pole to the other, passing through the point where it appears; and that point should be regarded as connected to the same areas as the sections of the zodiac that lie along that line.—Vide Chap. IV of this Book, regarding how fixed stars outside the zodiac are connected to specific regions and countries.

[98] The Neomenia, or new Moon, was observed as a festival with much solemnity in earlier ages and by the most ancient nations. It was celebrated by the Israelites, as well as by Pagan; and it may perhaps be gathered from the 5th and 6th verses of the 20th Chapter of the 1st Book of Samuel, that it was kept once in a year with greater ceremony than at other times: this was done, probably, at the “New Moon of the Year,” as Ptolemy calls it; or, in other words, at the new Moon nearest to the vernal equinox.

[98] The Neomenia, or new Moon, was celebrated as a festival with a lot of seriousness in ancient times by the earliest civilizations. It was observed by both the Israelites and Pagans; and it can be inferred from the 5th and 6th verses of the 20th Chapter of the 1st Book of Samuel that it was honored once a year with more ceremony than at other times: this was likely done at the “New Moon of the Year,” as Ptolemy referred to it; in other words, at the new Moon closest to the spring equinox.

[99] That is to say, at the new and full Moon taking place during the Sun’s progress through each sign.

[99] In other words, during the new and full Moon happening as the Sun moves through each sign.

[100] The passage marked thus “ ” is not in the Greek, but is found in two Latin translations.

[100] The part indicated by “ ” is not in the Greek text, but it appears in two Latin translations.

[101] According to Wing, in his “Instructions to the Ephemerides,” printed in 1652, the signs, as mentioned in this chapter by Ptolemy, are to be considered in their quality as constellations, and not as spaces of the heavens. This opinion, however, seems to me to be erroneous; for Ptolemy has already devoted a chapter in the 1st Book to the detail of the influences of the several stars in the respective constellations of the zodiac; and he moreover speaks, in the present chapter, of the operation of Aries, as owing to the presence of the Equinox. This he could not have done, had he spoken of the signs as constellations instead of spaces.

[101] According to Wing, in his “Instructions to the Ephemerides,” published in 1652, the signs mentioned in this chapter by Ptolemy should be viewed as spaces in the sky, rather than as constellations. However, I believe this view is incorrect; Ptolemy has already dedicated a chapter in the 1st Book to explaining the influences of the various stars within the different zodiac constellations. Additionally, he discusses the impact of Aries in this chapter, attributing it to the position of the Equinox. He could not have done this if he were referring to the signs as constellations rather than as spaces.

[102] The temperaments here alluded to are, probably, heat and cold.

[102] The temperaments mentioned here probably refer to hot and cold.

[103]Before.” Although I have thus Englished the word, προ, I think it properly requires to be here rendered, by “at” or “near to” rather than “before.” Firstly, because my author (in speaking of the commencement of each quarter of the year, in the 11th Chapter, p. 93), has expressly stated that “the spring is to be dated from the new or full Moon taking place when the Sun is nearest (εγγιζα) to the first point of Aries; the summer from that, when he is nearest the first point of Cancer,” &c., &c.; and (in p. 94) he states that certain general effects are brought about by the new or full Moon occurring at (κατα) the aforesaid points. Secondly, because, in a few lines further on, in speaking of the monthly consideration, p. 98, he again uses only εγγιζα, in reference to the present passage, in which, however, he has used only προ. Thirdly, it is a proper inference that he meant to point out here the new or full Moon which may happen nearest to the tropical or equinoctial points, because he has previously and explicitly taught that the principal variation of all things depends upon those points. Lastly, Allatius has here rendered the word by no other than proximé, which is also the word given in the Perugio Latin of 1646.

[103]Before.” Even though I’ve translated the word προ, I think it makes more sense to translate it as “at” or “near to” rather than “before.” First, because my author (in discussing the start of each quarter of the year, in Chapter 11, p. 93) clearly states that “spring begins from the new or full Moon occurring when the Sun is nearest (εγγιζα) to the first point of Aries; summer begins when it is nearest to the first point of Cancer,” etc.; and (in p. 94) he mentions that certain general effects are triggered by the new or full Moon happening at (κατα) those mentioned points. Second, because in a few lines further on, when discussing the monthly consideration, p. 98, he again uses εγγιζα, referring to the current passage, in which, however, he only used προ. Third, it’s a reasonable conclusion that he intended to highlight the new or full Moon that may occur nearest to the tropical or equinoctial points, since he has previously and clearly taught that the main variation of all things relies on those points. Finally, Allatius translated the word as proximé, which is also the term used in the Perugio Latin of 1646.

On the other hand, Whalley, in his note on the present chapter, says, that “according to this Prince of Astrologers” (meaning Ptolemy), “we are to observe the new or full Moon preceding the ingress, only, for our judgment on the succeeding quarter, and not the lunation succeeding: and the reason I conceive to be, because the lunation, which immediately precedes the ingress, carries its influence to the very position of the ingress itself, but not so that which follows the ingress.” Wing, in his Introduction to the Ephemerides (London, 1652) also says, that “for the knowledge of the weather, it is requisite to observe the conjunction or opposition of the luminaries next preceding the Sun’s ingress into the first point of Aries.”

On the other hand, Whalley, in his note on this chapter, says that “according to this Prince of Astrologers” (referring to Ptolemy), “we should look at the new or full Moon before the ingress only for our judgment on the upcoming quarter, and not the lunation that follows it. I believe this is because the lunation right before the ingress carries its influence to the very position of the ingress itself, but the one that comes after doesn’t." Wing, in his Introduction to the Ephemerides (London, 1652), also states that “to understand the weather, it's essential to observe the conjunction or opposition of the luminaries just before the Sun enters the first point of Aries.”

Now, if a new or full Moon happen immediately after the Sun’s transit or ingress, the previous full or new Moon must have happened a fortnight before the said transit or ingress; and, after considering the other parts of Ptolemy’s doctrine, I do not conceive, that he intended to teach, in this chapter, that a previous lunation, when at so great a distance before the important ingress, would have a greater influence over the ensuing quarter of the year, than a subsequent lunation taking place so closely after the said ingress.

Now, if a new or full Moon occurs immediately after the Sun's transit or entrance, then the previous full or new Moon must have occurred two weeks before that transit or entrance; and after looking at the other parts of Ptolemy's teachings, I don’t believe that he meant to suggest in this chapter that a previous lunation, happening so far in advance of the important entrance, would have more influence over the following quarter of the year than a subsequent lunation occurring so soon after that entrance.

[104]Both the places.” These are the places of the new or full Moon, and of the following angle; as before mentioned with regard to the quarterly consideration.

[104]Both the places.” These refer to the positions of the new or full Moon and the subsequent angle, as previously discussed concerning the quarterly observations.

[105] Similar precepts may be found finely illustrated in Virgil’s 1st Georgic, vide I, 433 et infra:

[105] Similar principles are beautifully shown in Virgil’s 1st Georgic, see I, 433 and below:

“Sol quoque et exoriens et cum se condit in undas
 Signa dabit:”——

[106] Virgil has said almost the same thing in these beautiful lines:

[106] Virgil has expressed something very similar in these beautiful lines:

“At si virgineum suffuderit ore ruborem
 Ventus erit: vento semper rubet aurea Phœbe.”—Georg. I, l. 430.

See also the whole passage, beginning at l. 424:

See also the entire passage, starting at line 424:

“Si vero Solem ad rapidum Lunasque sequentes
 Ordine respicies,” &c.

[107] At this place, the following sentence, not found in the Greek, is inserted in a Latin translation:

[107] Here, the following sentence, which doesn't appear in the Greek text, is added from a Latin translation:

“If the northern of the two stars, situated one on each side of the Præsepe, and called the Asini, should not appear, the north wind will blow: but, if the southern one be invisible, the south wind.”

“If the northern of the two stars, located one on each side of the Præsepe, and known as the Asini, doesn't show up, the north wind will blow; but if the southern one is missing, the south wind will blow.”

[108] These coruscations are, perhaps, similar to those now known by the name of the Aurora Borealis.

[108] These flashes of light are probably similar to what we now call the Aurora Borealis.

[109] Virgil again:

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Virgil again:

“Sæpe etiam stellas vento impendente videbis
 Præcipites cœlo labi.”—&c. Georg. I, l. 365.

A great part of the 1st Georgic consists of astrological rules for predicting the weather, closely resembling the precepts here given by Ptolemy. Virgil is said to have adopted his doctrine from Aratus.

A large portion of the 1st Georgic includes astrological guidelines for forecasting the weather, which closely align with the instructions provided by Ptolemy. It is said that Virgil took his ideas from Aratus.

[110] The Division of Time is subsequently laid down by the author, in the last Chapter of the fourth Book.

[110] The Division of Time is then explained by the author in the last chapter of the fourth book.

[111] The words, thus marked “ ”, are not in the Greek, but in two Latin translations.

[111] The words, marked “ ”, aren’t in Greek, but in two Latin translations.

[112] It is, perhaps, needless to remark that modern improvements in science have superseded the use of this and other ancient instruments here mentioned.

[112] It's probably unnecessary to mention that modern advancements in science have replaced the use of this and other ancient tools previously referenced.

[113] Although the “clepsydra,” or water-clock, was commonly used among the ancients for various purposes, it appears, from Martian (a Latin writer, who lived about a. d. 490), that there was also a clepsydra in special use as an astrological engine.

[113] Although the “clepsydra,” or water-clock, was commonly used among the ancients for various purposes, it appears, from Martian (a Latin writer who lived around a. d. 490), that there was also a clepsydra specifically used as an astrological tool.

[114]The Doctrine of Ascensions,” in allusion to the method of calculating the actual position of the ecliptic.

[114]The Doctrine of Ascensions,” referring to the way of figuring out the actual position of the ecliptic.

[115]Phase or configuration.” Or, holding some authorized aspect to the degree in question.

[115]Phase or configuration.” Or, maintaining a recognized aspect to the extent being discussed.

[116] Or, on the ascendant.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Or, on the rise.

[117] The precepts delivered in this Chapter have obtained the name of Ptolemy’s Animodar: the term is probably Arabic, if it be not a corruption of the Latin words animum, or animam, dare, “giving animation or life”; yet this meaning seems scarcely close enough.

[117] The guidelines presented in this chapter are known as Ptolemy’s Animodar. The term is likely Arabic, unless it’s a distortion of the Latin words animum, or animam, dare, meaning “giving animation or life”; however, this interpretation doesn't seem to fit closely enough.

[118] In House, Triplicity, Exaltation, Term or Face.

[118] In House, Triplicity, Exaltation, Term or Face.

[119] Δορυφορια· This word has been heretofore rendered “satellitium” and “satellites,” but, as these terms do not seem sufficiently precise in their meaning, and are already in use to signify the minor orbs which revolve round a principal planet, I have ventured to anglicize the Greek word; the usual signification of which is a “bodyguard.”

[119] Satellite: This word has previously been translated as “satellitium” and “satellites,” but since these terms don't seem precise enough in meaning and are already used to refer to the smaller orbs that orbit a main planet, I've decided to adapt the Greek word into English; its common meaning is a “bodyguard.”

[120] Or, in other words, “should the stars, which attend the Sun, be such as rise before him; and those, which attend the Moon, such as rise after her.”

[120] Or, in other words, “should the stars that accompany the Sun rise before him; and those that accompany the Moon rise after her.”

[121] As described in Chap. XXVI, Book I.

[121] As described in Chapter 26, Book 1.

[122] Saturn being applicable to the father, and Venus to the mother.

[122] Saturn relates to the father, and Venus to the mother.

[123] The Perugio Latin translation, of 1646, inserts here, “and provided Saturn and the Sun are not impeded by being posited in unfortunate or unsuitable places.”

[123] The Perugio Latin translation from 1646 adds here, “and as long as Saturn and the Sun are not blocked by being placed in bad or unsuitable positions.”

[124]Elevated.” Moxon’s Mathematical Dictionary gives the following definition of this astrological term. “Elevated. A certain pre-eminence of one planet above another; or, a concurrence of two to a certain act, wherein one being stronger, is carried above the weaker, and does alter and depress its nature and influence: But wherein this being elevated consists, there are several opinions; some say when a planet is nearest the zenith, or meridian; others will have it only that planet is highest; or nearest to the Apogæon of his eccentric or epicycle. And Argol admits of all these, and several other advantages, and thence advises to collect the several testimonies, and that that planet, who has most, shall be said to be elevated above the other.” According to Whalley, Cardan’s opinion was that “that planet is most elevated which is more occidental and ponderous.” For myself, I conceive this opinion to be inaccurate, because, if Ptolemy meant to signify only the greater occidentality of the planet, he would (as in other instances) have used the word “preceding” instead of “elevated above”; and I incline to think, that greater proximity to the zenith is the truer, as well as more simple, meaning of the term “elevated.”

[124]Elevated.” Moxon’s Mathematical Dictionary offers this definition of the astrological term. “Elevated. A certain superiority of one planet over another; or, a conjunction of two in a certain action, where one, being stronger, lifts the weaker and alters or diminishes its nature and influence: But what constitutes this elevation is debated; some say it happens when a planet is closest to the zenith or meridian; others argue it’s just about which planet is highest, or closest to the Apogee of its orbit. Argol acknowledges all these cases and several other advantages, and therefore suggests gathering various opinions, concluding that the planet with the most advantages is considered elevated above the other.” According to Whalley, Cardan believed that “the most elevated planet is the one that is further west and heavier.” Personally, I find this opinion flawed, because if Ptolemy intended to indicate just the greater western position of the planet, he would have used the term “preceding” instead of “elevated above”; and I tend to believe that being closer to the zenith is the more accurate and simpler meaning of “elevated.”

[125] By the quartile or opposition, as before mentioned.

[125] By the quartile or opposition, as previously mentioned.

[126] On this passage, Whalley remarks that “Ptolemy teacheth, from the child’s nativity, to erect schemes for the father and mother, and thence to give judgment, as if it were their proper nativities; the rule is this: If the nativity be diurnal, for the father, observe the degree the Sun is in, in the child’s nativity; and make that the degree ascending for the father; and conformable to that, order the cusps of all the other houses. If for the mother, use Venus. But if the nativity be nocturnal, for the father, take the place of Saturn; and for the mother, that of the Moon.” Whalley adds, that what in this chapter hath relation to the parents, is what shall happen to them after the nativity, and not before.

[126] In this passage, Whalley notes that “Ptolemy teaches that, from the child's birth, one can create charts for the father and mother, and judge their situations as if they were their own charts; the guideline is this: If the birth is during the day, for the father, look at the degree the Sun is in at the child's birth; use that degree as the rising sign for the father; and accordingly, arrange the cusps of all the other houses. For the mother, use Venus. But if the birth occurs at night, for the father, take the position of Saturn; and for the mother, that of the Moon.” Whalley adds that what this chapter reveals about the parents refers to what will happen to them after the birth, not before.

[127] Or, at the actual time of nativity.

[127] Or, at the actual time of birth.

[128] In spite of this declaration of the author, it seems, by Whalley’s note on this chapter, that Cardan maintained that the particular circumstances, liable to affect the brothers and sisters, might be inferred by adopting, as an ascendant, the degree of the planet holding chief dominion over the place of brethren, and erecting a scheme thereby; in a mode similar to that allowed by Ptolemy in the case of the parents.

[128] In spite of this statement from the author, it appears, according to Whalley's note on this chapter, that Cardan argued that the specific situations affecting siblings could be determined by using, as a reference point, the position of the planet that has the greatest influence over the house of siblings and creating a chart based on that, much like what Ptolemy permitted for parents.

[129] That is to say, from the angles in quartile (and therefore hostile also) to the mid-heaven.

[129] In other words, from the angles in the fourth quarter (and thus also antagonistic) to the zenith.

[130] The text does not show whether it be necessary that Saturn and Mars should both be in the ascendant, in order to produce the effect described; nor whether the same effect would not follow, if one of them should be in the ascendant, and the other in the occidental angle, or even in some other position.

[130] The text doesn't indicate whether it's necessary for both Saturn and Mars to be rising to create the described effect; nor does it clarify if the same effect would occur if one is rising while the other is in the western angle, or in some other position.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

[132] The planet here alluded to, seems to be that which may be connected with most of the ruling places.

[132] The planet mentioned here appears to be the one that's linked to most of the governing locations.

[133] I have looked in many other books for this word “Anactores” (plural of ανακτωρ), as designating three particular individuals born at the same birth; for which signification it is here used by Ptolemy; but my search has been in vain. Cicero has, however, written a passage, in which a word, very nearly resembling it, occurs, and which would seem to relate to the very persons alluded to by Ptolemy: viz. “The godship of the Dioscuri was established in various modes among the Greeks, and applied to various persons. One set consisted of three persons, who were styled at Athens the Anactes, and were the sons of Jupiter, the most ancient king, and Proserpine; their several names were Tritopatreus, Eubuleus and Dionysius.” De Nat. Deor., lib. 3, cap. 21.

[133] I've searched through many other books for the word “Anactores" (the plural of ανακτωρ) to identify three specific individuals born at the same time; this is how Ptolemy uses it here, but my search has been unsuccessful. However, Cicero wrote a passage that contains a word very similar to it, which seems to refer to the very individuals mentioned by Ptolemy: “The godship of the Dioscuri was established in different ways among the Greeks and applied to various people. One group consisted of three individuals who were called the Anactes in Athens and were the sons of Jupiter, the ancient king, and Proserpine; their names were Tritopatreus, Eubuleus, and Dionysius.” De Nat. Deor., lib. 3, cap. 21.

[134] This is the second set of the Dioscuri, as stated by Cicero: they were the children of the third, or Cretan Jupiter (the son of Saturn) and Leda; their names were Castor, Pollux, and Helena. Helena, however, is not mentioned by Cicero.

[134] This is the second group of the Dioscuri, as Cicero mentioned: they were the kids of the third, or Cretan Jupiter (the son of Saturn) and Leda; their names were Castor, Pollux, and Helena. However, Helena isn't mentioned by Cicero.

[135] Core is a name of Proserpine; Liber, of Bacchus. And, although the mention here made of Ceres, Proserpine and Bacchus, as being the offspring of one and the same birth, does not accord with the usual notion of the genealogy of these divinities, it seems that Ptolemy did not so represent them without some reason. For, in cap. 24, lib. 2, De Nat. Deor., Cicero speaks of Liber as having been deified conjointly with Ceres and Libera (another name of Proserpine); and adds, that “it may be understood, from the rites and mysteries of the worship, how the deification took place.” It appears also, by Davies’s notes on Cicero, that Livy and Tacitus both speak of the copartnership in divinity exercised by Liber, Libera and Ceres. There is not, however, any occasion at present to dive deeper into the question of the generation of these deities; for our author has advertised to them only to point out that so many males or females will be produced at one birth, under certain configurations of the stars.

[135] Core is another name for Proserpine; Liber is Bacchus. Although the reference to Ceres, Proserpine, and Bacchus as being born from the same origin doesn’t match the usual understanding of these gods’ genealogy, it seems Ptolemy had good reason for this view. In chapter 24, book 2 of De Nat. Deor., Cicero mentions that Liber was deified along with Ceres and Libera (another name for Proserpine) and adds that “it can be understood from the rituals and mysteries of worship how their deification occurred.” Additionally, from Davies’s notes on Cicero, Livy and Tacitus also talk about the shared divine nature of Liber, Libera, and Ceres. However, there’s no need to explore the origins of these deities in detail right now; our author has only referenced them to illustrate that a certain number of males or females can be produced at one birth under specific star configurations.

[136] Whalley says here, “chiefly the ascendant and mid-heaven.”

[136] Whalley says here, “mainly the ascendant and midheaven.”

[137] Whichever might have been nearer in time.

[137] Whichever one was closer in time.

[138] It is perhaps superfluous to mention that the two kinds of animals here named (as well as many others) were venerated by the Ægyptians.

[138] It's probably unnecessary to say that the two types of animals mentioned here (along with many others) were honored by the Egyptians.

[139] The Greek says “enigmatical.”

The Greek says "mysterious."

[140] One Latin translation has rendered this word “stammerers”; and, as Harpocrates was the god of silence, Ptolemy has probably used the epithet to signify defect of speech.

[140] One Latin translation has translated this word as “stammerers”; and, since Harpocrates was the god of silence, Ptolemy likely used this term to indicate a speech impairment.

[141] “Dumb.” The Greek is οδοντων εςερημενον, “deprived of teeth,” and Allatius has so translated it: but other translations render these words by dumb, which, considering the nature of Mercury, seems their preferable signification.

[141] “Dumb.” The Greek is οδοντων εςερημενον, “deprived of teeth,” and Allatius has translated it that way; however, other translations interpret these words as dumb, which, given Mercury's nature, seems to be the more fitting meaning.

[142] A prorogator is either a luminary, planet, or a certain degree of the zodiac, which determines the duration of life, or the time of the accomplishment of any event: it is hereafter fully treated of in the 13th Chapter of this Book; which shows that, in the instance now mentioned, it would be a luminary, either in the ascendant, or in the mid-heaven.

[142] A prorogator is a star, planet, or a specific degree of the zodiac that determines how long someone will live or when an event will happen. This is explored in detail in the 13th Chapter of this Book, which indicates that, in the case mentioned, it would be a star, either rising or at the highest point in the sky.

[143] The epithet anæretic is a term of art, adopted from the Greek, signifying fatal, or destructive.

[143] The term anæretic is a specialized word, borrowed from Greek, meaning fatal or destructive.

[144] The Latin translation, printed at Perugio in 1646, has here the following passage in addition: “But it must be seen which luminary may follow the other in the succession of the signs; for if the Moon should so follow the Sun, the part of Fortune is also to be numbered from the horoscope or ascendant, according to the succession of the signs. But if the Moon precede the Sun, the part of Fortune must be numbered from the ascendant, contrary to the succession of the signs.”

[144] The Latin translation, printed in Perugia in 1646, includes the following passage: “But it needs to be determined which celestial body follows the other in the order of the signs; for if the Moon follows the Sun, the part of Fortune should also be calculated from the horoscope or ascendant, according to the order of the signs. But if the Moon precedes the Sun, the part of Fortune must be calculated from the ascendant, against the order of the signs.”

There is a long dissertation on the part of Fortune, in Cooper’s Placidus, from pp. 308 to 318; and, among the directions there given for computing its situation, the following seem the most accurate and simple: viz. “In the diurnal geniture, the Sun’s true distance from the east is to be added to the Moon’s right ascension, and in the nocturnal, subtracted; for the number thence arising will be the place and right ascension of the part of Fortune: and it always has the same declination with the Moon, both in number and name, wherever it is found. Again, let the Sun’s oblique ascension, taken in the ascendant, be subtracted always from the oblique ascendant of the ascendant, as well in the day as in the night, and the remaining difference be added to the Moon’s right ascension; the sum will be the right ascension of the part of Fortune, which will have the Moon’s declination.” It is shown also by this dissertation, that the situation of the part of Fortune must be necessarily confined to the lunar parallels; that it can but rarely be in the ecliptic; and that its latitude is ever varying. Cooper also adds, from Cardan’s Commentaries on the Tetrabiblos, that “if the Moon is going from the conjunction to the opposition of the Sun, then the Moon follows the Sun, and the part of Fortune is always under the Earth, from the ascendant; but if the Moon has passed the opposition, she goes before the Sun, and the part of Fortune is before the ascendant, and always above the earth.” This remark of Cardan’s is, in effect, exactly equivalent to what is stated in the additional passage inserted in the Perugio Latin translation, and given above.

There’s a detailed discussion about the Part of Fortune in Cooper’s Placidus, from pages 308 to 318. Among the instructions provided for calculating its position, the following seem to be the most accurate and straightforward: “In the diurnal chart, add the Sun’s true distance from the east to the Moon’s right ascension, and in the nocturnal chart, subtract it; the resulting number will indicate the position and right ascension of the Part of Fortune: it always shares the same declination as the Moon, both in value and name, regardless of its location. Also, always subtract the Sun’s oblique ascension, obtained in the ascendant, from the oblique ascendant of the ascendant, during both day and night, and add the difference to the Moon’s right ascension; the total will be the right ascension of the Part of Fortune, which will share the Moon’s declination.” This discussion also demonstrates that the location of the Part of Fortune must be limited to the lunar parallels; it can only rarely be on the ecliptic; and its latitude is constantly changing. Cooper further includes, from Cardan’s Commentaries on the Tetrabiblos, that “if the Moon is moving from conjunction to opposition with the Sun, then the Moon trails behind the Sun, and the Part of Fortune is always below the Earth, relative to the ascendant; but if the Moon has already passed the opposition, she moves ahead of the Sun, and the Part of Fortune is positioned before the ascendant, always above the Earth.” This observation from Cardan is essentially equivalent to what is stated in the additional passage included in the Perugio Latin translation, as mentioned above.

In the Primum Mobile of Placidus (Cooper’s translation, p. 45), the following remark and example are given: “The part of Fortune is placed according to the Moon’s distance from the Sun; and you must observe what rays the Moon has to the Sun, for the latter ought to have the same, and with the same excess or deficiency, as the part of Fortune to the horoscope. As the Moon is to the Sun, so is the part of Fortune to the horoscope; and as the Sun is to the horoscope, so is the Moon to the part of Fortune. So, in the nativity of Charles V, the Moon applies to the ultimate sextile of the Sun, but with a deficiency of 7° 45′: I subtract the 7° 45′ from 5° 34′ of Scorpio, the ultimate sextile to the horoscope, and the part of Fortune is placed in 28° 9′ of Libra.” N.B.—In this nativity, according to Placidus, the Sun is in the second house, in 14° 30′ of Pisces: the Moon in the ascendant, in 6° 45′ of Capricorn; the ascendant is 5° 34′ of Capricorn; and the part Fortune is in the ninth house, in 28° 9′ of Libra.

In the Primum Mobile of Placidus (Cooper’s translation, p. 45), the following comment and example are provided: “The part of Fortune is determined by the Moon’s distance from the Sun; and you need to consider what aspects the Moon has to the Sun, for the latter should have the same aspects, with the same excess or deficiency, as the part of Fortune to the horoscope. Just as the Moon relates to the Sun, the part of Fortune relates to the horoscope; and as the Sun relates to the horoscope, the Moon relates to the part of Fortune. For example, in the nativity of Charles V, the Moon makes an ultimate sextile to the Sun, but with a deficiency of 7° 45′: I subtract the 7° 45′ from 5° 34′ of Scorpio, which is the ultimate sextile to the horoscope, placing the part of Fortune at 28° 9′ of Libra.” N.B.—In this nativity, according to Placidus, the Sun is in the second house at 14° 30′ of Pisces; the Moon is in the ascendant at 6° 45′ of Capricorn; the ascendant is at 5° 34′ of Capricorn; and the part of Fortune is in the ninth house at 28° 9′ of Libra.

[145] According to her position in the scheme of the nativity.

[145] According to her role in the context of the birth.

[146] Placidus, in remarking on the nativity of John di Colonna, after stating his opinion that it is an error to suppose that a malign influence to the horoscope, when the horoscope has not the primary signification of life is anæretic, says, that “the order and method which Ptolemy lays down for the election of a prorogator are quite absurd, unless life be at the disposal of a sole prime significator only.” He proves by other arguments also, and by instances of the fact, that “one only signifies life, elected according to Ptolemy’s method.” (Cooper’s translation, p. 184.)

[146] Placidus, commenting on the birth of John di Colonna, states that it's a mistake to think a negative influence affects the horoscope when the horoscope does not have the main indication of life. He argues that “the system and approach Ptolemy describes for choosing a significator are completely unreasonable, unless life is determined by a single primary significator.” He supports this with additional arguments and real-life examples, claiming that “only one represents life, chosen according to Ptolemy’s method.” (Cooper’s translation, p. 184.)

[147]Horary proportion.” So the Perugio Latin of 1646; the Greek word, however, is ωριμαιαν, which seems to be compounded of ωρα and ιμαω; and, if so, the literal signification would be “extraction of hours.”

[147]Horary proportion.” This is from the Perugio Latin of 1646; however, the Greek term is ωριμαιαν, which appears to be a combination of ωρα and ιμαω; if that's the case, the literal meaning would be “extraction of hours.”

[148] By the apparent motion of the planetary system. On this passage, Placidus has the following observations: “In directing the significator to the west, you must consider what stars or mundane rays are intercepted between the significator and the west; if fortunate, add their arc to the significator’s arc of direction to the west; if unfortunate, subtract it from the same, and it will give the arc of direction, augmented or diminished according to Ptolemy. How largely and differently authors have spoken of this direction of the significator to the west, putting various constructions on the words of Ptolemy, is known to every one. See Cardan in his Commentaries, Maginus in Prim. Mob. and the Use of Legal Astrology in Physic, c. viii, where he delivers the sentiments of Naibod. Argol censures wholly this doctrine of Ptolemy’s, of directing the moderator of life to the west, as vain and useless; but I say it is worthy of remark, and altogether comformable to truth; because then the rays and intermediate stars of the malign only lessen the arc of direction to the west, and do not destroy life, when, by a right direction, the moderator or life does not remain at the same time with the malignant planet: for, should this happen, they kill, without any manner of doubt.” (Cooper’s translation, pp. 106 and 108.)

[148] By the apparent movement of the planetary system. In this passage, Placidus makes the following observations: “When directing the significator to the west, you need to consider which stars or worldly rays are in the way between the significator and the west; if they are favorable, add their arc to the significator’s arc of direction to the west; if they are unfavorable, subtract it from the same, and it will give the arc of direction, increased or decreased according to Ptolemy. It is well known how extensively and differently authors have discussed this direction of the significator to the west, interpreting Ptolemy’s words in various ways. Refer to Cardan in his Commentaries, Maginus in Prim. Mob., and the Use of Legal Astrology in Physic, c. viii, where he shares Naibod’s views. Argol completely criticizes this doctrine of Ptolemy regarding directing the moderator of life to the west as foolish and pointless; however, I believe it deserves attention and is entirely aligned with the truth; because in this case, the rays and intermediate stars of the unfavorable merely reduce the arc of direction to the west and do not end life, provided that through correct direction, the moderator of life does not coincide with the malignant planet at the same time: for if this occurs, they will undoubtedly cause death.” (Cooper’s translation, pp. 106 and 108.)

[149]Horary times.” These are the number of equatorial degrees which any degree of the zodiac may appear, in a certain latitude on the earth, to transit in an equatorial hour.

[149]Horary times.” These are the number of equatorial degrees that any degree of the zodiac may seem to move through in an equatorial hour at a specific latitude on Earth.

[150] By the apparent motion of the planetary system.

[150] By the visible movement of the planetary system.

[151] In reference to this passage, Placidus, in speaking of the death of Octavian Vestrius of Rome, has these words: “the Moon is found in a parallel declination of Mars, and Saturn with the opposition of Mars; the sextile of Jupiter to the Sun could give no assistance, because Jupiter is cadent, and the ray sextile is very weak, especially when it is the principal ray: for which reason, Ptolemy, in the chapter of Life, when he mentions the planets that are able to save in the courses of the infortunes, does not name the sextile, but the quartile, trine, and opposition; because the sextile ray is feeble, particularly when it is less than 60°: neither could Venus assist, as she was cadent from the house, and in a sign inimical to the Sun,” &c. (Cooper’s Translation, p. 286.)

[151] Regarding this passage, Placidus, while discussing the death of Octavian Vestrius of Rome, states: “the Moon aligns parallel to Mars, and Saturn opposes Mars; the sextile from Jupiter to the Sun provides no help because Jupiter is in a weakened position, and the sextile aspect is very weak, especially when it is the main aspect: for this reason, Ptolemy, in the chapter on Life, when he talks about the planets that can help during unfortunate times, does not mention the sextile but rather the square, trine, and opposition; because the sextile aspect is weak, particularly when it is less than 60°: nor could Venus offer support, as she is in a weakened position from her house and in a sign hostile to the Sun,” &c. (Cooper’s Translation, p. 286.)

[152] Literally, and perhaps more properly, “its meeter.”

[152] Basically, and maybe more accurately, “its meter.”

[153] That is to say, orbs, in contradistinction to prorogations made by aspects or degrees merely.

[153] In other words, orbs, unlike extensions that are determined only by aspects or degrees.

[154] Of the stars and places brought into configuration.

[154] Of the stars and locations brought into alignment.

[155] Whalley’s translation of this passage is in direct contradiction to the sense: and even that of Allatius, as well as other Latin ones, are (if strictly correct) confused in their meaning.

[155] Whalley’s translation of this passage directly contradicts the meaning, and even Allatius's translation, along with other Latin versions, are (if taken literally) unclear in their interpretation.

[156]Ascensional times.” These are, in other words, the number of degrees of the equator, equivalent to a certain number of zodiacal degrees, ascending in any particular latitude. They are also otherwise called the oblique ascension of such zodiacal degrees.

[156]Ascensional times.” In other words, these are the number of degrees of the equator that correspond to a specific number of zodiacal degrees, rising at any given latitude. They are also known as the oblique ascension of those zodiacal degrees.

[157]Equatorial times” here signify degrees of the equator, by which all time is measured.

[157]Equatorial times” here refer to degrees of the equator, which serve as the basis for measuring all time.

[158] That is to say, of the preceding and of the succeeding body of degree.

[158] In other words, of the earlier and later body of degree.

[159] Which may be intercepted in the arc between them.

[159] Which can be intercepted in the space between them.

[160] This number is that of the oblique descensional times of the intercepted arc, or of the oblique ascensional times of the arc opposite to it. The whole of the instructions in this paragraph are fully exemplified in the following chapter.

[160] This number represents the slant descent times of the intercepted arc, or the slant ascent times of the opposite arc. All the instructions in this paragraph are thoroughly illustrated in the next chapter.

[161] Or, times to be reckoned in another manner.

[161] Or, times to be considered in a different way.

[162] On this passage, there has been founded (to use Whalley’s words) “what we call Mundane Parallels, or parallels in the world. And, as zodiacal parallels are equal distances from the tropical or equinoctial circles, so mundane parallels are a like equal distance from the horizontal or meridianal points or circles. And as zodiacal parallels are measured by the zodiacal circle, so those mundane parallels are measured by the diurnal or nocturnal arcs: and just so long as the Sun or any other planet is, in proceeding from the cusp of the twelfth House to the cusp of the tenth, the same Sun or other planet will be in proceeding from the cusp of the tenth to the cusp of the eighth House. And the distance between Sun-rising and setting, is the diurnal arc which the meridian cuts in two equal parts. In directions, these mundane parallels have a twofold consideration: first, simple; secondly, according to the rapt motion of the earth, or the primum mobile: all which have been largely explained by the learned Monk, Placidus,” &c. That Author has certainly stated, in one of his Theses, that “those seats, or parts of the circle, are to be received, in which the stars, having a different declination, effect equal temporal hours” (p. 22, Cooper’s Translation), and he has fully exemplified this principle in other parts of his “Primum Mobile”; but Ptolemy here speaks only of one of the semicircles between the horizon and meridian, without reference to any other semicircle, corresponding in distance from the horizon and mid-heaven; and all that he has said on the subject amounts only to this, that the prorogation is completed when the succeeding place arrives at the same semicircle on which the preceding place had been posited.

[162] In this section, it has been found (to use Whalley’s words) “what we call Mundane Parallels, or parallels in the world. And, just as zodiacal parallels are equal distances from the tropical or equinoctial circles, mundane parallels are at the same equal distance from the horizontal or meridianal points or circles. Similarly, zodiacal parallels are measured by the zodiacal circle, while those mundane parallels are measured by the diurnal or nocturnal arcs: and as long as the Sun or any other planet moves from the cusp of the twelfth House to the cusp of the tenth, the same Sun or planet will be moving from the cusp of the tenth to the cusp of the eighth House. The distance between sunrise and sunset is the diurnal arc that the meridian divides into two equal parts. In terms of directions, these mundane parallels involve two considerations: first, the simple one; secondly, according to the rapid motion of the earth, or the primum mobile: all of which has been extensively explained by the learned monk, Placidus,” etc. That author has certainly stated, in one of his theses, that “those seats, or parts of the circle, are to be accepted, in which the stars, having different declinations, produce equal temporal hours” (p. 22, Cooper’s Translation), and he has thoroughly demonstrated this principle in other parts of his “Primum Mobile”; however, Ptolemy here speaks only of one of the semicircles between the horizon and meridian, without referencing any other semicircle that corresponds in distance from the horizon and midheaven; and all that he has said on the subject comes down to this: the prorogation is complete when the succeeding place reaches the same semicircle where the preceding place had been located.

[163] The ascendant, mid-heaven, and western horizon; as mentioned in the preceding paragraph.

[163] The rising sign, highest point in the sky, and western horizon; as mentioned in the previous paragraph.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

[165] This, in the Northern Hemisphere, would be the latitude of Alexandria (where Ptolemy flourished), or, in his own words, that of the 3rd Climate, passing through Lower Egypt, numbered 30° 22′.—Vide extracts from the Tables of the Almagest, inserted in the Appendix.

[165] This, in the Northern Hemisphere, would be the latitude of Alexandria (where Ptolemy thrived), or, in his own words, that of the 3rd Climate, passing through Lower Egypt, at 30° 22′.—Vide extracts from the Tables of the Almagest, included in the Appendix.

[166] This is the magnitude of the diurnal temporal hour of the first point of Gemini in the latitude prescribed.

[166] This refers to the duration of the daily time period at the first point of Gemini for the specified latitude.

[167] By right ascension, as shown by the Extract, inserted in the Appendix, from the Tables of Ascensions in the Almagest. The exact distance, however, according to that Table, is 147° 44′.

[167] By right ascension, as shown by the Extract included in the Appendix, from the Tables of Ascensions in the Almagest. The exact distance, however, according to that Table, is 147° 44′.

[168] Or rather, according to the Table, 102° 39′.

[168] Or rather, according to the Table, 102° 39′.

[169] That is to say, of the oblique ascension, which is here required to be reckoned; because the prorogatory and preceding place is in the ascendant. Vide p. 95, and Note ² in p. 94. And the first point of Gemini, on arriving at the ascendant, will be distant from the mid-heaven 102° 39′ by right ascension; the 13th degree of Aquarius being then in culmination in the prescribed latitude. The oblique ascensions in the latitude 30° 22′ N. are also shown in the extract referred to in the preceding note: and it thereby appears, that Aries and Taurus ascend in 45° 5′, instead of 46°.

[169] In other words, we need to consider the oblique ascension here; because the prior position is in the ascendant. Vide p. 95, and Note ² in p. 94. When the first point of Gemini reaches the ascendant, it will be 102° 39′ away from the mid-heaven by right ascension, with the 13th degree of Aquarius reaching its peak at the specified latitude. The oblique ascensions for latitude 30° 22′ N are also detailed in the referenced extract from the previous note: it shows that Aries and Taurus ascend at 45° 5′, not 46°.

[170] Or, rather, 57° 44′—by right ascension.—Vide extract above referred to.

[170] Or, more specifically, 57° 44′—by right ascension.—See the extract mentioned above.

[172] Or on the cusp of the 7th House.

[172] Or at the edge of the 7th House.

[173] Or, rather, 32° 16′—by right ascension again.—Vide extract as before.

[173] Or, rather, 32° 16′—by right ascension again.—See extract as before.

[174] By right ascension. The amount according to the Table is, however, 102° 39′, as before stated.

[174] By right ascension. According to the Table, the amount is 102° 39′, as mentioned earlier.

[175] On which the 10th degree of Virgo will then be posited.

[175] Where the 10th degree of Virgo will be positioned.

[176] By oblique descension and ascension: Vide p.95.—The Table shows the amount to be 70° 23′.

[176] By indirect descent and ascent: Vide p.95.—The Table shows the amount to be 70° 23′.

[177] In reference to p. 95, and Note ¹ in the same page.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ About __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, and __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

[178] The 18th degree of Cancer being then in culmination.

[178] The 18th degree of Cancer is currently at its peak.

[179] Or semi-diurnal arcs, each equal to six temporal hours.

[179] Or semi-diurnal arcs, each lasting six hours.

[180] The amount of the progressive difference of the times of prorogation, as here mentioned, is of course only applicable to the parallel of declination of the first point of Gemini, in the latitude before quoted. It must necessarily vary in all other parallels of declination, and also in all other latitudes.

[180] The amount of the progressive difference in the times of prorogation mentioned here only applies to the declination parallel of the first point of Gemini at the latitude previously stated. It will naturally vary in all other declination parallels and across different latitudes.

[181] Oblique ascension.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Slanting rise.

[182] The times of oblique descension of any arc of the zodiac are equal to the times of oblique ascension of its opposite arc; as before explained.

[182] The periods of slanted descent for any zodiac sign are equal to the periods of slanted ascent for its opposite sign, as explained earlier.

[183] That is to say, at the time of the 1st point of Aries transiting the cusp of each angle respectively.

[183] That is to say, at the time of the 1st point of Aries moving over the edge of each angle, respectively.

[184] The calculation of time may be greatly facilitated by the use of a zodiacal planisphere, said to have been invented about thirty years ago by Mr. Ranger, who died without making his invention public. The invention consists of a set of instruments perfectly adapted, as far as relates to the zodiac, for astronomical, as well as astrological, purposes; and the completeness with which it solves, in the most intelligible and expeditious manner, all the astronomical problems of the zodiac, deserves attention. Whether a similar planisphere was known in the days of Placidus, I am not aware; but it is worthy of remark that the following words occur in his “Primum Mobile,” and seem almost to have been predicted of Mr. Ranger’s planisphere:—“If any one would provide himself with a Ptolemaic planisphere, with the horary circles, crepuscules, the zodiac’s latitude, and all other things requisite, it would be of very great service towards foreseeing the aspects.” (Cooper’s Translation, p. 87.) In the Appendix will be found a plate, containing diagrams drawn by the instruments in question, which, though not completely filled up, will show how easily, and, at the same time, how accurately, the measure of time in directions may be ascertained. The said diagrams have been adapted to the “exemplification” here given by Ptolemy; one of them being laid down for the latitude of Alexandria, and the other for the latitude of southern Britain (51° 30′ N.), with similar positions of the preceding and succeeding places adverted to in the text.

[184] Calculating time can be greatly simplified using a zodiac planisphere, which was invented about thirty years ago by Mr. Ranger, who passed away without publicly sharing his invention. This invention includes a set of tools that are perfectly suited for both astronomical and astrological purposes concerning the zodiac. The thoroughness with which it addresses and solves all the astronomical questions of the zodiac in a clear and efficient way is noteworthy. I'm not sure if a similar planisphere existed during Placidus's time, but it's interesting to note that the following words appear in his “Primum Mobile,” and seem almost to have predicted Mr. Ranger’s planisphere:—“If anyone would get a Ptolemaic planisphere with horary circles, crepuscules, the zodiac’s latitude, and all other necessary elements, it would greatly help in predicting the aspects.” (Cooper’s Translation, p. 87.) In the Appendix will be found a plate, there are diagrams created with these instruments, which, although not fully completed, will demonstrate how easily and accurately the measurement of time in different directions can be determined. These diagrams have been adapted to the “exemplification” provided by Ptolemy; one is designed for the latitude of Alexandria, and the other for the latitude of southern Britain (51° 30′ N.), along with similar locations mentioned in the text.

[185] These meetings and descensions are technically termed “directions.”

[185] These meetings and descensions are technically called “directions.”

[186] On these words Placidus has the following remark: “The revolutions may possess some virtue, but only according to the constitution of the stars to the places of the prorogators of the nativity, and their places of direction, but no farther; as Ptolemy was of opinion, and briefly expresses himself in his Chapter of Life. ‘Those who are afflicted, both in the places and conclusions of the years, by the revolution of the stars infecting the principal places, have reason to expect certain death.’” (Cooper’s Translation, p. 127.)

[186] Placidus comments on these words: “The revolutions may have some power, but only based on the position of the stars relating to the birth chart and their directional points, and no more; as Ptolemy believed and summarized in his Chapter of Life. ‘Those who are troubled, both in the positions and outcomes of the years, by the influence of the stars affecting the key positions, should be prepared for certain death.’” (Cooper’s Translation, p. 127.)

[187] Of the significators before mentioned.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ About the significators mentioned earlier.

[188] That of the ascendant, and that of the Moon.

[188] The one of the rising sign, and the one of the Moon.

[189] The original word is (in the accusative plural) αιγοηους, which Allatius has rendered, by “pedibus caprinis,” goat-footed, as if it were compounded of αιξ capra and πους pes; but the preferable derivation seems to be from αιξ and ωψ vultus; meaning “goat-faced.”

[189] The original word is (in the accusative plural) αιγοηους, which Allatius has translated as “pedibus caprinis,” goat-footed, as if it were a combination of αιξ capra and πους pes; however, the better interpretation seems to come from αιξ and ωψ vultus, meaning “goat-faced.”

[190] From any one of the said planets.

From any of those planets.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

[192] The Greek is ποιουμενοι φασεις; literally “making apparition”; but the subsequent context seems to require the meaning I have adopted.

[192] The Greek is ποιουμενοι φασεις; literally “making apparition”; but the following context seems to need the meaning I have chosen.

[193] The parts of the signs in which the planets are posited.

[193] The sections of the signs where the planets are located.

[194] For the operative qualities of the other constellations, vide Chapters X and XI, Book I.

[194] For the practical aspects of the other constellations, see Chapters X and XI, Book I.

[195] The sixth house.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ The 6th house.

[196] This seems to imply, if Saturn be in one of Venus’s places of dignity, and Venus in one of Saturn’s. Such a counterposition is technically termed “mutual reception.”

[196] This suggests that if Saturn is in one of Venus's strong positions, and Venus is in one of Saturn's, this situation is technically called "mutual reception."

[197] In her extreme latitude, whether north or south.

[197] In her farthest reaches, whether to the north or south.

[198] Της ιερας νοσου; literally, “the holy disease,” which authors have explained to mean epilepsy. Perhaps the disease was anciently called holy, because the patient, when possessed by the fit, seemed to be under the influence of some supernatural agency.

[198] Της ιερας νοσου; literally, “the holy disease,” which authors have explained to mean epilepsy. Perhaps the disease was called holy in ancient times because the patient, during a seizure, appeared to be under the influence of some supernatural force.

[199] That is to say, in the commencement of her separation from the aspect or conjunction of such stars.

[199] In other words, at the beginning of her separation from the appearance or alignment of those stars.

[200] The Greek is μεταμελητικους, which means “penitent,” or “prone to repentance,” or “to subsequent regret.” It is difficult to convey its precise meaning in the text.

[200] The Greek term is μεταμελητικους, which translates to "penitent," or "likely to repent," or "experiencing regret afterwards." It's challenging to capture its exact meaning in the text.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

[202] That of Mercury, and that of the Moon.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Mercury and the Moon.

[203] This seems to imply, if well placed in elevation; as, in the mid-heaven, for instance, or in a conspicuous situation; and in possession of dignities.

[203] This suggests that it should be positioned at a good height; for example, in the upper sky or in a noticeable location; and in a position of honor.

[204] Or, persons: the Greek is φιλοσωματους.

[204] Or, people: the Greek is φιλοσωματους.

[205] Or, persons: μισοσωματονς.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Or, people: μισοσωματονς.

[206] Πρσς μιξιν θηλειων και αρρενων διακειμενσυς.

[206] Πρσς μιξιν θηλειων και αρρενων διακειμενσυς.

[207] Προς αρρενας δε κεκιννμενους και ζηλοτυπους.

[207] For the men who are jealous and contentious.

[208] Παιδων διαφθορεας.

Children's abuser.

[209] That is to say, in her extreme latitude, whether south or north.

[209] That means, in her farthest reach, whether to the south or to the north.

[210] Epilepsy is defined to be “a conclusive motion of the whole body, or some parts of its parts, accompanied with a loss of sense.” The knowledge of this latter effect probably induced the author to rank it among diseases of the mind.

[210] Epilepsy is described as "a definite movement of the whole body or some parts of it, along with a loss of consciousness." Understanding this last effect likely led the author to categorize it as a mental disorder.

[211] Of Mercury, the Moon, and the ascendant.

[211] About Mercury, the Moon, and the rising sign.

[212] Εσπερινοι; perhaps, more properly, nocturnal; the word being used in contrast to ημερινοι, diurnal.

[212] Evening; perhaps more accurately, nighttime; the word is used in contrast to daytime, daytime.

[213] That is to say, such events as are independent of the will, and not necessarily consequent on any peculiar conformation of the mind or body.

[213] In other words, these events happen regardless of someone's intentions and are not necessarily linked to any specific way of thinking or physical condition.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

[215] I have considered the words, γυναικειων δωρερεων, as comprising “the dowry of wives,” as well as other “gifts from women.”

[215] I have thought about the words, γυναικειων δωρερεων, as meaning “the dowry of wives,” along with other “gifts from women.”

[216] That is to say, its duration will depend on the time requisite to complete the arc of direction or prorogation between the stars, operating the loss, and the places which give the wealth. And the calculation is to be made as pointed out in the 14th and 15th Chapters of the 3rd Book.

[216] In other words, how long it lasts will depend on the time needed to complete the path of movement or extension between the stars, the loss incurred, and the locations that provide wealth. The calculation should be done as explained in Chapters 14 and 15 of Book 3.

[217] It seems that there have been different opinions on this point. Placidus makes the following remark on the subject: “I do not take the dignities from the horoscope, but from the Sun and Medium Cœli, according to Ptolemy and others.” (Cooper’s Translation, p. 121.)

[217] It looks like there are varying opinions on this issue. Placidus comments on the topic: “I don't derive the dignities from the horoscope, but from the Sun and Medium Coeli, in line with Ptolemy and others.” (Cooper’s Translation, p. 121.)

[218] The Perugio Latin, of 1646, says, “If either both luminaries, or only that one of the chief quality” (which Whalley defines to be the Sun by day, and the Moon by night) “be in an angle,” &c.

[218] The Perugio Latin, from 1646, says, “If both luminaries are present, or if just one of the chief quality” (which Whalley identifies as the Sun during the day and the Moon at night) “is in an angle,” &c.

[219] Doryphory. Vide Chapter V of the 3rd Book On the present passage, Placidus has the following words: “You are not to observe what is generally alleged by professors, respecting the satellites” (quasi doryphory) “of the luminaries, for dignities; viz. that the satellites are those planets which are found within 30°, on either side of the luminaries; but that a satellite is (also) any kind of aspect of the stars to the luminaries of what kind soever: which, if it be made by application, its power extends inwardly over the whole orb of light of the aspecting planet, and the more so, as the proximity is greater; but, by separation, it is not so. This doctrine may be seen in several chapters of Ptolemy; for, an aspecting star influences the significator, and disposes him to produce effects co-natural to him, by a subsequent direction. But a star of no aspect does not predispose the significator, and produces very little or no effect of its nature, by a subsequent direction; this is the true doctrine of the stars.” (Cooper’s Translation, pp. 124, 125.)

[219] Doryphory. Vide Chapter V of the 3rd Book In the current passage, Placidus says: “Don’t pay attention to what professors usually claim about the satellites” (quasi doryphory) “of the luminaries for dignities; specifically, that the satellites are the planets located within 30° on either side of the luminaries. Rather, a satellite can be any kind of aspect of the stars to the luminaries, regardless of its nature: if this aspect occurs by application, its influence extends inwardly over the entire light of the aspecting planet, especially as they are closer together; but if it occurs by separation, this influence is lesser. This principle is detailed in several chapters of Ptolemy; for an aspecting star affects the significator and encourages him to produce results naturally aligned with him through a subsequent direction. However, a star without an aspect does not predispose the significator and has little to no effect of its nature through a subsequent direction; this is the true understanding of the stars.” (Cooper’s Translation, pp. 124, 125.)

[220] The angle of the mid-heaven; see the first note to this Chapter.

[220] The angle of the mid-heaven; see the first note to this Chapter.

[221] See the 4th Chapter of the 8th Book of the Almagest inserted in the Appendix.

[221] See Chapter 4 of Book 8 of the Almagest inserted in the Appendix.

[222] The Greek says merely “that one having the dominion,” without specifying the place of dominion: the Latin printed at Perugio, is, however, “dominum accipe medii cœli,” which is certainly the sense required by the tenor of the previous instructions. Whalley also has similarly rendered it.

[222] The Greek simply states “that one having the dominion,” without mentioning where the dominion is. However, the Latin published in Perugia says, “dominum accipe medii cœli,” which definitely conveys the meaning intended by the earlier instructions. Whalley has also interpreted it in a similar way.

[223] Among the ancients, a garland was an indispensable decoration at all public ceremonies, whether civil or religious, and at private banquets. The making of garlands was, therefore, a considerable employment.

[223] In ancient times, a garland was an essential decoration for all public ceremonies, both civil and religious, as well as for private celebrations. Consequently, creating garlands was a significant job.

[224] It would seem, from “garland-wearers” being placed here in connection with “prize-wrestlers” (αθληται), that the author intended to point out persons competent to obtain the victors’ wreath in public exhibitions. But it appears that the word σεφανηφορος, garland-wearer, also signifies a person who was annually chosen by the priests to superintend religious ceremonies, an office similar to that of high priest. According to Athenæus, the Stephanephorus of Tarsos was invested with a purple tunic, edged or striped with white, and wore the laurel chaplet, which Plato, in the treatise de Legibus, describes as being constantly worn by these officers, although the other priests wore it only during the performance of the ceremonies.

[224] It seems that the mention of "garland-wearers" alongside "prize-wrestlers" (αθληται) indicates that the author wanted to highlight individuals capable of winning the victor's wreath in public competitions. However, the term σεφανηφορος, garland-wearer, also refers to someone chosen each year by the priests to oversee religious ceremonies, a role similar to that of a high priest. According to Athenæus, the Stephanephorus of Tarsos wore a purple tunic with white edges or stripes and donned the laurel crown, which Plato describes in the treatise de Legibus as being worn consistently by these officials, while the other priests only wore it during the ceremonies.

[225] Meaning probably “if in mutual reception,” which position has been before explained.

[225] Meaning likely “if in mutual reception,” which position has been explained earlier.

[226] Or makers of hieroglyphics—ιερογλυφοι.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Or makers of hieroglyphs—ιερογλυφοι.

[227] That is to say, the mid-heaven; as stated in the 4th Chapter of the 3rd Book, and in the commencement of the present Chapter.

[227] In other words, the mid-heaven; as mentioned in Chapter 4 of Book 3, and at the beginning of this Chapter.

[228] This mode of divination, as practised by the Greeks, is mentioned by Potter. It is likewise described by a learned Doctor of Medicine, Geo. Pictorius Vigillanus (in his Treatise “de Speciebus Magiæ Ceremonialis,” printed at Strasburgh, 1531), as being used “when the fraudulent vanity of a dæmon renders things more like each other than eggs are to eggs.” And, according to this writer, it is practised by exorcising water, and pouring it into a basin, wherein the vain and refractory dæmon is immersed: the said dæmon will sometimes remain at the bottom, and sometimes raise himself to the surface, sending forth a slender hissing; out of which the desired responses are to be formed.

[228] This method of divination, as practiced by the Greeks, is mentioned by Potter. It is also described by a knowledgeable Doctor of Medicine, Geo. Pictorius Vigillanus (in his Treatise “de Speciebus Magiæ Ceremonialis,” printed in Strasburgh, 1531), stating that it is used “when the deceptive pride of a demon makes things look more alike than eggs do to each other.” According to this writer, it is performed by exorcising water and pouring it into a basin, where the vain and rebellious demon is submerged: the demon may sometimes stay at the bottom and at other times rise to the surface, releasing a faint hissing sound; from this, the desired answers are to be derived.

[229] Κρασεσι των χρωματων.—These words have been rendered literally, but they seem to contain some figurative meaning, rather than a literal one. Perhaps the preferable sense of them is, “by a mixture of views,” or “from various pursuits being blended together.”

[229] The colors of the wines.—These words have been taken literally, but they seem to hold some figurative meaning rather than a straightforward one. Perhaps a better interpretation of them is, “through a mix of perspectives,” or “from different interests being combined.”

[230] The words marked with inverted commas are not in the Greek; they are found, however, in two Latin translations; that of Basle, 1541, and that of Perugio, 1646.

[230] The words in quotation marks are not in Greek; however, they can be found in two Latin translations: the one from Basle, 1541, and the one from Perugio, 1646.

[231] In other Editions, “whether by conjunction or aspect.”

[231] In other editions, “whether by conjunction or aspect.”

[232]Saturn.” Not found in the Elzevir edition, but in others.

[232]Saturn.” Not included in the Elzevir edition, but present in others.

[233] The words thus marked “ ” are not found in the Elzevir edition, but appear in the Latin one of Basle, 1541.

[233] The words marked “ ” are not in the Elzevir edition, but they do appear in the Latin version from Basle, 1541.

[234] Πεpi παιδας επιθυμητικους.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ About desirable kids.

[235] That is to say, from the new and the full Moon.

[235] In other words, from the new Moon and the full Moon.

[236] By mutual reception; according to Whalley, and also according to the Latin copy of Perugio, 1646.

[236] By mutual agreement; as noted by Whalley, and also according to the Latin version of Perugio, 1646.

[237] Meaning, probably, if the Moon in the husband’s nativity should be in the same position as the Sun in the wife’s nativity, or harmoniously configurated with that position.

[237] This likely means that if the Moon in the husband's birth chart is in the same position as the Sun in the wife's birth chart, or in a harmonious aspect to it.

[238] The exaltation of Venus being in Pisces, and that of Mars in Capricorn. Vide Chapters XXI and XXII, Book I.

[238] The celebration of Venus in Pisces, and that of Mars in Capricorn. See Chapters XXI and XXII, Book I.

[239] Libra being Venus’s house, and in Saturn’s triplicity; and Capricorn being Saturn’s house, and in Venus’s triplicity. Vide Chapters XX and XXI, Book I.

[239] Libra is ruled by Venus and is associated with Saturn’s element; Capricorn is ruled by Saturn and is linked to Venus’s element. See Chapters XX and XXI, Book I.

[241] Instead of the Moon.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Instead of the Moon.

[243] Of the planets before specified.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ From the planets mentioned earlier.

[244] These are such signs as are connected with each other in any manner similar to that before described, as connecting Capricorn with Pisces, and with Libra; or, in other words, signs common to the planets configurated.

[244] These signs are related to each other in a way similar to what was described earlier, linking Capricorn with Pisces and Libra; in other words, signs that share a connection with the configured planets.

[245] The following also occurs here: “και ει μεν o εις τωνασερων δυτικος, o δε ετερος ανατολικος εσι, και προς ανδρας και γυναικας εσονται διακειμενοι, ουχ’ υπερβολικως δε, ει δε αμφοτεροι οι ασερες δυτικοι ευρεθωσι, προς μονον το θηλυ εσονται καταφερεις. θηλυκων δε των ζωδιων υπαρχοντων εν οις οι ασερες, και αυτοι παοχειν ανεξονται τα του θηλυος. ει δε αμφοτεροι ανατολικοι ωσι, προς μονον το αρρεν ερμητικως εξουσι. των δε ζωδιον αρσενικων οντων, προς πασαν αρσενικην ηλικιαν.”

[245] The following also occurs here: “If one is in the western position and the other is in the eastern position, they will relate to both men and women, but not excessively. However, if both are in the western position, they will only relate to the female. Among the female zodiac signs present in which the western positions are, they will be able to provide for the female. But if both are in the eastern position, they will exclusively relate to the male. As for the male zodiac signs, they pertain to all male ages.”

[246] To this the following sentence succeeds: εαν δε αρρενικως διακειμενοι ωσιν οι ασερες, και προς το ποιειυ.

[246] Following this, the next sentence states: if the males are disposed in a masculine way, and towards the act of doing.

[247] The angle of the mid-heaven.

[247] The angle of the high point in the sky.

[248] The meaning, apparent from the commencement of the chapter, is this: “Should such planets be in the mid-heaven or its succedent house, or configurated with either.”

[248] The meaning, clear from the start of the chapter, is this: “Should such planets be in the midheaven or its following house, or connected with either.”

[249] Μοναδικην, single, or one at a birth.

[249] Unique, single, or one at a birth.

[250] Διδυμογωνιαν, double, or two at a birth.

[250] Dichorionic, double, or two at a birth.

[251] That on the mid-heaven, and that on the eleventh house.

[251] That on the mid-heaven, and that on the eleventh house.

[252] Or, regard each other within the distance of seventeen degrees.

[252] Or, see each other within a distance of seventeen degrees.

[253] That is to say; if the places of the Sun, &c., in one nativity be configurated with such parts of the zodiac as are occupied by the Sun, &c., in the other nativity.

[253] In other words, if the positions of the Sun, etc., in one birth chart align with the parts of the zodiac that the Sun, etc., occupies in the other birth chart.

[254] Of any of the four places above described.

[254] Of any of the four locations described above.

[255] Than the rest of the places.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Than the other locations.

[256] Those of the Sun, Moon, Ascendant, and part of Fortune, as before mentioned.

[256] Those of the Sun, Moon, Ascendant, and Part of Fortune, as mentioned earlier.

[257] “—and the attachment, or disagreement, subsisting between them and their masters”;—so Allatius, and the Latin translation printed at Perugio.

[257] “—and the connection, or conflict, that exists between them and their masters”;—so Allatius, and the Latin translation published in Perugia.

[258] The twelfth house.

The 12th house.

[259] The probable meaning is, “if not acting in concert”: but the Latin of Perugio says, “si sint oppositi secundum longitudinem.”

[259] The likely meaning is, “if not working together”: but the Latin from Perugio says, “si sint oppositi secundum longitudinem.”

[260] There seems a misprint here in the original: δυσωδιων, “foul vapours,” instead of δυσοδων, “wildernesses.”

[260] It looks like there's a typo in the original: δυσωδιων, “foul vapours,” instead of δυσοδων, “wildernesses.”

[261] On the places indicative of travelling.

[261] About the locations that suggest travel.

[262] Vide the 14th Chapter of the 3rd Book; on the number of the modes of prorogation.

[262] See the 14th Chapter of the 3rd Book; regarding the number of ways to extend proceedings.

[263] That is to say, the sign and degree on the occidental horizon.

[263] In other words, the sign and degree on the western horizon.

[264] See a subsequent note, p. 135, which gives an instance of the mode in which Placidus applied the power of the terms, in an anæretic direction.

[264] See a later note, p. 135, which provides an example of how Placidus used the power of the terms in a direction that diminishes or reduces.

[265] Δια σηψεων. Perhaps more properly, putridity or rottenness. The Perugio Latin translation renders it by “cancer.”

[265] Δια σηψεων. Maybe more accurately, decay or rot. The Perugio Latin translation translates it as “cancer.”

[266] Placidus, in treating of the nativity of Lewis, Cardinal Zachia, uses these words: “This example also teaches us what the sentiments of Ptolemy were concerning a violent death; when, in a peremptory place, both the enemies meet together, it is to be understood, that in the nativity the violence is sometimes first pre-ordained from the unfortunate position of the Apheta; at other times quite the contrary. But, because the direct direction happened to be in the terms of Mercury, the sickness was attended with a delirium and lethargy, so that you may perceive this to have been the true cause of the native’s death.” (Cooper’s Translation, pp. 198, 199.)

[266] Placidus, when discussing the birth chart of Lewis, Cardinal Zachia, says: “This example also shows us what Ptolemy thought about violent death; when enemies confront each other directly, it suggests that in the natal chart, violence can sometimes be predetermined by the unfortunate position of the Apheta; at other times, it can be just the opposite. However, since the main influence was related to Mercury, the illness was accompanied by delirium and lethargy, so it’s clear that this was the real cause of the person’s death.” (Cooper’s Translation, pp. 198, 199.)

[267] Ειδε ανθωροσκοπησει προσοιον δηποτε των φωτων: which Allatius has translated, “if he should be in the ascendant opposed to either of the luminaries” (si in horoscopo alteri luminum opponatur); but the Latin copy of Basle, 1541, as well as that of Perugio, 1646, give the passage as now rendered. And it appears in a subsequent place, p. 201 (where the word ανθωροσκοπων occurs), that it can only be properly translated “in opposition to the ascendant.”

[267] If someone is in the ascendant opposing either of the lights: which Allatius has translated as, “if he should be in the ascendant opposed to either of the luminaries” (si in horoscopo alteri luminum opponatur); but the Latin copies from Basle, 1541, and Perugio, 1646, present the passage as currently rendered. And it appears later, on p. 201 (where the word ανθωροσκοπων occurs), that it can only be accurately translated as “in opposition to the ascendant.”

[268] Caput Medusæ.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Medusa's Head.

[269] Ανθωροσκοπων. Vide note ³ in p. 135.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Horoscopes. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

[270] That is to say, the lower heaven, or imum-cœli. Whalley has translated it, “above the earth,” instead of “below”; mistaking νπο for νπερ.

[270] That is to say, the lower heaven, or imum-cœli. Whalley has translated it, “above the earth,” instead of “below”; confusing νπο for νπερ.

[271] On this chapter Whalley makes the following annotations: “One direction, how malevolent soever, rarely kills; and, in most nativities, there is required a train of malevolent directions to concur to death: where several malevolent directions concur so together, without the aid of intervenings of the benevolents, they fail not to destroy life.”

[271] In this chapter, Whalley notes: “One harmful influence, no matter how bad, rarely leads to death; usually, it takes a series of negative influences to bring about a person's end. When multiple harmful influences align without any positive ones intervening, they surely cause destruction to life.”

“In such trains of directions, the author here distinguisheth between the killing planet and the causer of the quality of death; for one planet doth not give both. The foremost of the malevolent train is the killing place, and shows the time of death; but the following directions, though benevolent, show the quality. If the train fall altogether, and none follow, for the quality observe those which precede, though at a distance and benevolent also; for, though the benevolent contribute to the preservation of life, yet they frequently specify the disease which is the cause of death. And with these, our author tells us, concur the configurating stars, the quality of the stars and signs, and the terms in which the lords happen. In violent deaths, the genethliacal positions of the lights are to be observed, and how the malefics affect them, and (how they) are also concerned by directions in the quality or death.” See also Chap. XIV, Book II.

“In these instructions, the author distinguishes between the planet that causes death and the one that indicates the nature of death; one planet does not do both. The main source of malice points to the time of death, while the subsequent influences, though positive, indicate the nature of the death. If the influences completely fade away, and none follow, look to those that came before, even if they are further back and also positive; for while positive influences help maintain life, they often specify the illness that leads to death. Additionally, the author notes that the aligning stars, the qualities of the stars and signs, and the contexts in which the rulers operate are connected. In cases of violent death, it is important to observe the astrological positions of the key lights and how the harmful influences affect them, as well as how they are influenced by the directions concerning the nature of death.” See also Chap. XIV, Book II.

[272] With respect to the periodical divisions of time.

[272] Regarding the divisions of time into periods.

[273] It will, of course, be remembered, that the Sun, in the Ptolemaic astronomy, is counted as a planetary orb.

[273] It will, of course, be remembered that in Ptolemaic astronomy, the Sun is considered a planet.

[274] The Latin copy of Basle, 1541, says, “to marriages.”

[274] The Latin version from Basle, 1541, states, “to marriages.”

[275]Bodily,” or in conjunction.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ “Bodily,” or together.

[276] On this passage, Whalley remarks, “we are to observe in direction, that the star in exact ray with the prorogator shall be ruler until the prorogator meets another ray; that then the planet whose ray it is shall take the dominion, and so on. But if no planet aspect the hyleg (prorogator) exactly, that which casts its rays before the prorogator is to be taken for ruler of the time, till another planet’s ray comes in by direction. And the lord of the term, in which the direction falls, must be considered as a co-partner in this dominion.”

[276] In this passage, Whalley states, “we should note in direction that the star aligned with the prorogator will be the ruler until the prorogator encounters another ray; at that point, the planet associated with that ray will take over the dominion, and this process continues. However, if no planet is in a direct aspect to the hyleg (prorogator), the one whose rays are directed toward the prorogator should be considered the ruler for that time, until another planet's ray intervenes through direction. Additionally, the lord of the term in which the direction lands must be acknowledged as a co-partner in this dominion.”

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

[278] The Greek is simply εις τα επομενα κατα ξωδιον; but the context proves that the entire meaning must be as now given, although the Latin translation of Perugio renders it “one year to each degree.” Whalley explains that by annual periods “the author intends profections: for the taking of which, for every year from the birth, add one sign to the sign in which the aphetics are at birth, and the sign which ends at the year desired is the sign profectional for that year, and the lord of that sign is chronocrator (arbitor) for that year; so far as the degrees of that sign reach.” For example, if a prorogator at birth be in 15° of Gemini, to 15° of Cancer serves the first year; but the first six months are ruled by Mercury, and the last six by the Moon and Jupiter; and so on.

[278] The Greek is simply εις τα επομενα κατα ξωδιον; but the context shows that the full meaning must be understood as given now, even though Perugio's Latin translation renders it as “one year for each degree.” Whalley clarifies that by annual periods “the author means profections: for which, for every year from birth, you add one sign to the sign where the planets are at birth, and the sign that corresponds to the desired year is the sign for that year, with its ruler being the chronocrator (arbitor) for that year; as far as the degrees of that sign extend.” For example, if a planet at birth is at 15° of Gemini, then 15° of Cancer applies to the first year; however, the first six months are ruled by Mercury, and the last six by the Moon and Jupiter; and so forth.

[279] The Latin translation of Basle, 1541, says, “the lord of that sign in which the number shall terminate.”

[279] The Latin translation from Basel, 1541, says, “the lord of that sign where the number will end.”

[280] Whalley says here, “let a sign be added for each month to the sign of the year. So, in the example before proposed, the last 15° of Gemini, and the first 15° of Cancer, shall serve for the first month: the last 15° of Cancer and the first 15° of Leo, for the second month; and so on. And for days, from 15° of Gemini to 15° of Cancer, rules two days and eight hours after birth, &c.”

[280] Whalley says here, “let a sign be added for each month to the sign of the year. So, in the example proposed earlier, the last 15° of Gemini and the first 15° of Cancer will represent the first month; the last 15° of Cancer and the first 15° of Leo will represent the second month; and so on. And for days, from 15° of Gemini to 15° of Cancer, it governs two days and eight hours after birth, etc.”

Placidus is of opinion, “that Ptolemy, speaking of annual places, is to be understood of the places of secondary directions; and that when he speaks of the menstrual, he hints at the places of progressions.” (Cooper’s Translation, pp. 25 and 57.)

Placidus believes that “when Ptolemy talks about annual places, he’s referring to the places of secondary directions; and when he mentions the menstrual, he’s implying the places of progressions.” (Cooper’s Translation, pp. 25 and 57.)

[281] Placidus says, that “active ingresses, if they be similar, to the pre-ordained effects, cause them to influence; if dissimilar, they either diminish or retard; as Ptolemy has it in the last Chapter of Book IV.” (Cooper’s Translation, p. 27.)

[281] Placidus says that “active ingresses, if they match the pre-ordained effects, cause them to have an impact; if they don’t match, they either lessen or slow them down; as Ptolemy states in the last chapter of Book IV.” (Cooper’s Translation, p. 27.)

[282] Placidus observes, that “the primary directions of the significators to their promittors, and the lords of the terms, Ptolemy calls the General Arbiters of Times, because they pre-ordain the general times of their effects; which, as its motion is slow and its perseverance long, discovers its effects after a very long time; that is, after months and years. In order that we may know, in this extent of time, on what particular month and day the effects appear, Ptolemy proposes these motions for observation, wherein, when the majority of the causes agree together, then doubtless the effect is accomplished, or most clearly manifests itself.” (Cooper’s Translation, p. 109.) And he says afterwards, in speaking of secondary directions, progressions, ingresses, &c., “these subsequent motions of the causes demand our greatest attention.” (Ibid., p. 110.) In the Appendix to the same book, at p. 438, the proper equation of time, or measurement of the arcs of direction, is also treated of, in reference to the 16th canon of Placidus, which is as follows:—

[282] Placidus notes that “the primary movements of the significators towards their promittors, as well as the lords of the terms, are what Ptolemy refers to as the General Arbiters of Times. This is because they set the general times for their effects; since their motion is slow and lasts a long time, their effects become evident only after a significant period—specifically, after months and years. To determine specifically in which month and day the effects occur during this time frame, Ptolemy suggests observing these motions. When most of the causes align, then undoubtedly the effect is fulfilled or becomes clearly manifest.” (Cooper’s Translation, p. 109.) He later adds, while discussing secondary directions, progressions, ingresses, etc., “these additional movements of the causes require our utmost attention.” (Ibid., p. 110.) In the Appendix to the same book, on p. 438, the correct equation of time, or measurement of the arcs of direction, is also discussed concerning the 16th canon of Placidus, which is as follows:—

To equate the Arc of Direction. Add the arc of direction to the right ascension of the natal Sun; look for this sum in the table of right ascensions under the ecliptic, and take the degree and minute of longitude corresponding with that sum; then, in the best ephemeris, reckon in how many days and hours the Sun, from the day and hour of birth, has arrived at that degree and minute. The number of days indicate as many years; every two hours over, reckon a month.” (Ibid., p. 55.)

To determine the Arc of Direction. Add the arc of direction to the right ascension of the natal Sun; look for this total in the table of right ascensions under the ecliptic, and take the degree and minute of longitude that matches this total; then, in the best ephemeris, calculate how many days and hours it took for the Sun, from the day and hour of birth, to reach that degree and minute. The number of days indicates that many years; for every two hours over, count as a month. (Ibid., p. 55.)

[283] Whether general or annual.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Whether regular or yearly.

[284] That is to say, by the opposition, trine, &c.

[284] In other words, through opposition, trine, etc.

[285] On this side of the equator.

[285] On this side of the equator.

[286] Thus (according to the Table inserted at p. 152), in the climate or latitude of Lower Ægypt, the times of ascension between the first point of Gemini and the first point of Sagittarius, diametrically opposite, are 205° 18′, which, being divided by 15, give 13 hours 41 minutes and a fraction of equatorial time, as the length of the day of the first point of Gemini. And the same number of times of ascension, divided by 12, give 17° 6′ and a fraction of the equator, as the length of the diurnal temporal hour. In the latitude of Southern Britain, the times of ascension between the same points as above mentioned are 236° 2′, which, divided by 15, give 15 hours 44 minutes and a fraction of equatorial time, as the length of the day of the first point of Gemini; and, if divided by 12, they produce 19° 40′ and a fraction of the equator, as the length of the diurnal temporal hour.

[286] Thus (according to the Table inserted at p. 152), in the climate or latitude of Lower Egypt, the times of ascension between the first point of Gemini and the first point of Sagittarius, which are directly opposite, are 205° 18′. When this is divided by 15, it results in 13 hours 41 minutes and a fraction of equatorial time, representing the length of the day at the first point of Gemini. The same times of ascension, when divided by 12, give 17° 6′ and a fraction of the equator, indicating the length of the diurnal temporal hour. In the latitude of Southern Britain, the times of ascension between the same points mentioned above are 236° 2′. Dividing this by 15 results in 15 hours 44 minutes and a fraction of equatorial time, which is the length of the day at the first point of Gemini; and when divided by 12, it gives 19° 40′ and a fraction of the equator, representing the length of the diurnal temporal hour.

[287] Thus, the aggregate times of ascension, in a right sphere, of the first point of Gemini are 57° 44′; and, in the climate of Lower Ægypt, 45° 5′: the sixth part of the difference between them is 2° 6′ and a fraction, which, added to 15°, again makes the diurnal temporal hour of the first point of Gemini equal to 17° 6′ and a fraction of the equator. In the climate of Southern Britain, the aggregate times of ascension of the first point of Gemini are 29° 43′: the sixth part of the difference between that sum and 57° 44′ of right ascension is 4° 40′ and a fraction, which, added to 15°, makes the diurnal temporal hour of the first point of Gemini, in South Britain, equal to 19° 40′ and a fraction of the equator, as before shown.

[287] So, the total times of rising, in a perfect sphere, of the first point of Gemini are 57° 44′; and, in the climate of Lower Egypt, 45° 5′: the sixth of the difference between them is 2° 6′ and a bit, which, when added to 15°, makes the daily time of the first point of Gemini equal to 17° 6′ and a bit above the equator. In the climate of Southern Britain, the total times of rising of the first point of Gemini are 29° 43′: the sixth of the difference between that amount and 57° 44′ of right ascension is 4° 40′ and a little, which, when added to 15°, makes the daily time of the first point of Gemini in South Britain, equal to 19° 40′ and a little above the equator, as previously shown.

[288] For example,

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ For instance,

Diurnal horary times of the first point of  
 Gemini in the latitude of Alexandria 17°   6′ 30″
Number of temporal hours 12
  15)205   18   0
Diurnal equatorial hours of the first point of  
 Gemini in the latitude of Alexandria 13  41  12
Diurnal horary times of the first point of  
 Gemini in the latitude of Southern Britain 19°   40′   10″
Number of temporal hours 12 
  15)236     2    0 
Diurnal equatorial hours of the first point of  
 Gemini in the latitude of Southern Britain 15   44     8 

[289] Let the first point of Gemini be on the meridian above the earth; the number of temporal hours since sunrise will then be 6, by which 17° 6′ 30″ are to multiplied. The product will be 102° 39′: this, added to 45° 5′, the aggregate number of the first point of Gemini in the latitude of Alexandria, will give 147° 44′, which, in the ascensions of the climate in question, will correspond to the 3d degree of Virgo, and show that to be the degree ascending. In the latitude of Southern Britain the total number would still amount to the same, viz. 147° 44′, but it would show 7° and about 30′ of Virgo to be ascending.

[289] Let the first point of Gemini be on the meridian above the earth; the number of hours since sunrise will then be 6, which means that we multiply 17° 6′ 30″ by that number. The result will be 102° 39′: this, added to 45° 5′, the total number for the first point of Gemini in the latitude of Alexandria, gives 147° 44′. In the given climate, this corresponds to the 3rd degree of Virgo, indicating that this is the degree that's rising. In the latitude of Southern Britain, the total would still be 147° 44′, but it would indicate about 7° and 30′ of Virgo as ascending.

[290] Let the first point of Gemini be three temporal hours past the meridian; these hours reduced to degrees, in the latitude of Alexandria, will give 51° 19′, which, added to the right ascension of the first point of Gemini, make 109° 3′, showing the 18th degree of Cancer on the meridian. In the latitude of Southern Britain, these hours would produce 59°, which, added to the right ascension, would make 116° 44′, and show the 25th degree of Cancer on the meridian.

[290] Set the first point of Gemini to three hours past noon; when you convert these hours to degrees in the latitude of Alexandria, it totals 51° 19′. Adding this to the right ascension of the first point of Gemini gives you 109° 3′, indicating the 18th degree of Cancer on the meridian. In the latitude of Southern Britain, these hours would equal 59°, which along with the right ascension would result in 116° 44′, showing the 25th degree of Cancer on the meridian.

[291] Thus, in the latitude of Alexandria, when the first point of Gemini is three temporal hours past the meridian, the 16th degree of Libra will be on the ascendant, and the aggregate times of ascension of that degree in the said latitude are 109° 3′: by subtracting 90 from this sum, the remainder will be 19° 3′, the right ascension of the mid-heaven answering to the 18th degree of Cancer. In the latitude of Southern Britain, the 18th degree of Libra would be on the ascendant, of which degree the aggregate times of ascension in that latitude are 206° 44′, from which, if 90 be subtracted, the remainder will be 116° 44′, the right ascension of the mid-heaven answering to the 25th degree of Cancer. The converse of these operations seems too obvious to need explanation.

[291] So, in the latitude of Alexandria, when the first point of Gemini is three hours past the meridian, the 16th degree of Libra will be rising, and the total times of rising for that degree in this latitude are 109° 3′. If you subtract 90 from this total, you get 19° 3′, which is the right ascension of the mid-heaven corresponding to the 18th degree of Cancer. In the latitude of Southern Britain, the 18th degree of Libra would be rising, and the total times of rising for that degree in that latitude are 206° 44′. If you subtract 90 from that, you get 116° 44′, which is the right ascension of the mid-heaven corresponding to the 25th degree of Cancer. The reverse of these calculations seems too clear to need further explanation.

[292] Alexandria.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Alexandria.

[293] Southern Britain.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ South England.

[294] Moxon’s Mathematical Dictionary says, that the “Centiloquium is a book containing one hundred astrological aphorisms, commonly ascribed to Ptolemy, as its author, but by some to Hermes Trismegistus.” This account, however, seems to be inaccurate; for the Centiloquy attributed to Osiris’s contemporary and counsellor (eulogized by Lilly as having been “one of the wisest of all mortal men, and as ancient as Moses”), is very different from that known by the name of the Καρπος, or “Fruit of the Tetrabiblos.” Whether this latter Centiloquy be really the work of Ptolemy is another question: it has been usually edited as his, but some of the aphorisms seem to relate to horary questions only, which are not adverted to in the Tetrabiblos, and there are others also which do not appear to result from the doctrine of that book.

[294] Moxon’s Mathematical Dictionary states that the “Centiloquium is a book that contains one hundred astrological sayings, typically attributed to Ptolemy as its author, but some credit Hermes Trismegistus.” However, this description seems to be incorrect; the Centiloquy linked to Osiris’s contemporary and advisor (praised by Lilly as “one of the wisest of all mortal men, and as ancient as Moses”) is quite different from what is known as the Καρπος, or “Fruit of the Tetrabiblos.” Whether this latter Centiloquy is genuinely the work of Ptolemy is another matter: it has generally been edited as his, but some of the sayings appear to pertain only to horary questions, which are not mentioned in the Tetrabiblos, and there are others that also don't seem to come from the teachings of that book.

[295] Of the same degree and sign.

[295] Of the same degree and sign.

[296] Or in obscure situations.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Or in unusual situations.

[297] Of the Sun and Moon.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ About the Sun and Moon.

[298] On this aphorism Partridge has said, “how Ptolemy meant it to be understood, I know not; and so I leave it.”

[298] Regarding this saying, Partridge remarked, “I don't know how Ptolemy intended it to be understood, so I'll leave it at that.”

[299] Or part of heaven indicating the grant.

[299] Or a piece of heaven showing the gift.


Transcriber’s Notes:

Transcriber’s Notes:


The cover image was created by the transcriber, and is in the public domain.

The cover image was made by the transcriber and is in the public domain.

Uncertain or antiquated spellings or ancient words were not corrected.

Uncertain or outdated spellings or old words were not corrected.

The illustrations have been moved so that they do not break up paragraphs and so that they are next to the text they illustrate.

The illustrations have been repositioned so they don't interrupt the paragraphs and are placed next to the text they depict.

Typographical and punctuation errors have been silently corrected.

Typographical and punctuation mistakes have been quietly fixed.


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!